National Plant Materials Manual

Fourth Edition

July 2010
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)
National Plant Materials Manual

Table of Contents

Part 539 - Introduction

539.0 Mission

Subpart A - General Information

539.1 Purpose

539.2 Policy

539.3 Purpose of the Manual

539.4 Changes to the Manual

539.5 Supplements to the Manual

539.10 General

Subpart B - Authorities for the Plant Materials Program

539.11 Description of Authorities

539.20 NRCS Goals and Objectives

Subpart C - Exhibits

539.21 NRCS PMP Goals and Objectives

539.22 Locations and Service Areas of Plant Materials Centers

539.23 Plant Materials Centers

Part 540 – Operation and Management

540.0 Roles and Responsibilities

Subpart A - Plant Materials Operations

540.1 Plant Materials Long Range Planning

540.2 Operation and Administration of the Plant Materials Centers

540.3 Operation and Administration of the National plant Materials Center

540.10 General

Subpart B - Product Development

540.11 National Projects

540.12 Studies

540.13 Technology Development and Transfer

540.14 Field-based Technology Studies

540.15 Information-based Technology

540.16 Final Preparation of Field-based and Information-based Technology Products

540.17 Transferring and Marketing Technology Products
540.30 General

Subpart C – Plant Selection

540.31 Coordination of Plant Selection and Release

540.32 Assembly and Accessioning

540.33 Evaluation and Summary

540.34 Release Procedures

540.35 Protecting PMC Releases

540.36 Management of Plant Releases

540.37 Import and Export of Plant Germplasm

540.50 Example of State Plant Materials Long Range Plan

Subpart D – Exhibits

540.51 Example of a PMC Long Range Plan

540.52 Recommended Training for Plant Materials (PM) Staff

540.53 Working with Native Americans-American Indians and Alaska Natives

540.54 Reports and Information Required from PMCs Each Year

540.55 Safety and Health legislation and Regulations Pertinent to PMC Operations

540.56 Outline for Safety Inspections at PMCs

540.57 Reserved

540.58 Prescribed Burn Plan for a Plant Materials Center

540.59 Example of a PMC Business Plan

540.60 Example of a PMC Workload Analysis

540.61 Guidelines for Program Evaluations or Other Review of a Plant Materials Program

540.62 Checklist for Development of Technology Products

540.63 Typical Process for Product Development

540.64 Sample Project Statement for the Plant Materials Program

540.65 List of National Projects

540.66 Details of Assigning Numbers for Studies and Plantings

540.67 Example of a Study Plan for the Plant Materials Program

540.68 Resources for Preparing Literature Reviews

540.69 Type of Technology Products

540.70 Form NRCS-ECS-9, Planting Plan for Field, Special and Increase Plantings

540.71 Form NRCS-ECS-14, Plant Materials Program Field Planting or Study Plan Assistance Notes

540.72 Form NRCS-ECS , Establishment of Field, Special and Increase Plantings

540.73 Reserved

540.74 Reserved

540.75 Example of a Technical Notes

540.76 Example of a Plant Fact Sheet

540.77 Example of a Plant Guide

540.78 Checklist for Plant Selection Studies

540.79 ESCOP Policy Statement for Developing and Releasing Improved Plants

540.80 Form NRCS-ECS-580, Seed and Plant Collection Information
540.81 Reserved

Subpart D – Exhibits (continued)

540.82 Reserved

540.83 Worksheet for Documenting an Environmental Evaluation of NRCS Plant Releases

540.84 Example of Information Found in a Documentation of Selection

540.85 Summary of Plant Release Types and Criteria for Release

540.86 AOSCA Guidelines for Release Types and Development Tracks

540.87 Conservation Plant Release Review Worksheet

540.88 General Outline for an Official Plant Release Notice for All Release Types

540.89 Example of an Official Plant Release Notice for a Cultivar Release

540.90 Example of an Official Plant Release Notice for a Tested Release

540.91 Example of an Official Plant Release Notice for a Selected Release

540.92 Example of an Official Plant Release Notice for a Source-Identified Release

540.93 Example of an Official Plant Release Notice for a Germplasm Release

540.94 Example of a Release Brochure

540.95 Application for Seed Storage at the National Center for Genetic Resources Preservation

540.96 Seed Storage Policy of the National Center or Genetic Resources Preservation

540.97 Form NRCS-ECS-001, Request for Plant Materials Allocation and Distribution

540.98 Form NRCS-ECS-596, Distribution and Delivery (D&D) Record (Sample)

540.99 Worksheet to Discontinue PMC Production of a Plant Materials Release

Part 541 – Information Management

541.0 General

Subpart A – Plant Materials Reports

541.1 Plant Materials Operations and Management System (POMS)

541.2 Plant Materials Performance Index

541.3 NRCS Reporting through the Performance Results System

541.4 Plant Materials Reports

541.10 POMS Database Architecture

Subpart B - Exhibits

541.11 Plant Materials Performance Index

541.12 Example of a Progress Report of Activities

Part 542 –Plant Science Reference Section

542.0 Acronyms Found in the NPMM 

542.1 Glossary of Terms For Use in Plant Materials

542.2 Plant Nomenclature

542.3 Guidelines for Preparing Botanical Specimens

542.4 Photographing Plant Materials 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Part 539 - Introduction

Subpart A – General Information

539.0 Mission

The mission of the Natural Resources Conservation Service (NRCS) Plant Materials Program 

(PMP) is to develop, test, and transfer plant science technology to meet customer and natural 

resource needs. NRCS PMP activities are consistent with the objectives of the current United 

States Department of Agriculture (USDA) and NRCS Strategic Plans (Section 539.20), 

namely to provide timely and effective vegetative solutions for identified resource needs.

539.1 Purpose

A. The purpose of the NRCS PMP is to: 

(1) Assemble, test, and release plant materials for conservation use. 

(2) Determine techniques for successful use and management of conservation plants. 

(3) Facilitate the commercial increase of conservation plants. 

(4) Provide for the timely development and transfer of effective applied plant science 

technology to solve conservation problems. 

(5) Promote the use of plant science technology to meet the goals and objectives of the 

USDA and NRCS Strategic Plans (Sections 539.20 and 539.21).

B. To accomplish this purpose, NRCS maintains and operates a PMP utilizing a network of 

Plant Materials Centers (PMC) (see Section 539.22) and Plant Materials Specialists to 

coordinate its on-going conservation operations activities. PMP strategic goals and 

objectives are described in Section 539.21.

539.2 Policy

The Plant Materials Program:

(1) Works to meet the goals and objectives of the USDA and NRCS Strategic Plans and 

to comply with the authorities described in Section 539.11.

(2) Works to meet the objectives of other Federal, State, and local programs and 

initiatives. 

(3) Cooperates with other partners, with the major emphasis being to provide timely and 

effective state-of-the-art plant science technology.

(4) Performs activities and provides services consistent with USDA and NRCS 

Affirmative Action, Equal Employment Opportunity, and Civil Rights policies.

539.3 Purpose of the Manual

The National Plant Materials Manual (NPMM) establishes policies and procedures for plant 

materials activities within NRCS. This manual is meant to complement all established 

USDA and NRCS policies and guidelines.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

539.4 Changes to the Manual

A. Periodic review of the NPMM may be undertaken by the National Program Leader 

(NPL)-Plant Materials with revisions to policy and procedures made as needed.

B. All deviations from policy or procedure found in the NPMM must be reviewed and 

approved by the NPL in writing prior to implementation. Deviations typically affect only 

local operations or the local PMC for which the deviation is approved. Approved deviations 

to policy or procedure will be filed in the appropriate section(s) of the NPMM.

C. Proposed amendments to policy or procedure found in the NPMM must be submitted to 

the NPL for consideration. Amendments typically pertain to national operations. The NPL 

will determine the appropriate procedure for review and final disposition of the proposed 

amendment.

D. The following items should be submitted to the NPL to evaluate requests for deviations or 

changes to the NPMM.

(1) Date of request.

(2) Requestor’s name, address, email address, and phone number.

(3) Is this a deviation or amendment? 

(4) Does this request affect local, State, regional, or national level(s)?

(5) Reference the parts and page numbers in the NPMM dealing with the request for 

deviation or amendment.

(6) Describe proposed changes to the existing text in the NPMM or proposed new text to 

be added to the NPMM.

(7) Justification for why the deviation or an amendment is needed.

(8) Letter must include areas for concurrence by the appropriate State Conservationist 

and approval by the NPL. All requests should be forwarded to the NPL through the 

State Conservationist.

539.5 Supplements to the Manual

A. Supplements may be required to provide additional details to accommodate specific 

national, regional, State, or local plant materials needs, policies, or regulations. Supplements 

are not meant to change the policies and procedures found in the NPMM. Supplements must 

be filed in accordance with the NRCS Directives System. Copies of all supplements to the 

NPMM will be provided to the NPL.

B. Examples of supplements include Long Range Plans (LRP) for State PM activities, PMC 

LRP, PMC Business Plan, PMC Workload Analysis, and details of State regulations 

pertaining to plant release selection, certification, or marketing.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Part 539 - Introduction

Subpart B - Authorities for the Plant Materials Program

539.10 General

The authority to operate a PMP is provided for in Federal law. A brief description of the 

authorities relevant to the PMP is found in Section 539.11. Full text for each of these 

authorities can be found on the Internet or requested from the NPL.

539.11 Description of Authorities

Authority for the NRCS PMP is provided by:

(1) Soil Conservation Act of 1935

The Soil Conservation Act of 1935 (Public Law (P.L.) 74-46, 49 Statute 163; 16 USC 

590 [a-f]) declares that it is the policy of Congress to provide permanently for the 

control and prevention of soil erosion and, thereby, preserve natural resources. This 

act provides for basic authority for the Soil Conservation Service (SCS) (now NRCS) 

PMP.

(2) Soil and Water Resources Conservation Act of 1977

The Soil and Water Resources Conservation Act of 1977 (P.L.95-192; 16 USC 40)

declares that it is the policy of Congress to ensure that USDA possesses information, 

technical expertise, and a delivery system for providing assistance to land users with 

respect to conservation and use of soils; plants; woodlands; watershed protection and 

flood prevention; the conservation, development, utilization, and disposal of water; 

animal husbandry; fish and wildlife management; recreation; community 

development; and related resource uses.

(3) Department of Agriculture Reorganization Act of 1994

The Department of Agriculture Reorganization Act of 1994 (7 USC 6962) authorizes 

the Secretary to establish and maintain within the Department an agency called the 

Natural Resources Conservation Service. This Act changed SCS to NRCS.

(4) NRCS Policy on the Operation of Plant Materials Centers (2009)

This policy, issued January 9, 2009, is contained in 7 CFR 613 and the Federal 

Register, Vol. 72 No. 234 (September 3, 2008) and clarifies the role, activity, and 

function of NRCS PMCs to support NRCS conservation activities. This CFR updates 

information on NRCS conservation activities and PMCs as described in P.L. 74-46. 

This CFR is presented in Section 539.23 because of its importance to the PMP.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

539.20 NRCS Goals and Objectives

The goals and objectives for NRCS are referenced in the USDA and NRCS Strategic Plans: 

2006-2010. The goals and objectives for NRCS are:

(1) Mission Goal 1: High Quality, Productive Soils

Soil Quality Outcome: The quality of intensively used soils is maintained or 

enhanced to enable sustained production of a healthy and abundant food supply.

Objective: In 2010, farmers will manage 70 percent of cropland under systems 

that maintain or increase soil condition and soil carbon. Baseline: In 2003, 60 

percent of cropland was farmed under systems that maintained or increased soil 

condition and soil carbon.

(2) Mission Goal 2: Clean and Abundant Water

(i) Water Quality Outcome: Water quality that supports desired uses.

• Objective: Between 2006 and 2010, reduce potential sediment delivery from 

agricultural operations by 70 million tons. Baseline: In 2003, potential 

sediment delivery was 970 million tons.

• Objective: Between 2006 and 2010, reduce potential delivery of nitrogen 

from agricultural operations by 375,000 tons. Baseline: In 2003, potential 

annual delivery was an estimated 6 million tons.

• Objective: Between 2006 and 2010, reduce potential delivery of phosphorus 

from agricultural operations by 70,000 tons. Baseline: In 2003, potential 

annual delivery was an estimated 360,000 tons.

(ii) Water Quantity Outcome: An abundant and reliable water supply for the Nation.

Objective: By 2010, conserve or store an additional 8 million acre-feet of water 

for more efficient or future use. Baseline: In 2005, an estimated 2.5 million 

acre-feet of water was conserved.

(3) Mission Goal 3: Healthy Plant and Animal Communities

(i) Grassland Outcome: Productive, diverse, and resilient grassland, range, and 

forest ecosystems 

Objective: Between 2006 and 2010, farmers, ranchers, and non-industrial forest 

landowners will apply management that will maintain or improve vegetative 

condition over the long term on 150 million acres of rangeland and forestland 

that are at risk. Baseline: In 1999, 500 million acres of non-Federal grazing 

lands and non-industrial forestlands were at risk. 

(ii) Wildlife Habitat Outcome: Working lands and waters provide habitat for diverse 

and healthy wildlife, aquatic species, and plant communities.

Objective: In 2010, an additional 9 million acres of essential habitat will be 

improved and managed to benefit at-risk and declining species. Baseline: In 

2005, NRCS helped improve habitat for declining and at-risk species on 2 

million acres.

(iii) Wetland Outcome: Under development

Objective: By 2010, resource managers will create, restore, or enhance 1.5 

million acres of wetlands on non-Federal lands. Baseline: In 2003, there were 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

111 million wetland acres on non-Federal lands within the contiguous United 

States.

(4) Mission Goal 4: Air Quality

Outcome, Objective, and Baseline TBD

(5) Mission Goal 5: An Adequate Energy Supply

Outcome, Objective, and Baseline TBD

(6) Mission Goal 6: Land Fragmentation

Landscape Outcome: Connected landscapes sustain a viable agricultural sector and 

natural resource quality. 

Objective: By 2010, 70 percent of farms and ranches protected under easements 

will remain in active agriculture. Baseline: A study is being conducted by the 

University of Nebraska to ascertain how many farms and ranches enrolled in the 

Farm and Ranch Lands Protection Program remain in active agriculture. 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

539.21 NRCS PMP Goals and Objectives

The PMP revised its Strategic Plan to reflect changes outlined in the 2006-2010 NRCS 

Strategic Plan. The goals and objectives for the PMP are:

(1) Strategic Goal 1 – Identify and evaluate plants and develop technology for their 

successful establishment and maintenance to solve natural resource conservation 

problems.

(i) Objective 1.1: Conserve and enhance soil resources with plant science 

technology. 

(ii) Objective 1.2: Improve water quality and quantity with plant science 

technology.

(iii) Objective 1.3: Enhance fish and wildlife resources with plant science 

technology.

(iv) Objective 1.4: Identify and develop plants and plant technology to mitigate air 

quality issues.

(2) Strategic Goal 2: Provide plant materials and plant technology that are economically 

feasible for meeting resource concerns.

(i) Objective 2.1: Provide for and promote the commercial production of NRCS 

plant releases to ensure that adequate seed and plants are available for use in 

cooperative conservation programs.

(ii) Objective 2.2: Maintain and improve the productivity of agricultural lands and 

watersheds through plants and plant management technology. 

(iii) Objective 2.3: Increase the alternative uses and specialized uses of conservation

plant releases to meet emerging needs.

(3) Strategic Goal 3: Provide equal access for all Americans to the PMP.

(i) Objective 3.1: Deliver products and services fairly and equitably.

(ii) Objective 3.2: Promote the products of the PMP through effective 

communications and program delivery.

(iii) Objective 3.3: Increase the use of plant materials to address issues of human 

health, safety, culture, and aesthetics.

(iv) Objective 3.4: Make effective use of Internet-based technology to provide 

customer-focused service. 
539.22 Locations and Service Areas of Plant Materials Centers
456 

Pt. 613 7 CFR Ch. VI (1–1–09 Edition) 

whole or part on information provided 

by NRCS. 

PART 613—PLANT MATERIALS 

CENTERS 

Sec. 

613.1 Purpose. 

613.2 Policy and objectives. 

613.3 NRCS responsibilities in plant materials. 

613.4 Special production of plant materials. 

613.5 PMCs. 

AUTHORITY: 16 U.S.C. 590a–590f, 5908; 7 

U.S.C. 1010–1011. 

SOURCE: 73 FR 51351, Sept. 3, 2008, unless 

otherwise noted. 

§ 613.1 Purpose. 

This part provides NRCS policy on 

the operation of PMCs. The Centers 

have responsibilities for assembling, 

testing, releasing, and providing for 

the commercial production and use of 

plant materials and plant materials 

technology for programs of soil, water, 

and related resource conservation and 

development. 

§ 613.2 Policy and objectives. 

(a) It is NRCS policy to assemble, 

comparatively evaluate, release, and 

distribute for commercial increase new 

or improved plant materials and plant 

materials technology needed for broad 

programs of resource conservation and 

development for agriculture, wildlife, 

urban, recreation, and other land uses 

and environmental needs. It is the policy of NRCS to conduct plant materials 

work in cooperation with other agencies of the Department of Agriculture, 

such as the Agricultural Research 

Service, and with other Federal and 

State research agencies, including 

State agricultural experiment stations. 

The emphasis of the NRCS plant materials work is to find suitable plants to 

address conservation needs. In contrast, the emphasis of research agencies and organizations in plant development is to improve economically important crops. The NRCS program of 

testing and releasing new seed-propagated plant materials follows the 

guidelines in ‘‘Statement of Responsibilities and Policies Relating to the 

Development, Release, and Multiplication of Publicly Developed Varieties of 

Seed-Propagated Crops,’’ which was 

adopted in June 1972, by Land Grant 

Colleges and interested Federal agencies. NRCS releases improved conservation plant materials requiring vegetative multiplication in ways appropriate 

for particular States and particular 

species by working with experiment 

stations, crop improvement associations, and other State and Federal 

agencies. 

(b) The objective of the plant materials activity is to select or develop 

special and improved plants and techniques for their successful establishment and maintenance to solve conservation problems and needs related 

to: 

(1) Controlling soil erosion on all 

lands; 

(2) Conserving water; 

(3) Protecting upstream watersheds; 

(4) Reducing sediment movement 

into waterways and reservoirs through 

the stabilization of critical sediment 

sources, such as surface mined lands, 

highway slopes, recreation sites, and 

urban and industrial development 

areas; 

(5) Stabilizing disposal areas for liquid and solid wastes; 

(6) Improving plant diversity and 

lengthening the grazing season on 

dryland pastures and rangelands; 

(7) Managing brush on mountain 

slopes with fire-retarding plant cover 

to reduce the possibility of fires that 

threaten life and property, or result in 

serious sediment sources; 

(8) Improving the effectiveness of 

windbreaks and shelterbelts for reducing airborne sediment, controlling 

snow drifting, and preventing crop 

damage from wind erosion; 

(9) Protecting streambank, pond, and 

lake waterlines from erosion by scouring and wave action; 

(10) Improving wildlife food and 

cover, including threatened and endangered and pollinator species; 

(11) Selecting special purpose plants 

to meet specific needs for environment 

protection and enhancement; 

(12) Selecting plants that tolerate air 

pollution agents and toxic soil chemicals; 

(13) Selecting plants that mitigate 

odor, Particulate Matter (PM)–10, and 

PM–2.5; 


erowe on PROD1PC63 with CFR
457 

Natural Resources Conservation Service, USDA § 613.5 

(14) Testing plants for biofuels and 

other energy-related activities; and 

(15) Evaluating plants and techniques 

to combat invasive plant species and 

for reestablishment of desirable species 

after eradication. 

§ 613.3 NRCS responsibilities in plant 

materials. 

NRCS operates or enters into agreements with State universities or other 

State organizations to operate PMCs. 

NRCS also cooperates, both formally 

and informally, with other Federal, 

State, county, and nonprofit agencies 

or organizations on the selection of 

plants and evaluation of plant technology to increase the capabilities of 

PMCs. NRCS employs specialists for 

testing and selecting plant materials 

for conservation uses and the development of plant materials technology. 

NRCS’ responsibilities are to: 

(a) Identify the resource conservation 

needs and cultural management methods for environmental protection and 

enhancement. 

(b) Assemble and comparatively 

evaluate plant materials at PMCs and 

on sites where soil, climate, or other 

conditions differ significantly from 

those at the Centers. 

(c) Make comparative field plantings 

for final testing of promising plants 

and techniques in cooperation with 

conservation districts and other interested cooperators. 

(d) Release cooperatively improved 

conservation plants and maintain the 

breeder or foundation stocks in ways 

appropriate for particular State and 

plant species by working with experiment stations, crop improvement associations, and other State and Federal 

agencies. 

(e) Produce limited amounts of foundation or foundation-quality seed and 

plants available for allocation to conservation districts, experiment stations, other Federal and State research 

agencies, State seed certifying organizations and directly to commercial 

growers (if other options do not exist) 

that will use the material to establish 

seed fields, seed orchards, or vegetative 

plantings for large-scale increase. 

(f) Encourage and assist conservation 

districts, commercial seed producers, 

and commercial and State nurseries to 

produce needed plant materials for 

conservation uses. 

(g) Encourage the use of improved 

plant materials and plant materials 

technology in resource conservation 

and environmental improvement programs. 

§ 613.4 Special production of plant materials. 

NRCS can produce plant materials in 

the quantity required to do a specific 

conservation job if this production will 

serve the public welfare and only if the 

plant materials are not available commercially. This function will be performed only until the plant materials 

are available commercially. Specific 

production of plant materials by NRCS 

requires the approval of the Chief. 

§ 613.5 PMCs. 

(a) The Norman A. Berg National 

PMC. The Norman A. Berg National 

PMC at Beltsville, Maryland, focuses 

on national initiatives and provides coordination for plant materials work 

across all 50 States. In addition, the 

center provides plants and plant technology to address resource concerns in 

the mid-Atlantic region. 

(b) Other PMCs. There are 26 other 

PMCs. Each serves several major land 

resource areas. NRCS operates 24 of 

these Centers, and 2 by cooperating 

agencies, as follows: 

(1) Operated by NRCS: Tucson, AZ, 

Booneville, AR, Lockeford, CA, 

Brooksville, FL, Americus, GA, 

Molokai, HI, Aberdeen, ID, Manhattan, 

KS, Galliano, LA, East Lansing, MI, 

Coffeeville, MS, Elsberry, MO, Bridger, 

MT, Fallon, NV, Cape May Courthouse, 

NJ, Los Lunas, NM, Big Flats, NY, Bismarck, ND, Corvallis, OR, Kingsville, 

TX, Knox City, TX, Nacogdoches, TX, 

Pullman, WA, and Alderson, WV. 

(2) Operated by cooperating agencies 

with financial and technical assistance 

from NRCS: Meeker, CO—White River 

and Douglas Creek Soil Conservation 

Districts with partial funding from 

NRCS. 

(3) Operated by cooperating agencies 

with technical assistance from NRCS: 

Palmer, AK—State of Alaska, Department of Natural Resources. 


erowe on PROD1PC63 with CFR
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Part 540 - Operation and Management

Subpart A - Plant Materials Operations

540.0 Roles and Responsibilities

A. The following roles and responsibilities provide support for the Plant Materials Program 

(PMP). The majority of these roles are currently established and functioning as described. 

The roles described may or may not be valid depending on the structure which exists at the 

national, regional, or State level. Titles of positions and committees are generally the most 

accepted ones or the titles currently in use. Titles may be different but the responsibilities 

and functions of the position or committee are comparable.

B. Staff Positions - National Responsibilities

(1) Chief, NRCS - The Chief, with line and staff assistance, provides overall strategic 

planning and national direction for the agency, including plant science activities.

(2) Deputy Chief for Science and Technology - The Deputy Chief for Science and 

Technology provides overall strategic planning and national direction for national 

science and technology activities, including plant science activities.

(3) Director, Ecological Sciences Division - The Director of the Ecological Sciences 

Division provides management and leadership for the Division, including plant 

science activities.

(4) National Program Leader - Plant Materials - The National Program Leader – Plant 

Materials (NPL-PM) is a staff member of the Ecological Sciences Division. The 

NPL provides overall leadership for program integration and coordination of 

technology development and transfer in the PMP and other programs. 

Responsibilities include:

(i) Communicating with and providing information to agency administrators, 

national program leaders, legislative personnel, and other national level 

partners regarding program accomplishments and program needs;

(ii) Providing leadership and opportunities for discipline training;

(iii) Providing leadership in performance evaluation and accountability within the 

PMP;

(iv) Recommending budget allocations for Plant Material Centers (PMC);

(v) Communicating national PMP information, priorities, needs, and concerns to 

appropriate region and State levels;

(vi) Participating in national and regional strategic planning efforts;

(vii) Providing leadership and direction for information coordination; and

(viii) Encouraging, guiding, assessing, and assuring diversity and equity in 

program operations and delivery.

(5) National Plant Materials Information Coordinator - The Plant Materials (PM) 

Information Coordinator provides overall coordination for information management 

to the PMP. Responsibilities include:

(i) Serving as coordinator and facilitator in efforts to provide technology 

transfer of PM data to field offices;

(ii) Developing and maintaining a data management system for PM;

(iii) Serving as data steward for PM databases;
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

(iv) Serving as administrator of PM information on the Internet; and

(v) Developing and maintaining an information system for PM.

(6) National Plant Materials Center Manager - The National Plant Materials Center 

(NPMC) Manager is responsible for operation of the NPMC and its technical 

programs. Responsibilities include:

(i) Managing and administering the NPMC and the activities of a national scope 

as directed by the NPL;

(ii) Coordinating PM data management and Web site development and 

population;

(iii) Coordinating the collection and preservation of all PM publications and 

national PM information;

(iv) Collecting and preserving information on PM releases;

(v) Assisting with PMP promotional activities;

(vi) Providing release and germplasm processing assistance to the PMP;

(vii) Coordinating the export and import of plants with the Agricultural and Plant 

Health Inspections Service (APHIS); and

(viii) Those activities defined for the PMC Manager as described in Section 

540.0(D)(5).

(7) National Technology Support Center (NTSC) Plant Materials Specialist – The NTSC 

PM Specialist serves as the lead contact and technical specialist for all PM-related 

technology nationally or in a region. Responsibilities include:

(i) Providing direct technical assistance and policy guidance to State

Conservationists, their staffs, and the NTSC staff; 

(ii) Serving as a liaison with the NPL and advising the NPL on key issues within 

their region;

(iii) Provide a technical review and scoring of new releases before the release 

gets approved, and a review of significant technical documents before they 

are finalized;

(iv) Initiating and coordinating PM work and technology transfer across State and 

regional boundaries; and 

(v) Initiating and coordinating joint projects and work with other Federal and 

State agencies, groups, and organizations.

(8) NTSC Technology Coordinator - The Technology Coordinator (TC) is on the NTCS 

staff and will facilitate technology development for NRCS nationally and in each 

region. Responsibilities include:

(i) Being a primary contact person and liaison for NRCS Technical Support

Centers, the NPL-PM, other agencies, and partners;

(ii) Serving as liaison with national program managers and technology 

committees;

(iii) Facilitating inter- and intra-region and national technology development;

(iv) Assisting with the identification of customer needs on State and regional 

levels, and the coordination of product development and transfer; and

(v) Serving as a member of the Regional Technology Workgroup.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

C. Staff Positions - Regional Responsibilities

(1) Regional Conservationist - The Regional Conservationist (RC), assisted by the State

Conservationists, provides overall administrative leadership, support, integration, and 

coordination of plant science activities within and between regions, national program 

leaders, and national and State partners. Responsibilities include:

(i) Providing leadership in the implementation of a regional organizational 

structure, which will allow key plant science resource needs and priorities to 

be met;

(ii) Ensuring PMP integration at State, regional, and national levels; and

(iii) Providing leadership in the evaluation and accountability of all program 

activities and accomplishments.

D. Staff Positions - State and Local Responsibilities

(1) State Conservationist - The State Conservationist (STC), assisted by the staff, 

provides overall administrative leadership, support, integration, and coordination of 

the plant science activities within and between States and with other local, State, and 

regional partners. Responsibilities include:

(i) Providing leadership in the development and implementation of a State

organizational structure which will allow key plant science resource needs 

and priorities to be met;

(ii) Ensuring PMP integration at local, State, and regional levels;

(iii) Providing leadership in the evaluation and accountability of all program 

activities and accomplishments, and directing resources and staff as 

necessary to address priority needs with recommendations from the State

program manager and State technical staff;

(iv) Overseeing the administration and operation of the PMC or Centers located 

in their State;

(v) Ensuring that the PM needs of all States within the PMC service area are 

met;

(vi) STCs both with and without PMCs will actively coordinate, organize, and 

participate in annual PMC advisory committee meetings;

(vii) Appointing the State Technology Contact;

(viii) Encourage field offices to be involved with PM activities through germplasm 

collection, test plantings, and demonstration plantings;

(ix) Delegate to PMC Managers the authority to manage discretionary spending 

within the PMC budget; and

(x) Provide a PM Specialist position (funded by CO-01 as part of the State 

resources staff) to support PM technology transfer activities within the PMC 

service area.

(2) State Resource Conservationist - As directed by the STC, the State Resource 

Conservationist (SRC), or equivalent position within the State, provides leadership of 

the State technical support staff. Responsibilities include:

(i) Ensuring coordination, technology development and transfer, support, 

integration, and coordination of plant science activities with other ecological 

sciences staff within the State; 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

(ii) SRCs both with and without PMCs will actively coordinate, organize, and 

participate in annual PMC technical committee meetings; and

(iii) Include the PM Specialist and PMC Manager in State Ecological 

Sciences/Resources staff meetings (for States with these positions).

(3) State Technology Contact - The State Technology Contact coordinates technology 

development within the State. Responsibilities include:

(i) Being the primary contact person and liaison for NTSC, other agencies, and 

partners;

(ii) Coordinating the identification of customer needs on State and regional 

levels, and the coordination of product development and transfer; and 

(iii) Serving as liaison with the Regional Technology Coordinator and member of 

the Regional Technology Committee.

(4) Plant Materials Specialist - The PM Specialist is a member of the State technical 

support staff in each State served. The PM Specialist may also be referred to as a 

“Plant Resource Specialist” or “Plant Materials Program Specialist.” A PM

Specialist may serve multiple States and provide support for one to three PMCs. 

Responsibilities include:

(i) Providing leadership in the coordination of PM activities with the NPL, STC, 

PMC Advisory Committee, PMC Manager, NTSC PM Specialist, State

Technology Contact, NTSCs, State Technology staff, NRCS field offices, 

conservation districts, and other local, State, and regional offices and 

partners; 

(ii) Providing integration of critical PM information into other technical 

disciplines (e.g., agronomy, biology, cultural resources, forestry, and

grazing) and conservation programs;

(iii) Integrating key PM and plant technologies into the Field Office Technical 

Guide for conservation planning and application activities; 

(iv) Providing leadership in innovative plant technology to the field to meet 

emerging conservation issues;

(v) Providing leadership in promoting awareness of PM technology and outreach 

in PM activities to conservation partners, cooperators, and the public;

(vi) Maintaining working partnerships and coordination with agricultural 

experiment stations, the Agricultural Research Service (ARS), Plant 

Introduction Centers, Crop Improvement Associations, seed and plant 

growers and dealers, non-government organizations, etc.;

(vii) Developing the State Long Range Plan (LRP) for PM in States served, and 

integration of PMP objectives into the State business plan (Section 540.50);

and

(viii) Provide coordination and oversight in the development of the PMC LRP and 

other PMC operational documents.

(5) Plant Materials Center Manager - The PMC Manager is a member of the State

technical support staff in each State served. Responsibilities include:

(i) Managing and administration of the PMC including budget, procurement, 

personnel; management of the PMC facility and equipment; and development 

and management of reimbursable agreements; 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

(ii) Providing leadership in completing plant science technology needs 

assessment and development of the PMC LRP, PMC Business Plan, 

Workload Analysis, Study Plans, and other operational documents;

(iii) Providing leadership and coordination in the execution of the annual PMC 

Business Plan, including development of cooperative research projects with 

other agencies and partners;

(iv) Reporting of activities and accomplishments in appropriate databases and 

systems;

(v) Developing and transferring technology products for identified customers, 

such as State technical support staff, NRCS field offices, Tribal partners, 

other government agencies, land users, and universities;

(vi) Providing direct assistance and training to NRCS field offices, conservation 

districts, and partners on PM activities;

(vii) Ensuring that NRCS conservation plant germplasm is maintained and 

available to meet conservation needs; and

(viii) Utilizing the PMC for rapid response to emerging and critical vegetative 

needs.

(6) Area Conservationist - The Area Conservationist (AC), or equivalent position within 

the State, is responsible for providing overall administrative leadership, support, 

integration, and coordination of the plant science activities within and between areas, 

the State office, and with other local and State partners.

(7) District Conservationist - The District Conservationist (DC), or equivalent position 

within the State, is responsible for assisting Soil and Water Conservation Districts 

(SWCD) in carrying out plant science-related programs and activities. Field offices 

assist with PM activities which may include:

(i) Assessing local resource and conservation problems and needs in conjunction 

with the SWCD;

(ii) Promoting plant science technology and improved PM;

(iii) Initial seed and plant collecting for improved plant selection; and

(iv) Assisting with installation and evaluation of field plantings, conservation 

field trials, and demonstration plantings.

(8) Conservation Districts - Regional, State, area, and district conservationists are to 

keep conservation districts and other identified partners informed and actively 

involved with ongoing and proposed plant science-related programs, projects, and 

activities.

(9) Regional Technical Teams - These NRCS entities will provide technical guidance 

and support at State or regional levels as appropriate according to the developed 

organizational structure.

E. Committee Responsibilities

(1) National Plant Materials Advisory Committee

(i) The National PM Advisory Committee provides guidance to the National 

PMP. The principal duties of the National PM Advisory Committee are to:

• Review and provide input for strategic planning within the PMP;
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

• Discuss and act on issues which may have major impacts on the PMP;

• Identify concerns of national significance from the areas they represent;

• Recommend, review, and/or approve for consideration by the Chief, or other 

top level NRCS administrators, agreements or initiatives needed by PMP to 

achieve NRCS objectives; and

• Increase the awareness level and support of the PMP at all levels of NRCS.

(ii) Members of the committee may include:

• STCs appointed by the Deputy Chief for Science and Technology and 

Regional Conservationists;

• The Deputy Chief for Science and Technology or his/her representative;

• The NPL-PM;

• The National PM Information Coordinator and NTSC PM Specialist;

• Representatives from the National Association of Conservation Districts 

(NACD) or other national organizations;

• Representatives from other appropriate Federal agencies or NRCS offices as 

determined by the committee; and

• Representatives from private industry. 

(iii) The committee will choose a chairperson or co-chairperson. Meetings will 

normally be rotated around the country to expose the committee to new 

resource concerns. Meeting frequency is 2-4 times per year or as determined 

by the committee. 

(2) National Plant Materials Technical Committee

(i) The National PM Technical Committee provides input to the National PM 

Advisory process. The National PM Technical Committee is composed of 

representatives from all regions of the country. Responsibilities include:

• Providing overall technical leadership in the identification, integration, and 

prioritization of plant technology needs on a national scale;

• Identifying concerns and developing recommendations, which are submitted 

to the National PM Advisory Committee for review and approval; and

• Discussing and acting on issues which may have major impacts on the PMP. 

(ii) Members may include:

• The NPL;

• Appropriate PMC Managers and technical staff, PM Specialists, and NTSC 

PM Specialists; 

• Regional Technology Coordinators;

• The National PM Information Coordinator and NPMC Manager;

• Appropriate field and area personnel; and

• Advisors to the committee, which may include appropriate partners.

(iii) Meeting frequency is 1-3 times per year as determined by the NPL.

(3) Regional Plant Materials Advisory Committee

(i) The purpose of the committee is to provide leadership in the coordination, 

communication, support, and integration of plant science needs and/or 

developed technology within and between regions, the National PM 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Advisory Committee, and other regional and national partners. The 

committee:

• Provides leadership in the integration of all PMP activities into one process 

for technology development;

• Reviews, approves, and arranges for the carrying out of projects and

activities, and develops a regional LRP for PM; and 

• Takes leadership in addressing identified priority resource needs and 

concerns and ensures the needed action is presented within the Regional 

Strategic Plan (annual or multi-year plan of work).

(ii) Members may include:

• STCs in the region;

• Regional Conservationist;

• NTSC PM Specialist; and 

• Advisors to the committee, who may include the NPL-PM and other 

members as determined appropriate by the committee to serve as advisors.

(iii) Meetings will normally be chaired by the STC in the host State and rotate 

among States in the region. Meeting frequency will be annually or as 

determined by the committee.

(4) State Conservationist’s Plant Materials Advisory Committee

(i) The purpose of the committee is to provide leadership in the coordination, 

communication, support, and integration of applied plant science technology 

within and between States within the service area, the Regional and National 

PM Advisory Committees, and other partners. The STC PM Advisory 

Committee:

• Provides leadership in the integration of all program activities into one 

process for technology development;

• Ensures that identified priority resource needs and actions are included in the 

State Strategic Plans;

• Reviews and approves the PMC LRP; and 

• Reviews and approves PMC studies and activities to address the needs in the 

State and PMC LRP.

(ii) Members include:

• STCs in the PMC service area; and 

• Advisors to the committee who may include the PM Specialist, PMC staff, 

NTSC PM Specialist, NPL-PM, and other Federal, State, and private 

members representing the various interests found within the service area of 

the PMC. These advisory members may or may not have a vote in the 

prioritization process. 

(iii) Meetings will normally be chaired by the STC in the host State and rotate 

among States in the PMC service area. Meeting frequency will be annually.

(5) Regional Technology Workgroup

The Regional Technology Workgroup coordinates technical support needs and 

facilitates the development of technology for the region. Members of this workgroup 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

include the NTSC Technology Coordinator, State Technology Contacts (one per 

State), and NTSC representatives as assigned (advisory capacity).

(6) Plant Materials Technical Committee

(i) The PM Technical Committee provides input to the PM Advisory process. 

The PM Technical Committee may be on a State, multistate, or other 

regional/local level for a single PMC or multiple PMCs. Responsibilities 

include:

• Providing overall technical leadership in the identification, integration, and 

prioritization of plant technology needs;

• Developing recommendations for addressing needs and submitting 

information to the STC’s PM Advisory Committee for review and approval; 

and 

• Promoting the transfer of developed applied science technology.

(ii) Members may include:

• STCs or their representatives, such as the SRC;

• State and multistate technical staff;

• Appropriate PMC Managers and technical staff, PM Specialists, NTSC PM

Specialist, and Regional Technology Coordinator;

• State Technical Contact;

• Representatives from Federal and State agencies;

• Appropriate field and area personnel; and

• Advisors to the committee, which may include appropriate partners.

(iii) Meeting frequency will be annually or as determined by the committee. PM

Technical Committees typically meet prior to a STC’s PM Advisory 

Committee meeting to discuss PM issues to be brought to the STCs.

(7) State Plant Materials Committee

(i) The State PM Committee is critical for the integration of PM activities into 

field office operations and the needs of the field office into the PM program. 

Each State will have a State PM Committee. Responsibilities include:

• Serving as a focal point for the identification and prioritization of key local 

and State plant issues, concerns, and product needs;

• Developing a State PM LRP which includes prioritized plant issues, 

concerns, and needs, along with proposed action items;

• Developing an annual State PM plan;

• Ensuring identified local and State plant science needs are presented to the 

appropriate decision makers; and

• Ensuring that the developed plant technology is disseminated to meet 

customer needs.

(ii) Members may include:

• The SRC, or equivalent;

• Appropriate NRCS State, area, and/or regional specialists;

• District and area personnel; and

• PM Specialist and PMC personnel, NRCS State technical specialists, and 

other partners as determined by the committee to serve as advisors. (The PM
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Specialist or PMC Manager can chair or facilitate but should not direct the 

meetings.)

(iii) Meeting frequency will be determined by the committee. It may be 

necessary for a PM Specialist and/or PMC Manager to work closely with 

their SRC to initiate or keep the committee functioning.

(8) Standing or Ad Hoc Program Committees

Standing or ad hoc committees provide guidance or assistance to the NPL on specific 

issues. Standing or ad hoc committees can be formed and dissolved by the NPL,

depending on the needs of the program. Examples include: strategic planning 

committee, PM information committee, Web site information committee, PM manual 

revision committee, etc. 

540.1 Plant Materials Long Range Planning

A. General

(1) LRPs are developed to direct PM activities at the national, regional, State, or local 

levels. A LRP for PM will be developed and implemented to identify, prioritize, and 

integrate customer, resource, and program needs. The LRPs will help facilitate the 

development and transfer of plant technology to address priority concerns. The LRP 

is analogous to a strategic plan.

(2) National, regional, or State LRP should be of sufficient scope to serve as a basis for 

the development of the LRP for the servicing PMC(s), and provide direction for PMrelated activities at the level (i.e., State, PMC service area, regional) for which the 

plan was developed.

(3) Regional and State LRPs will be filed as a supplement to the NPMM. Electronic 

copies will be sent to the NPL-PM and the NPMC.

B. Contents of a PM LRP

An example of a PM LRP is included in Section 540.51. The PM LRP should include the 

following items:

(i) Introduction

• Purpose (objectives) of the plan.

• Those involved with the development of the plan (listing of partners).

• Process/procedure used to identify customers and prioritize concerns/needs at 

appropriate level of development (i.e., State, PMC service area, regional, and 

national). The process or procedure should function within the scope of the 

organizational structure in place. This may be completed from a local, 

State(s), regional, and/or national level, as appropriate.

(ii) Description of concerns/needs - This section may include:

• A description of specific prioritized resource and non-resource related 

problems and needs. Resource problems and needs will be classified by 

NRCS Goals and Objectives (Section 539.20). Non-resource needs may 

include promotion of activities, training provided, and outreach efforts to 

minority and socially disadvantaged groups and other underserved clientele. 

The need must be specific enough to allow the development of action items 

by the servicing PMC(s).
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

• General discussion of current knowledge for each identified need (is current 

information available to solve the need?).

• Geographic location [include map(s) or Major Land Resource Areas 

(MLRAs), now Common Resource Areas (CRAs), as appropriate], 

ecological setting (land use, site description, soils, cause and effect 

information, etc.), and area of extent (approximate size of problem area in 

acres) of each identified need.

• Proposed action items identified to help solve the high priority resource and 

non-resource related needs. This may include information on field plantings 

and future seed collections needed to meet objectives.

(iii) Supporting Documentation, Attachments, and References

• Attachments may include a listing of State committee members, references 

used to prepare the LRP, and a summary of needs and actions which will be 

taken.

C. Development of the LRP

The responsibility for development of the LRP depends on the level at which the plan 

was developed. The PM Specialist(s) and PMC Manager(s) will take leadership in plan 

development for the applicable organization level. At the State level, the plant science or 

technical committee would be responsible. At the PMC service area level, the STC 

advisory or multistate technical committee would be responsible. At the regional level, 

the regional advisory committee would be responsible.

D. Review of the LRP

The LRP will be reviewed annually by the appropriate committee and approved by the 

advisory committee. 

540.2 Operation and Administration of the Plant Materials Centers

A. General

(1) A PMC is a field unit operated by NRCS or by another agency or organization in 

cooperation with NRCS. It consists of the staff, land, buildings, equipment, and 

other items needed for the development and transfer of new plant science technology.

(2) Service areas of PMCs generally cover parts of States that have common land and 

climatic characteristics and are strategically located to serve multiple MLRAs, 

otherwise referred to as eco-regions. The location and service area of each PMC is 

shown in Section 539.22.

B. PMC Operations

PMC operations will follow established NRCS administrative policies and procedures. 

Administrative procedures are handled directly with the State office in the State where 

the PMC is located. Guidance for operations is provided in NRCS policy and guidelines, 

in the NPMM, in State supplements, and through specific instructions from appropriate 

administrative personnel.

(i) Administrative Activities

• Equipment and buildings - The PMC Manager is to review and update, as 

needed, the long range schedule of acquisition, replacement, or repair of 

equipment and buildings. The plan is reviewed by the STC responsible for 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

the operation of the Center. A copy of the revised schedule is to be sent to 

the NPL annually when requested. The schedule is to be used in requesting 

the allocation of funds to meet priority needs. Inventory of all NRCS owned 

buildings and structures is maintained in the USDA Corporate Property 

Automated Information System (CPAIS) database. PMC managers will 

work with their State office property management specialist to verify the 

accuracy of CPAIS information.

• Property utilization - Each PMC should show the need and use for all land 

managed by the PMC. The property utilization survey is a good tool for 

planning field space and justifying the land being used by the PMC.

• Filing - Correspondence, forms, and reference materials are filed according 

to the NRCS Directives System. Electronic files should be stored in 

electronic folders according to the NRCS Directives System and/or 

appropriate systems to meet the needs of the PMC. Electronic files should be 

shared over networks as appropriate and kept in common directories if 

possible. Retention of electronic files follows the same management as 

paper files. Electronic files should be backed up and/or archived when no 

longer needed on a daily basis.

• Inventory - Personal property inventories are completed, updated, and filed 

according to NRCS policy.

• Budget - PMC budgets are developed annually by the PMC Manager and 

State office in a manner to reflect the commitment of resources to PMC 

projects. PMC budget requests are initiated by the NPL and the information 

is required in May or June of each year. Budgets are to be reviewed and 

approved by the STC. Centers are responsible for fiscal management within 

the budget limitation and as delegated by the STC. The PMC is to use 

appropriate software or other methods to assist in budget management.

• Procurement - Procurement matters are to be conducted according to 

procedures in accordance with the Federal Acquisition Regulations and by 

guidelines established by the State office which provides administrative 

support to the PMC. Centers procure supplies to operate the PMC and 

conduct plant science studies. These supplies are often outside the norm for 

NRCS, due to the unique functions of PMCs, and can include other PM for 

standards of comparison, testing, and demonstration.

• Cooperative Agreements – PMCs enter into cooperative agreements, 

Memoranda of Understanding, and Memoranda of Agreement to augment 

and enhance PM activities and the PMC budget in their States, in accordance 

with NRCS administrative procedures. Such agreements may be for the 

lease of land or buildings to operate a PMC, for reimbursable projects with 

cooperators, and for agreements where services are rendered or exchanged.

(ii) Personnel

• Classification - Employees at a PMC may include a manager/team leader, 

assistant manager, technical specialists, field technicians, secretary/clerical, 

seasonal employees, and volunteers. These positions are typically classified 

as agronomist (GS-471), biologist (GS-401), range conservationist (GS-454), 

forester (GS-460), horticulturist (GS-437), natural resource specialist (GS401), resource conservationist (GS-401), biological science technician (GS404), secretary (GS-318 or administrative assistant), or soil conservationist 

(GS-457). Qualification standards are provided in the Qualification 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Standards Handbook X-118, which is issued by the Office of Personnel 

Management. Positions are normally advertised as being interdisciplinary 

and applicants must meet one or more of the required series. Position 

Description and Knowledge, Skills, and Abilities evaluation factors for these 

positions are available from the NRCS State office Human Resources

Manager. At a minimum, each Center should have a manager, an assistant 

manager or technical specialist, two field technicians, and a secretary/office 

assistant.

• Personnel procedures - Procedures (i.e., performance work plans, training 

plans, position descriptions, etc.) for PM employees follow guidelines found 

in NRCS policy documents. 

• Employee Development - Employee development plans should be prepared 

for each employee at the PMC. These plans track employee development 

and establish training needs. Section 540.52 includes recommended training 

for positions at the PMC. Equal Employment Opportunity (EEO), Civil 

Rights, and computer security training are provided to each employee by the 

State office, in accordance with NRCS requirements.

(iii) Outreach Activities

• PM staff will look for opportunities to provide services and products to 

customers who are traditionally underserved. This includes working with 

limited resource and minority farmers, developing partnerships with minority 

and small-scale seed growers, and making important documents available in 

multiple languages. NRCS outreach policy can be found in General Manual 

(GM) Title 230, Part 406.

• The NRCS PMP is committed to assisting federally-recognized Tribes in a 

Government-to-Government relationship through consultative processes. 

Section 540.53 provides more details on working with tribes.

(iv) Communications and Marketing

• PM staff will look for opportunities to increase the awareness of the program 

and its products, such as releases, technical documents, field plantings, and 

training. The end result of such activities is to be able to provide more 

assistance and information to a wider range of customers. Staff should work 

with their State Public Affairs Specialist (PAS) and the PMP PAS on 

communications activities when needed. 

(v) Preparing Reports and Information

• Each PMC will follow the guidelines outlined in Section 541.2 for the 

reporting of annual accomplishments and activities. Additional reports and 

information may be requested by the NPL and prepared on a periodic basis as 

outlined in Section 541.2(E).

• Each PMC will prepare administrative information, such as an annual budget 

(Section 540.2(B)(i)), planning tools such as the PMC LRP (Section 

540.2(C)(1)), the Business Plan (Section 540.2(C)(2)), and the Workload 

Analysis (Section 540.2(C)(3)) to support the operation of the PMC. 

• Many of the reports and planning required by PMCs are prepared on an 

annual basis on a recurring schedule. Section 540.54 provides a summary 

and schedule of the reports and information a PMC needs to prepare each 

year. 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

(vi) Safety and Health Policy 

• The NRCS PMP is conducted in conformity with GM Title 360, Part 420 and 

all applicable Federal and State public health and pollution control statutes 

and regulations. PMC Managers need to be knowledgeable about those 

regulations that affect their operations. Federal statutes and regulations that 

may influence PMCs are discussed in Section 540.55, which includes a brief 

description of each. Additional guidelines on PMC safety can be found in 

the PMC Safety Manual. 

• Each PMC must assign a Safety Officer/Coordinator to perform annual 

safety inspections as required by Federal and State regulations. Section 

540.56 provides an outline for safety inspections at PMCs.

(vii) Prescribed Burning at PMCs

NRCS supports and encourages the use of prescribed burning within the 

context of Conservation Practice Prescribed Burning (Code 338), contained 

in the National Handbook of Conservation Practices. Prescribed burning is 

appropriate at PMCs where its application will assist in the development, 

evaluation, and production of conservation PM. At PMCs, burn plans as a 

management or study tool will be limited to no more than 10 acres per field. 

Employees at PMCs with the appropriate level of job approval authority and 

certification can conduct prescribed burns at PMCs for the development, 

evaluation, and production of conservation PM. The NRCS Prescribed 

Burning Policy is found in GM Title 190, Part 413. An example of a burn 

plan is found in Section 540.58.

(viii) Pest Management Policy for PMCs

PMCs will follow NRCS pest management policy as found in GM Title 190, 

Part 404. The highlights of this policy as it pertains to PMCs include:

• PMC staffs need to be certified and follow applicable State laws and 

regulations when applying pesticides at the PMC. Staff can apply 

pesticides off the PMC as long as it part of a PMC research study or planting 

which the landowner has agreed to and

• PMCs can test pesticides and report on the results as long as the tests were 

within the limitations of the label. They can also report on what pesticides 

were used in a study or are used in an activity, such as glyphosate, for site 

preparation, as long as this is within the label.

it is consistent with their certification 

issued by the State. PMC staff having a "Research and Demonstration" 

certification can test pesticides outside the label but these results cannot be 

reported and used for recommendations.

• The reports generated by PMCs based on testing pesticides are considered as 

being based on reputable scientific research, provided they are peerreviewed, and these reports are equivalent to reports from universities, 

Extension Services, or ARS. It is recommended that PMCs coordinate such 

studies and reports with others such as universities, Extension Services, or 

ARS.

• NRCS conservation planners can provide options on pesticide use based on 

reference materials from universities, Extension Services, ARS, and PMCs 

during the course of technical assistance to landowners.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

C. PMC Planning

(1) PMC Long Range Plan

(i) The purpose of the PMC LRP is to identify, guide, and direct the operation 

toward solving high-priority resource problems identified throughout their 

service area. The PMC LRP is analogous to a Strategic Plan.

(ii) The PMC Manager is responsible for the preparation, review, and revision of 

the PMC LRP. The STC Advisory Committee reviews and approves the 

plan, and makes sure it is consistent with the needs and priorities identified in 

the State's PM LRP, NRCS National Objectives (Section 539.20) and/or 

PMP strategic objectives (Section 539.21). The PMC LRP should be 

reviewed annually and may require revision as State, regional, and national 

priorities change.

(iii) The PMC LRP will be filed as a supplement to the NPMM. An electronic 

copy of the PMC LRP will be sent to the NPL and to the NPMC for 

archiving.

(iv) An example of a PMC LRP is included in Section 540.51. The PMC LRP 

should include the following items:

• Introduction

o Purpose (objectives) of the plan.

o Those involved with the development of the plan.

o A description of general significant characteristics of the area served

by the PMC such as climates, soils, and land uses. It should not 

include detailed descriptions of MLRAs or other published data but 

should refer to the documents containing this information (i.e., State

PM LRP).

o A description of the process or procedure which was used to 

identify customers and prioritize identified needs.

• Description of concerns/needs - This section may include:

o A comprehensive list and description of resource and non-resource 

related PM problems and needs. This list should identify and 

prioritize those problems and needs which will be addressed by the 

PMC. Resource problems and needs will be classified by NRCS 

Goals and Objectives (Section 539.20) and/or PMP strategic 

objectives (Section 539.21). Non-resource needs may include 

promotion of activities, training provided, and outreach efforts to 

socially disadvantaged groups and other underserved clientele.

o General discussion of knowledge for each identified need, 

particularly if current information is available to solve the need.

o Geographic location (include map(s) or MLRAs as appropriate), 

ecological setting (land use, site description, soils, cause and effect 

information, etc.), and area extent (approximate size of problem area 

in acres) of each identified need.

o Proposed action items identified to help solve the high priority 

resource and non-resource related needs.

• Supporting documentation, attachments, and references

o Supporting documentation and references may include maps and the 

State PM LRP being referenced.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

o Attachments may be used to eliminate frequent revision of the entire 

LRP.

o Other attachments may include activities pertinent to the operation 

of the PMC such as specific project activities, informational and 

training activities, and long range schedule for maintaining and 

updating facilities and equipment.

(2) Business Plans

(i) The Business Plan (also known as a Plan of Operations) is a management 

tool used to direct the daily operation of the PMC. The Business Plan should 

be flexible to accommodate changes in operating plans or staffing levels. 

The Business Plan should be aligned to PMP, State office, and agency 

objectives and goals as much as possible.

(ii) The PMC Manager, along with assistance from the PMC staff and PM

Specialist, is responsible for preparing the Business Plan. The Business Plan 

is to be prepared by October 1 on a fiscal year basis, unless otherwise 

approved by the STC Advisory Committee.

(iii) The Business Plan is to be reviewed and approved by the PMC Manager's 

supervisor. Copies should be sent to each STC Advisory Committee 

member.

(iv) Business Plans will be filed as a supplement to the NPMM at the PMC. An 

electronic copy of the PMC Business Plan will be sent to the NPL and to the 

appropriate NTSC PM Specialist.

(v) Major items used as references for development include the PMC Workload 

Analysis, the PMC LRP, PMC study plans, and long range schedule for 

updating and maintaining equipment and facilities. The Business Plan 

includes:

• All activities at the PMC, regardless of funding source;

• Action items by project and study plans;

• New and established plantings for seed and plant production;

• Planned technology development and transfer activities, including plant 

releases, written and oral information, and training (providing and receiving);

• Administrative and operational duties;

• Facility and equipment improvements, maintenance, and upgrades;

• Identification of activities which are funded by reimbursable or non-CO-46 

funds;

• The staff member(s) responsible for identified action item and activity;

• When the action item or activity will begin and be completed; and 

• Anticipated product from scheduled action or activity.

(vi) An example of a Business Plan is found in Section 540.59. Business Plans 

should be reviewed by the PMC staff each quarter of the year to ensure that 

scheduled items are being completed. It may be useful for PMCs to update a 

copy of their performance index (Section 541.2(A)) for the year as a tracking 

tool of PMC accomplishments. All progress and final reports from PMC 

studies and activities contained in the Business Plan will be summarized 

annually and presented in the PMC Annual Technical Report (Section 

541.2(D)).
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

(3) Workload Analysis

(i) The PMC Manager is to develop an annual Workload Analysis for the PMC. 

The Workload Analysis will be prepared on a fiscal year basis and be 

completed by October 1 of each year. The Workload Analysis of a PMC 

operation is a valuable management tool needed to determine staffing 

requirements to accomplish the PMC LRP and Business Plan. The Workload 

Analysis can also be used to identify future program staffing needs and act as 

an aid for budget analysis and planning. The Workload Analysis should 

include all activities at the PMC and identify those activities which are 

funded by reimbursable or non-CO-46 funds. Section 540.60 can be used as 

a guide for constructing a Workload Analysis.

(ii) The Workload Analysis will be filed as a supplement to the NPMM at the 

PMC. An electronic copy of the PMC Workload Analysis will be sent to the 

NPL and to the appropriate NTSC PM Specialist.

(4) Conservation Plan

Each PMC is to have a current conservation plan prepared according to the NRCS 

National Planning Procedures Handbook. The conservation plan should include past, 

current, and future land use information. NRCS field office personnel are to assist in 

preparing and implementing the plan. If land or facilities are cooperatively used, the 

conservation plan is to be jointly prepared by all parties concerned. The conservation 

plan is to be updated every 10 years or sooner if major changes in PMC land use are 

made. The PMC Manager is to make maximum use of the conservation plan.

D. Expectations, Evaluation, and Review of a PMC Program

(1) Expectations

All PMCs are expected to follow policies and guidelines presented in the NPMM. 

Each PMC is expected to maintain a balanced program of technology and release 

development and transfer over a 3-6 year time frame. The Center should focus on 

action items in the LRP and items noted in the performance index. 

(2) Goals

Goals for PMCs, such as new releases, technical documents, and hours of training, 

will be requested by and provided to the NPL on an annual basis.

(3) Evaluation of Performance

All PMCs will report progress towards performance goals on at least a quarterly basis 

as determined by the NPL. This reporting is done through the POMS database 

(Section 541.1) and through the NRCS Performance Results System (Section 541.3). 

Evaluation factors for performance goals will include those items noted on the PM

performance index (Section 541.11). Specifically, some of the evaluation factors are:

• Technology product development and transfer completed by the PMC, such 

as written materials and presentations;

• Number of new releases during the fiscal year;

• Maintenance of seed and plants of released materials for distribution to 

commercial growers;

• Evaluation of PM;

• Number of field evaluation plantings;

• Training provided; and
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

• Contact and assistance provided to NRCS field offices, partners, and other 

individuals.

(4) Reviews

(i) Each PMC will undergo a comprehensive program evaluation every 5-7

years.

(ii) The NPL may initiate a Program Review for a PMC and PM Specialist. 

Other NRCS administrative levels may initiate an Oversight and Evaluation

Review, a Leadership Review, an Operations Review, a Civil Rights review, 

or a Functional Review for a PMC, PM Specialist, or State PM program as 

specified in GM Title 340, Part 413, Subpart E. 

(iii) Guidelines for PM Program Reviews

• Procedures for the review and the composition of the review committee will 

be determined at the time the review is initiated. The review committee may 

include the NPL, NTSC PM Specialist, and a member of the National PM

Advisory Committee (typically a STC). The STC, SRC, PM Specialist, and 

PMC staff will be present for some or all of the review. It is the 

responsibility of the PMC Manager and PM Specialist to select 3 to 4

cooperators or partners to be available for interviews during the review. 

• Section 540.61 provides guidelines and criteria for conducting a Program 

Evaluation or other type of review for a PM program. This guide may be 

used for reviewing a PMC, PM Specialist, or a State PMP. Other items 

beyond the guide may be covered in a review. Review follow-up will 

include a summary of findings, commendations, recommendations, and 

agreed-to items prepared by the review committee.

540.3 Operation and Administration of the National Plant Materials Center

A. Purpose

The NPMC, located at Beltsville, Maryland, has responsibility for providing specialized 

support to the National PMP and limited support to the Mid-Atlantic region as a field 

PMC.

B. Operation

(1) Operating Procedures - The NPMC will follow the same guidelines for operation and 

administration as those outlined for PMCs in Section 540.2.

(2) Personnel - Staffing procedures generally are the same as those for field PMCs 

discussed in Section 540.2, with the exception that national specialists may be 

located at the NPMC as needed by the program.

(3) Supervision - The STC of Maryland is responsible for administrative supervision of 

the NPMC and for providing technical input for regional activities at the NPMC. The 

NPL is responsible for providing technical supervision of the NPMC for national 

activities at the Center, and providing input to the STC of Maryland for the NPMC 

Manager’s annual performance evaluation.

C. National Activities - The NPMC carries out or assists with activities of the National PMP. 

These activities include:

(1) Providing assistance to the NPL in carrying out activities of national scope as 

requested;
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

(2) Working closely with the NRCS Conservation Communications Office and National 

Headquarters (NHQ), ensure coordination of PMP information into the national 

delivery system, and providing assistance to the PM Information Program including: 

preparation of national PM newsletters, preparation and maintenance of national 

display and presentation items (such as slides and electronic images), and assisting 

other PMCs with desktop publishing and printing of written technology transfer 

products;

(3) Soliciting published information from PMCs and PM Specialists, providing longterm storage of paper and electronic documents at the NPMC, and preparing 

documents for inclusion on the PM Web site;

(4) Coordination of national PM germplasm efforts including: plant exchange outside of 

NRCS on a national and international basis, assisting PMCs with clearing improved 

plants for release, coordination with the ARS-National Plant Germplasm System, and 

coordination with the Plant Protection and Quarantine Office, APHIS, for import and 

export of plants;

(5) Maintaining the PM releases database and permanent release files to provide current 

information for reports, and the annual publication, “Improved Plant Materials 

Released by NRCS and Cooperators;” and

(6) Coordinate development and maintenance of PM databases, development of the PM 

Web site, assisting with national PM training, and coordination of activities with the 

NRCS National Plant Data Center.

D. Regional Activities - Provides PM support in the Mid-Atlantic region in areas of high priority. 

In carrying out regional activities, the NPMC will follow guidelines established for PMCs in 

Section 540.2.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010) 

Part 540 – Operation and Management

Subpart B – Product Development

540.10 General

Projects and studies are the foundation of plant science technology development in the Plant 

Materials Program (PMP). Projects are intended to address important NRCS conservation 

issues and are developed using goals identified in the USDA and NRCS Strategic Plan 

(Section 539.20) and in the PMP Strategic Plan (Section 539.21). Studies are established 

within projects to meet specific technology objectives and deliver relevant products. Studies,

and the technology products from them, are divided into three general types according to how 

they are conducted. They include Plant Selection Studies (e.g., cultivar and other releases), 

Field-based Technology Studies (e.g., stand establishment or plant management), and 

Information-based Technology (e.g., summary of existing knowledge). Technology products 

should be based on goals identified in national project statements and relevant to NRCS field 

office needs. The typical process for Product Development is outlined in Section 540.63.

540.11 National Projects

A. General

Projects function to identify topics of work carried out by the PMP. They are national in 

scope and are used to address NRCS conservation needs. Projects are an umbrella for 

studies carried out by one or more PMCs. An appropriate project must be identified and 

associated with each PMC study before the PMC begins work on the study. Not all 

national projects pertain to each region of the country or the activities of each PMC.

B. Project Statements

Each national project is outlined by a national project statement. The project statement 

covers a broad topic area which addresses a conservation need. There are typically many 

studies which relate to each project. Projects help with the coordination of work, thus 

avoiding duplication of studies among PMCs. The content of a project statement is 

determined by the nature and magnitude of the problem, extent of prior work, and 

availability of information about the problem.

C. Development of a Project Statement

Projects and project statements are identified and developed on the national level, with 

input from the National Program Leader (NPL), PM Information Coordinator, National 

Technology Support Center (NTSC) PM Specialists, PM Specialists, and Plant Materials 

Center (PMC) Managers. Projects are broad in scope, and the majority of studies will fall 

under one or more national projects. If the study does not fall under a national project, 

then the PMC Manager, PM Specialists, or NTSC PM Specialists will contact the NPL to 

discuss adding a new national project or modifying an existing project. All national 

projects and project statements must be approved by the NPL.

D. Contents of a Project Statement

A complete sample project statement is found in Section 540.64. Each project statement 

will contain:

(1) Project Title - a brief title statement that best describes the project.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010) 

(2) Project Code - this will be a standardized identifier for the project. Project codes will 

be related to PMC study identification codes.

(3) Problem Statement - used to identify land use, resource concern, conservation 

practices affected, and the relative magnitude (e.g., extent and severity) of the 

problem. Generally, this will identify how the project will help solve the problem 

identified in the title and will include anticipated products.

(4) Project Classification - classification of the project based on SWAPA designation 

(soil, water, air, plants, and animals), conservation practice, etc., and on a lookup 

table in the Plant Materials Operation and Management System (POMS).

(5) Keywords - important words that may be used in a search of the database.

(6) Approval - all national project statements are approved by NPL.

E. Filing Project Statements

A list of national projects is included in Section 540.65. National project statements are 

also located in POMS (see Section 541.1) and will be found on the PMP Web site.

540.12 Studies

A. General

Studies are designed to guide the activities of a PMC or PM Specialist. They are 

prepared to address the needs identified in the State and PMC LRP, or by national 

initiatives or areas of emphasis. Studies may cover the activities of one or more PMCs or 

PM Specialists. Coordination required between PMCs and PM Specialist is the 

responsibility of the staffs involved and the NTSC PM Specialist. Plans will be prepared 

for all PM studies.

B. Study Plans

The study plan provides the details required to carry out the field, greenhouse, or 

laboratory work required to address the problem. Study plans will be prepared for fieldbased technology studies and plant selection Studies. Information-based technology may 

require development of a study plan. PMC Managers and/or PM Specialists develop 

study plans. Study plans are to be reported and developed in POMS (see Section 541.1), 

and may be modified as needed to achieve objectives.

C. Designating Study Plans

(1) Study plans are designated by an identification code used to track the study. The 

study plan number follows a defined format. This format is as follows: "MTPMC-P0911" or "WY-F-0902," where:

(i) MT = PMC or State Abbreviation (ET = East Texas, etc.)

(ii) PMC or PMS = Plant Materials Center or Plant Materials Specialist

(iii) P, T or F = Type Code

(iv) 09 = year study was initiated

(v) 11 = Consecutive Number assigned by PMC or PM Specialist.

(2) Specific details and codes for assigning study numbers are found in Section 540.66. 

(3) A study may have sub-studies, field plantings, or conservation field trials associated 

with it. In these cases, related studies may have their own study plan and study 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010) 

number assigned. When this new study information is entered into the POMS 

database, the "main" study number will be recorded in the appropriate field to 

indicate related studies.

D. Development of the Study Plan

(1) The PMC or PM Specialist takes the leadership for developing study plans. Plans 

may include input from other staff members or disciplines. Study plans are reported 

in POMS (see Part 541.1). This will allow consolidation of information at the 

national level.

(2) Study plans will be reviewed by others for technical merit and to ensure the plan 

meets the need of the resource concern being addressed and a useful product is 

developed for the field. At a minimum, study plans will be reviewed by the PMC 

Manager, PM Specialist, appropriate State office technical specialists, the NTSC PM

Specialist, or another technical specialist. Additional reviewers might include other 

PMCs having similar studies, State office specialists, field office staff, Agricultural 

Research Service (ARS) scientists, or university and Agricultural Experiment Station 

researchers. 

E. Content of the Study Plan

A sample study plan is found in Section 540.67. Study plans have the following 

elements:

(i) Title - use a title specific to the study.

(ii) Study ID Code - follow guidelines in Section 540.12(C). 

(iii) Basic Information - included in this is study leader, relevant project code(s), 

and study start and end dates.

(iv) Study status - status of study (i.e., on hold, active, inactive, completed.)

(v) Practice/Resources - select the Land Use(s), Vegetative Practice(s), Resource 

Concern(s), and National Objective(s) being addressed by the study.

(vi) Long Range Plans - identify concern(s) within the State and PMC LRPs that 

are addressed by this study.

(vii) Study objective - this is a brief text description that specifically identifies the 

objectives of the study.

(viii) Review of literature on prior research - a thorough review of all previous 

work, including current and previous activities on a study, is important at the 

time a study plan is prepared. The literature search is to be completed before 

the remainder of the study plan is started. Resources that may be used in a 

literature search are listed in Section 540.68.

(ix) Methods and materials - where, when, and how the work is to be done; 

featured materials, including standards; plot size and type; treatments to be 

used; data to be obtained; statistical procedures to be used; personnel who are 

to do the work; and an estimate of staff-day requirements. It is essential the 

technical and statistical validity of the methodology for each study be well 

developed before initiating the study.

(x) Species used - a list of species and cultivars/releases (if applicable) which are 

used in the study.

(xi) Keywords - important words that may be used in a search.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010) 

(xii) Cooperators - list of other PMCs, PM Specialists, State office technical 

specialists, agencies, or individuals that will be involved with the study.

(xiii) Study design - identifies the type of experimental design and describes the 

treatments to be evaluated by the study.

(xiv) Final evaluation - identifies Field Plantings (Section 540.14(F) and 

Conservation Field Trials (Section 540.14(G) which may be necessary to 

complete the evaluation process.

(xv) Technology transfer products - final products may include one or several 

formats. Section 540.69 lists types of technology transfer products.

(xvi) Approval - study plans and supplements are to be reviewed by others as 

indicated in Section 540.12(D)(2) to ensure technical adequacy. Signatures 

indicating review, concurrence, and acceptance will be included on the study 

plan prior to beginning a new study. The State Conservationist’s PM 

Advisory Committee reviews the plan for administrative items such as 

adequacy of resources to carry out the work.

F. Filing Study Plans

Study plans are filed at the originating PMC. Information on studies is also pulled 

from the POMS database and posted to the PMP Web site to highlight PMC research 

activities. It is the responsibility of each PMC to update information in POMS as 

studies are added or completed.

G. Study Summaries

All progress, activities, and conclusions from ongoing and completed Field-based 

Technology studies, Plant Selection studies, and Information-based Technology will 

be summarized annually to be filed in the study folder and included in the PMC 

Annual Technical Report (Section 541.2(D)).

540.13 Technology Development and Transfer

The development and transfer of written and/or oral technology is an integral part of the 

PMP. Technology development and transfer is accomplished through the use of Field-based 

Technology or Information-based Technology studies. Field-based Technology studies 

evaluate plant management techniques used in conservation applications. Information-based 

Technology involves the consolidation of existing information into a usable format or 

transferring the results of Field-based Technology studies into a format the field can use. 

Examples of products that may result from Field-based and Information-based Technology 

studies are included in Section 540.69.

540.14 Field-based Technology Studies

A. General

Field-based Technology Studies are those activities which involve active studies at a 

PMC or are conducted by a PM Specialist. Examples of Field-based Technology Studies 

include the development of planting methods for streambank soil bioengineering, time of 

seeding studies for late season cover crops, and an evaluation of improved PM for use in 

windbreaks or air quality control studies. Study plans must be prepared as described in 

Section 540.12 for all Field-based Technology Studies, and be approved by the State 

Conservationist’s PM Advisory Committee (or equivalent) prior to starting a study. A 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010) 

basic outline for the process of Technology Development is found in Section 540.63. A 

Technology Development checklist, which may be used as a guide for Field-based 

Technology Studies, is found in Section 540.62.

B. Assembly of Materials for Field-based Technology Studies

(1) Materials for Field-based Technology Studies may include plant materials, 

chemicals, propagation supplies, nursery-type supplies, or other equipment necessary 

to complete the study objective. Standards for comparison are to be included in 

studies as appropriate.

(2) Required materials may come from any number of sources, depending on the type. 

The cost of materials should be considered in preparing the PMC budget. Plant 

materials may be obtained as described in Section 540.32(A)(2). The Internet may be 

a useful resource for locating difficult-to-find supplies.

C. Installing Field-based Technology Studies

Field-based Technology Studies will be installed and conducted according to the study 

plan.

D. Evaluation of Field-based Technology Studies

Evaluation is the process of recording and analyzing plant response to treatments under 

test conditions. The objective is to determine quantitatively and qualitatively how 

promising new cultural or management techniques may be better than the standards used. 

Most study evaluations are completed at the PMC and are called “on-center evaluations.” 

The following should be considered when conducting evaluations:

(i) Performance is to be documented as required for the development of applied 

plant technologies using statistically acceptable methods and procedures that 

will ensure confidence in, and reliability of, the results.

(ii) True quantitative data, e.g., days to germination, plant height, weight of 

biomass produced, will be collected whenever possible. The use of relative 

rating systems, e.g., 1-9 scale, is discouraged.

(iii) Documentation is to be standardized for ease of recording and interpretation 

and to meet storage and retrieval requirements of automated data processing 

throughout the United States.

(iv) The data collected each year will be analyzed using Statistix 8 or a similar 

statistical package.

E. Off-center Evaluations

(1) Off-center evaluations are plantings and evaluations used by the PMC or sometimes 

the PM Specialist as part of a study to evaluate plant releases or technology off the 

Center. Typically they consist of plant selections, cultural or management studies 

established at locations that represent a land resource area, or a site having soil,

climate, and other conditions not represented at the PMC. Although initial testing is 

sometimes conducted off the PMC, these sites generally are used for advanced 

testing.

(2) All off-center evaluations are to be coordinated by the PMC responsible for the State 

where the planting is made. The PMC is responsible for conducting evaluations or 

arranging for evaluations to be done by the PM Specialist, local field or conservation 

district office, or other partner.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010) 

(3) The State Conservationist is to be assured through a cooperative agreement, 

memoranda of understanding, or exchange of correspondence with the land owner 

that there is mutual agreement between land owners, NRCS, and/or the conservation 

district regarding use of, access to, and tenure of the planting. The level of 

documentation required may be dependent on other existing agreements or who the 

land owner is. If appropriate, any such arrangements will include an 

acknowledgment by the PMC to the landowners that the planting does not pose an 

environmental risk or threaten the health or well being of wild or domestic animals or 

ecosystems. The PMC Manager or PM Specialist will also determine if necessary 

funds, equipment, and manpower are available. Factors such as location, workload, 

and available facilities are to be considered in determining who is to have primary 

responsibility for each planting.

F. Field Plantings

(1) Field plantings are conducted as final evaluations in a study. The purpose of field 

plantings in Field-based Technology Studies is to assess the conservation potential of 

the new or developing technology under actual use conditions. Field plantings 

evaluate new plants or new plant technology under a variety of soil, climatic, and 

land uses. Study objectives will determine the need and location of field plantings. 

Field plantings generally are the responsibility of the PM Specialist and coordinated 

with the PMC Manager.

(2) The establishment of field plantings will be addressed in a LRP for field plantings. 

The purpose of the LRP is to provide an orderly evaluation process of field plantings 

for each specific conservation use for which the technology has potential application. 

Study objectives will provide guidance in the development of the LRP for field 

plantings. The LRP will address field planting numbers, location, establishment and 

management techniques, timing and duration of evaluations, standards for 

comparison, evaluation responsibility, and data collection and analysis. The size of 

the planting should be such that it permits normal use and management. 

(3) The LRP will include the preparation of written products to adequately describe and 

convey new technology. These written products may include Plant Guides, Plant 

Fact Sheets, Technical Notes, or information brochures for the technology being 

evaluated in the field plantings. The written information is to include a description of 

the technology and how it will support appropriate conservation practice standards 

and specifications, potential uses, potential areas of adaptation, maintenance

requirements, and/or detailed instructions on the procedures. See Section 540.16 for 

more information on preparing these and other types of written products.

(4) Additional field plantings (other than those specified in the LRP) may be requested at 

the local level by completing a planting plan (Form NRCS-ECS-9, Section 540.70) or 

other appropriate worksheet and submitting the request through the State Resource 

Conservationist (SRC) (or equivalent). All additional field planting requests will be 

considered by the SRC and PM Specialist/PMC Manager based upon the usefulness 

of the planting and availability of material.

(5) Each field planting will be identified by a study number according to the format 

described in Sections 540.12(C) and 540.66. All field plantings should use Type 

Code "F" to designate a field planting.

(6) A register of field plantings will be developed and maintained in the POMS database. 

Each planting will be classified as active, inactive, or closed. An active field planting 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010) 

is one that is expected to provide additional trial information and for which periodic 

evaluations are to be continued. An inactive field planting will not require periodic 

evaluations. Because of their locations, demonstrational value, or for other reasons, 

records relating to these plantings will be maintained indefinitely in the study folder. 

Follow-up evaluations may be made as determined necessary. If a field planting has 

been destroyed or has no evaluation or demonstrational value, records pertaining to it 

are to be closed and the trial is considered closed. 

(7) Form NRCS-ECS-14 (Section 540.71) may be used by the PMC or PM Specialist to 

document assistance provided through the field planting process. Form NRCS-ECS600 (Section 540.72) may be used for documenting conditions at the time of planting. 

G. Conservation Field Trials

(1) Conservation Field Trials (CFT) are identified in GM 450-403 as a field study 

designed to examine the adequacy or adaptability of a conservation practice, system, 

procedure, or material. It may also be used to introduce promising conservation 

practices or systems into areas where they are not now accepted as a solution to a 

local soil, water, or related resource problem or condition. These trials can be useful 

to transfer technology, update the local Technical Guide, or to demonstrate a need for 

formal research.

(2) The approach is usually interdisciplinary, involving multiple agencies. The PMP 

may use CFTs to develop or test new technology, evaluate releases, or promote PM 

products. These trials may be coordinated by the PM Specialist or by the PMC. 

They may involve a study or be established based on a local need.

(3) Each CFT will be identified by a study number, according to the format described in 

Sections 540.12(C) and 540.66. All field plantings, including CFTs, should use Type 

Code "F" to designate a field planting. Each CFT may be designated by a new and 

unique number, but may be linked back to a larger study or previous study through 

the POMS database.

H. Preparing Summaries

The data from every active study will be summarized each year and presented in the 

PMC Annual Technical Report (see Section 541.2(D)). When a study is completed, the 

data from all years will be summarized and analyzed. The results and conclusions will be 

reported in the PMC Annual Technical Report and other forms of written reports, 

including progress reports and Technical Notes.

I. Selection

(1) Selection is choosing the most desirable technique(s) from the study or the most 

desirable technique for a particular conservation use. Personnel responsible for 

conducting the evaluation are to select promising applied plant technologies based on 

observations and quantitative and qualitative data.

(2) Criteria for selection:

(i) The selected applied plant technology must be practical and economical for 

the intended conservation use.

(ii) If no standard is available, selection is to be based on the performance of the 

new technology in relation to the performance of the technologies being 

tested in the same group.

(iii) Selection criteria are to be documented in the study plan.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010) 

(iv) In selecting applied plant technologies for subsequent incorporation into 

technical guides, consideration is to be given to the practical use of the 

technology.

(v) Appropriate steps are to be taken during evaluations to determine that the 

new technology poses no hazards or threat to humans or the environment. 

See Section 540.33(A)(3) for details on environmental considerations.

540.15 Information-based Technology

A. General

Information-based Technology includes those activities which do not involve an active 

study at a PMC. The purpose of Information-based Technology development is to 

address priority technological voids independent of field work at PMCs. Informationbased Technology development usually involves the consolidation of existing 

information into a usable format. A Technology development checklist, which may be 

used as a guide for Information-based Technology activities, is found in Section 540.62.

B. Sources of Information-based Technology

The type of Information-based Technology developed will depend on the nature of the 

need being addressed. Sources of information to develop Information-based Technology 

products may include: 

(i) Existing material, either by a new summarization or reprinting existing 

material that still has application, but is in short supply;

(ii) Revision of older material based on recently developed technology;

(iii) New information/work that has been recently developed or is currently being 

developed;

(iv) “Personal” experience and knowledge on a specific subject;

(v) Providing training to NRCS and non-NRCS personnel; and/or

(vi) Addressing a new resource or species of concern.

C. Product Development

The product of Information-based Technology development may be written or oral and 

could take one of many forms. Types of technology products are found in Section 

540.69. When developing an Information-based Technology product, an outline may be 

very beneficial to assist the PMC or PM Specialist. The outline may include:

(i) Title - A proposed title or working title for the activity.

(ii) Basic Information - Activity leader, cooperators, start and end dates, and 

timeline for development.

(iii) Need - Identify the specific need which is being met by undertaking this 

activity and the target audience.

(iv) Objective/Description - This is a brief description of the activity and the 

purpose it will serve.

(v) Literature Search - The current status of knowledge and products available 

should be assessed through a literature search. Resources for conducting a 

literature search are described in Section 540.68.

(vi) Materials - Identify what sources the information is to be acquired from.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010) 

(vii) Products - Identify the type of technology product (see Section 540.69) 

which will result from this activity and the intended distribution. Costs (i.e., 

printing and distribution) should be considered and funds allocated for 

product delivery.

(viii) Copyright - Copyrighted material needs proper clearances and permission if 

information or artwork is extracted from copyrighted sources; this should be 

considered during preparation.

(ix) Review and Approval - Cooperators and peers will review information for 

technical accuracy. NRCS policy will be followed for approval.

(x) Credit - Attention should be given to ensure that NRCS and the PMP are

given credit for involvement with the product development.

(xi) Performance - Ensure products are captured under the appropriate 

performance goal and management system.

(xii) Report accomplishments in POMS.

540.16 Final Preparation of Field-based and Information-based Technology

Products

A. Types of Technology Products

The products of Field-based and Information-based Technology development may be 

either written or oral, and the product can take one of many forms. Types of 

technology products are found in Section 540.69.

B. Preparing Technology Products

Product quality is of the utmost importance. The following items should be considered

when preparing technology products:

(i) All products developed by the PMP must provide full and appropriate credit,

particularly where multiple partners are involved with product development. 

A full citation for the document, especially for technical documents which 

might be referenced, should be included towards the end of the document so 

that it can be cited, and the originating authors and office are identified.

(ii) All written products must include the name of the PMC or PM Specialist

office, authors and contact information, and the month and year issued.

(iii) All written products must include the USDA-NRCS logo. Proper Equal 

Employment Opportunity/Civil Rights statements should be included,

according to USDA regulations for printed material. 

(iv) Products must be scientifically sound, professionally presented, and must 

satisfy customer expectations.

(v) “Personal” information is acceptable, provided the source has recognized 

experience and knowledge on the subject. 

(vi) The use of plant names in all PM publications will include both the full Latin 

binomial or trinomial and the common name the first time a plant is referred 

to in the abstract and text (see Section 542.2 on plant nomenclature). Plant 

names will conform to the PLANTS database and synonyms listed as needed.

(vii) When using measurements, the most appropriate measure, either English or 

metric, should be used. If metric is used, also include the English 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010) 

measurement if appropriate. For example, plant height might be reported as 

“meters (feet),” while stem diameter might be reported as 3 mm with no 

English conversion.

(viii) Copyrighted material needs proper clearances/permission if information is

extracted from copyrighted sources.

(ix) The State Public Affairs Specialist (PAS) should be involved in the final 

development of printed materials, even if the product will be printed through 

non-USDA sources.

(x) The format used should present material in an attractive way that can achieve 

a positive perception of the PMP and/or follows predetermined format 

guidelines. Format will be determined by the nature of the product 

developed. Technical Notes and Plant Fact Sheets/Plant Guides may have 

specific guidelines to follow.

• Technical Notes - A Technical Note is a document issued by a State 

office, regional office, or National Headquarters. A sample 

Technical Note is found in Section 540.75. Technical Notes are 

issued, distributed, and filed in accordance with the NRCS directives 

system, though the format of the Technical Note may vary with the 

content. Technical Notes are most useful for ensuring that important 

information is distributed and filed properly by the end user, most 

typically the NRCS field office. Many States have a set of Technical 

Notes for each discipline (e.g., PM, Biology, Agronomy, Range, 

etc.). While each State office may specify the distribution and filing 

of Technical Notes differently, there is a common method for the 

preparation and handling of PM Technical Notes. This method is 

summarized below.

o Preparation: PM Technical Notes are typically written by a 

PM Specialist or PMC staff member. There are instances,

though, when materials prepared by another author, e.g., 

cooperator or NRCS Field office staff, warrants issuing as a 

Technical Note. All written information which directly 

supports the Field Office Technical Guide (FOTG) or which 

may be of use to the field, should be considered for issuing 

as a Technical Note so that its importance to the field is 

conveyed and filed properly by the Field office. Technical 

Notes should receive a number (i.e., Technical Note #32) so 

that they can be referenced in an index or in other materials. 

All Technical Notes developed by PM staff should clearly 

identify the office(s) and/or author(s) so that recognition for 

the Technical Note is given to the PMP. The content of 

Technical Notes can vary considerably. It is up to the 

author(s) to determine the most appropriate format for the 

information they want to distribute. The only item that will 

be consistent is the cover letter with distribution and filing 

instructions.

o Filing: Technical Notes are usually filed in a discipline 

handbook (e.g., the State Agronomy Handbook), with the 

FOTG, or in a 3-ring binder containing all State Technical 

Notes. The Technical Note should be filed by the receiving 

office according to the instructions in the distribution letter.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010) 

o Updating Technical Notes: Occasionally, it may be 

necessary to update the information found in Technical 

Notes. The updated Technical Note should retain the 

number of the old Technical Note. Instructions should be 

included in the distribution letter to discard the old Technical 

Note and insert the new one in its place.

• Plant Fact Sheets and Plant Guides - Plant Fact Sheets and Guides 

are a cooperative effort between the PMP and the National Plant 

Data Center, with input from other cooperating organizations. 

Coordination is provided by the NPMC. A sample Plant Fact Sheet 

is found in Section 540.76 and a sample Plant Guide in Section 

540.77. Details on creating these documents can be found on the PM 

web site or SharePoint site. Plant Fact Sheets are one page (front 

and back) species overviews, and include color photos, a species 

description, and information on establishment, management, and 

improved materials. Plant Fact Sheets are intended for the 

landowner or layperson and should avoid the use of highly scientific 

terms or descriptions. Plant Guides contain more detailed 

information of everything on the Plant Fact Sheet plus information 

on propagation and production, cultural significance, and detailed 

descriptions of improved materials. They can be several pages long 

and must have references throughout the body of the Plant Guide,

with a complete reference section at the end of the document. Plant 

Guides are intended for conservation professionals and are more 

scientific or technical. For examples of how to properly reference 

various types of technical documents (articles, books, and other 

manuscripts) refer to guidelines on the PM web site or SharePoint 

site. Before creating a new document for a species, be sure to check

the PLANTS Web site (http://plants.usda.gov/java/factSheet) and 

contact the NPMC to see if a document already exists. Where new 

information can be provided to enhance a current fact sheet or guide, 

contact the NPMC.

(xi) For larger publications, such as major publications, books, and symposium 

proceedings, the authors may want to consider applying for a Library of 

Congress number. The NPMC should be contacted for assistance with this.

C. Review of Technology Products

(1) Development of technical information is an important component of the PMP, and 

PMC/PM Specialist scientists are encouraged to develop technical documents. To 

ensure technical documents are sound, high quality, and pertinent to the subject 

matter, a thorough peer review process will take place before being published. 

(2) PMC staff and PM Specialists will follow NRCS policy for manuscript review,

which can be found in GM Title 260, Public Information, Part 400, Public 

Information Policy, National Instruction 260-308.4. State offices follow this policy 

for manuscript review and clearance of in-service and outside publications, including 

Technical Notes, Standards and Specifications, professional papers published in 

scientific journals, symposia, periodicals, fact sheets, plant guides, video and audio 

scripts, etc. Reviewers of PMP-developed documents may consist of in-State 

reviewers and outside agency partners who are cooperators and/or familiar with the 

subject matter and technology. 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010) 

(3) In addition, the appropriate NTSC PM Specialist will review all major documents.

As a PMC/PM Specialist develops a technical document, they will submit the draft 

document to their NTSC PM Specialist. For more extensive or comprehensive 

documents, the NTSC PM Specialist may send to additional reviewers and will 

consolidate all feedback prior to returning comments to the originating PMC or PM

Specialist.

(4) A review will be considered successful and complete after all the NTCS PM

Specialist comments are adopted or addressed. 

(5) Final copies of all major technical documents will be provided to the NTCS PM

Specialist for their records, recorded in the POMS database, and an electronic copy 

sent to the PM Webmaster.

D. Distribution of Final Products

The type of product will determine the method and scope of distribution. The author has 

the responsibility to ensure that products are properly distributed to the customer in a 

timely and efficient manner. The author should work closely with their PAS for 

guidelines on final preparation, printing, and distribution of written products. The NPMC 

is an alternate source of information on printing and distribution. The cost of printing 

and distributing written materials should be considered.

E. Preservation and Archiving

An electronic file of all written products will be sent to the PM Webmaster for inclusion 

on the PMP Web site for filing in the program archives. Paper copies of documents will 

be forwarded to the NPMC only if an electronic copy is not available or the document 

was printed in a non-standard format. The NPMC will forward written materials to the 

National Agricultural Library. In addition, the PMC or PM Specialist should save written 

and electronic copies of all written products within their paper and electronic file 

systems.

F. Documentation

The PMC Manager and/or PM Specialist have the responsibility to record new documents 

on a quarterly basis in the POMS database and in the PRS, as applicable. All Field-based 

Technology Studies and Information-based Technology developed will be summarized 

annually in the PMC Annual Technical Report (see Section 541.2(D)).

540.17 Transferring and Marketing Technology Products

Marketing is extremely important in the delivery of products from the PMP. There are a 

number of ways to market technologies and products, including:

(1) Oral Communication - Oral communication is probably the most widely used 

method of marketing the PMP and PM products. Training, presentations, tours, and 

one-on-one contacts should all be looked upon as ways to improve the visibility of 

the PMP. Oral communication should be technically sound and presented in a 

professional manner.

(2) Printed Materials - Printed materials provide an in-hand copy of information to the 

customer. Printed materials are easy to access and share with others. It may be 

necessary to identify how the printed materials should be filed or used by the 

recipient. Consideration should be given to distribution of materials both within and 

outside of NRCS. The cost of printing materials may determine the extent to which 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010) 

this method is used. Printed materials should clearly identify NRCS, the PMP, and 

the originating PMC or PM Specialist office.

(3) Electronic Media - Distribution of written products electronically through the 

Internet or on disk or CD is relatively inexpensive. Electronic media provides 

customers broader access to PM products. The NPMC should be contacted as needed 

for guidelines on the preparation of electronic media.

(4) Special Demonstration Plantings - Special plantings are designed to promote the 

use and/or acceptance of a plant release or developed technology. If special plantings 

are needed or desired, specific information such as number, location, purpose, 

amount of plant material needed, etc., should be addressed in the study plan or PMC 

Business Plan as applicable.

(5) Off-center evaluations - Off-center evaluations are an excellent way to market new 

technology or improved plants. More information on off-center evaluations is 

provided in Section 540.14(E).

(6) Conservation Field Trials - The PMP may use CFTs to develop new technology, 

evaluate releases, or promote PM products. Section 540.14(G) describes CFTs in 

more detail.

(7) Field Days or Tours – The PMP may use field days or tours to help market new 

products or increase awareness of the PMP and PMC activities. 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Part 540 – Operation and Management

Subpart C - Plant Selection

540.30 General

The collection, assembly, selection, and release of new plant varieties and/or germplasm are 

integral parts of the PMP. The selection and release of new plant germplasm is accomplished 

through the use of plant selection studies. Plant selection studies use observational and/or 

quantitative evaluations, along with plant breeding methods, to identify and/or select 

improved materials. In all cases, new conservation plants released by the PMP must have 

specific purposes and/or traits to address a specific natural resource issue or solve a particular 

conservation problem. Plant selection activities are based on study plans as described in 

Section 540.12. The typical process for plant selection is outlined in Section 540.63. A 

checklist, which may be used as a guide for tracking the progress of plant selection studies, is 

found in Section 540.78.

540.31 Coordination of Plant Selection and Release

The PMP relies on the cooperation, standards, and regulations of other State and Federal

agencies during the development of plant releases.

(1) Agreement of Experiment Station Committee on Organization and Policy 

(ESCOP)

The ESCOP policy statement for developing and releasing improved plants was 

revised in November 1988 and reviewed by ARS and NRCS. The policy statement 

contains responsibilities and guidelines for the development, release, and 

multiplication of publicly developed germplasm and varieties of seed-propagated 

crops. A copy of the ESCOP policy statement is provided in Section 540.79. The 

PMP follows these guidelines in the testing and release of seed-propagated plant 

materials. NRCS also develops many releases cooperatively with State Agricultural 

Experiment Stations and other agencies.

(2) Federal Seed Act

Broad guidelines for the production of crops, such as isolation distances, seed testing, 

purity, and germination requirements are established by the Federal Seed Act and 

monitored by USDA’s Agricultural Marketing Service (AMS). The PMP follows the 

guidelines of the Federal Seed Act for the species it produces. Note that not all 

species selected by the PMP are included in the Federal Seed Act. The National 

Plant Materials Center (NPMC) will retain copies of Federal Seed Act and AMS

regulations.

(3) Association of Official Seed Certifying Agencies (AOSCA)

AOSCA develops the basic requirements for certified production of many crops in 

the United States, Canada, and several other countries. AOSCA also defines the 

various classes of releases, requirements for each class of release, and labeling 

requirements. These standards are found in the Certification Handbook published 

by AOSCA and in the Federal Seed Act. The NPMC will retain reference copies of 

these documents. The PMP follows these guidelines for release types and 

certification. State certification standards are individually established within these 

guidelines. Each PMC should maintain manuals of the seed certification standard.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

(4) State Seed Certification Agencies

The PMP cooperates with the State Seed Certification Agency, Crop Improvement 

Association, or other official State agencies in establishing standards for new crops 

and meeting State and Federal requirements in the production and handling of 

cultivar and pre-varietal germplasm seed classes with respect to: source of seed 

stocks, genetic purity, isolation requirements, roguing other crop or weed 

contaminants, field inspection, seed cleaning, and seed quality, purity, and 

germination. Though the internal organization of seed certifying agencies may differ 

from State to State, all regulations must comply with AOSCA and Federal Seed Act 

genetic requirements and standards.

540.32 Assembly and Accessioning

A. Assembly of Plants for Potential Release

(1) General

Plant materials are assembled from domestic and foreign sources for studies. 

Preference is given to finding a conservation solution using native plant species,

whenever possible, based on the intended use of the release. "Native" for the PMP is 

a plant species that occurs naturally within North America, including the United 

States, Mexico, Canada, Puerto Rico, the U.S. Virgin Islands, and the Hawaiian 

Islands in a particular region, State, ecosystem, and habitat without direct or indirect 

human actions. Germplasm assemblies are planned to satisfy a specific objective(s) 

indicated in a study plan.

(2) Sources of Material - The following sources may be utilized when assembling plants 

for release:

(i) Seed and Plant Collections - Collections should be made from the area 

encompassed by the identified problems and/or objectives outlined in the 

study plan. Where the identified problem encompasses more than one PMC 

service area, PMCs should coordinate plant collection efforts. Plant and seed 

collections may be coordinated with field offices and cooperators. 

• The number of collections will depend on the purpose of the study. 

Vegetative samples require higher sample numbers than seed 

collections to capture the diversity of sampling population. With 

seed, be sure to collect on enough dates to avoid selection against 

either early or late maturing genotypes. In most cases, collections 

should be made from 25 or more sites (populations) and from 30-

100 different plants at each site. It is important to ensure that a 

representative sample of the population has been collected and that 

there is sufficient data to substantiate decisions on the 

recommended selections. In addition to the sampling size, 

understanding the breeding system, seed dispersal, successional 

stage, and isolation requirements are all important when it comes 

to collections and how they are handled. Determining genetic 

adaptability, ploidy level, and outbreeding depression all need to 

be considered before a release is made. 

• Appropriate approvals should be obtained as needed when working 

with non-PM staff. Collection information should be recorded on 

Form NRCS-ECS-580 (Plant Collection Information, Section 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

540.80) or Forms NRCS-ECS-580-a or NRCS-ECS-580-c (seed 

collection envelopes). Electronic copies of NRCS-ECS-580 are 

available on the PM Web site and seed collection envelopes can be 

ordered from the NRCS LandCare Web site 

(http://landcare.sc.egov.usda.gov/).

(ii) National Plant Germplasm System (NPGS) - The NPGS, operated by ARS, is 

an excellent source of both domestic and foreign collected materials. The 

NPGS includes collections maintained at ARS Plant Introduction (PI) 

stations and the ARS National Seed Storage Laboratory (NSSL). 

Information on plant collections may be accessed through the Germplasm 

Resources Information Network (GRIN) database via the Internet. Materials 

in the NPGS may be obtained though the GRIN database and/or by 

contacting an ARS PI station and/or the NSSL directly. The NPMC will 

assist PMCs with obtaining these materials if necessary.

(iii) Foreign Sources - Plant materials may be obtained from foreign sources, as 

necessary, to solve a specific conservation problem. The NPMC will assist 

with locating sources of plant materials and coordinating the import process. 

For the NPMC to complete this effectively, PMCs must provide them with 

ample lead time to bring the assembly together to meet the PMC study plan 

timetable. This may require 1-2 years, depending on the source of foreign 

germplasm. In all circumstances, the PMC Manager should discuss foreign 

germplasm needs with the NPMC Manager to determine the most feasible 

method of obtaining materials and the timeframe needed to complete the 

acquisition.

(iv) Other Sources - Other State and Federal agencies frequently supply materials 

for specific evaluation purposes and as standards for comparison. 

Commercial seed dealers and nurserymen, privately endowed foundations, or 

district seed-increase growers are sources of many released varieties and new 

strains. PMCs should work directly with these sources to obtain these seed 

or plants. Plant materials may be purchased from commercial sources as 

needed for standards of comparison, testing, and demonstrations. 

(3) Size of Assemblies

An assembly should ideally contain a representative sampling of populations from 

throughout the range of a native species or the area the release is intended to be used 

in. An assembly of introduced species should contain as large a number of 

accessions as is available in this country. There may be instances where additional 

field collections from foreign sources may be required in order to have an adequate 

assembly. All released varieties with known adaptation should be included in 

evaluations for comparison.

B. Assigning Accession Numbers

(1) An accession is plant material (plant, seed, or vegetative part) collected and assigned 

a number to maintain its identity during evaluation, increase, and storage. NRCS 

accession numbers are also known as 9-million numbers (i.e., 9012345). Blocks of 

accession numbers are requested from the NPMC. The 9-million number assigned to 

an accession is to be used in referring to that accession throughout the evaluation 

process. Other numbers, such as individual PMC control numbers, are not permitted. 

Old PMC control numbers which are still being used should be replaced with 9-

million numbers. 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

(2) PMCs will assign NRCS accession numbers to:

(i) New collections from native or foreign sources;

(ii) Unnamed non-varietal materials obtained from commercial sources;

(iii) Accessions which are combined (i.e., composited) during the plant selection 

process; or

(iv) One or more plants which are selected from an original accession during the 

plant selection process.

(3) PMCs shall not assign NRCS accession numbers to:

(i) Accessions received from another PMC, which already have an NRCS 

accession number;

(ii) Materials which already have a PI number; or

(iii) Named materials received from commercial sources. These materials will be 

assigned an accession by the NPMC to avoid assigning two different 

numbers to the same material. The NPMC should be contacted to obtain 

accession numbers for these materials.

(4) Use the NRCS accession number (9-million) as the primary number for an accession. 

The only exception is when the accession was received with a PI number assigned. 

The 9-million number will be used within the POMS database for tracking purposes. 

The 9-million number and the PI number, along with any other numbers assigned, 

will be included on release notices and other documents as appropriate. Accession 

numbers and accessioning records will be tracked through POMS according to 

procedures found in Section 541.1 of the NPMM.

540.33 Evaluation and Summary

A. Evaluating Plant Assemblies

(1) General

The purpose of a plant assembly is to observe the characteristics and comparative 

performance of numerous collections so that promising plant(s) can be selected for 

release.

(2) Documentation of Performance

(i) Plant performance will be documented as required for the release of the plant 

using statistically acceptable methods and procedures that will ensure 

confidence in and reliability of the results. Such techniques may require 

multiple plantings and plantings that are conducted at off-center locations. 

Standards for comparison should be included if available. The 

interdisciplinary approach is important and should be utilized in preparing 

plans for evaluations. All evaluations will be documented according to the 

study plan.

(ii) True quantitative data will be collected whenever possible. The use of 

relative rating systems, e.g. 1-9 scale, is discouraged. Criteria which are 

often used for plant evaluations include:

• speed of germination;

• rate of growth;

• mature height;
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

• flowering date;

• flower color;

• seed maturity date;

• seed shatter/dispersal or seed retention;

• drought tolerance;

• insect and disease problems; and

• overwintering survival

(3) Environmental Considerations

(i) The PMP, by means of a categorical exclusion found within the Code of 

Federal Regulations (CFR), does not routinely need to prepare a formal 

Environmental Assessment (EA) and/or Environmental Impact Statement 

(EIS) for new plant releases (7 CFR 650.6). However, under this CFR, an 

Environmental Evaluation (EE) is necessary to "identify extraordinary 

circumstances that might lead to significant individual or cumulative 

impacts. Actions that have potential or significant impacts on the human 

environment are not categorically excluded." The EE, conducted by the 

PMP, will be documented in the worksheet found in Section 540.83. The EE

process determines if the new release will pose significant adverse effects on 

the environment. The EE is also the first step in determining if an EA and/or 

an EIS will be needed according to National Environmental Policy Act 

(NEPA) regulations.

(ii) All plant releases, whether a native or introduced species, will undergo an EE

process supported by appropriate documentation. Native species are 

preferred for use in NRCS conservation practices and programs whenever 

possible and should be considered first when evaluating potential solutions to 

conservation problems. Introduced species may continue to be evaluated by 

PMCs, provided they do not pose a threat to the environment or agricultural 

systems, are determined not to be invasive, and there is a significant 

conservation need which may not be solved using native plants. Use the 

worksheet in Section 540.83 to conduct and document the EE for PMP

releases. Plants will not be released until evidence or conclusions can be 

provided that a plant will not pose a significant adverse impact to the 

environment. These impacts include risks related to displacing natural plant 

communities (i.e., native plants or threatened/endangered plants), negatively 

altering natural processes in the environment (i.e., frequency of fire), 

decreasing the value of domestic animal and wildlife habitats, and altering 

the value of current land use (i.e., such as for agriculture or forestry). 

(iii) The PMC will document during initial, advanced, and field planting 

evaluations whether the plant has characteristics which may pose a 

significant adverse impact to the environment. The PMC should test the 

plant under a variety of conditions, especially if there is little known about 

the species or if the plant is suspected of having undesirable characteristics. 

A review of the literature, initial and advanced evaluations at the PMC, field 

planting evaluation data, and herbage toxicity determination (if applicable) 

should all be used to determine undesirable characteristics which may 

contribute to a plant having a significant adverse impact on the environment. 

PMCs should be familiar with the criteria found in Section 540.83 far in 

advance of completing the worksheet so that they can adequately answer the 

questions found in it.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

(iv) If it is found that the plant, while under evaluation in on-center plantings, offcenter plantings, or field plantings, has undesirable characteristics or the 

potential for significant adverse impacts on the environment, then the PMC 

should carefully evaluate the proper course of action to take. If it is clear that 

the plant poses a significant threat, is difficult to control, and has low 

potential for conservation use, then the plants will be removed from the 

testing program, destroyed, and the findings recorded in the PMC Annual 

Technical Report. 

(v) Careful consideration should be given to pursuing the release of a plant that 

has undesirable characteristics but may have potential for meeting an urgent 

or priority conservation need. Contact the National Program Leader (NPL)

and discuss all information available about the plant to determine if the 

release should be pursued or if the study should be terminated. If 

environmental impacts are not considered until the final stages of the release 

and it is determined, based on completion of the EE worksheet (Section 

540.83), that it is not clearly OK to make the release, the NPL should be 

contacted immediately. The NPL will assist the PMC in determining 

whether to pursue the release or if the release process should be terminated 

under these circumstances. If the decision is to continue evaluating a plant 

for release or to continue with releasing a plant which could have significant 

adverse effects on the environment based on the EE worksheet, then it will 

be necessary to consult with NRCS experts to determine if an EA and/or EIS 

are needed. This involves preparing and publishing a formal Notice of 

Intent, inviting comments from other Federal and State agencies and the 

public, and preparing an EA and/or EIS. The NPL must be contacted for 

assistance with these procedures. Note that most NRCS releases will not 

reach this stage of NEPA compliance. Only those releases that are 

determined to have potential significant adverse effects on the environment,

and have considerable merit for release and conservation, should be 

considered for having a full EA and/or EIS conducted prior to release.

(vi) If the EE worksheet determines that is it OK to make the release based on no 

significant adverse effect on the environment, include a summary of findings 

based on the documentation in the EE in the formal release notice (see 

Section 540.34(F)). The summary will clearly indicate that the proposed 

release does not have undesirable characteristics and is not known to have 

significant adverse impacts on the environment. In addition, the summary 

must include (if applicable) any known or foreseeable negative impacts the 

release will have on the environment (no matter how minor), limitations of 

the release based on the geographic area of intended use (i.e., if the plant is 

aggressive in a part of the United States outside its area of intended use), and 

methods for management and control of the release should it become a 

problem. 

(vii) If the primary releasing agency is not a PMC, then NRCS will not participate 

in the cooperative release until an EE has been performed. Release notices 

will not be approved by the Ecological Sciences Division if they do not have 

a summary of environmental considerations in the release notice and an EE

worksheet included with the release documentation.

(viii) The EE (Section 540.83), EA, and/or EIS (if required) must be included with 

the release documentation and a copy sent to the NPMC for archiving.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

(4) Determining Regions of Adaptation

(i) Regions of adaptation for potential releases are best determined before the 

release is made. Determining the region of adaptation for a potential release 

is more important for cultivars and long-term evaluated (i.e., tested class) 

pre-varietal releases because of the additional information needed to 

document performance.

(ii) Regional adaptation plantings are usually conducted at PMCs in the area of 

intended use. There may be cases where the potential plant release is tested 

at off-center evaluation sites by other PMCs and PM Specialists within their 

service areas.

(iii) It is recommended that adaptation and performance of potential selected, 

tested, and cultivar releases be determined as soon as adequate seed or 

vegetative stock is available. Source-identified releases are often not used 

beyond a limited area so the full area of adaptation may not be necessary. 

Determining area of adaptation and performance allows PMCs and PM 

Specialists the opportunity to evaluate the new plant release and determine if 

additional plantings are needed in the service area. It also provides general 

information to potential growers of the plant in regions beyond the releasing 

PMC. Incorporating the selection into NRCS specifications and 

recommendations will be according to NRCS policy regardless of 

performance at the evaluating PMC. If the plant shows the potential to 

become invasive or has other undesirable characteristics in certain areas, it 

should be included in the release notice, release brochure, and other 

documentation about the adaptation of the release.

(iv) Region of adaptation is determined using Observation Nursery Plantings at 

other PMCs, Inter-Center Strain Trials, Off-center Evaluations, Field 

Plantings, or a combination of the four methods. The results of such 

evaluations may be incorporated into the release notice, planting guides, and 

other information about the release.

(v) The region of adaptation for NRCS releases is typically not equivalent to the 

region where the species occurs or is native. The species range 

distribution/description (i.e., species maps from the PLANTS Database) 

should not be used in place of the intended area of adaptation or the known 

area of adaptation unless the plant release has been tested throughout the 

range of the species.

(5) Observational Plantings

(i) Observational plantings are conducted to determine the potential area of 

adaptation of an accession(s) selected from initial evaluation or advanced 

evaluation plantings. These plantings are also recommended for determining 

the potential area of adaptation and future use of pre-varietal releases beyond 

the originating PMC service area. Generally, observational plantings consist 

of non-replicated, single row or plots planted at other PMCs in the region of 

potential use with a standard of comparison, if one is available. Plants are 

evaluated for their adaptation and performance over a given number of years 

(e.g., 3 to 10 years) depending on the type of plant material and objective of 

the planting. For assistance in conducting observational plantings, contact 

the NTSC PM Specialist in your region.

(ii) All naturalized or introduced plants selected for potential release will be 

evaluated in an observational planting at multiple PMCs to determine if the 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

plant has aggressive or invasive properties under controlled conditions 

outside of the releasing PMC service area.

(6) Inter-Center Strain Trials

(i) Inter-Center Strain Trials (ICST) are similar to observational plantings in that 

area of adaptation and performance of accession(s), cultivars, or pre-varietal 

releases are measured over multiple locations, which generally include 

PMCs, and years. ICSTs are used to minimize the number of potential plant 

releases with similar characteristics by identifying ones that are adapted to 

and perform well over a broad geographical region. Additionally, ICSTs are 

used to refine and strengthen NRCS technical guide standards by including 

plant selections that have proven performance. 

(ii) Entries are planted in replicated plots using an experimental design to collect 

performance data on various plant parameters. A standard of comparison is 

generally included in the ICST, if one of more is available. Plants are 

evaluated for adaptation and performance over multiple years (e.g., 3 to 10 

years) depending on the type of plant material and objective of the planting. 

Experimental design and data collection criteria will be determined by the 

originating PMC and PM Specialist in consultation with the NTSC PM 

Specialist. 

(iii) All naturalized or introduced plants selected for potential release will be 

evaluated in ICSTs at multiple PMCs outside of the releasing PMC service 

area to determine if the plant has aggressive or invasive properties under 

managed conditions.

(iv) The PMC Manager and/or PM Specialist should work through the NTSC PM 

Specialist to contact other PMCs in their area to discuss field space 

requirements and evaluation data to be collected before the materials are sent 

to the receiving PMC. Each PMC is responsible for maintaining and 

evaluating materials received from another PMC. Plots may be maintained 

on a rotational basis, where new plots may be added as needed and old plots 

removed after evaluations are completed.

(7) Off-center Evaluations

(i) Typically off-center evaluations consist of replicated plot or row plantings of 

plant accessions for a potential release. These plantings should be 

established at locations that represent a land resource area or a site having 

soil, climate, and other conditions not represented at the PMC. Although 

initial testing is sometimes conducted off the center, these sites generally are 

used for advanced evaluations. Plant materials used in initial off-center 

evaluation sites will be limited to local native ecotypes or be under highly 

controlled conditions to prevent unwanted spread of the tested materials.

Evaluation of potential releases, following a positive rating on a locallyconducted EE worksheet, can be conducted at locations away from the PMC. 

(ii) Off-center evaluations generally are the responsibility of the PMC Manager 

and coordinated with the PM Specialist. See Section 540.14(E) for more 

information on responsibilities and approvals necessary for conducting offcenter evaluations.

(8) Field Plantings
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Field plantings may be conducted as the final evaluations in a study. The purpose of 

field plantings is to assess the conservation potential of new or unproven plant 

materials under actual use conditions. Field plantings are evaluated in comparison 

with standard varieties under a variety of soil, climatic, and land uses. Field 

plantings also provide an opportunity for testing of released plant materials for new 

uses or in new areas where adaptation is not known. Field plantings are especially 

important with pre-varietal releases to allow further demonstration of adaptation, 

determine additional conservation uses not identified prior to release, and will assist 

field office personnel to become familiar with the release and its potential uses. 

Study objectives will determine the need and location of field plantings. Field 

plantings generally are the responsibility of the PM Specialist and are coordinated 

with PMC Manager(s). Complete details for planning, designing, implementing, and 

evaluating field plantings are found in Section 540.14(F).

B. Managing and Analyzing Evaluation Data

Managing and analyzing evaluation data are important steps in the development of new 

releases. The objective is to determine quantitatively and qualitatively how potential 

releases may be better than the standards used. The following should be considered when 

conducting evaluations:

(i) Performance is to be documented as required for the development of new 

releases using statistically acceptable methods and procedures that will 

ensure confidence in, and reliability of, the results.

(ii) Standardized documentation is necessary for ease of recording and 

interpretation and to meet storage and retrieval requirements of automated 

data processing throughout the United States. 

(iii) The data collected each year will be analyzed using Statistix 8 or a similar 

statistical package.

C. Preparing Summaries

The data from every active study will be summarized each year and presented in the 

PMC Annual Technical Report (see Section 541.2(D)). When a study is completed, the 

data from all years will be summarized and analyzed. The results and conclusions will be 

reported in the PMC Annual Technical Report, other forms of technology transfer media, 

Technical Notes, refereed papers, etc.

D. Making Plant Selections

(1) General

A plant selection is made by choosing the accession(s) from the assembly or the most 

desirable individual plants in an accession which have the best characteristic(s) for a 

particular conservation use. Determination of promising plants should be based on 

observations and quantitative/qualitative data.

(2) Criteria for Selection

(i) The selected accession must be superior to the standard plant in one or more 

characteristics for the intended conservation use. If no standard is available, 

the decision should be based on superior performance of the accession in 

relation to the performance of the other accessions being tested in the same 

group.

(ii) The desirable plant characteristics for a potential release and the criteria for 

selection should be documented in the study plan. General criteria which 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

should be considered in the final selection process include, but are not 

limited to:

• Methods of propagation

• Mode of pollination (crossing, selfing, apomixis)

• Seed/vegetative production

• Yield potential

• Areas of adaptation or anticipated area of use

• Potential weediness or invasiveness and control methods

• Toxic qualities to animals or humans

• Establishment, management, and care requirements

• Market potential

• Acceptance by land managers.

(iii) Under certain circumstances, it may be beneficial to blend accessions in 

developing an outstanding cultivar or pre-varietal release. Justification for 

combining accessions must be well documented before proceeding. 

(3) Documentation of Selection

(i) Selection criteria should be documented in the release notice, the release 

brochure, and entered into the release module of POMS. Reports may 

include documentation to support moving a release to advanced evaluation or 

summary information for preparing a release notice. Section 540.84 provides 

an example of Documentation of a Plant Accession Selected for Advanced 

Testing. This document will accompany planting instructions of plant 

materials that are sent to other PMCs for observational plantings (see Section 

540.33 (A) (5)). The factors found in this exhibit include information which 

may indicate the adaptation and performance of a plant accession. The final 

selection documentation for new plant releases is the release notice (see 

Section 540.34(G)(1)).

(ii) During the course of evaluation, PMCs will collect data to populate the 

“Conservation Plant Characteristics” worksheet for inclusion in the PLANTS 

database. This worksheet includes data specific for a species or release 

related to morphology, physiology, growth, reproduction, and use. 

Information is used in NRCS plant information databases.

(4) Disposition of Non-Selected Materials

(i) Materials which are not selected for advanced evaluation or release may still 

be valuable germplasm. If seed or plants of a vegetative collection from the 

original collection site is still available and are believed to be viable, then the 

PMC should make an effort to determine if the material is needed in the ARS 

NPGS. The PMC should contact the NPMC and follow the guidelines 

outlined in Section 540.74(J) to submit materials to the NPGS. The PMC 

should include all evaluation data for that accession with the seed.

(ii) Inclusion of non-selected materials in the NPGS:

• Allows other researchers, including other PMCs, to use the 

germplasm for other studies;

• Reduces duplication of efforts if future collections are made of 

the same species in the same location; and

• Provides performance and characteristics information for the 

accession if evaluation data was submitted to the NPGS. 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

(iii) Even seed from native collections which have been in storage for long 

periods of time, or may have questionable viability, may be of use to the 

ARS National Center for Genetic Resources Preservation for DNA analysis. 

This seed may be used for DNA analysis for comparing past to current 

populations. Contact the National Center for Genetic Resources Preservation 

or the NPMC to find out what information is needed to submit seed samples 

for this purpose.

540.34 Release Procedures

A. Determining the Type of Release

(1) NRCS recognizes five release types. “Cultivar,” “Tested,” “Selected,” and “Source 

Identified” releases can be made available to commercial growers following release. 

“Germplasm” releases are intended for additional research, selection, or development 

but not for commercial production. A summary of the following text is included in 

Section 540.85.

(2) Release types are further defined by one of two development methods recognized by 

NRCS, based on AOSCA guidelines: those which undergo genetic manipulation and 

those which undergo no genetic manipulation (natural). An entire population, 

accession, or ecotype may be selected in comparison with other populations under the 

“natural” development track. When a selection for a specific trait within a population 

is made, or when distinct populations are bulked, or individuals are crossed, the 

resulting population is then considered “genetically manipulated.” Genetic 

manipulation can also involve inducement of mutation or biotechnology methods. If 

there is no genetic manipulation involved in making the release, and protocols have 

been established to minimize involuntary “non-purposeful” selection, the release may 

be eligible for a natural designation on the seed tag. All release types are eligible for 

both the genetic manipulation and natural tracks except for Source Identified 

releases, which are only eligible for the natural track. Section 540.86 presents the 

release types and development tracks as found in AOSCA guidelines.

(3) The decision as to which release type should be developed is dependent on 

conservation need, market demand and availability, source of original plant materials, 

and plants already available to do the job. Plants released as Selected or Tested 

releases may undergo continued selection and evaluation and be released later as a 

cultivar. How a release is typified should be based on criteria in the following 

descriptions:

B. Types of Releases

(1) Cultivar

(i) The international term “cultivar” denotes an assemblage of cultivated plants 

that is clearly distinguished by any characters (morphological, physiological, 

cytological, chemical, or others), is uniform in these characteristics, and 

retains its distinguishing characters when reproduced (sexually or asexually). 

The terms “cultivar” and “variety” are often used interchangeably. The term 

“variety” is accepted by AOSCA, however, this term also refers to a 

botanical classification (a variety of a species). Because of this confusion, 

the PMP will use only the term “cultivar” when referring to cultivar releases.

(ii) Cultivars may or may not have purposeful genetic manipulation. Examples 

of genetic manipulation include any type of crossing within species, wide 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

hybridization, recurrent selection, or biotechnology gene transfer. Cultivar 

releases follow the ESCOP policy statement. This release method is 

expected to be used when there is a high priority need identified over a broad 

area, a limited number of commercially adapted materials available for that 

area, and suitable performance testing has been conducted. Range of 

adaptation, conservation value, and usefulness can be shown over the 

expected broad geographic and ecological area. There should also be a 

projected demand for the cultivar.

(iii) Cultivar releases use original site data, species literature searches, multiple 

testing sites, replications, and data collected over a period of several years 

(typically 7-11+ years depending on the species or type of plant) that 

statistically validates superior traits. Testing includes initial, advanced, and 

final evaluations plantings. Field plantings are used to validate performance, 

superior traits, area of adaptation, and conservation values.

(iv) Classes of seed for cultivar releases are defined by AOSCA; each generation 

through which a cultivar is multiplied is indicated by a class name, i.e.,

breeder, foundation, registered, and certified. The number of generations 

through which a cultivar can be increased is limited to a maximum of four by 

agreement between NRCS and the certifying agency. Number of generations 

allowed varies by species and is designed to minimize inadvertent “nonpurposeful” selection; for some species this may mean generations are 

limited to fewer than four. The length of time a production field may be 

maintained for any one of the generations also varies by species, and the 

certifying agency should be consulted if it is unclear how long a field may 

remain in production.

(2) Tested

(i) Tested releases are the progeny of plants whose parentage has been tested 

and has proven genetic superiority or possesses distinctive traits for which 

the heritability is stable, as defined by the certifying agency. The seed or 

plants must be produced so as to assure genetic purity and identity. Such 

production could occur in either rigidly controlled, isolated natural stands or 

individual plants, or in seed/plant production fields or orchards.

(ii) Purposeful genetic manipulation may or may not be conducted; if no 

purposeful manipulation is conducted, the plant material may be eligible for 

a “natural” designation on a certification label. Plantings and evaluations 

have been conducted that support, address, and validate performance for 

identified needs. This release method is expected to be used when there is a 

high priority identified need, there are a low number of commercially 

adapted materials available for this need, and performance testing is needed.

(iii) Tested releases use original site data, species literature searches, and multiple 

testing sites, replications, and data collected over a several year (typically 3-6 

years) period that statistically validates superior traits. Traits of interest must 

be shown to be heritable in succeeding generations. Some data must be 

replicated. Standards are used for comparisons. Initial and advanced 

evaluation plantings are normal. Field plantings can be a part of testing. 

Tested releases differ from cultivars in that the complete area of adaptation 

for tested releases may not be known. Cultivars are intensively evaluated for 

a longer period of time over a wider selection of sites and their range of 

adaptation has been fully documented. 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

(iv) The same generation class names accepted by AOSCA for cultivars cannot 

be used for pre-varietal releases. Instead, AOSCA defines each generation 

through which a pre-varietal release is multiplied by a generation number 

(i.e., G0, G1, G2, etc.) for generation zero, generation one, generation two, 

etc. Generation numbers are similar to the seed class generations defined for 

cultivars: G0 is equivalent to breeder, G1 is equivalent to foundation, G2 is 

equivalent to registered, and G3 is equivalent to certified. Generations for 

tested releases are limited to a maximum of four by agreement between 

NRCS and certifying agency. Length of stand in a production cycle for any 

one of the generations varies by species.

(3) Selected

(i) Selected releases are phenotypically selected plants of untested parentage 

that have promise but no proof of genetic superiority or distinctive traits. 

The propagating material of this release class should be produced with 

methods that ensure genetic purity and identity from either natural stands or 

seed production areas or seed/plant production fields or orchards. 

(ii) Genetic manipulation may or may not be conducted on the selected material; 

if no purposeful manipulation is conducted, the plant material may be 

eligible for a “natural” designation on a certification label. The selected 

release type can involve establishment of crossing blocks and selection of 

materials from the progeny of a crossing block. This release method is 

expected to be used when an identified high priority need exists; there is a 

lack of or low availability of commercial, adapted materials for this 

identified need; and/or the commercially available sources are not adapted 

and have no performance documentation to meet the identified need.

(iii) Selected releases use original site data, species literature search, and initial 

evaluation plantings to support releases. Data may or may not be 

replicated. Comparisons are made to other accessions or cultivars for 1-2 

years and shows the selected material is better than others in some way that 

will meet client needs. Limited advanced evaluation planting data can be 

used to further support the release. Initial evaluation plantings normally 

would be completed on a typical site representative of the conservation need.

(iv) Generations are limited to a maximum of four by agreement of NRCS and 

the certifying agency (see information under tested releases).

(4) Source Identified

(i) Source identified releases within the PMP should usually be used only under 

special circumstances, for example, where use of local ecotypes are 

necessary. Selected or tested categories of pre-varietal releases are normally 

more appropriate release types and preferred for NRCS releases.

(ii) Source identified releases are seed, seedlings, or other propagating materials 

collected from natural stands, seed production areas, seed fields, or orchards 

where no selection or testing of the parent population has been made. No 

planned genetic manipulation is conducted, that is, all source identified 

releases are defined as “natural” track germplasm. The source identified 

release should be regarded as comparable to an ecotype. Protocols should be 

established to minimize involuntary non-purposeful selection in initial

assembly or production blocks. Any deliberate selection made from 

assemblies would make the release ineligible for the “natural” designation.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

(iii) The original collection site will be known, and any off-site production will be 

designated on the tag. This release method is expected to be used only when:

• There is a high priority and urgent need for identified plant 

materials;

• There is a lack of commercially available and adapted materials 

for this identified need;

• There is high potential for immediate use in the identified need 

area; and 

• A local population source exists.

(iv) Details of original population or individuals, soil-site characteristics, climate, 

and other physiographic data must be documented. Source identified 

releases use original site data and species literature review for basic 

documentation. Every seed harvest made from a natural stand is designated 

G0 and unlimited generations are allowed by AOSCA.

(v) Source identified releases can be initiated by anyone. In many cases, NRCS 

may not be involved beyond providing technical assistance. Public agencies, 

private individuals, and companies may decide to secure locally adapted 

ecotypes for restoring indigenous plant communities on disturbed sites. On 

request, NRCS can provide technical assistance relative to species selection, 

seed phenology, collection, conditioning, storage, asexual and sexual 

propagation, site preparation, and seeding techniques. Interested parties will 

be advised of the pre-varietal release process and referred to the State

seed/plant certification agency. Clients will be encouraged to utilize the 

State certification agencies to verify origin and ensure genetic integrity of 

harvested seed or plants. NRCS will not be party to source identified 

releases initiated by private and other public agencies where the State or 

PMC long range plan does not show the activity as a high priority need.

(5) Germplasm

(i) A germplasm release refers to basic genetic plant material possessing one or 

more potentially desirable characteristics that may be of value in plant 

breeding, the release of which is in the best interests of USDA and a State or 

Federal agency research program. A germplasm release consists of basic 

genetic materials and should generally be provided to all plant breeders who 

request it, but it should not be moved into commercial use without further 

evaluation and development.

(ii) Most germplasm releases by NRCS will involve materials that have 

undergone preliminary genetic manipulation. Most often a germplasm 

release will result from a reduced priority for the need that initiated the 

evaluation, or is plant material that is considered valuable but does not meet 

an NRCS priority, or has some limitation that NRCS does not wish to 

overcome.

(iii) Documentation will include original site data, species literature search, and 

initial and advanced evaluation data replicated at multiple sites over a several

year (typically 6+) period. There will be enough data to support the 

materials as having potential for additional research.

C. Plant Identification
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

(1) All plants demonstrating potential for advanced evaluations and release are to be 

positively identified as to genus, species, and subspecies or variety, as appropriate. 

Potential releases which cannot be identified to a species or may contain a mix of 

more than one species or hybrids cannot be released.

(2) If positive identification cannot be made by PMC staff, a pressed plant specimen 

should be submitted to an appropriate college, university, or other authority. Plant 

specimens should be prepared in the manner described in Section 542.3. After 

positive identification is made, the PMC originally submitting the specimen will 

ensure that all records and documentation on the material are correct. In addition, 

any PMCs or other offices which have received this material should be notified of the 

name change.

(3) Each request submitted to a college, university, or other authority for identification 

should contain the following:

(i) A voucher plant specimen properly labeled, along with additional 

information that would help the taxonomist to work through the keys and 

make the identification and a specimen label. The voucher plant specimen 

should be prepared following the guidelines in Section 542.4.

(ii) Detailed documentation and evaluation data to help identify the plant, such 

as plant height, leaf characteristics, flowering and seed maturity dates, and 

flower color.

(iii) Where and when the specimen was collected (geographic location, soil type, 

associated vegetation, etc.).

(iv) One seed packet containing approximately 100-200 seeds. The seed packet 

should be attached to the voucher specimen. 

(v) Anticipated genus and/or species name of the sample.

(vi) NRCS Accession Number or PI Number, if assigned.

D. Naming Plant Releases

(1) General

(i) All types of plant materials releases are named at the time of release, and 

appropriate publicity and credit are given to cooperators and the originating 

source of the materials. The selected names should be acceptable to the 

agencies and organizations cooperating in the release. Release names are 

used to identify improved materials which are being released to the public 

and in commerce. 

(ii) Distinction should be made between cultivar names and pre-varietal release 

names so that pre-varietal releases are not later confused as a cultivar name 

in commerce. Names of all classes of release are to be selected according to 

guidelines provided in the International Code of Nomenclature for Cultivated 

Plants (see Section 542.2), the provisions of the ESCOP Policy Statement 

(Section 540.79), and current AOSCA guidelines. Release names for all 

types of releases are limited to a maximum of 10 syllables and 30 characters, 

including spaces.

(2) Selecting and Using Cultivar Release Names

(i) Selection of cultivar names is at the discretion of the releasing agency, 

providing the cultivar name follows the formulation rules of the International 

Code of Nomenclature for Cultivated Plants. Often, the collection location 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

or a term which describes the attributes of the release is used as the cultivar 

name.

(ii) The following rules will be used when formulating cultivar names according 

to the International Code of Nomenclature for Cultivated Plants:

• Cultivar names must be a word or words in the modern English 

language. Latin words, or words which may be considered Latin, 

may not be used unless they are the classical name of an ancient 

Roman person or place.

• Cultivar names may not be repeated within a genus, species, or 

denomination class. A denomination class is a grouping of 

similar genera. For example, the same cultivar name may not be 

applied to a species of both Festuca and Lolium. (Note: the 

NPMC has lists of denomination classes which are checked when 

clearing names for new cultivar releases.)

• Cultivar names must consist of no more than 10 syllables and no 

more than 30 letters or characters, excluding spaces and 

demarcation marks. [Note: the PMP limits the length to 30 

characters, including spaces because of database restrictions.]

• Cultivar names may not consist solely of common descriptive 

words (i.e., ‘Large’ or ‘Variegated’) in a modern language unless 

the descriptive word is used with a non-descriptive word (e.g., 

‘Velvet Cream’), or unless the word is a recognized name of a 

color (i.e., ‘Indigo’ or ‘Majestic Red’).

• Cultivar names may not contain the following words: variety, 

var., cross hybrid, grex, group, maintenance, mutant, seedling, 

selection, sport, strain, improved, and transformed.

• Cultivar names may not contain punctuation marks except for the 

apostrophe (‘), the comma (,), a single exclamation mark (!), the 

hyphen (-), and the period (.).

• When used with the common name, the release name should be 

written as ‘Cave-In-Rock’ switchgrass. When used with the 

scientific name, the release name would be written as Panicum 

virgatum ‘Cave-In-Rock’. Single quotes are used around the 

cultivar name.

(3) Selecting and Using Pre-Varietal Release Names

(i) The naming guideline accepted by AOSCA in January 1998 specifies a 2-

part name to be used for all pre-varietal releases (i.e., source-identified, 

selected, and tested releases). 

(ii) When naming a pre-varietal release, the first part of the name or descriptor 

term, can be any combination of words, letters, or numbers the releasing 

PMC feels is appropriate. The second part of the name is the fixed term

“Germplasm,” which denotes that the material is not a cultivar. The two 

terms used together are written as Beltsville Germplasm (for example). The 

first letter of each word is capitalized. Quotes are not used around the prerelease name as they are with cultivars. 

(iii) When used with the common name, the release name should be written as 

Beltsville Germplasm little bluestem. When used with the scientific name, 

the release name should be written as Schizachyrium scoparium Beltsville 

Germplasm. On release notices and other information, the release can be 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

described as Beltsville Germplasm, Beltsville Germplasm little bluestem, or 

Schizachyrium scoparium Beltsville Germplasm. 

(4) Selecting and Using Germplasm Release Names

As with other pre-varietal material, germplasm type releases are given a 2-part name 

similar to the AOSCA guidelines, the second part of which is the fixed term 

“Germplasm” to denote that the material is not

(5) Name Clearance

a cultivar. It is standard practice, 

however, to use a designation in the first part of the name to indicate that the release 

differs from other pre-varietal release types. Germplasm material is generally given a 

designation based on its genetic make-up, any features useful for further exploitation, 

or accession identifier. For example, a germplasm release of little bluestem with four 

chromosome sets and collected in North Dakota might be named Schizachyrium 

scoparium ND4X Germplasm or ND4X Germplasm little bluestem. A meaningful 

sequence of letters and/or numbers should be selected by the releasing PMC with the 

understanding that the germplasm release may be used for future development by 

other researchers.

(i) The name of all releases, regardless of release type, must be cleared through 

the NPMC. The following information should be included when submitting 

a request for name clearance to the NPMC:

• Requesting PMC/ PM Specialist name and contact;

• Plant scientific name and plant common name;

• PLANTS plant symbol (required);

• NRCS Accession Number and/or assigned PI Number (required);

• Type of Plant (grass, grass-like, legume, forb, or woody);

• Anticipated class of release (cultivar, tested, selected, source 

identified, or germplasm);

• List up to 3 proposed release names in order of preference;

• Anticipated release date (month/year); and

• Attach Advanced Evaluation Documentation for the release.

(ii) The NPMC will check to make sure that cultivar names are formulated 

according to the rules of the International Code of Nomenclature for 

Cultivated Plants, and that pre-varietal release names are formulated 

according to current ESCOP and AOSCA guidelines. The NPMC will check 

for potential name conflicts with ARS-NPGS-GRIN, the USDA Plant 

Variety Protection Office, the U.S. Plant Patent Office-Trademarks Division, 

and the appropriate registrar or office for the genus in question. The extent 

to which the NPMC checks for conflicting names depends on the type of 

plant, the genus or species, and type of release being made. Once name 

clearance has been confirmed for the selected name(s), a letter will be sent 

from the NPMC to the releasing PMC indicating that the name has been 

cleared for use. If the requesting PMC has submitted several options for the 

release name, names should be ranked in priority order. The NPMC will 

confirm the first available highest ranking name as the new release name in 

the letter sent back to the requesting PMC. 

(6) Name Registration and Publication of the Plant Release Notice

(i) Registration or publication of the plant release notice is required for all 

release types. Registering release names and publication of the plant release 

notice with the proper office, registrar, or publication gains recognition for 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

the release and discourages others from using the same release name for a 

different accession of the same species. All applicable plant release notices 

of native species, regardless of plant type, will be submitted to the Native 

Plants Journal (NPJ) for publication. In addition to publication in the NPJ, 

cultivars of agronomic importance will be registered in The Journal of Plant 

Registrations (for agronomic crops, grasses, and legumes). HortScience (for 

vegetable, flower, fruit, and nut varieties), American Nurseryman (for woody 

ornamentals), and Rangeland Ecology & Management or Rangelands (for 

releases for rangeland application) may be used for publication of release 

notices. The NPMC can help obtain the proper application forms and 

registrar contacts if needed.

(ii) The requesting PMC should complete the release name registration forms 

provided by the registrar, as necessary, and send copies to both the registrar 

and the NPMC. The NPMC will update all name information in the NPGSGRIN record for the release as needed.

(iii) The primary PMC for the release pays any costs required for name 

registration. This should be incorporated into the PMC budget as needed.

(iv) PMCs will receive credit for such name registrations as part of their release 

package and as a new document.

E. Assigning Plant Introduction (PI) Numbers

(1) General

PI numbers are assigned through the NPGS. They are used to introduce the 

germplasm to the public and make it available for other scientists. It is ARS policy 

that once a PI number is assigned to an accession, the accession must be maintained 

in perpetuity at a NPGS maintenance site. Assignment of PI numbers is concurrent 

with submitting germplasm for storage to the NPGS. The NPGS reserves the right to 

not accept germplasm; in which case, a PI number would not be assigned. Section 

540.34(I) discusses the protocol for submitting germplasm to NPGS. 

(2) When to Apply for a PI Number

Application for a PI number should be made when a PMC is within one year of 

finalizing a new release. When Plant Variety Protection (PVP) is being considered, 

PI numbers should not be applied for. Releases which have been assigned a PI 

number for over one year are considered public domain and are no longer eligible for 

PVP (see Section 540.35(D)).

(3) Applying for a PI Number

(i) PI numbers may be requested once the release name has been cleared 

through the NPMC, and all other items have been completed according to the 

checklist for Plant Selection Studies (Section 540.76). This ensures that the 

release name and other pertinent information will be entered into the NPGS 

system when the PI number is assigned, and reduce paperwork after the PI 

number has been assigned. Seed or vegetative material must be available to 

be sent to NPGS at the time a PI number is requested.

(ii) Follow the guidelines below when submitting requests to the NPMC. The 

NPMC will determine the appropriate NPGS Curator for the species being 

released and make initial contact with the Curator. The NPMC will find out 

what documentation the Curator needs and send a response to the requesting 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

PMC. The requesting PMC should then forward the appropriate materials 

directly to the Curator. Send copies of all correspondence between the PMC 

and the Curator to the NPMC. The information required varies with each 

Curator and species, but typically includes:

• Requesting PMC/ PM Specialist name;

• Date;

• Person requesting and phone number;

• Plant Scientific Name;

• Plant Common Name;

• PLANTS plant symbol;

• NRCS Accession Number and/or other numbers assigned to this 

release;

• Type of Plant (grass, grass-like, legume, forb, or woody);

• Anticipated class of release (cultivar, tested, selected, source 

identified, or germplasm);

• Anticipated release date (month/year);

• Release and/or advanced testing documentation which clearly 

shows the superior or distinguishing characteristics of the 

accession being released and the intended uses of the release;

• Historical documentation, including original collection site and 

collector’s name; and

• Seed or vegetative materials must be sent with the information 

package. Seed may include a specified amount or volume. 

Vegetative material may include unrooted cuttings, rooted 

cuttings, or whole plants.

(iii) Once a PI number has been assigned, all relevant information on the release 

is entered into the NPGS-GRIN and confirmation is sent to the requesting 

PMC. In some cases, a temporary PI station number may be assigned. The 

NPMC will check the GRIN database to ensure that the information for the 

release is correct and will follow up with the GRIN database management 

unit to make any corrections, if necessary.

(4) Using PI Numbers

PI numbers should be included, along with the 9-million number, on all release 

documentation, submission of plant materials to the NPGS, and on correspondence 

with NPGS and others who are familiar with PI numbers. Using both the PI number 

and 9-million number will help prevent double-assigning of PI numbers by the 

NPGS. Once assigned, enter the PI number in the POMS database in both the 

Accession and Releases modules. For PM, the 9-million number remains the primary 

accession identifier so that studies and evaluations for a release are consistent (see 

Section 540.32(B)).

F. Releasing Agencies

(1) Involving other agencies in NRCS releases is an important part of the testing and 

marketing of new plant releases. Conservation plant releases may be made in 

conjunction with other Federal, State, and local agencies, universities, and non-profit 

organizations. Releases cannot be made with privately owned commercial growers 

or nurseries.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

(2) Other agencies involved in the release should be included as signers on the official 

release notice and as co-authors on any technical papers or marketing materials 

involving the release, as appropriate.

(3) Where NRCS is the secondary releasing agency, the PMC will follow the procedures 

of the primary releasing agency. However, the PMC will complete an EE plus 

submit the new plant release package and evaluation worksheet to the NTSC PM 

Specialist as outlined in 540.34(G). 

G. Preparing the Release Package

(1) Plant Material Availability

The amount of seed or stock needed for commercial increase purposes is to be 

determined by NRCS and the cooperating agencies, and is to be on inventory prior to 

the release of the plant material. There should be sufficient quantities of foundation 

quality seed and plants so that distribution can be made to interested commercial 

growers after the release is final. This is a critical part of making sure the new 

release is available for large scale increase and use in conservation plantings.

(2) Preparing Release Notices

(i) The notice of release describes the plant and its unique characteristics, its use 

and area of adaptation, and how and by whom the breeder, foundation, 

generation one, or other classes of materials are to be maintained. The notice 

is to specify when and where seed or plants will be available and when the 

release is expected to be commercially available. In addition, the notice must 

contain a summary of environmental considerations based on the EE

worksheet (Section 540.83) which has been completed for the release. The 

summary must show that the proposed release does not have undesirable 

characteristics or significant adverse impacts on the environment. Also it 

must include, if applicable, any known or foreseeable impacts the release 

will have on the environment, no matter how minor; limitations of the release 

based on the geographic area of intended use (i.e., if the plant is aggressive in 

a part of the United States outside its area of intended use); and methods of 

management and control of the release, should it become a problem. Release 

notices will not be approved by the Ecological Sciences Division if they 

do not have a summary of environmental considerations. If it is 

determined in the EE that the release has potentially significant adverse 

effects on the environment, the PMC should contact the NPL prior to 

completing the release notice and routing for signatures (see Section 

540.33(A)(3)) to determine if an EA and/or EIS is needed for the release.

(ii) The PMC Manager and/or the PM Specialist will prepare the release 

documentation. The notice is to be reviewed by cooperating agencies and 

organizations. The notice of release generally is prepared after the 

certification requirements have been determined. (See Section 540.34(J).) A 

release is not considered official until final review and signatures by all 

participating agencies have been completed. Section 540.88 is a general 

outline for all release types. Sections 540.89, 540.90, 540.91, 540.92, and 

540.93 are typical release notices for cultivar, tested, selected, source 

identified, and germplasm releases, respectively.

(3) Prior to routing a new conservation plant release notice the PMC, along with the PM 

Specialist, will prepare a release package. The release package contains an assembly 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

of the materials needed to support the new conservation plant release. A full release 

package contains the following:

(i) The complete notice of release (Section 540.34(G)(3));

(ii) A copy of the name clearance letter received from the NPMC (Section 

540.34(D)(5));

(iii) Indication of how the plant material was botanically identified and a copy of 

correspondence, as appropriate, relating to positive botanical identification of 

the proposed release if done by an outside partner or entity (Section 

540.34(C));

(iv) The completed EE (Sections 540.34(A)(3) and 540.83);

(v) Completed “New Plant Release Package and Evaluation Worksheet” 

(Section 540.87);

(vi) Completed, or ready for publication, release brochure (Section 540.90);

(vii) New or updated Plant Fact Sheet (Section 540.76) or Plant Guide (Section 

540.77);

(viii) Completed Conservation Plant Characteristics worksheet for the release to be 

submitted to PLANTS (540.33(D)(3)(ii);

(ix) Draft press release or marketing plan (Section 540.34(H)); and

(x) A completed or ready for publication release registration abstract or article, 

appropriate for the level of release (for example, a source identified release 

may not be registered), for the Native Plants Journal, Journal of Plant 

Registrations, HortScience, American Nurseryman, or other appropriate 

venue (Section 540.34(D)(6)).

(4) The procedure for routing a release package through the approval process involves 

the following:

(i) The PMC submits the entire release package to the NTSC PM Specialist for 

their region.

(ii) The NTSC PM Specialist review focuses on the following:

• Is the documentation packet complete as per the NPMM?

• Is the documentation professional in appearance and easily 

understood?

• Is testing analyzed and summarized in a manner appropriate with 

the release type as per the NPMM?

• Do summarized results support the proposed uses and the 

geographic area of recommended use?

• Does the release notice clearly state why this material is superior 

or different than previous releases and/or other plants of the same 

species currently available?

(iii) The NTSC PM Specialist consolidates any comments and returns the release 

package to the PMC within 3 weeks of original receipt. The NTSC PM 

Specialist either returns a completed evaluation with a point score or 

provides recommendations to the PMC on revisions. A review will be 

considered successful and complete after all Plant Materials Release

Committee comments are adopted and/or addressed via re-submittal of the 

package. A successful review will result in a PMC receiving a score between 

3–15 (15 total available) points under the release component in the PM
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

performance index as shown in Section 540.87. The NTSC PM Specialist

will document the points earned by the release component in the exhibit and 

provide a copy of the points awarded to the NPMC, the NPL, and the 

originating PMC.

(iv) The PMC either proceeds to obtain signatures on the release notice or revises 

the release package and resends it back to the NTSC PM Specialist. When 

the NTSC PM Specialist review is final, the release notice is routed for 

signatures

(v) The release notice is signed by the appropriate personnel of the area served 

by the PMC and the proposed plant release. All releases where NRCS is 

involved will be signed by each State Conservationist within the primary 

releasing PMC service area, or by the chair of the State Conservationists’ 

Plant Materials Advisory Committee where agreed upon. When the area of 

recommended use of the released plant exceeds the primary PMC service 

area, additional State Conservationist signatures may be desirable and should 

be determined by the primary releasing PMC advisory committee. All 

cooperating agencies must sign the release notice as well. Final signature 

will be at NHQ; the release notice is sent to the NPL to obtain the signature 

of the “Director, ESD.” The NPL will then forward the release notices back 

to the originating PMC or office. All NRCS releases, regardless of release 

type, must be sent to the NPL to obtain the final signature of the Director of 

ESD. The notice of release and EE is routed for signatures in the following 

order: State Conservationists, other cooperating agencies, and then to the 

NPL. This routing may differ when NRCS is a secondary releasing agency.

(vi) The complete release package, as indicated in 540.43 (G), must be sent by 

the PMC to the NPL as well, preferably with the final release notice to be 

signed by NHQ. The NPL returns the signed notice of release and EE back 

to the originating PMC and sends a copy to the NPMC. The NPMC will 

maintain a file on each plant release in the PMP.

(vii) The PMC sends a copy of the complete release package with a signed release 

notice to all cooperating agencies.

(viii) Electronic copies of the new or updated plant fact sheet, plant guide, and 

Conservation Plant Characteristics worksheet will be sent to the National 

Plant Data Center for incorporation into PLANTS.

(ix) The release notice, new or significantly revised plant fact sheet and plant 

guide, release registration notice, and release brochure will be entered into 

the POMS database and electronic files sent to the PM Webmaster.

(x) Name registrations will be submitted to the appropriate journal for 

publication.

H. Marketing New Plant Releases

(1) It is essential to publicize new releases to improve visibility and gain acceptance for 

use of a new release. A marketing plan should be developed with the plant release 

study plan. Publicity of a new release may include plantings, such as Field Plantings 

(see Section 540.33(A)(8)), Special Demonstration Plantings (see Section 540.17(D)) 

and Conservation Field Trials (see Section 540.17(F)), and written materials, such as 

release brochures (see Section 540.94), revision of plant fact sheets (see Section 

540.76) or plant guides (see Section 540.77), and news releases. A release brochure, 

or similar document, should be prepared for each release. Release brochures should 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

describe the characteristics of a species and/or release(s) and describe the adaptation, 

uses, establishment, and maintenance of the plant. Additional information on seed 

production, establishment, and management for the release should be included in 

plant guides (see Section 540.77) or other written documents. New releases should 

also be included into FOTG standards, specifications, and job sheets as appropriate 

for specific conservation practices. The PMC Manager and the PM Specialist are to 

prepare plans and materials for promoting the new release. 

(2) Assistance from the State Public Affairs Specialist (PAS) should be sought in 

preparing public information materials. Public information materials are to include a 

statement when plant materials will be commercially available. Popular type news 

releases and publications may be delayed following a plant release until such time as 

the material is commercially available. Additional publicity can be obtained through 

bulletins, release brochures, Web sites, local articles, journals or periodicals, Soil and 

Water Conservation Districts, and commercial growers. NRCS guidelines on 

preparing and providing information to the public and news media may be obtained 

from the State PAS.

I. Preservation of Plant Germplasm

(1) General

(i) Plant germplasm preservation is accomplished mainly in cooperation with 

the NPGS. Plant germplasm within NRCS includes initial collections 

(accessions) and conservation plant releases. Germplasm at any stage of 

plant selection, i.e., initial collections and assemblies through final plant 

releases, should be considered for long-term preservation. Preservation of 

initial collections/accessions will reduce duplicated efforts in making field 

collections or assembling collections of plant materials and make the 

collections available for future research by NRCS and others. 

(ii) Preservation of all NRCS conservation releases is required. All new plant 

releases must be submitted for preservation no later than 90 days after being 

released. This ensures that the released materials are backed up at another 

location in case of a disaster at the PMC.

(2) Role of the NPMC

The NPMC will serve as the clearinghouse for all information on germplasm 

preservation of NRCS releases. The NPMC will periodically inventory NPGS 

records to determine what materials need to be submitted or resubmitted to maintain 

viable seed or vegetative materials at the NPGS sites. The NPMC will work with 

individual PMCs to identify germplasm preservation needs and assess the most 

appropriate method of preservation. In addition, for any materials which cannot be 

preserved within the NPGS, the NPMC will serve as a back-up site or will find 

another appropriate site to maintain the germplasm.

(3) Submission of materials to the NPGS

(i) There are two methods of preserving germplasm in the NPGS: through the 

PI Stations and through the National Center for Genetic Resources 

Preservation (NCGRP, formerly the National Seed Storage Laboratory). The 

PI Stations are the first source for preservation. Materials not accepted by 

the PI Stations can be submitted to the NCGRP.

(ii) PMCs interested in preserving germplasm should first contact the NPMC. 

Seed or plants should not be sent to the NPMC. The NPMC will contact the 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

appropriate NPGS Curator and determine if the Curator is interested in 

receiving the material. If the NPGS Curator would like to include the 

material in the active collection at a PI Station, he/she will indicate the plant 

form (seed, plants, or vegetative propagules) and amount to be sent. The 

NPMC will forward all information to the requesting PMC. The PMC will 

then forward materials directly to the Curator and provide a copy of all 

correspondence to the NPMC. Germplasm accepted by the NPGS Curator 

will be assigned a PI number or PI Station identifier, and information about 

each accession will be entered in the GRIN database. The NPGS will 

maintain adequate quantities of seed to make the material available to other 

interested scientists. 

(iii) The Curator may recommend in some cases that seeds be maintained at the 

NCGRP rather than at a PI Station. The NPMC will contact the NCGRP to 

determine if they are interested in preserving the germplasm. If the 

germplasm is accepted by the NCGRP, the NPMC will contact the requesting 

PMC with materials needed by the Curator. In all cases, the requesting PMC 

will be required to complete a Seed Storage Application Form (Section 

540.95). This form indicates the amount of seed which is required by 

NCGRP. The PMC will then forward materials directly to the NCGRP in 

Fort Collins, Colorado, and provide a copy of all correspondence to the 

NPMC.

(4) Submission of botanical specimens

In addition to preservation as live material or seeds, all materials released through the 

PMP should be represented in a herbarium with a mounted botanical specimen. 

Botanical specimens should be prepared according to the guidelines found in Section 

542.3. It is particularly important that a standard type specimen be prepared for all 

cultivar releases. A type specimen contains the typical and/or unique features of a 

particular cultivar, and may be used to differentiate between similar cultivar materials 

in legal cases where PVP is an issue. Generally, the National Arboretum will 

maintain the type specimen sample for each cultivar. In addition, if there is a 

registrar for the genus, a herbarium specimen should also be sent to the registrar. The 

releasing PMC will maintain a record of where the type specimen is stored and notify 

the NPMC of that location. It is not necessary to identify a specimen as a standard 

for pre-varietal materials. Herbarium specimens of all releases should be sent to the 

NPMC, and they will then be forwarded to the National Arboretum for long-term 

storage. 

J. Certification Standards for Seed and Plants

(1) General

Certification of seed and/or plants provides the end-user an assurance that the 

material being purchased or received is, in fact, the material they think it is. Certified 

seed or plants are sold or distributed under minimum standards which have been 

established by AOSCA and the State seed certification agency (or similar agency). 

Certification classes of cultivars include breeder, foundation, registered, and certified 

generations. Certification generations of pre-varietal releases include G0, G1, G2, 

etc., for the number of generations from the original population. The G0 is 

equivalent to the breeder, the G1 to the foundation, and so on. Refer to Section 

540.85 for limitations of generations for each release type. All releases may not need 

to be distributed under the certification program. Examples might include vegetative 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

releases where no certification program exists or seed producing releases distributed 

in very limited amounts.

(2) Guidelines for Certification

(i) Plants or seed intended for certification by the State seed certification agency 

(or similar agency) need to be produced according to standards established 

by the agencies cooperating in the release and the certifying agencies. The 

PMC Manager, the PM Specialist, and cooperating agencies, such as 

experiment stations and crop improvement associations, need to prepare 

specific certification guidelines for plants where certification standards have 

not been established. Guidelines for established species or releases may be 

found in the Certification Handbook prepared by AOSCA.

(ii) In releasing new plant materials, NRCS is guided by State and Federal

regulations and the ESCOP policy statement (Section 540.79). Insofar as 

possible, materials are released in cooperation with or with concurrence of 

cooperating agencies. The data required to document a cooperative release 

will be identified and agreed upon with cooperators. It may vary by type of 

release. Detailed study plans will outline evaluation factors, methods of data 

collection and analysis, and identify potential cooperators and evaluation 

factors. A thorough summarization of performance and data will be made 

well in advance of the anticipated release date to ensure that the information 

is available or that appropriate steps can be taken to obtain it.

(iii) Procedures for certification vary depending on the type of release being 

certified. NRCS recognizes cultivar, tested, selected, source identified, and 

germplasm release types. These release types are defined and discussed in 

Sections 540.24(A) and 540.85.

540.35 Protecting PMC Releases

A. General

(1) Title 37 CFR 501.6, which pertains to ownership of inventions made by Government 

employees, generally provides that the Government is entitled to ownership of any 

invention directly related to the official duties of the inventor. New plant releases 

and/or technologies developed by PMCs for conservation use represent new 

inventions. As the owner, the Government is entitled to apply for protection.

(2) The principal reasons for seeking statutory protection of a new plant cultivar are to 

safeguard the cultivar name, to provide a basis for granting exclusive production 

rights to one or more growers, and to protect the integrity of the released germplasm 

by limiting generations or production cycles. Without legal protection, there can be 

no licensing of production rights. Patents for Plants, Utility Patents, and the Plant 

Variety Protection Act (PVPA) are methods that can be used to seek statutory 

protection. The PVPA is applicable for use when seeking protection of PMC 

releases. 

B. Patents for Plants

Patents for Plants (35 USC 161, Amendment 1954, 68 Statute 1190) are administrated by 

the U.S. Patent and Trademark office, Department of Commerce. It allows "Whoever 

invents or discovers and asexually reproduces any distinct and new variety of plant, 

including cultivated spores, mutants, hybrids, and newly found seedlings, other than a 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

tuber propagated plant or a plant found in an uncultivated state..." to obtain a patent. The 

key words here are "asexually reproduced" and "other than...found in an uncultivated 

state ..." The latter is interpreted to mean that plants cannot be merely selected from an 

uncultivated state (wild) and patented, but must undergo some genetic change or 

selection. Because most, if not all, asexually propagated releases by NRCS represent a 

selection from an uncultivated state, procedures for seeking plant patents are not covered 

in this policy. If a plant that is to be released is asexually propagated and has been 

genetically altered, the State Conservationist’s Plant Materials Advisory Committee of 

the PMC developing the plant release should explore with the NPL the desirability of 

seeking a plant patent.

C. Utility Patents

Utility patents (35 USC 101) are also administrated by the U.S. Patent and Trademark 

Office. It allows "Whoever invents or discovers any new and useful...manufacture, or 

composition of matter, or any new and useful improvement thereof" to obtain a utility 

patent, provided that the invention meets several criteria set forth in the law. Plant 

materials may fall into the category of "manufacture" or "composition of matter." Utility 

patents are more difficult to obtain than the other forms of protection, and require that the 

"hand of man" (e.g., by cross-breeding) be involved in making the invention. The mere 

discovery of a new plant growing in the ground does not qualify it for such protection. In 

addition, not only must the cultivar be novel, it also must be "non-obvious" to one of 

ordinary skill in the art. This type of protection is more than twice as expensive as PVPA 

and is better than PVPA only if one wishes to protect, for example, a newly bred 

characteristic in a genus, as opposed to protecting a specific cultivar. The application of 

utility patents does not apply to PMC work and will not be used.

D. Plant Variety Protection Act 

(1) PVP is a process by which plants can receive legal protections similar to patents. 

The PVPA (7 USC 2321 et seq.) was enacted December 1970 and provides legal 

protection, much like a patent, to developers of new releases or varieties of plants 

that reproduce sexually. The Act, administered by AMS, covers seeds, transplants, or 

plants of all seed-reproduced plants except first-generation hybrids of any kind. A 

PVPA certificate is awarded to any owner of a cultivar after an examination shows it 

clearly differs by one or more identifiable morphological, physiological, or other 

characteristic from all varieties that are publicly known. If any variation occurs, it 

must be describable, predictable, and commercially acceptable. When sexually 

reproduced, or reconstituted, the cultivar remains unchanged as to its essential and 

distinctive characteristics with a reasonable degree of reliability. A description of 

characteristics, genealogy, and breeding procedure are required. After a PVPA 

certificate is issued, protection lasts for 18 years. The owner of a U.S. protected 

cultivar has exclusive rights to multiply and market the seed of that cultivar or grant 

these rights to others (cooperating agencies, universities).

(2) PVP only applies to cultivar releases. When combined with exclusive licensing, PVP 

helps ensure that critically needed conservation plants of limited demand will remain 

available for consumer use.

(3) Seeking PVP

(i) Well in advance of the anticipated release date, the State Conservationist's 

Plant Materials Advisory Committee for the releasing PMC will evaluate 

whether PVP should be sought for the release. If there is potential for 

seeking protection of a release under the provision of the PVPA, the 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

releasing PMC should contact the NPL and NPMC for additional guidance 

and guidelines.

(ii) The releasing PMC should not submit a seed sample to NPGS or apply for a 

PI number until within one year of the planned date of seeking the protection. 

This is because PVPA considers any accession that has been assigned a PI 

number for more than one year prior to the application date to be in the 

public domain, and not eligible for PVP. 

(iii) If the decision is made to seek PVP, the releasing PMC will:

• Contact the NPMC for application forms and other documents 

necessary for applying for PVP.

• Prepare the release notice. The release notice will state that 

protection will be sought under the PVPA. The release notice 

will also state that the use and reproduction of the cultivar for 

plant breeding or other bona fide research shall not constitute an 

infringement of the certificate, as provided by Section 114 of the 

PVPA.

• Obtain the concurrence of other cooperators in the release.

• Determine that adequate interest is available to warrant its 

commercialization. 

• Develop an abstract documenting the rationale and intent of 

seeking PVP.

• Prepare a 2,500 viable seed sample to be included with the 

application.

• Complete all applications for PVP.

(iv) NRCS, under the direction of the NPL, with assistance from the releasing 

PMC, will:

• Verify availability of funds required to seek PVPA.

• Obtain the certificate of protection (approximately $3,000). 

• Develop a list of potential licensees interested in producing the 

new cultivar that represents an equal opportunity for all interested 

parties to become a licensee.

(v) The releasing PMC should provide the information identified above to the 

NPL, who will serve as the NRCS PVP Liaison with ARS, AMS, and the 

Office of General Council (OGC). The NPL will advise AMS, OGC, and the 

ARS-Office of Technology Transfer (OTT) of the intent to seek PVP, and 

that the PVP documentation will be forthcoming.

(vi) Following NPL review and agreement of the content with the releasing PMC, 

the application will be filed with the AMS PVP Office in Beltsville, 

Maryland. If licensing of exclusive production rights to a commercial 

grower will be pursued, the prepared release notice is to be reviewed by 

ARS-OTT. 

(vii) The releasing PMC can finalize and execute the release notice prior to or 

following completion of the PVP application, providing it contains the 

provision identified in this section, though it is generally advised to wait until 

the AMS PVP Office has received the PVP application.

(4) Exclusive Production Rights
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

(i) With few exceptions, NRCS-developed plant releases have been released on 

a nonexclusive (public) basis. However, there are compelling reasons to seek 

PVP and grant exclusive production rights to growers when:

• NRCS-developed plant releases are likely to fail in the market 

place when released on a nonexclusive (public) basis;

• Adequate supplies of seed or plant materials are not likely to be 

produced or marketed on a continuing basis under nonexclusive 

production and distribution;

• Exclusive licensing to one grower or limited licensing to several 

growers is a reasonable and necessary incentive to encourage the 

investment of capital and to protect, produce, and distribute 

adequate seed or plant material on a continuing basis;

• The specialized market for the release will not be satisfied 

without proprietary protection; or

• Special production techniques, production areas, or marketing 

techniques are required.

(ii) The licensing agreement with the commercial producer for exclusive 

production rights should include a provision that the commercial producer 

must grow and market a specified amount of seed within a certain time 

period or the exclusive production rights will be revoked. This ensures that 

releases achieve their market potential.

(iii) When the release notice has been executed, the NPL will advise ARS-OTT. 

ARS-OTT will: 

• Provide oversight to NRCS in the licensing process. 

• Coordinate the publishing of a notice in the Federal Register

• Negotiate fair licensing terms and conditions with anticipated 

licensees, considering both the interest of the Government in 

promoting commercialization of Federal research results and the 

need to provide a proper reward to the inventor. 

of 

NRCS’ intent to exclusively license material.

• Ask each applicant to complete a license application and a 

detailed marketing and development plan. 

• Administer licenses of PVP plants made by NRCS.

• Collect payments as required by licenses on NRCS PVP plant 

releases, retain funds sufficient to cover administrative costs 

associated with licensing and technology transfer activities, and 

distribute the remaining funds to the NRCS license coordinating 

office.

• Monitor licenses to ensure annual progress reports and fees due 

are received, maintain patent and license records, and keep NRCS 

agency personnel advised of activities.

(5) Licensing and License Income

(i) The Federal Technology Transfer Act (FTTA) of 1986 (15 U.S.C. 3710) 

authorizes income from inventions to be used to pay awards to the inventors 

and expenses associated with acquiring and administration of patent 

activities, and to share the balance with the agency. However, collection of 

license income (royalties) is not required under the PVPA.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

(ii) ARS-OTT has been delegated authority by the Secretary of Agriculture to 

administer the License Program in USDA. The following NRCS guidelines 

are permissible under ARS authority and guidelines:

• License income due to NRCS will be distributed in compliance 

with FTTA.

• Inventors employed by NRCS shall collectively receive the first 

$2,000 of license revenue each year and 25 percent of remaining 

income received by NRCS from each licensed invention up to a 

maximum of $150,000 per inventor per year.

(iii) After license income has been paid to the inventors, the NRCS licensing 

coordinator will ensure any remedial funds are used for technology transfer 

activities within the PMP. 

(iv) The manager of the NPMC serves as the licensing coordinator and will 

oversee disbursement of royalties to the inventors. 

540.36 Management of Plant Releases

A. Increase of Plant Releases

(1) General

An adequate supply of commercially available plant materials (seed or plants) of an

active release is vital to the success of NRCS conservation programs. PMCs are 

responsible for maintaining breeder seed and plant stocks. PMCs will also develop 

plans for the production of foundation or pre-varietal materials to ensure that high 

quality seed and plant stocks are available to commercial growers for large-scale 

increase.

(2) Seed and plant quality

(i) PMCs may choose to distribute seed and plants directly or through a 

certification process. The decision to release a product through a seed 

certifying agency should be made in cooperation with the PMC, PM 

Specialist, and the certifying agency. Cultivars and pre-varietal releases sold 

commercially as certified seed require distribution under a certification 

protocol. PMCs should always follow accepted practices for genetic purity; 

isolation requirements; crop or weed contaminants; field inspection; seed 

cleaning; and seed quality, purity, germination, etc.

(ii) NRCS cooperates with the State seed certification agency, or equivalent State

agency, in establishing standards and meeting State and national 

requirements in the production and handling of recognized seed classes (for 

cultivars: Breeder, Foundation, Registered, and Certified; for pre-varietal 

releases: G0, G1, G2, and G3) with respect to: source of seed stocks; 

genetic purity; isolation requirements; roguing other crop or weed 

contaminants; field inspection; seed cleaning; and seed quality, purity, and 

germination.

(iii) The basic requirements for certified production of many crops are found in 

the Certification Handbook, published by AOSCA ,and supported by the 

Federal Seed Act. State certification standards are individually established 

within these guidelines and pertain to the following items:

• Isolation requirements - The minimum standards for isolation of 

Foundation and pre-varietal seed established by AOSCA are to be 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

used as a basic guide for seed-producing crops. These standards 

may be supplemented by standards or other requirements imposed 

by the State seed certifying agency or crop improvement 

association.

• Location and size - A location is to be selected where optimum 

care and isolation can be provided. Examination of prior field use 

is necessary to determine any conflict with the release to be 

grown. The size of increase plantings vary according to species, 

amount of seed or clonal material available, and planned 

evaluations.

• Establishment and cultural and management practices are to be 

applied that provide optimum production of quality seed or other 

propagules.

• Harvesting, cleaning, and storage - Harvesting, cleaning, and 

storage are to be accomplished by the most practical method to 

maximize yield, purity, and viability of seed or plants. Improved 

technology for harvesting, cleaning, or storage methods should be 

reported as new technology development (see Section 540.15). 

• Inventory - An inventory of plants and seed produced and plants 

and seed on hand are to be maintained as described in Section 

540.36(B). This inventory should be adjusted to assure seed is 

available for commercial growers, research requests, and 

technology development. 

(3) Procedures for Increase

(i) Initial increase is the production of small quantities of seed or other 

propagules of potentially useful plants. These materials are usually selected 

on the basis of initial or advanced evaluation identifying them for further 

testing or for exchange with other PMCs or cooperating State and Federal

agencies.

(ii) Field-scale Increase

• Field-scale increase is the reproduction of plant materials to be 

included in field plantings or for use by other PMCs or 

cooperating State and Federal agencies. Sufficient quantity of 

seed should be produced to meet the needs of field plantings, 

conservation field trials, or demonstration plantings.

• Field-scale increase plantings should be established according to 

the standards used in producing Foundation-quality seed or 

plants.

(iii) Breeder Increase

• The production of Breeder seed or plants of PMC releases is an 

essential part of the overall function and program of a PMC. This 

production is necessary because it represents the genetic basis of 

a release from which all subsequent seed is produced. 

• It is the responsibility of the PMC to maintain Breeder or early 

generation pre-varietal production or seed stocks for releases 

where NRCS is the primary plant breeder. In some cases, the 

PMC may have the primary responsibility to produce Breeder 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

materials for another agency when agreed between the releasing 

agencies.

• PMCs will continue to maintain Breeder production for the 

releases for which they are responsible until the release is 

discontinued. See Part 540.36 B(7) for discontinuing a plant 

release. A PMC may suspend production of foundation/prevarietal generations indefinitely without discontinuing the release; 

small amounts of Breeder seed would be required to be available. 

• Guidelines for maintaining Breeder seed increase fields are 

provided by the State seed certification agency (or similar 

agency) based on AOSCA and Federal Seed Act regulations. If 

such guidelines are not available at the time of release, they will 

be developed with the State seed certification agency and 

incorporated into the release notice. Special guidelines unique to 

a release should also be incorporated into the release notice.

• Breeder seed can be made available by the PMC, at no charge, to 

establish up to 5 acres (or more under special circumstances) for 

commercial growers to produce their own foundation seed. 

Where not prohibited, the grower may work with NRCS and the 

State seed certification agency to have this production block serve 

as foundation seed for subsequent production of certified seed. 

(iv) Foundation and Pre-Varietal Generation Increase

• PMCs will develop plans to ensure the limited production of 

Foundation and pre-varietal (G0, G1, and/or G2) seed and plant 

stocks where NRCS is the primary agency and, in some cases,

where a cooperative release has occurred. This production is 

necessary to ensure that high quality seed and plants are available 

to private growers for establishing commercial scale production. 

Due to various constraints, including staff and facility resources, 

the annual production of specific releases, length of time a plant 

release is maintained in production, and the amount of seed 

distributed, should be carefully evaluated and adjusted as needed. 

Adjustments and suspensions of production should be determined 

and documented in advisory committee minutes. Consider the 

following when evaluating foundation seed plans:

o Work with universities, soil conservation districts, crop 

improvement associations, private growers, or other 

appropriate entities to develop alternatives to PMC 

production of foundation/early generation pre-varietal seed 

to supply commercial growers. This could include:

 “Exclusive Release” procedures

 Developing agreements where others produce 

Foundation/pre-varietal seed (outsourcing agreement 

example under development).

o Suspend production of Foundation/pre-varietal release:

 When an improved cultivar/pre-varietal release of 

that species is made within the same geographic 

region of recommended use.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

 When demand for the release is consistently low.

 After 10 years following plant release using prevarietal release procedures.

 When evidence of genetic drift has occurred. For 

older releases where original Breeder or G0 prevarietal stock is not available, studies should be 

conducted to evaluate potential genetic drift and 

handled as appropriate.

o Limit allocation of Foundation seed/pre-varietal releases, 

through established agreements with the State seed certifying 

agencies, to amounts sufficient to establish 10-40 acres and 

encourage commercial growers to use first harvests to plant 

larger acreages as desired.

• Guidelines for maintaining Foundation/pre-varietal seed increase fields are 

provided by the State seed certification agency (or similar agency) based on 

AOSCA and Federal Seed Act regulations. If such guidelines are not 

available at the time of release, they will be developed with the State seed 

certification agency and incorporated into the release notice. Special 

guidelines unique to a release should also be incorporated into the release 

notice. 

(4) Encouraging Commercial Increase of Releases

(i) The purpose of commercial increase is to make released plant materials available 

for conservation uses. Arrangements for commercial increase are to be 

formulated during the release process. The PM Specialist and/or PMC Manager,

assisted by the State plant materials committee, has leadership for developing the 

commercial increase of released plants to ensure that adequate supplies are 

available. 

(ii) Released plant materials are typically provided to growers through Crop 

Improvement Associations, Foundation Seed Programs, or State seed 

certification agencies. Agreements with these entities should outline how 

Foundation/pre-varietal seed and plants should be distributed, how producers will 

be selected, how pricing will be determined and how funds will be available to 

the PMC to support future foundation seed production. 

(iii) Individual commercial producers can acquire (from NRCS or those named 

above) foundation or early generation pre-varietal plant materials to establish 

production fields for the purpose of growing large quantities of seed and plants. 

The production of these materials is then sold to commercial retail sources or 

directly to the public for the establishment of conservation plantings. 

(iv) Requests for plant materials to be used for commercial increase are to be 

submitted by letter or formal application to the appropriate PM Specialist or 

PMC, or to the entity responsible for Foundation/pre-varietal seed distribution. 

Seed and plant requirements and allocations for commercial increase are to be 

determined annually.

B. Inventory, Allocation, Exchange, and Distribution

(1) General

All classes of seed and plants produced at PMCs, obtained through exchange or 

purchased with Federal funds, are Government property. The POMS database is to 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

be used to maintain inventory and track distribution of herbaceous and woody seeds 

and plants. The PMC will account for all seed and plants produced at the PMC or 

purchased by the PMC.

(2) Inventorying Plant Materials

(i) Inventories are the responsibility of the PMC Manager. The PMC Manager is 

responsible for tracking inventory information in the POMS database. A 

physical inventory of seed and plants is to be taken each year. The inventory 

record includes species, accession number or cultivar name, and current 

germination and purity records. Inventories for all PMC-produced seed and seed 

purchased for redistribution must be maintained. The PMC Manager may 

establish an independent procedure for maintaining an inventory of small lots of 

seed (i.e., packets) or planting stock.

(ii) Inventories should be made available to the PM Specialist. These inventories 

and information on estimated production serve as a basis for allocating plant 

materials.

(3) Determining Needs for Plant Materials

(i) Determining the needs for plant materials to be produced or purchased, and the 

availability of materials in inventory, requires good communication between the 

PMC Manager and the PM Specialist. Plant materials needs are based on:

• Studies and activities conducted by the PMC;

• Requirements for off-center evaluations;

• Seed increase at the PMC;

• Field plantings, Conservation Field Trials, and demonstration 

plantings;

• Materials needed for distribution to commercial producers;

• Requests from other PMCs; or

• Requests from cooperating agencies and partners.

(ii) The seed or plant needs of the PMC or cooperating agencies are to be determined 

annually at formal or informal meetings or through correspondence between the 

PM Specialist or PMC Manager and the cooperating agencies. The need for 

foundation seed or plant increase can be determined based on previous 

requirements, anticipated commercial need for the seed or plant, and availability 

of producers.

(iii) The PM Specialist and the PMC Manager are to prepare a summary of seed and 

plant needs for a 5-year period and update and extend it annually. The PM 

Specialist /PMC will send copies of the summary to the State Conservationist’s

Plant Materials Advisory Committee responsible for the PMC where production 

is being anticipated. The 5-year estimates are to be agreed upon, revised, 

extended annually, and incorporated into the PMC’s LRP for seed and plant 

production. If PM Specialists serve more than one PMC, they will coordinate 

plant materials needs and production among the PMCs in their service area.

(4) Allocation of PMC Produced Materials

(i) Requests for plant materials from a PMC are filled on the basis of available plant 

materials. Request for plant materials generally are submitted to the PM 

Specialist responsible for the service area of the PMC. The originator of the 

request is to be notified by the PM Specialist /PMC if the request cannot be 

filled. Requests received by PMCs and PM Specialists directly from individuals 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

or organizations outside their service areas are to be coordinated through the PM 

Specialist serving the area from which the request originated. This procedure 

ensures that the appropriate PM Specialist is kept informed concerning such 

requests and permits the PM Specialist to keep abreast of the results of studies in 

the service area pertaining to NRCS plant materials. 

(ii) Requests for foundation quality plant materials to be used for commercial 

increase should be directed to the PM Specialist. The PM Specialist will 

determine if the seed will be allocated from the PMC supply, or if the request 

should be forwarded to another agency, such as a Crop Improvement Association 

or district seed program, for allocation.

(iii) Foreign requests for seed or plants may be received by a PMC or PM Specialist. 

The NPMC will assist in arranging for shipping to the foreign country (refer to 

Section 540.37(B) for procedures). If the NPMC is contacted by a foreign entity 

for plant material, the NPMC will contact the appropriate PMCs directly to find 

out if seed or plants are available from the PMC. The quantity of each species 

shipped to foreign countries is usually limited to amounts necessary for research 

activities.

(iv) Requests for seed shipments are usually initiated by the PM Specialist using 

Form NRCS-ECS-001 (Request for Plant Materials Allocation and Distribution, 

Section 540.97) or by a letter containing the same information. Form NRCSECS-9 (Planting Plan for Field, Special, and Increase Plantings, see Section 

540.71) may also be used to initiate a seed request for a planting associated with 

an NRCS field office, or may be attached to NRCS-ECS-001 for additional 

documentation. Requests may be forwarded through a PM Specialist to the 

appropriate PMC or directly to the PMC if applicable. Information from NRCSECS-001 may also be used to determine future seed or plant production needs as 

described in Section 540.36(B)(3). The PMC retains Forms NRCS-ECS-001, 

NRCS-ECS-9, or other documentation and files them with Form NRCS-ECS-596 

(Distribution and Delivery Record).

(5) Exchange of Plant Materials

Within the framework of its priorities and study plans, a PMC can request amounts of 

seed or propagules directly from another PMC. If the source of an accession is 

known, the PMC Manager may request small quantities of seed or plants directly 

from the PMC Managers in other service areas within the region. The NTSC PM 

Specialists are responsible for coordinating requests for large quantities of plant 

materials among regions if needed.

(6) Distribution of Plant Materials

(i) Domestic plant material shipments from PMCs will be in accordance with all 

Federal and State laws relative to noxious weeds, quarantine of plants, and 

nursery certification. Attention should be given to State restrictions on noxious 

weeds and any restriction on the shipment of certain species of plants to certain 

States (quarantine restrictions). Often a Nursery Inspection Certificate is 

required for the shipment of plants over State lines. The State department of 

agriculture usually regulates such restrictions and issues inspection certificates.

(ii) All foreign plant material shipments are subject to guidelines established by 

USDA‘s Animal and Plant Health Inspection Service (APHIS). The NPMC 

should be contacted regarding restrictions on all foreign seed shipments. Refer to 

Section 540.37(B). 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

(iii) A properly executed Form NRCS-ECS-596, Distribution and Delivery Record 

(Section 540.98) will accompany each shipment of plant materials. Form NRCSECS-596 is generated electronically from within the POMS database. The 

POMS distribution record is populated on the basis of the information on Form 

NRCS-ECS-001, NRCS-ECS-9, or a request letter. Accession numbers (both 

NRCS 9-million number and PI number, as applicable), scientific, cultivar or 

release name, and common names identify items shipped. Seeds are identified by 

lot number, year produced, and results of purity and germination tests. Plants are 

identified by age and type of the material. Form NRCS-ECS-596 is processed as 

follows:

• Two copies are sent with the shipment or under separate cover, 

where one copy is signed by the recipient and returned to the 

PMC and the other copy retained for the recipient's file.

• One copy with attached Form NRCS-ECS-001 will remain in the 

PMC's file until the signed receipt copy is returned, at which time 

it can be replaced.

(7) Procedures for Discontinuation of a Release

(i) When it is determined appropriate by the State Conservationist’s Plant Materials

Advisory Committee that an NRCS conservation plant release is no longer 

needed, NRCS will formally discontinue maintenance of Breeder and Foundation 

seed of the PMC plant release and discontinue supporting and recommending the 

plant for conservation use.

(ii) The PMC Plant Materials Technical Committee (or equivalent) will review 

current PMC releases and make recommendations to the State Conservationist’s 

Plant Materials Advisory Committee on need and desirability to discontinue a 

prior plant release. This request shall be done in writing using the “Request to 

Discontinue Production of a Plant Materials Release” worksheet to guide and 

document their recommendations (Section 540.99). Releases may be 

discontinued for the following reasons:

• No or Limited Foundation Seed or Plant Requests - If no requests 

have been received in the last 5-10 years, consideration should be 

given to discontinuing the release. As part of the consideration 

process, the PMC Plant Materials Technical Committee should 

evaluate and document if another plant or source of plant material 

is available to address natural resource issue(s) for which the 

release was made. Where requests are few, seed and/or plant 

production should be commensurate with requests. For releases 

of native species where demand is being met from wildland 

collections, as is the case with many shrubs and trees, 

consideration should be given to maintaining the release name 

and type, but identifying the original collection site area as the 

source of Breeder or G0 seed for the named type material. 

Ability to utilize this latter process would require good collection 

site information, clear site definition, access to the site, and no 

intentional genetic manipulation or bulking of multiple source 

materials of the release.

• No Commercial Production - If no commercial production of a 

release has occurred in the last 5 years, consideration should be 

given to discontinuing the release. If the release is recent,
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

determine and document if adequate promotion of the material 

has occurred. 

• Replaced by Better Releases - When 2 or more releases are 

available for a species and both are recommended for the same

purpose in the same geographic area or eco-region, consideration 

should be given to discontinue one or more of the releases. 

Extensive comparative trials, using Field Plantings and ICSTs, 

over a 5-10 year period should be used to determine and 

document relative performance. NRCS should promote the most 

appropriate plant to solve a conservation problem. 

• Considered Invasive and Potentially Harmful to the Environment

- All plant materials releases are evaluated for their potential to 

harm the environment prior to release. If a new scientific study 

indicates a potential problem with an NRCS release,

consideration should be given to discontinuing the release.

(iii) The review for discontinuing a release should occur (at a minimum) when a 

PMC LRP is revised and updated. Any recommendation to discontinue a release 

should include documented consultation with all who cooperated in the original 

release and with distribution agencies, such as crop improvement associations. 

Documentation should note their agreement to discontinue the release. If NRCS 

was a secondary releasing agency, discussions should take place with the primary 

agency to consider jointly discontinuing the release. If the primary releasing 

agency does not wish to discontinue the plant release, NRCS should proceed with 

documentation and the worksheet in order to disassociate the agency from the 

plant release. This is especially important when the species may be considered 

invasive.

(iv) Documentation (the worksheet in Section 540.99 along with an EE or other 

appropriate paperwork) for discontinuing a plant release is sent to the NPL for 

final approval.

(v) Upon final approval, the PMC is strongly encouraged to send a notice to NRCS 

and all partner offices using the release informing them of the discontinuation. 

Additionally, all reference of the discontinued release should be removed from 

the FOTG, Web sites, and publications as they are updated. 

540.37 Import and Export of Plant Germplasm

A. General

Import and export rules differ according to the types of plant material (e.g., seeds, 

cuttings, live plants) and foreign countries involved. All transport of germplasm 

should be coordinated through the NPMC, which has ready access to APHIS 

personnel and information on required import/export documents.

B. Exporting Germplasm to Foreign Countries

(1) Researchers in foreign countries may request plant materials from the PMP. 

Requests may be received by any PM Specialist or PMC. The PM Specialist or PMC 

should first contact the NPMC to determine what restrictions there are on shipping 

the requested germplasm and provide the following information:
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

(i) The form of the germplasm to be shipped (seed or plants – Note: the restrictions 

for the import of plants into foreign countries are typically different than those 

for seed);

(ii) Scientific and common names of the species to be exported;

(iii) Origin of seed to be exported (State and country where it was produced);

(iv) Country of destination; and 

(v) Amount of seed to be shipped.

(2) The NPMC will check with APHIS as to any import restrictions for the species going 

into the destination country. If there are import restrictions, the recipient of the seed 

in the foreign country may need to obtain an import permit from their plant 

quarantine office. This import permit should be sent directly to the NPMC. The 

import permit may require additional declarations that the distributing PMC must 

meet before shipping seed. All PMCs should use extreme caution in exporting plant 

materials that may have invasive tendencies or that may have harmful effects on the 

environment of a foreign country. Guidelines for invasiveness and environmental 

considerations may be found in Sections 540.33(A)(3) and 540.83.

(3) A phytosanitary certificate from APHIS may be required for foreign shipment; if one 

is needed, the NPMC will notify the PMC to send the seed to the NPMC. A 

completed D&D form should be included. The NPMC will obtain the phytosanitary 

certificate from APHIS and ship the material to the foreign recipient. 

(4) There may be situations where the seed being exported does not need a phytosanitary 

certificate. In these cases, the NPMC will inform the PMC that the seed may be 

shipped directly from the PMC to the recipient.

C. Importing Germplasm from Foreign Countries

(1) A PMC wishing to import plant material from a foreign country should contact the 

NPMC before attempting to obtain material. The PMC will need to provide the 

following information to the NPMC so import permit requirements can be 

determined:

(i) The form in which the germplasm is to be shipped (seed or plants);

(ii) Scientific and common names of the species to be imported;

(iii)Origin of seed to be imported (country or locality it was collected or produced);

(iv)How the material will be used (e.g., research);

(v) Any known restrictions on the use of the material because of intellectual property 

rights; and

(vi) Amount of material to be shipped.

(2) The NPMC will check with NPGS-GRIN to determine if the material is already 

available in the United States from a public or private germplasm collection. If it is 

not available domestically, the NPMC will consult with the APHIS-Permit Unit to 

determine the entry requirements for introducing the species from a foreign country. 

The NPMC will obtain an import permit and other required documentation from the 

APHIS-Permit Unit for the requesting PMC if there are import restrictions. 

(3) All PMCs should use extreme caution when importing plant materials that may have 

invasive tendencies or have harmful effects on the environment. Species which are 

known to be invasive in the United States will not, under any circumstances, be 

imported into country. For those species which are new to the United States, an 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

extensive evaluation of potential spread and invasiveness must be conducted on the 

PMC prior to moving the material off the PMC. Guidelines for assessing 

invasiveness and environmental considerations may be found in Sections 540.33(A) 

and 540.83. 

(4) Shipment of plant materials into the United States: The requesting PMC should 

send an import permit (if required) to the foreign plant source for inclusion with the 

seed shipment to the United States. Packages sent to the United States must also 

include identification of the materials, country of origin, the sender (name and 

address), and the intended recipient. Some shipments may also require a 

phytosanitary certificate issued by the exporting country.

(5) Hand-carrying plant materials into the United States: Because of the potential 

costs involved in hand-carrying germplasm into the United States, APHIS 

recommends that travelers consider mailing plants from foreign countries whenever 

possible. If travelers know what material will be brought back into the country, the 

NPMC can obtain any required permits prior to an overseas trip. If a port of entry is 

not equipped to inspect the imported material, it is the importer’s responsibility to 

pay for shipment of the material to the appropriate inspection station.

(6) For material that must be quarantined prior to release into the United States, the 

NPMC will work with APHIS and the requesting PMC on a case-by-case basis.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010) 

540.50 Example of State Plant Materials Long Range Plan

STATE PLANT MATERIALS LONG RANGE PLAN

2005-2010

I. Introduction 

The mission of the Plant Materials Program is to develop and transfer effective state-ofthe-art plant science technology to meet customer and resource needs. The purpose of 

the Plant Materials Program is to: 1) assemble, test, and release plant materials for 

conservation use, 2) determine techniques for successful use and management of 

conservation species, 3) facilitate the commercial increase of conservation species, 4) 

provide for the timely development and transfer of effective state-of-the-art applied 

science technology to solve conservation problems, and 5) promote the use of plant 

science technology to meet the goals and objectives of the NRCS Strategic Plan.

The state Plant Materials LRP identifies and prioritizes customer, resource, and program 

needs. The LRP presents proposed action items to address identified needs.

II. Long Range Plan Development

This LRP was developed in accordance with the revised National Plant Materials 

Manual, Part 540.1. This plan is intended to be used as a guide for directing plant 

materials activities within the state. This plan will be used along with the respective 

plans of the other states within the service area to develop the Plant Materials Center 

LRP. This plan may also serve as a reference to develop specific action items which will 

be incorporated into the state’s annual Business Plan. 

The listing of identified customer, resource, and program needs were developed by the 

State Plant Materials Committee. The Plant Materials Committee is comprised of both 

NRCS employees and non-NRCS partners who have an interest in plant materials work. 

See Appendix A for a listing of committee members. Along with the input provided by 

the committee members, additional references were used to help identify and prioritize 

problems and needs. These are listed in Appendix B. Needs were categorized by the 

NRCS Goals and Objectives as listed in the National Plant Materials Manual, See exhibit 

in Section 539.20 (NRCS Goals and Objectives). 

III. NRCS Objectives, Needs, Recommended Actions 

A summary of problems, needs, and recommended actions are provided in Table 1. 

Details are provided in the following text.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010) 

NRCS Objective: High Quality, Productive Soils

(1) Degradation in the quality of intensively used soils has occurred through the 

production of an abundant food supply. The primary areas of concern are located 

within MLRA’s 76 and 106 and cover approximately 1,347,000 acres. The soils 

in these areas are typically deep, moderately well drained and are gently sloping 

to steeply sloping. The soils have been formed from loess and glacial till. 

Increasing soil condition and soil carbon can be improved by minimum tillage 

and cover crops. Information on these practices is found in the FOTG. In 2003, 

60 percent of cropland was farmed under systems that maintained or increased 

soil condition or soil carbon. Adequate plant materials and technology are 

currently available to carry out appropriate practices necessary to address the 

problem. The need exists to transfer current plant materials and technology 

information to identified customers.

Recommended Action: Summarize existing information on suitable plant materials 

and accompanying technology needed in implementing the appropriate 

conservation practice. Transfer this information to identified customers. 

Priority Ranking: High

NRCS Objective: Clean and Abundant Water

(1) Degradation of water quality has occurred through excessive sedimentation from 

unstable streambanks and shorelines. The areas of concern are along stream 

corridors and reservoirs located through the state in all MLRA’s. Current and 

past agricultural practices have resulted in the loss of riparian vegetation 

necessary to stabilize the stream course resulting in unstable conditions and 

excessive sedimentation. It has been estimated that 85 percent of the riparian 

areas within Kansas are in need of improvement. Creation of reservoirs with 

accompanying drastic changes in water level has resulted in shorelines exposed 

to severe erosion. Information pertaining to the stabilization of streambanks and 

shorelines are found in the FOTG and the Engineering Field Handbook Chapter 

16, Streambank and Shoreline Protection. The need exists to identify locally 

available plant materials that may be used in carrying out those practices as 

outlined in the above references. In addition, establishment techniques for the 

identified species need to be investigated.

Recommended Action: Locally available and suitable plant materials for use in 

streambank and shoreline protection need to be identified and evaluated. 

Establishment techniques need to be determined for the identified plant materials.

Priority Ranking: Medium 

(2) Degradation of water quality has occurred through nonpoint source contaminants 

from untreated and unconfined waste materials. Animal waste from feedlots has 

been identified as a major contributor to both surface and groundwater water 

quality problems, particularly nitrogen, throughout the state. Plants may play a 

major role in removing excess nutrients in agricultural waste filter systems, 

constructed wetlands, and in waste disposal areas. Conservation practices such

as riparian forest buffers, contour buffer strips, field borders, and filter strips 

may remove not only sediment, but also organic matter, various pesticides and 

nutrients such as nitrogen and phosphorous. Adequate plant materials and 

technology are currently available to carryout appropriate conservation practices 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010) 

necessary to address the problem. The need exists to transfer current plant 

materials and technology information to identified customers. 

Recommended Action: Summarize existing information on suitable plant materials 

and technology needed to implement the appropriate conservation practices 

necessary to address the identified need, and transfer this information to the 

identified customer.

Priority Ranking: High

(3) Degradation of water quality has occurred through point source contaminants and 

excessive soil erosion from saline, alkaline, and other mineralized soils. The 

majority of affected sites have resulted from past oil field activity. The affected 

sites are characterized by high soil salinity levels, excessive soil erosion, little 

soil structure or tilth, and lack of vegetation. While the majority of affected sites 

are less than 5 acres in size, collectively it is estimated that 100,000 affected 

acres exist statewide. The State Department of Health and Environment has 

identified these type sites as contributors to the non-point problem within the 

state. The need exists to identify plant materials and establishment techniques 

which will provide for the revegetation of these affected sites.

Recommended Action: Identify plant materials and establishment techniques that 

will provide for the revegetation of these affected sites.

Priority Ranking: Medium 

(4) Drought conditions have required irrigation to lands to maintain plant cover. 

This added water use is impacting stream and aquifer levels in the western part of 

the state. Adequate plant materials and technology are not currently available to 

carry out appropriate conservation practices necessary to address the problem. 

The need exists to collect, test, and release materials to satisfy this need. 

Recommended Action: Collect, test, and release seed to provide drought tolerant 

plants. 

Priority Ranking: High

(1) Grassland: There is a lack of productive adaptive cool season perennial grasses 

that provide quality livestock forage as well as providing for erosion control 

within MLRA’s 72, 73, 77, 78, and 79. Cool season perennial grass species are 

needed to extend the grazing season. The use of cool season grasses will allow 

grazing deferment of the native range and subsequent improvement of range 

health. Approximately 44 percent of the rangeland or 6, 900,000 acres are in 

poor or fair ecological condition. The need exists to provide adaptive and 

productive cool season perennial grass species and establishment and 

maintenance information. Currently the FOTG lists only two cool season grass 

species that are approved for use in the above MLRA’s. There are numerous 

cool season perennial grass species currently available that may address the need. 

However, adaptability and performance for many of these species have not been 

evaluated for the listed MLRA’s.

NRCS Objective: Healthy Plant and Animal Communities

Recommended Action: Evaluate and select cool season perennial grass species for 

adaptability, forage quality and quantity with respect to livestock grazing with 

MLRA’s 72, 73, 77, 78, and 79. 

Ranking Priority: High
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010) 

(2) Wildlife Habitat: Lack of diversity exists within rangeland seedings in terms of 

adapted native forbs, legumes, and shrubs. With the increased public interest in 

native species, federal program requirements for the use of native forbs, legumes, 

and shrubs (Conservation Reserve Program (CRP), Wildlife Habitat Incentive 

Program (WHIP), Environmental Quality Incentives Program (EQIP), Wetlands 

Reserve Program (WRP), and state and federal native species highway 

revegetation requirements, the demand for these adapted native forbs, legumes, 

and shrubs has greatly exceeded the supply. The need exists to provide 

additional sources of native forbs, legumes, and shrubs and the necessary 

information for propagation, establishment, and maintenance.

Recommended Action: Identify, collect, and evaluate suitable native forbs, legumes, 

and shrubs. Investigate propagation techniques, establishment methods, and 

maintenance requirements,

Priority Ranking: Medium 

(3) Wetlands: The creation, enhancement, and restoration of wetlands have gained 

much interest in light of legislation regarding wetlands and recent federal 

programs aimed at promoting wetlands conservation. There is a general lack of 

both plant materials and technology necessary for wetland enhancement, 

restoration, and creation to meet both regulatory and NRCS program 

requirements. The need exists to provide wetland species and accompanying 

technology regarding establishment and survival for those wetland species.

Recommended Action: Identify and select locally adapted wetland species for 

potential use in wetland restoration, enhancement and creation. Evaluate those 

selected plants in terms of propagation techniques, establishment methods, and 

maintenance requirements.

Priority Ranking: High

(1) Odors, particles, and greenhouse gas emissions generated through agricultural 

activities such as the use of nitrogen fertilizers and on-farm fuels, as well as 

animal waste management, degrade air quality. As urbanization encroaches on 

agricultural lands, communities at the rural/urban interface are becoming more 

sensitive to these issues. 

NRCS Objective: Healthy Air Quality 

Recommended Action: Identify and implement low-cost opportunities to reduce 

odor-laden particles, and greenhouse emissions from agricultural sources.

Priority Ranking: Medium 

(1) The recent increases in energy prices faced by producers throughout the country 

emphasize the need to find new ways to improve the energy efficiency of U.S. 

agriculture. In the future, the challenge will be to improve energy efficiency in 

ways that maintain the productive capacity of the land while benefiting the 

environment. Development of more efficient machinery and selection of new 

plant varieties can improve energy efficiency. While bio-energy and bioproducts can help replace fossil fuels, the challenge is to overcome the barriers to 

economic feasibility and ensure that the production of energy raw materials is 

environmentally beneficial at the farm level. There are opportunities to increase 

NRCS Objective: An Adequate Energy Supply
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010) 

the use of conservation plants and plant residues in the conversion to various 

forms of energy and bio-products. 

Recommended Action: Collaborate with external agencies to develop bio-energy 

technology and determine the feasibility of using existing conservation plants for 

biofuels. 

Priority Ranking: Medium 

(1) An important part of the NRCS Strategic Management Plan is addressing the civil 

rights issue. As part of this plan, the Plant Materials Program needs to be 

reviewed on a regular basis to determine if any systematic barriers exist that may 

result in disparate treatment of minority or small scale and limited resource 

groups. These groups should be identified and steps taken to assure that no 

barrier exists and to determine what steps need to be taken to reach these groups 

to ensure they are aware of the services provided by the Program.

NRCS Objective: A Diverse and Well-Served Customer Base

Recommended Action: Develop a Native American Limited Resource Farmer 

outreach strategy that will promote awareness and utilization of the Plant 

Materials Program for the purpose of addressing identified cultural resource 

needs.

Ranking Priority: High

(2) Many NRCS employees hired since 1985 have had limited exposure to the Plant 

Materials Program. Their understanding of the program and the services 

available is severely limited, especially in those states that do not have a Plant 

Materials Center. This lack of understanding hinders the effectiveness of the 

program in meeting employee, resource, and program needs. The need exists to 

provide awareness training to NRCS and other non NRCS partners regarding the 

purpose and function of the Program. 

Recommended Action: Develop an outreach training effort to provide awareness 

training of the Plant Materials Program to NRCS employees and non NRCS 

partners.

Ranking Priority: High

• State NRCS Resource Conservationist

Appendix A. Listing of State Committee Members

• State NRCS Range Management Specialist

• State NRCS Biologist

• State NRCS Agronomist 

• State NRCS Forester

• District Conservationist

• Soil Conservationist

• Soil Conservation Technician

• Area Conservationist Team Leader

• State Wildlife and Parks Representative

• State Foundation Seed Organization Representative

• State Highway Department Representative

• Nature Conservancy Representative
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010) 

• USDA ARS Representative

• USF&W Representative

• USDA-FS Representative

• Commercial Seed Industry Representative

• State Native Plant Organization Representative

• State Forestry Service Representative

• Plant Materials Specialist (Advisor)

• Plant Materials Center Manager (Advisor)

• USDA-NRCS Strategic Plan

Appendix B. Listing of References

• State Natural Resources Inventory Data (NRI) 1992

• EQIP Priority Area Resource Inventory Data

• State Soil Surveys

• GLCI State Summary Data for Range Health Report

• State Nonpoint Source Inventory and Assessment Report 

• State NRCS Field Office Technical Guide

• State Watershed Study Report for Riparian Health 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010) 

Table 1 Summary of Needs and Action Taken 

 Action 

Planned

 

Problem Plant Materials Needs Ranking 

Priority

Evaluate 

Existing 

Technology

Transfer 

Existing 

Technology

Develop 

New 

Technology

NRCS Objective: 

High Quality, 

Productive Soils

Degradation of soil 

quality due to 

sedimentation and nonpoint source 

contaminants from 

cropland

Summarize and transfer 

existing plant materials and 

technology information

High x x 

NRCS Objective: 

Clean and Abundant 

Water

 

Degradation of water 

quality due to 

sedimentation from 

unstable streambanks 

and shoreline erosion

Identify and evaluate 

locally adapted plant 

materials for use in 

streambank and shoreline 

protection (investigate). 

Develop establishment 

techniques for the selected 

material

Medium x 

 

Degradation of water 

quality due to nonpoint 

source contaminants 

from nitrogen and 

phosphorus runoff

Summarize and transfer 

existing plant materials 

and technology information

High x x 

 

Degradation of water 

quality due to point 

source contaminants 

and sedimentation 

from saline, alkaline, 

and other mineralized 

sites

Identify and evaluate 

locally adapted plant 

materials and 

establishment techniques 

for the reclamation of the 

affected sites

Medium 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010) 

Table 1 Summary of Needs and Action Taken 

 Action 

Planned

 

Problem Plant Materials Needs Ranking 

Priority

Evaluate 

Existing 

Technology

Transfer 

Existing 

Technology

Develop 

New 

Technology

Degradation of water 

quantity due to 

increased irrigation 

from drought 

Identify and evaluate 

locally adapted plant 

materials and 

establishment techniques 

for drought tolerant plants

High x 

NRCS Objective: 

Healthy Plant and 

Animal Communities

 

Lack of adapted and 

productive cool season 

perennial grasses for 

extending the grazing 

period

Investigate and evaluate 

existing cool season grass 

species for adaptability 

and performance

High x x 

 

Lack of locally adapted 

native forbs, legumes, 

and shrubs for use in 

range and wildlife 

plantings and 

information pertaining 

to the propagation, 

establishment, and 

maintenance of those 

species

Identify and evaluate 

locally adapted native 

forbs, legumes, and 

shrubs and investigate 

propagation, 

establishment, and 

maintenance requirements 

for those species

Medium x 

 

Lack of locally adapted 

wetland species and 

propagation, 

establishment, and 

maintenance 

information for use in 

restoring enhancing, or 

creating wetlands

Identify and select locally 

adapted wetland species 

for use in wetland 

restoration, enhancement 

or creation of wetlands. 

Propagation, 

establishment, and 

maintenance information is 

needed for these species

High x 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010) 

Table 1 Summary of Needs and Action Taken 

 Action 

Planned

 

Problem Plant Materials Needs Ranking 

Priority

Evaluate 

Existing 

Technology

Transfer 

Existing 

Technology

Develop 

New 

Technology

NRCS Objective: 

Healthy Air Quality

 

Lack of low cost 

options to reduce odor 

laden particles

Identify and select locally 

adapted species to serve 

as windbreaks or buffers to 

collect dust particles

High x 

NRCS Objective: 

Adequate Energy 

Supply

 

Lack of knowledge of 

conservation plants 

and plant residues in 

the conversion to 

various forms of 

energy and bioproducts

Collaborate with other 

agencies and identify and 

evaluate new species to 

use as biofuel

Med x x x 

 

NRCS Objective: A 

Diverse and well 

served Customer 

Base

 

Potential for disparate 

treatment of minority or 

small scale and limited 

resource groups

Develop an outreach 

strategy to minority groups 

to promote awareness of 

the program and identify 

needs which may be 

addressed by the program.

High x 

 

Lack of understanding 

of the program by 

NRCS and non NRCS 

partners

Develop outreach training 

efforts to provide

awareness of the program 

to NRCS and non NRCS 

partners

High x 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010) 

540.51 Example of a PMC Long Range Plan

PLANT MATERIALS CENTER LONG RANGE PLAN

I. Introduction

The mission of the Plant Materials Program is to develop and transfer effective state-ofthe-art plant science technology to meet customer and resource needs. The purpose of 

the Plant Materials Program is to carry out specialized activities in resource conservation, 

as part of the overall program of the Natural Resources Conservation Service (NRCS). It 

is the responsibility of the Plant Materials Center (PMC) to: 1) assemble, test, and release 

plant materials for conservation use, 2) determine techniques for the successful use and 

management of conservation species, 3) facilitate the commercial increase of 

conservation species, 4) provide for the development and transfer of state-of-the-art 

applied science technology.

The PMC Long Range Plan (LRP) identifies, guides, and directs PMC operation toward 

solving high-priority resource problems identified in the state(s) Plant Materials LRP. 

Plant Materials Centers may be directed by one or more state LRPs depending on the 

number of states served by the Center. The PMC LRP is consistent with goals and 

objectives identified in the NRCS Strategic Plan.

II. Long Range Plan Development

This LRP is in accordance with the revised National Plant Materials Manual, Part 

540.2(C)(1). This plan is to act as a guide for directing Plant Materials Center activities 

within the state(s) served. The PM Technical Committee(s) is responsible for identifying 

customers, resources, and program needs. The PM Technical Committee consists of 

representatives from NRCS and other federal and state agencies, private industry, and 

universities. Advisory members may have an interest due to financial contributions made 

to the Center.

Needs are categorized by the NRCS Goals and Objectives as listed in the revised 

National Plant Materials Manual, See exhibit in Section 539.20 (NRCS Goals and 

Objectives) and Plant Materials Strategic Plan.

The PM Technical Committee and/or State Plant Materials Committee recommends 

studies needed at the Center to meet identified concerns. Specific study areas and special 

concerns are defined by the PM Technical Committee and reviewed by the State 

Conservationist Advisory Committee. Projects budgeted are incorporated into the 

Center's Plan of Operation Annual Business Plan.

General Description of the Service Area

Climate - USDA Plant Hardiness Zones 4, 5, 6 are within the area serviced. The climate 

is continental, changes rapidly with altitude, and is characterized by wet winters and dry 

summers. Summers have cool nights and warm days. Precipitation occurs mostly as 

winter snow or rain and spring rain, varying from less than 5 inches to over 30 inches 

annually. 

Major Land Resource Areas – All or portions of 13 Major Land Resource Areas 

(MLRAs) and five states (Idaho, Nevada, Oregon, Utah, and Wyoming) are included in 

the Service Area. MLRAs include the following:
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010) 

B - Northwestern Wheat and Range Region 

B10 Upper Snake River Lava Plains and Hills (Idaho)* 

B10A Big and Little Wood River Footslopes and Plains (Idaho) 

B11 Snake River Plains (Idaho and Oregon)* 

B11A Central Snake River Plains (Idaho) 

B11B Upper Snake River Plains (Idaho) 

B12 Lost River Valleys and Mountains (Idaho) 

B13 Eastern Idaho Plateaus (Idaho and Utah)

D - Western Range and Irrigated Region 

D23 Malheur High Plateau (Oregon and Nevada)*

D25 Owyhee High Plateau (Nevada, Idaho, Oregon, Utah)*

D28A Great Salt Lake Area (Idaho, Utah, Nevada)*

E - Rocky Mountain Range and Forest Region 

E43B Central Idaho Rocky Mountains (Idaho, Utah, and Wyoming)*

E43C West Central Idaho Rocky Mountains (Idaho)* 

E47 Wasatch and Uinta Mountains (Idaho, Utah and Wyoming)*

* Indicates overlap with other PMC’s area of responsibility

A detailed description of MLRAs, land use, and climate may be found in the reference 

"Land Resource regions and Major Land Resource Areas of The United States," 

Agricultural Handbook 296. 

III. NRCS Objectives, Needs, Recommended Actions

The priority plant material needs of the Plant Materials Center fall into four goals 

according to the PM Technical Committee:

NRCS Mission Goal: High Quality, Productive Soils 

NRCS Mission Goal: Clean and Abundant Water

NRCS Mission Goal: Healthy Plant and Animal Communities 

NRCS Mission Goal: Clean Air 

The plant material needs of the PMC Service Area fall into nine major priorities and are 

in accordance with the national program objectives. The highest priorities include: plant 

releases and seed and plant production; rangeland in poor ecological condition; riparian 

and wetland degradation; clean air; equipment, facilities and personnel. Based upon 

current funding and personnel levels, the PMC is not able to assign specific actions to 

categories identified as medium and low priority needs.

These needs are listed with the intention that they may be addressed as actions are taken 

to meet the needs of the high priority categories and as additional funds become 

available. Written materials may be developed to assist with the medium and low priority 

needs identified.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010) 

A. Plant Releases, Seed and Plant Production

Priority Ranking: High

A major responsibility of the PMC is the maintenance of Breeder seed and 

production of foundation quality seed of the plant releases from the Center. 

Foundation seed is made available to the University Agricultural Experiment Station, 

Crop Improvement Associations, other Plant Materials Centers and cooperating 

agencies. Allocation and exchange or other written agreements distributing seed will 

be documented. Foundation seed of recent releases may be provided to soil 

conservation districts for Registered or Certified seed production under the District 

Seed Increase Program. Seed for field plantings is also made available to cooperators 

through soil and water conservation districts in order to determine proper uses, 

adaptation, proper technology, and to promote and demonstrate the values of recent 

releases.

Actions 

1. Maintain Breeder and Foundation seed of released materials

2. Maintain genetic superiority and characteristics of released materials

3. Release new plant materials

4. Develop techniques for facilitation of commercial production 

B. Rangeland in Poor Ecological Condition 

 Priority Ranking: High

Problems 

Large areas of rangeland are in unsatisfactory condition and are producing well 

below potential. Many sites are infested with cheatgrass, medusahead rye, and other 

weeds. These areas provide poor diversity of vegetation for wildlife, generally have 

poor cover, and commonly erode at excessive rates. Wildfires consume large 

acreages each year because of their flash fuel characteristics. Reseeding large areas is

costly with current methods and available plant materials. Threatened and 

endangered species are destroyed, weeds are allowed to invade, water quality is 

degraded due to erosion, and watershed values are adversely affected. Critical 

wildlife winter habitat is affected.

Needs

• Native plants and establishment techniques

• Facilitate commercial seed production of native plants

• Strategies for invasive weed management including chemical control, 

 integrated pest management, revegetation strategies

• Greenstrips to reduce wildfire hazard

• Establishment of woody shrubs from seed 

• Development of native forbs to improve vegetation diversity for wildlife

Actions 

1. Develop native, performance-tested rangeland grasses, forbs, and shrubs

2. Develop Integrated Pest Management strategies for invasive plants such

 as cheatgrass, medusahead rye, yellow starthistle, rush skeletonweed, etc.

3. Continue cooperative relationships with other plant development and land 

 management agencies

4. Equipment and technology development for plant establishment on 

 rangelands 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010) 

C. Riparian and Wetland Degradation 

 Priority Ranking: High

Problems 

Concentrated runoff water causes gully, perennial and intermittent stream erosion. 

Floods cause streambank and gully erosion on cropland, rangeland, pastureland, and 

meadows. Desirable streamside vegetation is degraded, and it is difficult to prepare a 

seedbed and protect such sites during establishment. Created wetlands can help 

improve water quality. There is a lack of commercially available seed or plants for 

riparian and wetland areas.

Needs

• Riparian and wetland species and restoration techniques 

• Riparian and wetland habitat management 

• Streambank stabilization with trees and shrubs

• Urban development stormwater collection

• Low growing, aggressive, stiff, sod-forming species for concentrated flow 

erosion 

• Filter and buffer strips

Actions 

1. Identify native riparian-wetland plants with high potential for use in 

 restoring plant communities

2. Develop bioengineering techniques for establishment and management of 

 trees, shrubs, grasses, and grass-like plants for degraded and intermittent 

 riparian zones 

3. Design criteria and adapted plant and management techniques for 

 constructed wetland

 systems to treat non-point source pollution

4. Continue cooperative relationships with other plant development and land 

 management agencies

D. Clean Air (Agroforestry)

 Priority Ranking: High

Problems 

Many tree and shrub species have been tested and their effectiveness is known for 

agroforestry applications. Design criteria and management for windbreaks is also 

known. Researchers know the beneficial effects of windbreaks on crop quality, and 

quantity and water use efficiency. The beneficial effects of windbreaks to reduce 

windborne soils and snow are also well understood. There is a continuing problem 

with air quality and how windbreaks can be used to mitigate odors and sediment. 

This information also needs to be transferred to land users. 

Needs

• Develop design criteria for using windbreaks to mitigate odors and 

 sediment from livestock and poultry operations 

• Communicate benefits of agroforestry to landowners 

• Demonstration/installation of agroforestry practices

• Information on species for buffer strips including windbreaks and field 

 borders 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010) 

Actions 

1. Develop design strategy and install sample field windbreaks to test 

 placement for odor mitigation

2. Develop list of species that work best in mitigating odor and wind carried 

 particles

3. Maintain PMC windbreak plots for display and training purposes 

4. Maintain testing of poplar species for plantation applications 

5. Maintain testing activities off-center

6. Demonstrate installation of agroforestry practices 

7. Continue cooperative relationships with research and extension people 

 involved in agroforestry

E. Wildlife Habitat

 Priority Ranking: - High

Problems 

Food and cover for wildlife have been seriously reduced or eliminated in many areas 

by intensive farming practices, poor rangeland condition, wildfire, reduced winter 

forage, overgrazing, extensive development of transportation corridors, and more 

intensive management of forests.

Needs

• Information on adapted species and cultural methods for establishment 

• Native forbs for rangeland areas

• Enhance areas with interseeding technology and burning 

• Reduce loss of critical habitat to urbanization 

• Establishment of woody shrubs from seed 

• Information on buffer strips, including windbreaks and greenstrips 

• Information on pest management 

Actions 

Develop list of plants and management techniques that address species of concern. 

F. Equipment, Facilities and Personnel

 Priority Ranking: High

Problems 

In order for the PMC to function effectively and efficiently, equipment and facilities 

must be maintained and upgraded as new technology becomes available. Farm 

machinery, greenhouse and research equipment, as well as computer hardware, 

software and buildings, must be maintained and upgraded. Funding for 

improvements can be difficult to obtain. Because of rapidly changing technology, 

PMC personnel must continually learn new skills to be effective in developing and 

transferring new plant science technology. 

Needs

• Continue equipment and facility upgrades 

• Training opportunities for PMC personnel 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010) 

Actions 

1. Continue cooperative working relationship with Soil Conservation 

 District, University, and Department of Fish and Game 

2. Maintain facilities and equipment 

3. Review needs and make purchases as funds allow

4. Obtain training to keep employees informed and educated in new 

 technology 

5. Promote funding 

G. Categories Identified as Medium or Low Priority 

Based on current funding and personnel levels, the PMC is not able to assign specific 

actions to needs categories identified as medium and low priority. They are listed 

with the intention that they may be addressed as actions are undertaken to meet high 

priority needs. While PMC plant development work will not generally be performed 

for medium or low priority needs, occasional written materials may be developed to 

assist with them.

1. Low Quality Pastureland

 Priority Ranking: Medium

Problems 

Pastureland is producing below potential on sites with poor soils and soil situations 

including low fertility, poor drainage, high sodic or saline conditions, and stony or 

excessively drained conditions. Improper grazing management, species selection, 

irrigation, and fertility practices commonly result in lower productivity and loss of 

more desirable species.

Needs

• Plant materials best suited to intensive grazing on irrigated pastures

• Plant materials for saline soils

• Pasture renovation including no-till

• Pasture and hayland management practices (grazing, fertilization, 

 irrigation)

2. Sheet and Rill Erosion on Cropland

 Priority Ranking: Medium

Problem 

High intensity rains, rain-on-snow, spring thaw, and runoff cause erosion of open 

cropland fields. The season of greatest erosion is during spring and with summer 

thunderstorms. Low residue crops, downslope farming, and highly erodible soils 

contribute to the erosion problem. There is lack of available information on the 

application of some practices. Information is needed on the affects of practices on 

water quality.

Needs

• Economically viable alternative crops to create improved rotations

• Information on cover and green manure crops 

• Information on buffer practices including windbreaks, field borders, filter 

 strips, riparian buffers, and grassed waterways
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010) 

3. Wind Erosion on Cropland 

 Priority Ranking: Medium

Problems 

High winds cause erosion of open fields, usually in the spring. Low residue crops and 

highly erodible soils contribute to the problem. There is a lack of information for 

landowners on the value of windbreaks and cover crops.

Needs

• Information on cover and green manure crops 

• Information on buffer strips including windbreaks and field borders

4. Critical Area Treatment 

 Priority Ranking: Medium

Problems 

Large areas of land are disturbed or damaged each year. Many acres are disturbed by 

practices such as highway, dam, dike, or pond construction and by urban 

development and mining. Other land is affected by natural events such as landslips, 

floods, etc. The soils are commonly a composite of rock and mixed soil material or 

denuded by wind and water erosion. These areas may be very droughty with low 

water holding capacities, are generally infertile, and may have high levels of calcium, 

sodium, or other minerals that make establishing vegetation difficult. Seedbed 

preparation may be very difficult.

Needs

• Information on critical area planting and seeding techniques and species 

• Information on bioengineering practices for disturbed land 

• Information on chemical and fertilizer soil amendments 

• Information on special stabilization techniques to allow establishment of 

 vegetation such as fiber mats, mulches, etc. 

5. Irrigation Induced Erosion on Cropland

 Priority Ranking: Low

Problems 

Thousands of acres of irrigated cropland have excessive erosion caused by poor 

irrigation systems and irrigation water management. Irrigation-induced erosion is 

most common on surface irrigated fields, but some sprinkler irrigation systems cause 

problems as well.

Needs

• Information on filter strips 

• Information on PAM 

• Information on irrigation systems and irrigation water management
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

540.52 Recommended Training for Plant Materials (PM) Staff

The following lists have been adapted from the NRCS training guidelines and are 

recommendations for staff training/proficiency in the PMP. Training may be received 

through the NRCS National Employee Development Center (NEDC), through State 

office or interagency sponsored courses, through PM sponsored courses, or through nongovernment sources as approved through proper procedures.

(1) PMC Manager and PM Specialists

• Principles of Management and Supervision

• EEO for Supervisors and Managers (USDA Grad School)

• Effective Facilitation

• Basic Computer Skills and Applications

• Experimental Design and Statistical Analysis

• Plant Materials - Field and Laboratory Techniques

• Soil Bioengineering

• Biology of Tree and Shrub Species

• Agrostology: Biology of Cool-Season Grasses and Biology of Warm-Season 

Grasses

• Biology of Legume Species

• Biosystematics, Genetics, and Plant Breeding

• Field Office Operations

• Pasture Ecology (NEDC)

• Plant Materials Operations and Management System (POMS) Training

• Plant Ecology

• Plant-Herbivore Interactions (NEDC)

• Rangeland Ecology (NEDC)

• Wetland Restoration (NEDC)

• Also includes all training identified for Assistant PMC Managers and 

Biological Science Technicians

(2) Assistant PMC Manager/other specialized positions such as Agronomists 

and Horticulturists

• Research Report Writing

• Basic Computer Skills and Applications

• Effective Presentation and Instruction

• Experimental Design and Statistical Analysis

• Plant Materials - Field and Laboratory Techniques

• Plant Physiology

• Soil Bioengineering (NEDC)

• Biology of Tree and Shrub Species

• Agrostology: Biology of Cool-Season Grasses

• Agrostology: Biology of Warm-Season Grasses

• Biology of Legume Species

• Biosystematics, Genetics and Plant Breeding Concepts

• Pasture Ecology (NEDC)

• POMS Training

• Plant Ecology
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

• Plant-Herbivore Interactions (NEDC)

• Rangeland Ecology (NEDC)

• Wetland Restoration (NEDC)

• The above list also includes training identified for Biological Science 

Technicians

(3) Biological Science Technician

• Introduction to NRCS Computer Operations

• Introduction to Civil Rights Modules 1& 2

• How to use NRCS Directives

• Introduction to NRCS

• Orientation for New Employees

• Partnership Roles and Responsibilities

• Effective Interpersonal Skills

• Farm Management and Agronomy Principles for PMC Biological Science

Technicians

• Road Map to Problem Solving Workshop

• POMS Training

(4) Secretary/Program Assistant/Office Automation Clerk

• Introduction to NRCS Computer Operations

• Introduction to Civil Rights Modules 1& 2

• How to use NRCS Directives

• Introduction to NRCS

• Orientation for New Employees

• Partnership Roles and Responsibilities

• Effective Interpersonal Skills

• Managing for Excellence

• Office Management (USDA Grad School)

• The Professional Office Manager (MCI)

• Roadmap to Problem Solving Workshop

• POMS Training 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

540.53 Working with Native Americans-American Indians and Alaska 

Natives

A. PURPOSE

The purpose of this section is to improve and enhance Plant Materials Program

(PMP) assistance to federally-recognized American Indian and Alaska Natives. 

Guidance provided in this section will assist the PMP in providing assistance to 

Tribes in meeting their goal of self-determination and self-sufficiency. It will also 

establish uniform procedures for delivery of quality assistance to Tribes in addressing 

their individual Tribal needs. This section provides background information, roles 

and responsibilities, policy, and exhibits for assisting American Indian and Alaskan 

Native Tribes.

B. BACKGROUND

The basis for the Government-to-Government relationship between the United States 

and American Indian and Alaska Natives can be found in the Constitution, treaties, 

and other laws involving Indian and Native Tribes, including case law.

(i) Public Law 74-46, 49 Stat. 163, 16 U.S.C. 590-a-f, April 27, 1935.

(ii) Public Law 101-624, the 1990 Food Agriculture Commerce and Trade Act (Farm 

Bill), Section 2501(g).

(iii) USDA Department Regulation 1020-6, Indian Policy, October 16, 1992.

(iv) Executive Order, Consultation and Coordination with Indian Tribal 

Governments, May 14, 1998.

(v) Executive Order, Tribal Colleges and Universities, October 21, 1996.

(vi) Civil Rights at the United States Department of Agriculture, Report by the Civil 

Rights Action Team.

(vii) NRCS, Action Plan - Oversight and Evaluation Review of American Indian 

Program Delivery, 1997.

C. RESPONSIBILITIES

(1) The PMP is committed to assisting federally-recognized tribes in a Governmentto-Government relationship through consultative processes. 

(2) The Federal Government has “Trust Responsibilities” to American Indian and 

Alaska

(3) The Plant Materials (PM) Specialist and PMC Manager are to ensure that all 

activities within the PMP adhere to the NRCS policy. NRCS has established policy 

on delivery of technical assistance to Tribes through Tribal Liaisons and/or Tribal 

Contacts. Operating outside of the National Plant Materials Manual and NRCSestablished policy causes inconsistency, confusion, and Tribal expectations that may 

or may not be able to be met through the PMP. The PMP will coordinate with the 

Tribal Liaisons and/or Tribal Contacts in providing assistance to Tribes. It is 

important that the PM Specialist and PMC Manager work closely with the Tribal 

Liaisons and/or Tribal Contacts to ensure their clear and accurate understanding of 

Natives. NRCS, as an agency of USDA, has trust responsibilities. The PMP

and each of the PMCs have trust responsibilities.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

the PMP and NRCS policy. For additional information see General Manual Title 

410, Part 405. 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

540.54 Reports and Information Required from PMCs Each Year

The following table summarizes the reports and information which PMCs are required to 

prepare annually and is intended as a guide for PMCs. The dates indicated are 

approximates and may change from year-to-year. Refer to the indicated NPMM part and 

page numbers for details on the specific item.

Item Date Due Section

Plant Materials Progress Report of Activities January 15 541.4(A)

PMC Annual Technical Report May 1 541.4(B)

Budget Information May-July 540.2(B)(i)

PMC Business Plan October 1 540.2(C)(2)

Workload Analysis October 1 540.2(C)(3)

POMS Exports for the first, second, and third quarters of the 

fiscal year

last business day 

of the quarter

541.1(C)

POMS Export for the fourth quarter of the fiscal year (final 

export of the fiscal year) 

second Friday in 

September

541.1(C)
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

540.55 Safety and Health Legislation and Regulations Pertinent to PMC 

Operations

The following statutes and laws require Federal agency compliance to the same extent as 

non-government entities. In addition, State regulations or requirements established 

pursuant to the statutes must also be complied with. PMCs should take into consideration 

these statutes while operating the PMC facility.

(1) Federal Insecticide, Fungicide, and Rodenticide Act

(i) The Federal Insecticide, Fungicide, and Rodenticide Act, 7 USC 136-136y, as 

amended, regulates the production, distribution, commerce, sale, and use of 

pesticides in the United States. 

(ii) Importance to PMCs

(2) Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability Act

: PMCs often use pesticides. All pesticides used by PMCs 

must be registered and their use must be in conformity with the label. In addition, 

PMCs must follow all State guidelines for the application, handling, storage, and 

disposal of pesticides. This usually includes having a certified pesticide applicator at 

the PMC.

(i) The Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability Act 

(also known as "Superfund Act"), 42 U.S.C. 9601-9657, was enacted on December 

11, 1980, to address problems posed by uncontrolled hazardous waste sites, means by 

which responses can be made to releases of hazardous substances into the 

environment, identification of potential Hazardous Waste Sites (HWS), preliminary 

assessment of potential sites, appropriate remedial action if problems are confirmed 

when there has been a release of a hazardous substance into the environment, 

emergency responses by the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) or a capable 

responsible party, and identification of sites where hazardous substances may be or 

are located as a result of abandonment or uncontrolled or inadequately controlled use. 

EPA maintains a list of potentially HWS locations and a system for tracking progress 

of obligations, allocations, and expenditures for all remedial projects at the National 

Priority List (NPL) sites. 

(ii) Importance to PMCs

(3) Resource Conservation and Recovery Act 

: Currently, there are no HWS’ identified on PMCs. If 

there is a release of a reportable quantity of a hazardous substance into the 

environment, the PMC Manager must notify the National Response Center. Liability 

for cost of cleanup of the hazardous materials may be attached to the PMC or State 

where the PMC resides if determined after EPA investigation. Hazardous chemicals 

should be purchased and stored in small enough quantities so if a spill occurred, the 

agency would not have to report it to EPA. Hazardous chemicals should also only be 

purchased for immediate or near future use and not stored long term.

(i) The Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA), 42 U.S.C. 6901-6991,

was enacted in 1976 to regulate the management of hazardous waste and improve 

waste disposal practices. Subsequent regulations have established reporting, record 

keeping, performance and operating standards for generators, transporters, and 

facilities that treat, store, or dispose of hazardous waste. The RCRA requires that 

anyone owning or operating a facility where hazardous waste is treated, stored, or 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

disposed of must obtain a permit from EPA or the State, if a State has an authorized 

Hazardous Waste Management program.

(ii) Importance to PMCs

(4) Safe Drinking Water Act

: Hazardous waste is generally not stored at PMCs. PMCs 

planning to store hazardous waste must obtain more information pertaining to this 

law prior to storage of such materials. A permit is not necessary for the use, storage, 

and disposal of gas and oil. Disposal of waste materials should meet EPA and State 

requirements.

(i) The Safe Drinking Water Act, U.S.C. 300f-300j-10, was passed on December 16, 

1974. The purpose of the Act is to ensure that potable water systems serving the 

public meet minimum national standards. The Act authorizes EPA to establish 

standards for protecting public water systems from harmful contaminants. It requires 

that Federal agencies which own or operate public drinking water systems comply 

with these standards. The Safe Drinking Water Amendments of 1977 require, among 

other items, that Federal agencies comply with all State and local requirements, 

processes, and sanctions, in addition to Federal requirements. 

(ii) Importance to PMCs

(5) Clean Water Statutes

: PMCs should make sure that their drinking water is safe 

for consumption, and have the water tested on a regular basis for lead, chemicals, and 

bacteria if there is a question about suitability of the drinking water for consumption. 

Lead contamination may be a problem in facilities with lead pipes, typically found in 

older buildings.

(i) The Federal Water Pollution Control Act Amendments of 1972 were enacted to 

restore and maintain the chemical, physical, and biological integrity of the Nation's 

waters. The Act establishes goals for the eventual elimination of discharge of 

pollutants into receiving waters; a prohibition of discharge of toxic pollutants in toxic 

amounts; and area-wide waste treatment management planning to ensure adequate 

controls of sources of pollutants. The Act also sets standards and minimum 

requirements for the control and abatement of water pollution.

(ii) The Clean Water Act of 1977, 33 U.S.C. 1251-1376, was passed November 16, 

1977. Among other items, it requires that Federal agencies comply with all State and 

local regulations, standards, and processes, in addition to Federal requirements. It 

also directs Federal agencies to consider alternative methods of wastewater treatment,

utilizing recycling and reuse and land treatment processes and techniques.

(iii) Importance to PMCs

(6) Toxic Substances Control Act

: PMCs should ensure that any wastewater generated by 

the PMC, including sewage and irrigation run-off, is properly treated before being 

discharged. Chemicals should be disposed of in an approved manner by neutralizing 

or applying wash water from pesticide mixing, according to the label. If the 

wastewater is hazardous enough, it could come under EPA or State guidelines for 

disposal.

(i) The Toxic Substances Control Act (TSCA), 15 U.S.C. 2601-2629, was enacted 

on October 11, 1976. It provides for the regulation of chemical substances that 

present a hazard to human health or the environment. EPA primarily regulates the 

manufacture and processing of commercial distribution of chemical substances and 

mixtures. However, EPA also regulates the use and disposal of certain substances by 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

noncommercial entities, including Federal agencies. TSCA and the regulations 

promulgated under the Act pertain to the commercial and industrial production, use, 

and disposal of toxic chemicals. USDA concerns involve the provisions of the 

statute and regulations covering facilities and sites which may contain PCBs and 

asbestos.

(ii) Importance to PMCs

(7) Clean Air Act

: Most important to PMCs is the issue of asbestos and 

PCBs. PMCs should make sure that any substances believed to be asbestos are tested 

and abated, if necessary. The NRCS asbestos policy may be found in General 

Manual Title 360, Part 420, Subpart T. 

(i) The basic purpose of the Clean Air Act (CAA), 42 U.S.C. 7401-7642, is to 

protect and enhance the quality of the Nation's air resources to promote the public 

health and welfare and the productive capacity of its population. The CAA 

recognizes that prevention and control of air pollution at its sources is the primary 

responsibility of States and local governments.

(ii) Importance to PMCs: PMCs have the potential to generate air contaminants, 

especially during prescribed burning of study plots. Most important might be 

management activities that are concerned with natural occurrences, such as fire, 

having attendant air quality impacts.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

540.56 Outline for Safety Inspections at PMCs

The following list represents items which may be included in a safety inspection of a 

PMC. Guidelines found in General Manual Title 360, Part 420 should be followed as 

well. This list may not be inclusive nor pertain to all PMCs. 

(1) General Safety Coordination

(i) Safety coordinator(s) should be appointed for the PMC and included on all 

contact sheets for emergency response.

(ii) Safety updates should be provided in staff meetings and in writing if needed.

(iii) Safety training should be provided to all employees at a level necessary for 

performance of the employee’s job.

(iv) State NRCS safety coordinators should be identified.

(2) General Health Items

(i) Limit the amount of time employees work in confined spaces.

(ii) Appropriate clothing should be worn by employees, i.e., work boots for field 

work, hats for sun protection.

(iii) Conduct a job hazard analysis as needed.

(iv) Instruction on defensive driving and winter driving techniques may be 

provided through the State office.

(v) HIV/AIDS information.

(vi) Workplace violence information.

(vii) Lyme disease information.

(viii) Information on exercise or fitness programs, cancer awareness, and proper 

nutrition should be provided as available.

(ix) Travel safety information provided as available.

(x) A minimum of one PMC staff member should be trained in CPR and First 

Aid techniques, if possible, due to the many potential hazards which exist at a 

PMC.

(xi) Handicap access provided to PMC buildings as needed or appropriate so that 

facilities do not become a safety hazard to handicapped individuals.

(xii) Hantavirus pulmonary syndrome information.

(3) PMC Facility

(i) Structures and equipment used on a daily basis are in good working order.

(ii) Adequate lighting is available for tasks.

(iii) Building and facility security is adequate to protect staff members, i.e.,

adequate lighting around buildings and parking lots at night, security systems 

installed and functional, terrorist training, and sign in sheets for people visiting 

the Center.

(iv) Asbestos:
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

• Survey and analysis of suspected materials completed;

• Abatement has been done; and

• If abated asbestos present, contractors doing remodeling work should be 

notified of possible asbestos content.

(v) Radon surveys as needed.

(vii) Office safety given same attention as field safety.

(viii) Fire safety inspection completed on a regular basis:

• Combustibles not located near electrical panels, boilers, and heating units;

• Adequate space around electrical panels, boilers, and heating units;

• Signs posted on doors, which must be left open during business hours;

• Boxes and materials not blocking hallways and exit paths;

• Fire lanes marked for “no parking;”

• Oily rags stored in metal container with self-closing lid;

• Fire extinguishers properly positioned, mounted, and checked annually;

• Smoke detectors and carbon monoxide detectors in place and inspected or 

serviced regularly; and

• Regularly used extension cords should be replaced with permanent outlets.

(ix) First aid and emergency response:

• Supplies adequate and clearly identified; and

• Contact numbers available.

(x) Hazardous materials spills:

• Spill kits adequately stocked and accessible;

• Cleanup instructions identified;

• Emergency numbers clearly identified in appropriate locations; and

• Emergency response sheets for pesticides, chemicals, and petroleum should 

be posted and kept current.

(xi) Lock-out/tag-out procedures in place and followed.

(4) Equipment and Field Operations

(i) Agricultural equipment:

• Basic equipment safety instructions and protocols established;

• Heavy equipment safety covered; and

• Specialized equipment, i.e., combines, safety has been covered.

(ii) Operation of tools and equipment:

• Instruction on basic hand tool use and care;

• Machine operation and safety instructions conveyed;

• Proper training consistent with guidance found in 29 CFR 1910.178 has been 

received when powered industrial trucks (forklifts) are used; and

• Proper jacks, supports, and blocking used when servicing equipment.

(iii) Seed cleaning:

• Dust - provide air filtering and/or dust masks

• Noise - provide ear protection
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

• Moving parts - guards installed and warning markings as needed.

(5) Pesticides and Chemicals

(i) Pesticide/chemical handling:

• Respirators proper size and fit-tested by industrial hygienist;

• Adequate protective clothing provided for each individual;

• Worker Protection Standards followed for handling and use of pesticides;

• Chemical hygiene (lab) instructions and protocols in place; and

• Pesticide applicator’s license displayed or carried with applicator according 

to State regulations.

(ii) Pesticide/chemical use and application:

• Proper application logs maintained;

• Signs used to mark treated areas and re-entry time; and

• Mixing area clearly identified and protected from running off the site.

(iii) Pesticide/chemical storage:

• Pesticides stored under approved storage conditions;

• Adequate ventilation in storage area;

• Pesticides and industrial chemicals (i.e., lubricants, cans of petroleum 

products, etc.) inventoried and safely stored in approved cabinets or storage 

areas; and

• MSDS sheets for each chemical used or stored are kept on-site and available 

for review.

(iv) Hazardous waste disposal protocols established and followed.

(v) Fertilizers stored and handled as appropriate.

(6) Miscellaneous

(i) Ergonomics of work stations, hand tools, etc., given consideration.

(ii) Fire and burning safety considered (field and trash pile burning).

(iii) Animal hazards (i.e., poisonous spiders, snakes, cattle) considered on the 

job site.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)
PRESCRIBED BURN PLAN FOR A PLANT MATERIALS CENTER

PMC:_______________________________________ Date:________________________

Address:_____________________________________ Phone:_______________________

Contact:_____________________________________________________________________

Acres to burn: ________________________ Planned date of burn:_________________

Location: County:_________________ Township:________________ Range:_________

Section:________________ Legal Description: _________________________

A. Description of burn area: _____________________________________________________

Land use: __________________________________________________________________

1. Present plant cover

a. Woody Plants:

Species

Height 

(ft.)

Average basal 

diameter (in.)

Canopy

(%)

Fuel load 

(lbs/acre)

b. Herbaceous Plants:

Species

Height 

(ft.)

Fuel load 

(lbs/acre)

Field 

Number

Wind Direction 

Required
Species

Height 

(ft.)

Fuel load 

(lbs/acre)

Field 

Number

Wind Direction 

Required

c. Total Estimated Fuel Load:

Woody and herbaceous plants ____________ lbs/acre

2. Slope%__________ Aspect__________ Soil Type______________

3. Objective (CHECK ONE)

 Stimulate forbs Stimulate grass seed production

 Reduce wildfire hazard Remove litter

 Reduce insect/disease/weed

 Other Reason(s) for Burning: 

4. Timing of Burn (CHECK ONE)

 1-3” New growth stage

 Before plant growth (forbs only)

 Other (e.g., fall burn) __________________________

C. Acceptable conditions for prescribed burns:

Relative 

Humidity (%)

Wind Speed (MPH)

4 6 8 10 12 14 16

25-34 A A A XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX

35-39 A A A A XXXX XXXX XXXX

40-44 A A A A A XXXX XXXX

45-59 A A A A A A XXXX

60-69 XXXX A A A A A A

70-79 XXXX XXXX A A A A A

80-89 XXXX XXXX XXXX A A A A

A = Acceptable; XXXX = Not acceptable
1. Comments: (firing method, starting time, wind direction, soil surface moisture condition, 

etc.)

______________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________

2. Ignition plan and/or firing sequence (see plan map)

______________________________________________________________________

* Parties igniting a prescribed burn may be liable for damages resulting from the fire and control 

cost, should fire escape the designated area.

D. Preparation of Area for Burning:

1. Firebreak construction:

a. Firebreak widths will be equal to or greater than five times the height of adjacent 

vegetation.

b. Burned firebreaks—being essentially devoid of fuel and of the proper width—can

provide protection from fire escape (width 5—30 ft.)

c. A combination of closely mowed vegetation and a bare ground strip firebreak can 

provide adequate protection, if combined widths are ________feet wide.

d. kind of firebreak _____________

width feet _____________ length feet ______________

date to apply _____________

e. Existing firebreaks, streams, roads, tilled fields, etc. (show on plan map). 

Describe.

___________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________

f. Potential hazards are present within the burn area: 

e.g.: power lines, snags, structures, etc. (show on plan map)

yes no 

If yes, explain precautions:

_________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________
E. Adjacent Areas (outside of burn area):

1. Special precaution areas: e.g. leaf litter, dry grass, roads, structures, smoke dispersion, 

etc. 

_______________________________________________________________________

(show on plan map)

Precautions needed:

_________________________________________________________________

2. Backup or secondary firebreak locations: (identify)

_________________________________________________________________

F. Equipment/Personnel Needs:

1. Safety equipment:

_________________________________________________________________

2. Tools/equipment needed for burn: 

rakes swatter torches pumper truck

backpack pump

other: ____________________________

3. Personnel needed for burn:

_________________________________________________________________

4. Water needs: filling source portable tank

G. Special considerations:

1. Precautions to prevent fire escape: _______________________________________

2. Suppression plan if fire escapes: ________________________________________

3. Patrol and mop-up plan: _______________________________________________

H. Emergency Phone Numbers:

1. Local fire department: ______________________________

2. Sheriff: ______________________________
I. Reviews and Approvals

Technical Review

Plan Prepared By:_______________________________ Date: __________________

Plan Checked By:_______________________________ Date: __________________

Approved By (burn boss):_______________________________ Date: __________________

Administrative Approval

NRCS STC/SRC _______________________________ Date:___________________

Landowner: _______________________________ Date: __________________
PRESCRIBED BURN PLAN MAP

(USE AERIAL PHOTOS IF SCALE IS APPROPRIATE)

(IDENTIFY LAND USE IN ADJACENT FIELDS)

LEGEND

Approximate Scale: ________ inches = mile

B-B-B-B-B Burned Firebreak W Water source

P-D-P-D-P Plowed/Disked Firebreak (A, B, etc.) Firing crews

S-G-S-G Short Grass Firebreak (1, 2, etc.) Firing sequence

M-M-M Mowed Firebreak (A1) → → → Firing direction

—WIND— Wind Direction

Other legends or information:________________________________________________________

Plan prepared by: _________________________________ Date: _____________________

Plan checked by: _________________________________ Date: _____________________

Landowner: _________________________________ Date: _____________________
PRESCRIBED BURN APPLICATION

PMC: _______________________________________________ Date:________________

Address:______________________________________________ Phone:_______________

Contact: ________________________________________________________________________

Acres to burn: ___________ Planned date of burn:_______________

Location: County:______________ Township:________________ Range:____________

Section:______________ Legal Description: _____________________________

A. Preburn Checklist: (day of burn)

1. Weather forecast favorable yes no

2. Necessary firebreaks constructed yes no

3. Potential hazards accounted for yes no

4. Special precaution areas noted yes no

5. Backup/secondary firebreak locations noted yes no

6. Safety equipment adequate yes no

7. Tools/equipment onsite yes no

8. Personnel needed available yes no

9. Special considerations reviewed with crew yes no

10. Actual weather at burn:

Temperature________ Humidity________ Wind Speed____________

Cloud Cover________% Fronts or changes expected_________________

11. Appropriate neighbors informed yes no

12. Notification of units of government made: yes no

Local fire department (phone) ______________________

USFS (phone) ______________________

Sheriff (phone) ______________________

DNRC (phone) ______________________

Other: (phone) ______________________

13. Necessary permits obtained yes no

14. Test burn performed as expected yes no

Do not proceed if any of these responses are checked “no.”

Checked by:___________________________________ Date: ______________________
B. Post Burn Evaluation: (day of burn)

1. Burning method used: ______________________________________________

2. Start time of test burn beginning time am pm 

Mop-up completed am pm

ending time am pm 

3. Observed change in weather conditions during the burn: 

_________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

4. Fire behavior: (check any that apply)

a. Spotting: one few many

b. Difficult to control yes no

c. Convection column yes no

d. Fire whirls yes no

5. Objective of burn met: _______________________________________________

6. Post-burn management plan (additional treatment needs): 

7. Future burn needed: yes no 

estimate when: 

8. Other comments: 

__________________________________________________________________

Checked by:________________________________________Date: _______________________

* Parties igniting a prescribed burn may be liable for damages resulting from the fire and control cost, 

should fire escape the designated area.

C. Follow up Evaluation: (60-90 days after burn)

1. Objectives of burn met:

_______________________________________________________________________

2. Post-burn management plan (additional treatment needs):

_______________________________________________________________________

3. Future burn needed: yes no If yes, when? _______________________

For what purpose?

_______________________________________________________________________

4. Other comments:

 ______________________________________________________________________________________
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010) 

540.59 Example of a PMC Business Plan

Plant Materials Center

Business Plan – FY2010 

Introduction: 

The following is the Business Plan for the Plant Materials Center. The purpose of this document is to serve 

as an outline of activities to be used to carry out the operation, evaluation, and activities of the Center. Attach 

yearly performance goal spreadsheet at end for reference and to assist with tracking performance.

Section I - Project and Study Activities - Initial Evaluation, Advanced Evaluation, Off-center, Inactive

Number Title/Activity Person 

Resp.

Description of 

Progress

Due Date Complete 

Date

08I073J IE antelope bitterbrush (Purshia tridentata) 

Collect and process seed/cuttings

Plant seeds in greenhouse BT/BA

BT/BA

07/01

09/30

08I160K IE thinleaf alder (Alnus tenuifolia) 

Develop plot management plan

Evaluate plots -spring

Evaluate plots - fall

Compile and summarize date from last year

HT

HT

HT

HT

10/01

05/25

09/25

11/01

13A120G Evaluate eastern gamagrass for Forage 

Quality 

Develop plot management plan

Fertilize plots

Schedule clippings - 3 times

Prepare samples for analysis

Evaluate sample data

Summarize data and develop report

HT/BT

BT

BT

HT

HT

HT

10/20

Spr/Sum

Summer

08/25

Yearly

03/15
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010) 

22A002S Selection of Spartina spartinea for a 

sexually propagated cultivar 

Maintain PMC evaluation plots

Select and transplant superior seed 

producing accessions

Increase selected accessions

Summarize performance data

BT/BA

BT/BA

HT

HT

Ongoing

09/01

09/15

05/30

48A200J Nutrient Quality of Selected Forbs/Legumes 

for White-Tailed Deer

Develop management plan/schedule

Evaluate off-center sites - spr/fall

Schedule clippings - 4X

Evaluate and summarize data

MGR

BT

BT

HT

10/30

04,09

Quarterly

03/01
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010) 

Section II - Field Operations/Seed & Plant Increase Activities - Seed Increase, Foundation Seed 

Production, Facilities/Equipment 

Number Title/Activity Person 

Resp.

Description of 

Progress

Due 

Date

Complete 

Date

59S025D Foundation Increase of 'Crockett' 

herbaceous mimosa

Develop field management plan

Apply fertilizer

Carry-out required irrigation

Inspect fields and rogue out off-type plants

Schedule field inspections

Harvest current year crop

MGR

BT/BA

BT

BT

BT/BA

BT/BA

11/01

Seasonal

Summer

08/30

08/30

09/30

04S222P Increase of alkali sacaton,

(Sporobolus airodies) 

Apply field management plan, fertilize, 

irrigate

Field inspections

Harvest crop

Clean and store seed

BT

BT

MGR

BT/BA

BT/BA

10/30

05/30

09/30

09/30

Harvest Seed from PMC Breeder Blocks

Determine anticipated needs 

Develop maintenance and harvest schedule

Harvest selected cultivars

Clean and store seed

MGR/PMS

MGR

BT/BA

BT/BA

10/01

10/01

09/30

09/30

Field Management/Operations

Develop field management plan

Evaluate irrigation system

Locate new plantings

Develop fertilizer needs

MGR

BT

MGR/BT

BT

Oct

Jan

Nov

Mar
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010) 

Facilities Management Plan

Review equipment status and needs

Equipment inspection

Monthly safety inspection

Snow removal

Yard/landscape maintenance

MGR

BT

FM

Staff

Staff

Repair/Maintenance of Irrigation System

Develop work schedule

Develop list of materials and cost estimates

Repair conveyance system

Perform maintenance to system

MGR

BT

BT/BA

BT/BA

12/01

01/10

03/30

Seasonal
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010) 

Section III - Technology Transfer Activities - Reports, Plant Releases, Written and Oral Information, 

Training

Number Title/Activity Person 

Resp.

Description of 

Progress

Due 

Date

Complete 

Date

Develop Annual Technical Report

Summarize project(s) data

Prepare report

Printing

Distribution

MGR/PMS

MGR/PMS

SE

MGR/SE

20A222A Naming and Select Release of dotted 

gayfeather

Develop release notice

Review names for clearance

Submit information for review

Prepare articles to advertise release

MGR/PMS

MGR

MGR

MGR/PMS

Jan

Jan

Jan

Mar

Assist State NRCS PAS to produce video 

on PMC releases

MGR Sept

48A226T Develop training module to assist NRCS 

field offices with grass seeding

Develop outline

Complete literature review

Complete draft

Review and update

Develop publish and distribution schedule

MGR/PMS

PMS

MGR/PMS

MGR

MGR/SE

1st

1

Qtr

st

Feb

Qtr

May

June

Prepare and present paper at SAAS 

meeting

MGR 12/01

Produce/revise four plant guides

Arizona cottontop

'Santa Rita' Four-wing saltbush

'Sonora' black grama

'Seco' barley

MGR/SE

MGR/SE

MGR/SE

MGR/SE

11/01

02/02

05/01

05/01
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010) 

Deliver plant guides and fact sheets to 

NPMC for posting on PMC homepage

MGR Sept

OJT Training for Staff

Computer Use/Programs

Plant Breeding

Pesticide Safety

Pest Applicator License

SE

MGR/AGR

FM/GHM

BT

Jan

Mar

May

Seasonal

Develop technical notes for FO use

PM for Wildlife

Bioengineering and PM

Cool Season Forages

FM

MGR

HT

11/30

02/01

06/01
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010) 

Section IV - Administration and Operations - Budget, Long-Range Plan, Business Plan, Meetings

Number Title/Activity Person 

Resp.

Description of 

Progress

Due 

Date

Complete 

Date

Update Centers Long-Range Plan MGR/PMS 06/30

Prepare Business Plan for FYXX

and submit to PMS for review

MGR 09/15

09/30

Develop specifications and cost data for 

facilities and equipment needs ID in 5 

year replacement plan

MGR 04/01

Develop Workload Analysis for PMC

Review WA and approve

MGR

MGR

05/30

06/30

Performance appraisals for staff

Mid-year review

Evaluate current years

Develop new appraisals

MGR

MGR

MGR

04/30

10/30

11/30

28A132B Hire Seasonal Employees for NPS Project

Advertise and Interview applicants

Recommendations for hire to SO

Complete application process

Have seasonal on staff

MGR/FM

MGR/FM

MGR

MGR

03/30

04/15

05/01

05/30

Update Staff EDP

Manager

All other PMC positions

PMS

MGR

10/30

10/30

Conduct safety lecture at staff mgt. FM/MGR Each Q

Prepare 3-year budget plan for Adv. Mtg MGR 07/30

24A330B Prepare budget worksheet for new NPS 

agreement

Review IA agreement

Calculate staff and monies needed

Develop time schedule

Submit to NPS for approval

MGR

MGR

MGR

MGR

11/01

12/15

12/30

01/10
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010) 

Evaluate work with cooperators and 

determine if new agreement are needed

MGR Quarterly

Maintain PMC budget within limits

Review and pay monthly recurring bills

Reconcile bills with on-line program

Prepare reports for review and analysis

MGR/SE

MGR/SE

MGR/SE

Weekly

2-Weeks

Monthly

PMC State Advisory Meeting

Notify members of proposed meeting dates

Develop agenda and distribute to members

Prepare last years minutes for review

Prepare progress report

Prepare Center for meeting/tour

MGR/SE

MGR/SE

MGR/SE

MGR

BT/BA

04/01

05/01

05/01

05/01

05/01

Support the EO/CR activities in the state 

and have information presented at staff 

conferences

Quarterly Meetings

MGR Quarterly
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010) 

540.60 Example of a PMC Workload Analysis PLANT MATERIALS CENTER STAFF WORKLOAD ANALYSIS – FY2006 TOTALS $$ 11,665 275 7,925 11,965 8,920 5,315 45,490

3,6353,2355,340

Hrs.

605425670470305

2,475

265230390

Volunteers

0.15

$$

0 0 0 0 0 0 

0 0 0 

FTE=

$/hr.

Hrs.

4040702020

190

0 

1520

Bio. Tech.

(summer)

0.35

8 

$$

240

0 

360480240

1,320

400

0 

400

FTE=

$/hr.

Hrs.

30

0 

45

6030

165

50

0 

50

Bio. Sci.

Technician

1.00

11$$

1,650

825

1,925

275330

4,705

1,1001,1001,650

FTE=

$/hr.

Hrs.

150

75

175

25

30

455

100100150

Farm Foreman

1.00

15$$

1,500

750

1,5001,125

750

5,625

1,1251,1251,500

FTE=

$/hr.

Hrs.

100

50

100

75

50

375

7575

100

Secretary

0.90

15$$

150150450150225

1,125

0 0 0 

FTE=

$/hr.=

Hrs.

101030101575

0 0 0 

Asst. Mgr./

Agronomist

1.00

23$$

1,7254,600

690

5,2903,450

15,755

690690

1,150

FTE

=

$/h.=

Hrs.

75

200

30

230150685

303050

Manager

1.00

32$$

6,4001,6007,0401,600

320

16,960

430

320320640

FTE=

$/hr.=

Hrs.

200

50

220

5010

530

101020

Category/ItemProjects and StudiesIE Antelope BitterbrushIE Thinleaf AlderEvaluate Eastern Gamagrass – ForageSpartina spartinea - dev. of sexually prop. Cv.Nutrient Quality of Forbs/Legumes for Deer

Subtotal

Field Operations/MaintenanceFoundation Increase -‘CrockettIncrease of Alkali SacatonHarvest Seed from PMC Breeder Blocks
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010) 

PLANT MATERIALS CENTER

STAFF WORKLOAD ANALYSIS - FY99

TOTALS

$$

16,785

3,5654,6155,8152,400

45,130

3,9101,0202,0203,0101,6752,8951,750

Hrs.

1,205

240390355150

3,225

200

4090

140

55

115100

Volunteers

$$

0 0 0 0 0 0 

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 

Hrs.

20

0 

2010

0 

85

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 

Bio. Tech.

(summer)

$$

1,600

200

1,000

240

80

3,920

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 

Hrs.

200

25

125

3010

490

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 

Bio. Sci.

Technician

$$

3,850

1,1001,6501,100

330

11,880

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 

Hrs.

350

100150100

30

1,080

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 

Farm Foreman

$$

6,750

1,050

750

1,1251,500

14,925

300

0 0 

450

0 0 0 

Hrs.

450

705075

100995

20

0 0 

30

0 0 0 

Secretary

$$

225

0 0 

600

0 

825

1,500

150600

450

75

375

1,200

Hrs.

15

0 0 

40

0 

55

100

104030

5 

2580

Asst. Mgr./

Agronomist

$$

2,760

575575

1,150

230

7,8201,150

230460

1,150

0 

920230

Hrs.

120

25255010

340

50102050

0 

4010

Manager

$$

1,600

640

640

1,600

0 

5,760

960640960960

1,6001,600

320

Hrs.

50202050

0 

180

30203030505010

Category/ItemField Management/OperationsFacilities Management

Buildings

LandscapeEquipment

Repair/Maintenance of Irrigation System

Subtotal

Technology TransferDevelop Annual Technical ReportNaming and Select Release of Dotted GayfeatherAssist State PAS w/ video on PMC ReleasesDevelop training to assist FOs with grass seedingPrepare and present paper at SAAS meetingProduce/Revise four plant guidesPrep and deliver written info to NPMC for Internet
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010) 

PLANT MATERIALS CENTER

STAFF WORKLOAD ANALYSIS – FY99

TOTALS

$$

2,335

18,615

1,5851,7002,2001,200

670

1,6983,6405,9753.9401,4802,440

12,57511,545

Hrs.

95

835

556080522864

175235190

80

130755505

Volunteers

$$

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 

Hrs.

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 

Bio. Tech.

(summer)

$$

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 

1640

0 0 

4040

0 

40

Hrs.

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 5 0 0 5 5 0 5 

Bio. Sci.

Technician

$$

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 

22

330

0 0 

165275

0 

385

Hrs.

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 

30

0 0 

1525

0 

35

Farm 

Foreman

$$

0 

750

0 0 0 

150

7575

600

0 

450225375

75

1,125

Hrs.

0 

50

0 0 0 

10

5 5 

40

0 

301525

5 

75

Secretary

$$

225

4,575

7575

0 

180

4575

150

1,125

1,200

225375

9,750

900

Hrs.

15

305

5 5 0 

12

3 5 

1075801525

650

60

Asst. Mgr./

Agronomist

$$

1,1505,290

230345920230230230920690690345575

1,1503,335

Hrs.

50

230

101540101010403030152550

145

Manager

$$

960

8,000

1,2801,2801,280

640320

1,2801,6004,1601,600

480800

1,6005,760

Hrs.

30

250

40404020104050

130

50152550

180

Category/ItemDevelop technical notes for FO use

Subtotal

Administration and OperationUpdate PMC Long-Range PlanPrepare Business Plan for FY00PMC Advisory MeetingDevelop Workload Analysis for PMCUpdate facilities & equip. replacement planPersonnel - summer hires, performance, update EDP’sSafety - training, reviews

Budget - prepare, track, updateProcurement -bidding, 

purchases, trackingSupport EO/CR activitiesStaff trainingOffice Duties- phone, filing, 

mail, etc.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010) 

PLANT MATERIALS CENTER

STAFF WORKLOAD ANALYSIS – FY99

TOTALS

$$

2,335

18,615

1,5851,7002,2001,200

670

1,6983,6405,9753.9401,4802,440

12,57511,545

Hrs.

95

835

556080522864

175235190

80

130755505

Volunteers

$$

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 

Hrs.

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 

Bio. Tech.

(summer)

$$

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 

1640

0 0 

4040

0 

40

Hrs.

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 5 0 0 5 5 0 5 

Bio. Sci.

Technician

$$

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 

22

330

0 0 

165275

0 

385

Hrs.

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 

30

0 0 

1525

0 

35

Farm 

Foreman

$$

0 

750

0 0 0 

150

7575

600

0 

450225375

75

1,125

Hrs.

0 

50

0 0 0 

10

5 5 

40

0 

301525

5 

75

Secretary

$$

225

4,575

7575

0 

180

4575

150

1,125

1,200

225375

9,750

900

Hrs.

15

305

5 5 0 

12

3 5 

1075801525

650

60

Asst. Mgr./

Agronomist

$$

1,1505,290

230345920230230230920690690345575

1,1503,335

Hrs.

50

230

101540101010403030152550

145

Manager

$$

960

8,000

1,2801,2801,280

640320

1,2801,6004,1601,600

480800

1,6005,760

Hrs.

30

250

40404020104050

130

50152550

180

Category/ItemDevelop technical notes for FO use

Subtotal

Administration and OperationUpdate PMC Long-Range PlanPrepare Business Plan for FY00PMC Advisory MeetingDevelop Workload Analysis for PMCUpdate facilities & equip. replacement planPersonnel - summer hires, performance, update EDP’sSafety - training, reviews

Budget - prepare, track, updateProcurement -bidding, 

purchases, trackingSupport EO/CR activitiesStaff trainingOffice Duties- phone, filing, 

mail, etc.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

540.61 Guidelines for Program Evaluations or other reviews of a Plant 

Materials Program

Guidelines for Evaluations of a Plant Materials Center or Program

The following items may be covered in a Program Review or other evaluation of a Plant 

Materials Program (PMP). Specific items to be covered will depend on the type of PMP being 

reviewed, i.e., PMC, PMS, or State program, and known issues which need to be reviewed for the 

program. This is only a guide of items that may be covered in a review.

Requirement Assigned Complete Comments

Objectives and procedures of review.

Review report of last PMC or Program Review.

Review the organizational structure of the PM 

program within the service area and how it 

functions.

Review report of previous State Conservationist's 

Advisory Committee (or comparable Advisory 

Committee) and progress made on decisions and 

actions.

Review supplements to NPMM and impact on the 

PMC or program being reviewed. Have the 

supplements been forwarded to the NPL?

History of the PMC, i.e., how old is the PMC, what 

activities have taken place and how they have 

changed over the history of the PMC?

A written summary of studies and activities at the 

PMC should be provided near the beginning of the 

review.

A tour of the PMC to look at items addressed 

below should be conducted near the beginning of 

the review. This will provide an overall picture of 

what activities the PMC is involved in.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Requirement Assigned Complete Comments

Operation of the PMC

Physical Facilities

Land adequacy and tenure (PMC and field 

evaluation sites available for PMC use).

Water supply - domestic (date and results of last 

water tests if on well) and irrigation supplies.

Infrastructure - are electric, water, natural gas 

lines, garbage disposal, and security adequate for 

the PMC?

Inventory of Buildings - adequacy, maintenance, 

and needs - present information in table form as 

appropriate.

Equipment Inventory - adequacy and replacement -

“Equipment” includes farm and field equipment, 

office equipment, computer equipment, and 

audio/visual equipment regardless of cost.

Are inventory records kept up to date for the 

PMC?

5-year acquisition and replacement schedule.

Is equipment adequately maintained and are 

maintenance records kept?

Financial Management of the PMC

Budget.

Who is responsible for maintaining the budget?

Who prepares the budget request for the next fiscal 

year?

How much is the State office offset and overhead?

How good is the fund accountability for the PMC?

A copy of the current year’s budget should be 

available for the review committee.

Reimbursable Projects – who, what, how much?
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Requirement Assigned Complete Comments

Purchases and Procurement

How are suppliers identified or sources for 

materials decided on?

What records are kept at the PMC on 

expenditures?

How are purchases made or handled at the PMC?

Safety and Health Issues of PMC Buildings, 

Equipment, and Operations

When was the last safety review conducted for 

your facility? Who conducted the last safety 

review?

Does the PMC comply with Occupational Safety 

and Health Administration (OSHA), other Federal, 

State, or Local regulations as found in the NPMM 

(Parts 540.2(B)(iv) and 540.55)? Are current codes 

of State air, water, and waste quality standards 

available?

Does the PMC have a safety coordinator, 

hazardous materials coordinator, and plans for 

emergency hazardous materials clean-up? Are 

regular safety meetings held?

Are fire extinguishers, smoke detectors, first aid 

kits, etc., in working order and stocked?

Have health issues been addressed?

Is the storage, use, and disposal of 

pesticides/hazardous materials in compliance with 

Federal, State, NRCS, and NPMM (Parts 

540.2(B)(iv) and 540.55) policy and guidelines?

Are water quality issues (domestic water supply, 

irrigation tailwater, run-off) dealt with at the PMC?

Are there fuel tanks at the PMC? Are they in 

compliance with current Federal and State 

regulations?

Are their prescribed burns at the PMC? Do they 

follow NRCS policy? Provide an example of a 

burn plan. 

The review committee should look for noncompliance of the above items during the tour of 

the facility.

Requirement Assigned Complete Comments
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Physical appearance and planning for the PMC.

a) Does the PMC have an adequate conservation 

plan and is it being followed?

Is a history of land use, maintenance, and treatment 

available for the PMC?

Has the PMC had a cultural resource assessment 

completed?

What is the appearance and quality of the facilities, 

grounds, and fields?

Are there any demonstration areas at the PMC and 

how useful are they?

Is the U.S. flag flown?

Is the PMC sign up-to-date? Are local signs 

directing visitors to the PMC needed and, if so, are 

they in place and maintained?

Are required Equal Employment Opportunity 

(EEO) statements, labor laws, worker’s 

compensation, and other personnel information 

posted in the PMC office?

Have provisions been made to accommodate 

physically challenged persons at the PMC?

State(s) Long-Range Plan (LRP) for plant 

materials activities

Are the LRPs developed on a State, multi-state, 

PMC service area, or regional level?

Is the LRP current?

Are these LRPs and/or plant materials needs and 

objectives being incorporated into State or 

Regional Strategic Plans?

How are these LRPs developed? Do they provide 

the guidance outlined in Part 540.1?

Are these LRPs of sufficient detail and scope to 

direct the development of the State PMP and PMC 

LRP to address the priority resource needs for the 

State?

Are these LRPs filed as a supplement to the 

NPMM?
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Requirement Assigned Complete Comments

PMC LRP for plant materials activities

Does the PMC have a current LRP?

Are the priorities established and specific needs in 

the LRP consistent with the objectives and 

priorities of the NRCS Goals and Objectives of the 

Strategic Plan (Part 539.20)?

Does the PMC LRP relate to the priority needs 

established in the State(s) LRP for plant materials?

How was the current LRP developed? Refer to Part 

540.2(C)(1) for LRP development.

Is the PMC LRP of sufficient detail and scope to 

direct the annual operations of the PMC to address 

the priority resource needs for the PMC service 

area? 

Does the PMC LRP have adequate non-Federal 

input?

PMC Business Plan (formerly the Plan of 

Operations)

Are the activities conducted at the PMC consistent 

with the PMC LRP?

Is the Business Plan detailed enough to adequately 

direct the activities of the PMC?

How is the Business Plan developed, and do others 

participate in the development or review of the 

Business Plan? Refer to Part 540.2(C)(2) for 

Business Plan development.

Is the Business Plan reviewed periodically through 

the year?

Are the items in the Business Plan being completed 

and products being delivered?

How many of PMC releases are being maintained 

on the Center? 

What is acreage of each release in production at 

PMC?

Are adequate amounts of germplasm being 

developed to meet needs?
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Requirement Assigned Complete Comments

PMC Workload Analysis

Is there a Workload Analysis for the PMC? (See 

Section 540.2(C)(3).)

How is staff determined?

Is staff adequate?

Are PMC staff familiar with accessing the eFOTG,

and is the FOTG being followed as appropriate for 

plantings being installed either on the PMC or offcenter?

PMP Procedures

Is there a current copy of the NPMM maintained at 

the PMC and/or by the PMS? Does the plant 

materials staff use the NPMM?

Are program activities consistent with policies and 

procedures contained in the NPMM?

Are plans being prepared for all studies (see 

Section 540.12)? Is study information inputted into 

the current PM database?

Plans clearly indicate purpose of study, expected 

product, and planned completion date?

Plans have adequate literature review.

Is plant materials inventory being maintained?

Are the procedures for releasing plants being 

followed (see Section 540.34)?

What is number of releases over last 5 years by 

release class?

Is recommended use consistent with class of 

release?

What is proposed 3-5 year release schedule? 

Pre-release activities

Number of new accessions entered/currently 

pending over last 3 years?

Number of active initial evaluation plantings 

installed/pending/evaluated over last 3 years?

Number of active advanced evaluation plantings 

installed/pending/evaluated over last 3 years?
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Requirement Assigned Complete Comments

Number of active off-center plantings 

installed/scheduled?

Number of ICSTs/ observational plantings 

evaluated for other PMCs?

How many technology development studies are 

installed/pending/evaluated?

Planting quality

Do assemblies in active studies meet NPMM 

requirements (Sections 540.32 and 540-79)?

Are trial designs statistically sound? 

Is the Plant Materials Environmental Evaluation 

being completed for all releases? When in testing 

process is form being completed?

Are the guidelines for database maintenance and 

Information Technology being implemented?

Are reports being completed?

Plant Materials Operations and Management 

System (POMS)? When? 

Annual Report on PM activities and 

accomplishments? When?

Are the products outlined in the PMC Business 

Plan, study plans, and Workload Analysis being 

completed in a timely manner?

How many studies are 1-3 years in age?

How many studies are 4-6 years in age?

How many studies are over 7 years in age?

Technology Transfer

Is the Plant Materials Progress Report of Activities 

current?

What is the distribution of the Plant Materials 

Progress Report of Activities?

Is the PMC Annual Technical Report prepared? 

Are results of studies summarized and published as 

State technical notes, in technical journals, or other 

appropriate places?

How many scientific documents have been 

developed/pending over last 3 years by type as 

listed below?
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Requirement Assigned Complete Comments

FOTG Specifications

Major Publications

Plant Fact Sheets

Plant Guides

PMC Annual Technical Report

Scientific Poster

Progress Report

Published Abstracts

Published Symposium 

Proceedings

Refereed Journal Articles

Release Brochure

Release Notices

Technical Notes

Do scientific and popular document designations 

meet criteria as outlined in POMS?

Have scientific and popular documents received 

required levels of review prior to release?

Are scientific and popular documents of sufficient 

quality?

How many popular documents have been 

developed/pending over last 3 years by type as 

listed below?

Information Brochures and 

Flyers

Interview

Miscellaneous Popular Articles

Newsletters

Newspaper Articles
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Requirement Assigned Complete Comments

Plant Materials Progress Report 

of Activities

Popular Journal or Magazine 

Articles

Popular Poster

Does the PMC have a current brochure?

How many training sessions has the PMC provided 

over the last 3 years and what was the estimated 

number of hours of these sessions?

How much direct technical assistance does the 

PMC provide to field offices and others? (Detail 

others if substantial commitments.)

Are oral presentations made on the activities and 

studies at the PMC?

How many presentations has the PMC provided 

over the last 3 years, by type, as indicated below?

Tour (min. 5 people)

Field Day (min. 50 people)

Presentation-Local

Presentation-Regional

Presentation-National

Presentation-International

Exhibit Set-Up & Staff

What are the contributions of plants released from 

the Center? 

How are field personnel, other agencies, 

cooperators, and other potential users informed of 

new products from the PMP?

Are planting guides and/or Technical Notes 

prepared?

Requirement Assigned Complete Comments
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Are new releases and/or new technology included 

in the FOTG?

Are other information leaflets and publications 

used?

Are technical journals used to summarize results of 

plant materials studies?

Relationship with other agencies, conservation 

districts, and others

What agencies and organizations work with the 

PMC and PMS? Are there any problems 

concerning the cooperative release of new plants 

and/or technology?

Does the State Conservationist enter into formal 

cooperative agreements, memorandums of 

understanding, and reimbursable agreements?

With State and other Federal agencies and others?

With conservation districts?

With State experiment stations or crop 

improvement associations?

Personnel administration

Lines of authority.

Job responsibilities, duties, descriptions, and 

standards of performance established for all staff 

positions.

Job responsibilities, duties, descriptions, and 

standards of performance established for all staff 

positions.

PMC relationship with the field PMS and other 

State specialists:

In developing plans?

In allocating plant materials?

In evaluating field plantings and problems?
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Requirement Assigned Complete Comments

EEO/ Civil Rights/ Outreach

Is the EEO program supported? Are Title VI and 

VII posters displayed showing the name, address, 

and telephone number of the EEO officers and 

other pertinent information?

What outreach efforts have the PMC participated 

in over the past 3 years?

Training

Are training plans current?

Are employees provided the training outlined in 

their training plans?

Are employees provided the opportunity to receive 

training from outside sources?

What is done to encourage self-improvement?

Is the PMC used as a training center?

Is membership in professional organizations and 

attendance at meetings encouraged?

What organizations do staff members belong to?

What meetings have been attended in the last 2-3 

years?

Have staff members received any awards and/or 

commendations in the past 2-3 years?

The Program Review report should include:

Date of review.

PMC or program being reviewed.

Review committee.

Summary of findings.

Recommendations.

Agreed-to changes.

How will agreed-to changes be followed up?

Recommendations for distribution of final Quality 

Assurance Review report.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

540.62 Checklist for Development of Technology Products

The following procedures may be used as a guide or checklist for the development of Field-based 

Technology Products and Information-based Technology Products.

Item

Date 

Completed

1. A Study Plan (for Field-based Technology Products) or Outline (for 

Information-based Technology Products) has been prepared and approved.

2. Adequate consideration has been given to similar products already available 

to meet the specified need.

3. Adequate consideration has been given to identifying cooperators and 

partners who might be involved in preparation of the product, review, and/or 

printing and distribution.

4. A literature review and assembly of appropriate materials has been 

completed.

5 Information-based product development has been incorporated into the 

Business Plan for the PMC and in the Performance Goals for the PMC.

6. The appropriate format of the finished product is assessed during product 

development. For example, NRCS FOTG technical notes will follow state 

guidance for preparing a technical note, and manuscripts submitted to 

refereed or popular journals will follow the format required by the journal.

7. Final product should receive proper review to ensure technical adequacy. 

The type and depth of review depends upon the nature of the product. Refer 

to section 540.16(C) for details.

8. The final product clearly identifies that NRCS and the Plant Materials 

Program was involved in preparation of the product.

9. The state Public Affairs Specialist has been consulted for format, printing, 

and distribution requirements.

10. File properties have been added and the document has been made 508 

compliant for the visually impaired.

11. The product has been recorded with the completed PMC performance goals 

in POMS and PRS. The electronic filename has been entered into POMS.

12. An electronic copy of the final product has been sent to the PM Webmaster

for archiving and use on the Internet. Contact the PM Webmaster if an 

electronic copy is not available.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

540.63 Typical Process for Product Development

Identification of Conservation Problem 

Through the Long-Range Planning Process

Develop Study 

 Plant Selection Plans Technology Development

Assembly of plant materials

Assemble materials in initial evaluation 

at the PMC

Advanced evaluations in comparison 

with standards at PMC or off-center 

sites

Final testing in field plantings, in 

comparison with standards, in 

conservation districts

Field-scale seed and plant increase

Name and release of new cultivars with 

experiment stations and other agencies

Production of foundation seed and 

plants

Commercial production of released 

plant materials

New plant release available for use

Initial seed and plant increase

Market new plant release

Assemble materials in initial evaluation 

at the PMC

Advanced evaluations in comparison 

with standards at PMC or off-center

sites

Final testing in field plantings, in 

comparison with standards, in 

conservation districts

Select most desirable techniques for 

conservation use

Develop technology transfer products

Distribution of final product

Transfer and market technology

product

Assembly of plants and supplies

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010) 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

540.64 Sample Project Statement for the Plant Materials Program

UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE

NATURAL RESOURCES CONSERVATION SERVICE

PROJECT STATEMENT

Project ID Code Cropland 1.1

Title Controlling erosion on cropland with cropping and residue 

management systems.

Project Statement Winter legumes and other plants used for cover crops on cropland 

in the PMC service area do not produce a seed crop prior to 

chemical burn down in the spring. Therefore, if cover crops are an 

objective of the landowner, they will need to be replanted 

annually. Earlier maturing plants and other techniques are 

needed to reduce establishment costs of cover crops. In other 

parts of the U.S., row crops are often harvested too late for 

establishment of cover crops before the onset of winter 

temperatures. Without a cover crop to utilize excess nutrients and 

provide winter cover, surface erosion from wind and water results 

on fields in this area. With a cover crop, there is the opportunity to 

capture excessive nitrogen and phosphorus, produce organic 

matter for the site, trap snow and improve moisture infiltration.

Primary Resource Soil

Other Resources water, air

Primary Land Use Cropland

Other land Use Wildlife

Primary Vegetative Cover and Green Manure Crop

Practices

Other Vegetative Wildlife Upland Habitat Management

Practices Nutrient Management
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

540.65 List of National Projects

UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE

NATURAL RESOURCES CONSERVATION SERVICE

PLANT MATERIALS PROGRAM PROJECT LIST

Project # Project Title Project Statement

Biomass/Biofuel 1.1 Selection of plants 

and management 

techniques to 

promote viable 

options for fuel 

production or 

generation.

The U.S. Department of Energy identified herbaceous and woody 

plant species as biofuel sources (e.g., switchgrass, giant miscanthus, 

willows, and poplars). In addition to these plants, there are other 

herbaceous and woody plants that may have characteristics suitable 

for biofuel technology but have not been evaluated. Agronomic 

practices are needed to determine the most effective and efficient 

approach in maximizing biomass production and fuel quality of 

current and potential biofuel crops in different geographical regions 

of the United States.

Critical Area 1.1 Controlling erosion 

on highly disturbed 

areas such as 

highways, dams, etc.

Improved erosion control techniques and plant materials are needed 

to control erosion on highly disturbed areas such as highways, dams, 

etc.

Cropland 1.1 Controlling erosion 

on cropland with 

cropping and residue 

management 

systems.

Winter legumes and other plants used for cover crops on cropland in 

the PMC service area do not produce a seed crop prior to chemical 

burn down in the spring. Therefore, if cover crops are an objective 

of the landowner, they will need to be replanted annually. Earlier 

maturing plants and other techniques are needed to reduce 

establishment costs of cover crops. In other parts of the United 

States, row crops are often harvested too late for establishment of 

cover crops before the onset of winter temperatures. Without a 

cover crop to utilize excess nutrients and provide winter cover, 

surface erosion from wind and water results on fields in this area. 

With a cover crop, there is the opportunity to capture excessive 

nitrogen and phosphorus, produce organic matter for the site, trap 

snow, and improve moisture infiltration.

Cropland 2.1 Controlling erosion 

on cropland with 

vegetative barriers in 

the United States.

During the 1980s and 1990s, the potential of using herbaceous 

vegetative barriers to help prevent water erosion was tested at a 

number of locations by several agencies. A number of species have 

been used for this purpose and additional species are being tested.

Cropland 3.1 Controlling erosion 

on cropland by crop 

conversion to 

perennial crops or 

less erosive annuals.

Livestock farmers and ranchers have the option of growing 

perennial forage crops for feeding purposes. To make this option 

attractive, perennial forages are needed that have higher yields, 

quality, and adaptation to soils with limitations.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Project # Project Title Project Statement

Cropland 4.1 Protecting surface 

and ground water 

with vegetative 

filters.

Biological filters for surface and shallow ground water will be 

extensively used to correct and/or protect water quality. 

Improvements in design, plant materials, and management will aid 

both effectiveness and efficiency of vegetative filters.

Forestland 1.1 Conservation 

systems for 

controlling erosion 

and improving water 

quality within 

forested watersheds.

Forest practices differ throughout the country; however, all regions 

need native plant options to use in erosion control following forest 

disturbance and/or harvest.

Mineland 1.1 Improve erosion 

control and the 

quality of water 

leaving mined land 

and other drastically 

disturbed sites.

While great strides have been made in general revegetation of 

mineland, the demand for energy has reopened old mines and 

opened new mines. Improved plant materials are needed for bioremediation and more effective treatments of these areas.

Natural Areas 1.1 Maintaining plant 

diversity and 

controlling soil 

erosion on natural 

areas.

Improved plant materials of additional species are needed to aid in 

preventing erosion and providing diversity from natural areas.

Pasture/Hayland 1.1 Improving forage 

production and other 

conservation 

systems with cool 

season plants.

Many cool season herbaceous species in common use for 

conservation systems are introduced. Native plant alternatives need 

to be developed.

Pasture/Hayland 2.1 Improving forage 

production and other 

conservation 

systems with warm 

season plants.

Improved selections of native warm season plants will aid in the 

effectiveness of conservation and forage systems. The number of 

improved warm season grasses for pasture and hayland is limited.

Rangeland 1.1 Improving the 

ecological status, 

production and soil 

protection of 

rangeland.

Rangelands have been degraded by recurring and extended periods 

of drought, improper use by domestic stock, colonization by 

invasive species, and wildfires. Management, establishment 

techniques, and improved drought tolerant, pest free native species 

are needed.

Urban 1.1 Developing plants to 

use in urban areas to 

control erosion and 

protect water 

quality.

Heavy use, compacted and "made" soils, limited rooting space, and 

heat islands effects make plants vulnerable in urban settings. Only a 

limited number of native species have been tested for use in urban 

settings.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Project # Project Title Project Statement

Urban 2.1 Developing plants to 

use in urban areas to 

reduce water 

quantity use

(xeriscapes fit here).

Expansion of urban areas and population growth is threatening to 

overtake existing water supplies. Need for native plants for 

landscaping are increasing, and only a limited number of improved 

native plant materials have been fully tested for this use. Plants 

tested will be drought tolerant.

Water Quality 1.1 Develop the 

technology for 

creating and 

restoring wetlands 

for water quality 

improvement.

The technology of using wetlands for water quality purposes has 

improved dramatically over the last two decades. New wetland 

restoration and wetland creation techniques have provided the need 

for a diversity of technology and plant materials to address this 

purpose. 

Water Quality 2.1 Develop plants and 

the technology for 

restoring or creating 

riparian areas for 

water quality 

improvements.

Riparian areas have been ravaged by recent hurricanes. There is a 

need to develop plants and t technology to assist municipalities 

reestablish riparian areas. 

Water Quality 3.1 Develop the 

technology for 

stabilizing channels 

for soil erosion 

control.

The native species that can be used in bioengineering practices in 

the United States need to be improved. National Engineering 

Handbook, Part 650 (Engineering Field Handbook), Chapter 18 -

Soil Bioengineering for Upland Slope Protection and Erosion 

Reduction, lists a number of potential species for these practices, but 

additional species are needed with supporting data and installation 

technology.

Water Quality 4.1 Develop plants for 

shoreline erosion 

control.

Development and changes in hydrology and littoral drift patterns 

accelerate coastal and shoreline erosion. Additional species are 

needed for effectiveness and diversity and help municipalities 

revegetate. Secondary dense species are particularly needed.

Wildlife 1.1 Develop plants for 

improving wildlife 

habitat.

Farm Bill programs increasingly target wildlife benefits. Native 

plant species and management technology are underrepresented in 

the marketplace for regional and sub-regional use.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

540.66 Details of Assigning Numbers for Studies and Plantings

Study numbers will be assigned using the following format:

MTPMC-P-0911 or WY-F-0902

Nomenclature of Study Numbers

Where MT = PMC or State Abbreviation (ET = East Texas, etc.)

Where PMC or PMS = Plant Materials Center or Plant Materials Specialist

Where P = Type Code

Where 09 = Year Study Started

Where 11 = Consecutive Number assigned by the PMC or Plant Materials Specialist

PMC and Plant Materials Specialist Codes

Use the two letter state code, for example, Alaska = AK, except for the following PMCs:

ET – East Texas (PMC in Nacogdoches)

ST – South Texas (PMC in Kingsville)

TX – Texas (PMC in Knox City)

Type Code

P – Plant Selection Study

T – Technology Development Study

F – Field Plantings

It is recommended that for Field Plantings to use the state code where the Field Planting 

occurs rather than the PMC or Plant Materials Specialist code.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010) 

540.67 Example of a Study Plan for the Plant Materials Program

UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE

NATURAL RESOURCES CONSERVATION SERVICE

STUDY PLAN

Study ID Code IDPMC-P-0601-CP

Title Controlling erosion on cropland with cover cropping and residue 

management systems in the arid, semiarid and summer dry parts of the 

US.

National Project No. Cropland 1.1

Study Type Comparative Evaluation

Study Status Active

Location IDPMC

Study Leader Derek Tilley, IDPMC

Duration 2006 through 2010

Cooperators University of Idaho, Aberdeen Experiment Station

Land Use Cropland

Hayland

Vegetative Practices Primary 340 COVER AND GREEN MANURE CROP

Secondary 512 PASTURE AND HAYLAND PLANTING

Resource Concern(s) Resource Consideration/Problem

Soil Soil erosion, wind

Water Water quality, surface water contaminants, suspended 

 sediment 

Long Range Plan Study falls under Part II, Item 3 of the IDPMC LRP

Description Commercially available cultivars of a wide variety of plants will be 

assembled and tested. Some will be replicated and some not. The 

material will include grasses and legumes. Plantings will be made at 

four different times during the year to measure the effectiveness of the 

plants for use as cover crops in a variety of cropping systems.

Status of Knowledge Many of the cultivars selected for this study are well documented as 

cover crops in other regions of the country and/or for use in different 

seasons of the year. Some of the cultivars are agronomic crops in other 

regions and may function in this region as cover crops. Most if not all 

of these cultivars have well documented performance during a single 

season, and we will be testing them in different seasons. Our 

knowledge of these cultivars for this use, in these seasons, in Idaho 

climate is very limited. However, we have sufficient confidence in 

some of them that we will replicate the plots based on an assumed level 

of survival.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010) 

Experimental Design Randomized Complete Block Design

 Treatment 1 Title: Accession

Description: Cultivars Planted

Materials and 

Methods

Samples of seed will be assembled from Plant Materials Centers, 

University researchers, and Commercial sources. Seed will be 

assembled beginning in January 1996. Those with high potential will 

be seeded in replicated plots 160 inches wide and 33 ft long. Row 

spacing will be 10 inches, and seeding rates will vary by seed size, with 

20 seeds per foot for large seeds, (<100,000 per lb), 30 seeds per foot 

small seeds, (>500,000 per lb). Planting equipment will be a Tye 

double disk drill. The design will be a Randomized Complete Block, 

RCB. 6 accessions will be replicated three times at each of three 

planting dates. The three planting dates are planned for early spring, 

late spring, and late fall

Final Evaluations Field Plantings will be installed in each of the MLRAs found in Idaho 

to test regional adaptation of materials tested at the PMC

Technology Transfer 

Products

TechNotes, revise FOTG standards, Current events article

Literature Cited PMC release documentation, Commercial literature, University 

research results

Keywords Cover crops, new species and cultivars, pasture land, hayland, Idaho

Reviewed by: Plant Materials Specialist, Idaho ______________________________

Approvals: State Conservationist, Idaho __________________________________
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

540.68 Resources for Preparing Literature Reviews

The following resources may be used for compiling a literature review:

A. The National Agriculture Library (NAL)

(1) NAL has many resources and provides support for locating information for 

USDA employees. Complete details of the services provided by NAL can be found 

on their Web site (http://www.nal.usda.gov). The NAL Web site provides online 

access to AGRICOLA (AGRICultural OnLine Access), Current Research 

Information Network (CRIS), ISIS, and the Agriculture Network Information Center 

(AgNIC). 

AGRICOLA is a machine-readable database of bibliographic records created by the 

NAL and its cooperators. Production of these records in electronic form began in 

1970, but the database covers materials dating from the 16th century to the present. 

The records describe publications and resources encompassing all aspects of 

agriculture and allied disciplines, including plant and animal sciences, forestry, 

entomology, soil and water resources, agricultural economics, agricultural 

engineering, agricultural products, alternative farming practices, and food and 

nutrition. 

CRIS is USDA’s documentation and reporting system for ongoing and recently 

completed research projects in agriculture, food and nutrition, and forestry. Projects 

are conducted or sponsored by USDA research agencies, State agricultural 

experiment stations, the State land grant university system, other cooperating State 

institutions, and participants in USDA's National Research Initiative Competitive 

Grants Program. 

ISIS is NAL's Online Public Access Catalog. AgNIC

(2) If Internet access is not available, NAL will conduct literature reviews for USDA 

employees. For a literature review, send a Computer Search Request or letter to 

NAL, Reference Division, Beltsville, Maryland 20705, or by contacting NAL by 

phone ((301) 504-5479), fax ((301) 504-6927), or by email (

is a distributed network that 

provides access to agriculture-related information, subject area experts, and other 

resources.

agref@nal.usda.gov) 

(note that phone numbers and email addresses are subject to change). A search of 

literature may be made by article, title, author, or general subject matter. The 

reference service request form provides space for a brief narrative description of a 

project, keywords, or categories of subject matter. The requester receives a 

bibliography of the articles available and an abstract for each document cited.

(3) Articles and documents may be requested by mail, fax, email, and other methods 

as described on the NAL Web site. Desired articles may be requested through fax or 

mail by submitting a Form AD-245-4. Photocopies of articles or abstracts of texts 

are then forwarded in response to the AD-245-4. The most efficient method of 

requesting documents after completing an online search is by email. Specific 

guidelines for sending requests are found on the NAL Web site.

B. Local Colleges and Universities

Many colleges and land grant universities have extensive agriculture libraries where 

information may be found. Oftentimes, these libraries provide access to the 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

AGRICOLA database or have Internet search engines to find information located in 

the library.

C. Internet Searches

The Internet is an excellent place to find information from a variety of sources. The 

use of popular search engines such as Google (http://www.google.com) may facilitate 

locating some materials. In addition, the libraries of most major universities are 

accessible through the Internet. Special attention should be given to the sources of 

materials from the Internet though, and the validity of some information may need to 

be checked before considering it in a literature review.

D. Contact with Other PMCs

Oftentimes, other PMCs are working on similar projects and may be a source of 

literature and technical information.

E. Personal Contacts

Communications with experts and practitioners in the field of interest may be useful 

for obtaining firsthand information on a topic and areas where work is needed. 

Personal contacts may be with university or government researchers, people in the 

industry, such as with seed companies and revegetation experts, and with qualified 

NRCS personnel, such as District Conservationists and State office specialists.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

540.69 Types of Technology Products

The following are examples of the types and descriptions of products which may be 

developed as a result of Technology Development or Plant Selection Studies. 

Product Type Description

Conservation Field Trials A planting used to evaluate technology for addressing 

local soil and water resource problems (see Section 

540.14(G))

Displays and Exhibits Display at a fair, career day, government-sponsored 

events, meeting, etc.

Field Office Technical Guide Revision or writing new standards and specifications for 

the FOTG

Field Planting A planting used to evaluate new plants and/or 

technology under actual use conditions (see Section 

540.14(F))

Information Brochures and Flyers Information in a brochure or flyer format intended to be 

non-technical in nature (i.e., general PMC brochure, 

release brochure, new technology)

Interview Personal interview conducted by an author for inclusion 

in a newspaper, popular magazine, or technical journal 

where PM is being highlighted or a PM staff member is 

being cited as a technical expert

Major Publications Major publications (longer than a Technical Note but 

not quite a book)

Miscellaneous Popular Articles Miscellaneous popular articles published and 

distributed by the PMC or PMS

Miscellaneous Technical Articles Technical information written in a general format

Newsletter-type Publication Newsletter-type written materials prepared by the PMC 

or PMS on a regular basis

Newspaper Articles Article written by PMC staff or a PMS which appears in 

a newspaper

One-On-One Direct Assistance Direct technical assistance given to both NRCS and 

non-NRCS customers

Oral Presentation A talk given to a group of people; may be popular, 

technical, or professional in nature

Plant Fact Sheets Information for a species, including description, 

adaptation, uses, and management; usually in a 2-page 

format (see Section 540.76)

Plant Guides Detailed information on a plant species and/or release 

or planting technology, including description, special 

characteristics, adaptation, use, establishment, and 

management, seed production, potential problems, and 

references. The Plant Guide is detailed enough to 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Product Type Description

allow the user to repeat the technology (see Section 

540.77)

Plant Materials Progress Report of 

Activities

Report giving highlights of studies and activities at the 

PMC; compiled and distributed annually (see Section 

541.2(C)) 

PMC Annual Technical Report Technical report which gives details of studies and 

activities; usually not for general distribution; compiled 

annually (see Section 541.2(D))

Popular Journal or Magazine Articles Article published in a popular journal or magazine 

which has not been peer-reviewed

Posters A presentation in poster format given at a technical or 

professional meeting

Progress Reports Reports compiled to update others on the progress of a 

study or activity

Published Abstracts Published abstract for a poster or oral presentation to 

be given at a technical or professional meeting

Published Symposium Proceedings Paper which is published in the proceedings from a 

technical or professional meeting

Refereed Journal Articles Articles which have been peer-reviewed and published 

in professional journals

Release Brochures A brochure or flyer describing the characteristics, uses, 

establishment, and management of a plant release (see 

Section 540.94)

Release Notices The formal notice for a new release which gets signed 

(see Section 540.34(F))

Special Demonstration Planting Planting to promote the use and acceptance of 

released material and/or developed technology (see 

Section 540.17(D))

Technical Note Written material used to convey technical information; 

usually conforms to NRCS or State guidelines for 

preparing and issuing the information (see Section 

540.75)

Tours A formal tour of the PMC

Training A formal training session held for NRCS or non-NRCS 

attendees

Video/Media Production A video, TV, or radio production with major content 

including plant materials information
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE NRCS-ECS-600 

NATURAL RESOURCES CONSERVATION SERVICE July 2010

ESTABLISHMENT OF FIELD, SPECIAL AND INCREASE PLANTINGS

Planting No. Field Office 

Cooperator Phone Number 

Address 

State County MLRA 

Township Range Section 

Latitude Longitude Location Map Provided Yes

Slope % Aspect N S E W Elevation ft m 

Soil Texture Soil Modifier 

Soil pH Annual Precipitation in mm Irrigation Available Yes No

Seedbed Preparation Tillage 

 Packing 

 Other 

Planting Method Drill Aerial Broadcast/Pack Broadcast/Harrow

 Hand-plant Tree Planter Other 

Weed Infestation None Light Moderate Severe

Soil Moisture Good Adequate Too-Dry Too-Wet

Irrigation Applied Kind None Pre-planting Post-planting 

Materials Applied Rate/Acre Notes/Date Applied

Lime

Fertilizer, Nitrogen

Fertilizer, Phosphors

Fertilizer, Potassium

Fertilizer, Other

Herbicide

Mulch

USDA IS AN EQUAL OPPORTUNITY PROVIDER AND EMPLOYER
NRCS-ECS-600 

ESTABLISHMENT OF FIELD, SPECIAL AND INCREASE PLANTINGS

(Continued) 

Scientific Name or Common 

Name Cultivar/Release Name

Accession 

Number

Seeding /

Planting Rate

Amount 

Needed

Supplied 

By

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

Information to be completed at time of planting

1 = Excellent 3 = Good 5 = Fair 7 = Poor 9 = Very Poor 

. Complete the evaluation for each plant listed above in the appropriate 

column below. Answer all questions in measurements requested. If a question does not apply or is unknown, enter N/A. Use 

remarks block for additional information pertinent to the planting. When planted as part of a mixture, please note other 

species and percentage information in the remarks section. 

Question/Criteria No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4 No. 5

Planting Date (mm/dd/yy)

Seedbed condition/site preparation at time of planting? (rank 1-9)

Soil moisture conditions at time of planting? (rank 1-9)

Condition of plant materials received? (rank 1-9)

Planting Stock?

BB=balled/burlapped BC=branches BL=bales 

BR=bare-root CO=container CU=cutting, unrooted

LI=liner LS=live stakes SD=seed

SP=sprig WH=whips OT=other

Number of acres for this accession? (tenth of an acre)

Number of plants? (if vegetatively planted, number)

In-row spacing between plants? (if vegetatively planted, round to 

nearest foot)

Between-row spacing between plants? (if vegetatively planted, 

round to nearest foot)

Seeding rate? (PLS pounds/acre)

Seeding rate? (PLS pounds/1000 ft2) 

Was material planted as mixture or single species? 

(M = mixture, S = single)

Was irrigation applied after planting? (Y = yes, N = no)

Remarks 

 

Completed By: Name Title Date 
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE NRCS-ECS-600 

NATURAL RESOURCES CONSERVATION SERVICE July 2010

ESTABLISHMENT OF FIELD, SPECIAL AND INCREASE PLANTINGS

FORM INSTRUCTIONS

These instructions will assist in completing form NRCS-ECS-600.

Planting No.

Enter the unique number assigned by the Plant Materials Center staff or Plant Materials Specialist for this planting. 

The format for field plantings is identified in the National Plant Materials Manual, sections 540.14(F)(5) and 540.66. 

This number should correspond to a POMS database record if applicable.

Field Office 

The name of the primary field office involved with the planting (if applicable).

Cooperator

The name of the land owner, individual or organization cooperating with this planting.

Phone Number

The phone number and/or email address of the cooperator.

Address

The address of the cooperator where the planting will occur.

State

The state where the planting will occur.

County

The county where the planting will occur.

MLRA

The MLRA where the collection was made. Major Land Resource Areas are geographically associated land resource 

units (LRUs). Identification of these large areas is important in statewide agricultural planning and has value in 

interstate, regional, and national planning. An interactive map can be found at 

http://soils.usda.gov/survey/geography/mlra/ that can assist in determining the MLRA of the collection site.

Township

Township name where the planting is planned (if applicable). This is used in the Public Land Survey System (PLSS). 

For more information and online access to PLSS maps, go to 

http://www.geocommunicator.gov/GeoComm/lsis_home/home/index.html.

Range

Range where the planting is planned (if applicable). This is used in the Public Land Survey System (PLSS). For 

more information and online access to PLSS maps, go to 

http://www.geocommunicator.gov/GeoComm/lsis_home/home/index.html.

Section

Section where the planting is planned (if applicable). This is used in the Public Land Survey System (PLSS). For 

more information and online access to PLSS maps, go to 

http://www.geocommunicator.gov/GeoComm/lsis_home/home/index.html.

Latitude

The geographic latitude of the planting location in decimal degrees or degrees, minutes, and seconds.

Longitude

The geographic longitude of the planting location in decimal degrees or degrees, minutes, and seconds.

Location Map Provided

A separate location map should be included with this plan. Check the box if you provided a map.

Slope %

The slope at the planting location, as a percentage.

Aspect (N, S, E, W)

The exposure of the site. Check the box(es) corresponding to the planting location exposure: N = north, S = south, 

E = east, W = west. More than one box may be checked.
NRCS-ECS-600 

ESTABLISHMENT OF FIELD, SPECIAL AND INCREASE PLANTINGS

FORM INSTRUCTIONS

(Continued)

Elevation (ft, m)

The site elevation at the planting location. Check one box, either “ft” for feet or “m” for meters, to indicate the unit of 

measurement represented.

Soil

List the soil series or soil complex at the planting location.

Texture

List the dominant soil texture (sand, silt, clay) at the planting location.

Soil Modifier

List the dominant soil modifier at the planting location - if applicable.

Soil pH

A measure of the soil acidity or soil alkalinity on a scale of 1-14. For more information, see the publication at 

http://soils.usda.gov/SQI/publications/files/indicate.pdf. 

Annual Precipitation (in, mm)

Indicate the site’s mean annual precipitation. The range in precipitation assigned to the soil series or soil complex is 

recommended. Check one box, either “in” for inches or “mm” for millimeters, to indicate the unit of measurement 

represented.

Irrigation Available 

Check “yes” or “no” to indicate if irrigation water is available for the site.

Tillage

Indicate what equipment was used to till the soil (plow, till, rip, etc.) prior to planting, if applicable.

Packing

Indicate what equipment was used to pack the soil prior to planting, if applicable.

Other

Indicate if any other methods/equipment were used to prepare the seedbed for planting.

Planting Method

Check the appropriate box to indicate the seeding or planting method used.

Weed Infestation 

Indicate if there is no weed infestation, or if there is light, moderate, or severe weed infestation.

Soil Moisture

Indicate if the moisture in the soil is good, adequate, too dry, or too wet. 

Irrigation Applied 

Kind – Indicate what type of irrigation was applied (overhead, furrow, flood, trickle, etc.), if applicable.

None – Check this box if no irrigation was applied.

Pre-planting – Check this box if irrigation was applied before planting.

Post-planting – Check this box if irrigation was applied after planting.

Materials Applied

Listed are the most common materials that may be required for the planting. Lime, fertilizer, herbicide, and mulch are 

identified – if these materials are applied, indicate the quantity in the Rate/Acre field. In the Notes/Date Applied

field, indicate any specific instructions, directions, or methods of application and the date applied. There are 

additional lines available to record materials applied that are not listed.

Scientific Name or Common Name

The Latin scientific name or the common name of the plant to be used

Cultivar/Release Name

The cultivar or release name of the plant to be used, if applicable.
NRCS-ECS-600 

ESTABLISHMENT OF FIELD, SPECIAL AND INCREASE PLANTINGS

FORM INSTRUCTIONS

(Continued)

Accession Number

The assigned accession number of the accession to be planted (example 9076517 Western wheatgrass), if 

applicable.

Seeding / Planting Rate

Indicate the planned seeding rate (in bulk or PLS lbs/acre) or planned vegetative planting rate (in number per acre or 

1,000 ft) used for the planting.

Amount Needed

The quantity of material necessary to complete the planting for the site. Seed should be listed in PLS (pure live seed). 

Supplied By

The name of the PMC, individual, organization, or company that will provide the planting materials.

Information to be completed at the time of planting

Planting Date (mm/dd/yy)

Enter the date of planting in the format shown.

Seedbed condition/site preparation at time of planting? (rank 1-9)

Indicate how well the site and/or seedbed was prepared prior to planting, taking into consideration weed control, 

tillage, soil packing, etc.

Moisture conditions at time of planting? (rank 1-9)

Indicate how moist the field was at time of seeding or planting each species or release.

Condition of plant materials received? (rank 1-9)

Indicate the condition of the seed or plants at the time of planting each species or release.

Planting Stock?

Using the codes to the left, indicate the type of plant material stock used for the planting for each accession. 

Number of acres for this accession? (tenth of an acre)

Enter the number of acres planted for this accession. Round to a tenth of an acre.

Number of plants? (if vegetatively planted, number)

Enter the number of plants used for this plant accession if the materials were vegetative in nature.

In-row spacing between plants? (if vegetatively planted, round to nearest foot)

The amount of space between each plant within the row. If vegetative materials were used, round the number to the 

nearest foot.

Between-row spacing between plants? (if vegetatively planted, round to nearest foot)

The amount of space between each row of plants. If the materials used were vegetative in nature, round the number 

to the nearest foot.

Seeding rate? (PLS pounds/acre)

The actual amount of Pure Live Seed used per acre. 

Seeding rate? (PLS pounds/1000 ft2

) 

The actual amount of Pure Live Seed used for one thousand square feet.

Was material planted as mixture or single species? 

Indicate whether the material was planted as a mixture with other species, or if it was the sole species planted. (M = 

mixture, S = single)

Was irrigation applied after planting? 

Indicate if water was applied to the site after planting was completed. (Y = yes, N = no)

Remarks 

Add any additional comments or remarks that may be useful.
NRCS-ECS-600 

ESTABLISHMENT OF FIELD, SPECIAL AND INCREASE PLANTINGS

FORM INSTRUCTIONS

(Continued)

Completed By

Name

The name of the individual completing the form.

Title

The position title of the individual completing the form.

Date 

The date the form was completed.
TECHNICAL NOTES 

USDA-Natural Resources Conservation Service

Boise, Idaho

 

TN PLANT MATERIALS NO. 44 July 2005 

Using Windbreaks to Reduce Odors Associated with Livestock 

Production Facilities

Introduction

Preliminary research and observations made by farmers suggest that windbreaks placed around

livestock production facilities may effectively reduce movement of odors emitted by manure to 

neighboring properties. Essentially, trees can be 'put to work' to reduce the movement of livestock 

production odors off-site. This information was developed by Missouri NRCS and has been modified 

for use in Idaho and Utah.

Although the idea of placing vegetative windbreaks and shelterbelts around agricultural buildings and 

farm fields is not new, additional benefits from farm windbreaks continue to be learned and tested. 

Windbreaks alone will not prevent odor problems associated with intensive livestock production but 

may provide farmers with one more tool to help reduce negative visual perceptions and detection of 

odors by neighbors and surrounding communities. 

Figure 1 

A windbreak of 

maturing conifers 

can significantly 

change the 

appearance of 

livestock 

production 

facilities and help 

filter out odor 

particles.

An odor-emitting source can include a livestock production barn, manure storage facility or a farm field 

where manure is being spread. Windbreaks have the ability to reduce odor concentrations significantly 

at or very near the source, which greatly improves the effectiveness of separation distances.
There are six ways that windbreaks and shelterbelts can reduce the effects of livestock odor and 

improve visual perception of production buildings:

1. Dilution and dispersion of gas concentrations of odor by a mixing effect created by 

windbreaks.

2. Deposition of odorous dusts and other aerosols to the windward and leeward sides of 

windbreaks.

3. Collection and storage (sinks) within tree wood of the chemical constituents of odor pollution.

4. Physical interception of dust and aerosols (odor particles) on leaves, needles and branches.

5. Containment of odor by placing windbreaks windward and leeward of the odor source.

6. Aesthetic appearance:

- Trees create a visual barrier to livestock barns and manure storage facilities

- Trees can make cropped fields and pastures more pleasing to look at

- Trees represent an 'environmental statement' to neighbors that the producer is making

 every effort to resolve odor problems in as many ways as possible.

Dilution and Dispersion

Without wind management, odors emitted from livestock facilities and manure storage areas tend to 

travel along the ground as a plume with air movement, especially during atmospheric inversions with 

little or no dilution of odor occurring. 

Figure 2 

Without 

windbreaks and 

wind 

management, the 

odor plumes are 

picked up by 

passing air 

masses and travel 

near the ground 

with little or no 

dilution or filtration. 

Windbreaks create an obstacle for moving air masses. When designed properly, windbreaks force 

turbulent fresh air up and over the tree row and will also moderate and evenly distribute a more gentle 

airflow through the trees. Less air movement past barns will mean less pickup and movement of odor 

off site. 

It is believed that windbreaks have the ability to lift some of the odor plume into the lower atmosphere 

where winds aloft mix and dilute the odor. The greatest dilution of odor occurs above and downwind 

from the quiet zone created by the action of wind passing over the windbreak. Beyond the quiet zone, 

more fresh air and less odorous air returns to the ground, thereby reducing movement of livestock 

odors off site. 

Approximately 60 percent of the wind should be deflected up and over the windbreak and 40 percent 

should pass through the canopy of the trees. Two to three rows of trees can provide an ideal 60 

percent density (or 40 percent porosity) through the tree canopy. Windbreaks are less effective for 

odor reduction when wind is minimal but the visual appearance remains in place.
Windbreaks create a 'quiet zone' of air that measures a distance of 8 to 10 times the height of the tree 

row downwind of the windbreak, and an additional moderation of wind speeds 10 to 25 times tree 

height, beyond the windbreak. Back-pressure created by the blocking effect of the tree row also 

creates a small quiet zone upwind of the tree line that is equal to 2 to 3 times the height of the trees.

Figure 3 

Windbreaks located 

upwind and downwind of 

livestock facilities will 

reduce and manipulate 

air flow around the facility 

to reduce the spread of 

odors. Overhead winds 

can lift particles and 

gases into the lower 

atmosphere to help dilute 

and disperse odors. Also, 

more clean air diverts up 

and over the source of 

odor.

Livestock barns and manure storage areas are best located in the quiet zone 100 feet downwind of 

windbreaks. In addition, windbreaks located downwind of the odor source are also important for 

filtering, absorption and trapping odors. Therefore, placing windbreaks around the entire perimeter of 

livestock production areas is ideal. Windbreaks should also be at least 100 feet from access roads and 

driveways to prevent snowdrifts from blocking farm vehicles during winter.

Deposition of Odorous Dusts

Windbreaks create a physical barrier to wind and air movement. The trees absorb wind energy and 

reduce its speed near the ground. As a result, fewer dust particles and less odorous gases will be 

picked up by the air coming from livestock facilities. Also in calmer air, dusts and gases already caught 

up in the air will be more likely to settle back to the ground on the downwind side of the windbreak. 

This deposition effect is commonly seen with living and non-living snow fences where snow settles 

downwind of the fencing or trees due to reduced wind speed.

Figure 4 

Reduced wind speed in the quiet zone 

that is created downwind from a 

windbreak allows odorous dusts and 

particles to settle to the ground, 

similar to what happens with settling 

and drifting of snow. 

To be most effective for deposition of 

odorous dust, windbreaks need to be 

located upwind and downwind of 

odorous livestock facilities. Upwind 

windbreaks reduce the quantity of 

dust and odor that is picked up by 

wind, and windbreaks located 

downwind of the facilities will further 

reduce wind speeds to allow settling of odorous dusts that have become airborne. 
For cropland, the same may hold true for reduction of odor movement where manure is being spread 

onto farm fields. Windbreaks established around the full perimeter of farm fields should reduce 

movement of odor and can accommodate winds that are approaching the farm from any direction.

Figure 5 

Windbreaks located downwind of 

livestock production barns allow 

settling of odorous wind-borne 

dust particles. Windbreaks should 

be located 100 feet away from 

barns.

Wind tunnel studies of mass 

transport have shown that 

windbreaks can remove 35 to 55 

percent of the dust being carried 

in moving air which would provide 

a substantial reduction of 

offensive odors carried off-farm. 

 

The amount of dust that is picked 

up or allowed to settle will depend 

on wind speed, direction of the 

wind, density of windbreak trees, 

height of windbreak trees and 

number of windbreaks. 

 

Figure 6 

Mature windbreaks around 

cropped fields may help lift 

and disperse odors during 

application of manure as a 

nutrient soil amendment, in 

addition to sheltering crops 

from damaging wind. 

Collection and Storage of Pollutant Odors within Trees (sink)

Scientific evidence of plant intake of livestock odors by tree foliage in field situations is limited, 

however there have been many studies done on the ability of plants to absorb air-polluting odors and 

chemicals. Trees and shrubs clean the air of micro-particles of all sizes by interception. Interception of 

air pollutants may be 20 times higher in tree or forested areas than non-forested cropped or barren 

lands. In addition, conifers show a better ability to absorb air pollutants than deciduous trees.
Figure 7 

In air pollution research, 

odorous gases and particles 

can be absorbed into the 

foliage of conifers and 

deciduous trees during the 

growing season. Pollutants 

diffuse inside leaves and 

needles through tiny openings 

called stomata or adsorb into 

waxy coatings that naturally 

cover leaf surfaces. 

Odorous gases, chemicals and 

dust particles can become fixed 

to plant surfaces and can enter 

into the plant tissue in three 

ways: 1) gaseous diffusion 

through open stomata, 2) on 

wet leaves, soluble air 

pollutants can enter through stomata in a dissolved liquid form, 3) pollutants can absorb directly into 

plant tissues.

Windbreak trees and shrubs absorb air pollutants when they are healthy and not under drought stress. 

Trees and shrubs absorb more air pollutants when leaf surfaces are wet. Higher humidity can increase 

uptake of air pollutants into trees, which is commonly measured within tree canopies. 

Micro-organisms cover plant surfaces and there is evidence that these micro-organisms associated 

with windbreak trees also contribute to absorbing odorous chemicals. Forests are often referred to as 

pollutant air filters. This may also apply to windbreaks trees.

Physical Interception of Odor Particles 

Trees are highly effective at physically intercepting dust, gases and microbial particles that are carried 

in the wind. Windbreaks are commonly used to intercept and drop blowing snow, act as barriers to trap 

blowing soil caused by wind erosion, catch spray drift of agricultural chemicals, and reduce and catch 

pollen drift from agricultural crops. As leaf surface roughness increases, the capture ability of particles 

and odor increases. Leaves with complex shapes (large circumference to area ratios) collect particles 

most efficiently. Therefore, conifers may be more effective at intercepting livestock odors than 

deciduous tree and shrub 

species. Conifers also have 

leaves (needles) year 

around. 

Figure 8 

Similar to the air filters of 

home furnaces, windbreak

trees, especially conifers, 

physically catch wind-borne 

odorous particles. Conifers 

have foliage year-round. 
Windbreak Design and Planting

Selecting the species of trees and shrubs to plant will vary at each livestock facility and farm field site. 

Species selection should be based on the characteristics of each site including: soil type, natural 

drainage, common wind conditions, annual precipitation, natural range of each tree and shrub species 

and site needs. In addition, to maximize particulate trapping, select species based on high leaf 

surface roughness (plants with leaf hairs, leaf veins, and small leaf size), complex leaf shapes, 

and large leaf circumference to area ratios and medium to rapid growth rates. 

It is usually best to select several species of trees and shrubs for use in windbreaks to prevent loss or 

destruction of the entire windbreak if attacking insect pests or tree diseases occur. Having diversity 

also offers a better chance for tree survival during alternating seasons of drought and wet soil 

conditions.

Windbreaks should consist of single or multiple rows of trees and shrubs. Shrubs are generally planted 

in the outside or inside rows, followed by conifers with deciduous hardwoods towards the middle or 

along the downwind side where they can grow more efficiently. Tree varieties and placement for the 

windbreak should be managed to maximize odor interception and dilution of air, and reduce odor 

leaving the source.

Where site conditions allow, place plantings around the entire perimeter of the odor source.

Adjust windbreak porosities/densities to meet air movement needs for naturally ventilated 

livestock confinement systems. 

Keep the inner row of windbreak plantings away from all buildings and waste storage areas and 

at least 10 times the exhaust fan diameter or 50 feet, whichever is farther. A dike between any 

livestock effluent sources and trees/shrubs is also highly recommended to protect plantings.

Use wide “between row spacing” to increase particle surface area contact and foliage light levels.

Ideally once established, the tree barrier should have a density of about 60 percent for best results for 

wind management. Conifers such as spruce will provide uniform branch coverage from the ground 

level up. Tree rows should be spaced wide enough apart to allow access by equipment for 

mechanized management of vegetation. 

Weed management is important during the first five years of tree establishment using herbicides, or 

weed barrier materials, plastic or organic mulch. Weed management is important until the young 

windbreak trees have overtopped most weed competition and are free to grow.

For additional information on windbreak design and planting, refer to Idaho Technical Note No. 43 Tree 

Planting, Care and Management http://www.id.nrcs.usda.gov/programs/tech_ref.html#TechNotes 

Managing Odor

Odor management is a result of the overall management of the farm operation. General maintenance 

of the buildings and the nutrition of the feed ration are normal farm management needs that can 

influence odor emissions. Waste management plans have become a standard part of livestock 

operations in recent years. Livestock odor management techniques fall into three areas:

1. Preventing the generation of odor, including feed additives, aeration, manure additives, etc. 

2. Capturing and destroying the odor, including biofilters, waste storage covers, organic mats, 

etc.

3. Dispersing or disguising the odors, including vegetative or structural windbreaks, setback 

distances, site selection, etc.

In particular, structural or vegetative windbreaks placed near exhaust fans on tunnel-ventilated 

livestock and poultry buildings appear promising, primarily because the air jets issuing from the 

exhaust fans are diverted upward. This effect promotes mixing of the odorous, dusty airflow with the 
wind passing over the building, so that the plumes of air pollutants originating from the fans are made 

larger (extend higher) in addition to the physical trapping of odor particles on the windbreak.

Figure 9 

Relevant design considerations 

and low-cost designs using UVresistant tarpaulin or plastic 

material, roofing, or wood 

fastened to anchored pipe 

frames or posts are potential 

options for windbreak walls.

Windbreak structures may either be designed to withstand the same wind speeds as the buildings and 

be insured with the buildings, or lower wind speeds at reduced cost. If the windbreaks are not 

designed for maximum design wind speeds, a method of ensuring non-catastrophic failure is needed, 

such as breakaway ties fastening material to frames. The location of the windbreak affects the 

diversion of airflow from exhaust fans. Observations of windbreak action in several locations suggest 

that the windbreaks should be placed two to four fan diameters downwind from the fans to deflect fan 

airflow without back pressures, (Figure 11) and extend high enough to fully intercept the plumes of 

airflow issuing from the fans (e.g. 10-12 feet high for typical buildings).

Biofilters using biomass and microorganisms to treat ventilation air as it leaves the building have been 

used in the U.S. Some producers have installed windbreak walls using straw or other biomass. 

Windbreaks made from or incorporating straw have been installed on swine farms in North Dakota, 

Minnesota and Missouri and received favorable results. One facility in Minnesota with a biofilter 

achieved odor and H2S reduction of 80-90% and NH3 reduction of 50-60%. Weed control and rodent 

control were the primary problems experienced. A critical element in the use of biofilters is their 

dependence on power ventilated buildings where fans push the air through the filter. They don’t work 

on naturally ventilated buildings.

Other Benefits 

In addition to odor management, vegetative windbreaks also act to reduce the seasonal cost of heating 

and cooling of farm buildings without disrupting ventilation in livestock barns.

Windbreaks may also reduce the spread of specific infectious disease of livestock by blocking, 

intercepting or diverting wind-borne infectious organisms away from buildings.
Windbreaks placed around farm fields reduce damage to forage and crops (preserve crop yield 

potential) caused by damaging turbulent winds while allowing normal air circulation to continue. 

Windbreaks reduce soil erosion by wind. Around pastures, mature windbreaks will relieve livestock of 

stress during hot summer days and cold windy winter conditions. Avoid planting trees and shrubs that 

are know to be poisonous to livestock. 

Figure 10 

Where barns are 

surrounded by solid forest 

plantation, it is important 

not to block ventilation fans 

with excessive tree growth. 

Thinning the plantation and 

pruning off lower branches 

can improve air circulation. 

100 feet is a good 

separation distance 

between trees and barn.

References

1. “Using Shelterbelts to Reduce Odors Associated with Livestock Production Barns” (January 2004) by 

Todd Leuty, Horticulture/Agroforestry Specialist, Ontario Ministry of Agriculture and Food. 

2. “Air Quality and Shelterbelts: Odor Mitigation and Livestock Production – A Literature Review” 1999. John 

Tyndall and Joe Colletti; Iowa State University. 

3. “Designs for Windbreak Walls for Mitigating Dust and Odor Emissions from Tunnel Ventilated Swine 

Buildings” 2000. R. Bottcher, R. Munilla, G. Baughman, and K. Keener. North Carolina State University.
Figure 11 

Example layout of windbreak wall or biofilter for typical tunnel ventilated building.

Figure 12 

A hypothetical windbreak design for 

a swine facility. The numbers refer 

to the interaction and means by 

which the windbreak will mitigate 

livestock odor. 

1. Creation of air mixing 

turbulence

2. Dust deposition 

3. Particulate interception

4. Pollution sinks

Other important design 

considerations include: livestock 

type, odor sources, air/wind 

patterns, tree/shrub species, and 

aesthetics.

 N 

 

The United States Department of Agriculture (USDA) prohibits discrimination in its programs on the basis of race, color, national 

origin, sex, religion, age, disability, political beliefs and marital or familial status. (Not all prohibited basis apply to all programs). 

Persons with disabilities who require alternative means for communication of program information (Braille, large print, audiotape, 

etc.) should contact the USDA TARGET Center at (202) 720-2600 (voice and TDD) To file a complaint, write the Secretary of 

Agriculture, USDA, Washington, DC 20250, or call 1-800-245-6340 or (202) 720-1127 (TDD). USDA is an equal opportunity 

employer. 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)
 Plant Fact Sheet

Plant Materials <http://plant-materials.nrcs.usda.gov/>

Plant Fact Sheet/Guide Coordination Page <http://plant-materials.nrcs.usda.gov/intranet/pfs.html>

National Plant Data Center <http://npdc.usda.gov>

BLACK WILLOW

Salix nigra Marsh.

Plant Symbol = SANI

Contributed by: USDA NRCS Plant Materials 

Center, Manhattan, Kansas & Kansas State 

University, Forestry Research

Photo Courtesy of Philip Barbour, Wildlife Biologist, USDA 

NRCS, Madison, Mississippi

Alternate Names

American, Brittle, Champlain, Dudley, Gooding, gulf 

black, puzzle, rough American, scythe-leaf, scytheleaved, southwestern black, swamp, tall black, Texas 

black, and western black willow; sauce, saule, saule 

noir, sauz, swamp walnut, weide, wilg, willow, and 

willow catkins

 

The name willow derives from the Old English 

wilwe. The botanical name Salix was the name given 

by the ancient Romans.

Uses

Ethnobotanic: The ancient Greeks knew the 

therapeutic values of willow. Tea made from willow 

bark was used for stiff joints and rheumatic pains. 

By the 1840’s, chemists had isolated salicylic acid 

from willow and found it produced marked 

antipyretic (fever-reducing) and analgesic (painkilling) effects and “striking relief of acute articular 

rheumatism.” Modern aspirin (acetylsalicylic acid) is 

a synthetic product. Salicylic acid got its name from 

Salix.

Industry: Most black willow lumber is used for 

shipping boxes. 

Wildlife: The willows are among the first plants to 

provide honey bees, after long winters, with nectar 

and pollen. Domestic grazing animals browse in 

willow thickets. Elk and beaver browse on willow 

leaves in the summer and willow twigs in the winter. 

Ornamental: Black willow can be planted as an 

ornamental where a fine-textured shade tree is 

desired. It will tolerate dry soils with reduced vigor.

Conservation: One of the greatest services of the 

willows is as a soil-binder. Growing along the banks 

of countless streams, their fibrous roots help to 

prevent the soil from being washed away. 

Status

Please consult the PLANTS Web site and your State 

Department of Natural Resources for this plant’s 

current status (e.g. threatened or endangered species, 

state noxious status, and wetland indicator values.

Description and Adaptation

A member of the Willow Family (Salicaceae), black 

willow is a small to medium-sized tree 30 to 60 ft 

high and about 14 inches in diameter with a broad, 

irregular crown and a superficial root system. 

Leaves are simple, alternate, deciduous, narrow, 

lance-shaped, with tapered bases, rounded base, 

finely toothed margin, blade yellow-green on both 

sides, with a few small hairs on the lower surface; 

petiole slender. Flowers of black willow: male and 

female catkins on separate trees. Catkins are 4-5 cm 

long, on ends of leafy shoots, many small, yellowgreen flowers without petals. Twigs are light-red, 

slender, and flexible. Buds narrow, conical, orangebrown; leaf scars narrow, crescent shaped; broad, 

flat, often shaggy ridges; pith pale brown, small. The 

bark is dark gray-brown to nearly blackish, divided 

into deep fissures separating thick, interlacing, 

sometimes scaly ridges. 

Black willow is adapted wherever ample soil 

moisture is found. Black willow grows best where 

the average annual rainfall is 51 inches, of which 20 
inches falls during the growing season, April through 

August. 

The estimated life span for black willow averages 65 

years with a range of 40 to 100 years. 

Wood characteristics: The wood is of moderately 

light to light density, moderately soft. It does not 

splinter easily, which makes excellent wood for toys, 

crates, and barn floors. 

Distribution: Black willow ranges from New 

Brunswick to Manitoba, south to Florida and Texas

Black willow distribution from USDA-NRCS PLANTS Database.

Habitat: This species is usually found on moist or 

wet soils along banks of streams, lakes, swamps 

around farm ponds, and pasture sloughs. 

Establishment 

Black willow is easily established from cuttings. 

Stringent requirements of seed germination and 

seedling establishment limit black willow to wet 

soils.

Management

Stands of black willow can stagnate if not 

periodically thinned. 

Pests and Potential Problems

A number of insect species attack black willow but 

few cause serious damage, such as, forest tent 

caterpillar, cotton wood leaf beetle, willow sawfly, 

stem borers, and twig borers.

Seeds and Plant Production 

Good seed crops occur almost every year with only a 

few interspersed poor crop years. The seeds are 

widely disseminated by wind and water. Willow 

seed must be collected as soon as it ripens and sown 

immediately. Stem cuttings are highly desirable to 

propagate trees. 

Fire Effects

Black willow is very susceptible to fire. Hot fires can 

kill entire stands of willows. Black willow will 

sprout at the base following fire. 

Cultivars, Improved, and Selected Materials (and 

area of origin) ‘Webb’ compact willow is a 

“strikingly different vase-shaped form of black 

willow.” This unusual form was found by Mr. 

Charles Webb in Madison County, Florida. 

Control 

Please contact your local agricultural extension 

specialist or county weed specialist to learn what 

works best in your area and how to use it safely. 

Always read label and safety instructions for each 

control method. USDA, NRCS does not guarantee or 

warranty the products and control methods named, 

and other products may be equally effective.

Prepared By

John M. Row

USDA NRCS, Manhattan Plant Materials Center, 

Manhattan, Kansas 66502

Wayne A. Geyer

Forestry Division, Kansas State University, 

Manhattan, Kansas 66506

Edited: 

For more information about this and other plants, please contact 

your local NRCS field office or Conservation District, and visit the 

PLANTS Web site<http://plants.usda.gov> or the Plant Materials 

Program Web site <http://Plant-Materials.nrcs.usda.gov> 

The U.S. Department of Agriculture (USDA) prohibits 

discrimination in all its programs and activities on the basis of 

race, color, national origin, age, disability, and where applicable, 

sex, marital status, familial status, parental status, religion, sexual 

orientation, genetic information, political beliefs, reprisal, or 

because all or a part of an individual's income is derived from any 

public assistance program. (Not all prohibited bases apply to all 

programs.) Persons with disabilities who require alternative 

means for communication of program information (Braille, large 

print, audiotape, etc.) should contact USDA's TARGET Center at 

(202) 720-2600 (voice and TDD). 

To file a complaint of discrimination write to USDA, Director, 

Office of Civil Rights, 1400 Independence Avenue, S.W., 

Washington, D.C. 20250-9410 or call (800) 795-3272 (voice) or 

(202) 720-6382 (TDD). USDA is an equal opportunity provider 

and employer."

Read about Civil Rights at the Natural Resources Conservation 

Service.
 Plant Guide 

Plant Materials <http://plant-materials.nrcs.usda.gov/>

Plant Fact Sheet/Guide Coordination Page <http://plant-materials.nrcs.usda.gov/intranet/pfs.html>

National Plant Data Center <http://npdc.usda.gov>

BLACK WILLOW

Salix nigra Marsh.

Plant Symbol = SANI

Contributed by: USDA NRCS Plant Materials 

Center, Manhattan, Kansas & Kansas State 

University, Forestry Research

Photos Courtesy of Philip Barbour, Wildlife Biologist, USDA 

NRCS, Madison, Mississippi

Alternate Names

American, Brittle, Champlain, Dudley, Gooding, gulf 

black, puzzle, rough American, scythe-leaf, scytheleaved, southwestern black, swamp, tall black, Texas 

black, and western black willow; sauce, saule, saule 

noir, sauz (Espanol), swamp walnut, weide, wilg, 

willow, and willow catkins

 

The name willow derives from the Old English 

wilwe. The botanical name Salix was the name given 

by the ancient Romans.

Uses

Conservation: One of the greatest services of the 

willows is as a soil-binder. Growing along the banks 

of countless streams, their fibrous roots help to 

prevent the soil from being washed away. Willow 

has been planted frequently to help stabilize the 

banks of eroding streams, to hold the soil in road cuts 

and embankments, and to bind shifting sands. Black 

willows dense root system is excellent for stabilizing 

eroding lands (Pitcher and McKnight, 1990). 

Ethnobotanic: The ancient Greeks knew the 

therapeutic values of willow. Tea made from willow 

bark was used for stiff joints and rheumatic pains. 

By the 1840’s, chemists had isolated salicylic acid 

from willow and found it produced marked 

antipyretic (fever-reducing) and analgesic (painkilling) effects and “striking relief of acute articular 

rheumatism.” Modern aspirin (acetylsalicylic acid) is 

a synthetic product. Salicylic acid got its name from 

Salix (Randall, 1969). 

Aboriginal peoples of North America used various 

plant parts of black willow for uses such as drugs to 

treat aliments, fiber for basketry and other uses. 

Drug Uses – “The medicinal part of the plant is the 

inner bark and was used as a pain reliever for a 

variety of ailments (arnatural.org, 2010).” 

Antiperiodic: a medicine preventing the recurrence 

of periodic disturbances and irregularities. Antirheumatics: medicines correcting and relieving 

rheumatism. Antiseptics: agents preventing or 

countering decay, or the formation of pus. 

Astringents: agents producing contractions of organic 

tissues, or the arrest of a discharge. (Meridian 

Institute, 2010). Analgesic: Infusion of roots taken 

by the Koasati for headaches (Taylor, 1940). 

Antidiarrheal: An infusion of bark used by the

Cherokee to check the bowels (Hamel and 

Chiltoskey, 1975); Blood Medicine: a decoction of 

roots and bark taken by the Houma for “feebleness” 

due to thin blood (Speck, 1941). Carminative: A 

compound decoction taken for stomach gas by the 

Iroquois (Herrick, 1977). Cough Medicine: A 

compound decoction was taken by the Iroquois for 

coughs (Herrick, 1977). Dermatological Aid: The 

Cherokee used a decoction or infusion of bark as a 

wash to make the hair grow; and the bark was also 

used as a poultice (Hamel and Chiltoskey, 1975); The 

Micmac made a poultice of bruised leaves used on 

sprains and bruises; also a poultice of scraped root 

and spirits was applied to bruises and sprains (Speck, 

1917). Febrifuge: An infusion taken by the 

Cherokee for fever (Hamel and Chiltoskey, 1975); 

the Houma made a decoction of roots and bark was 

taken for fever (Speck, 1941); Cold infusion of roots 

was taken for fevers by the Koasati (Taylor, 1940). 

Gastrointestinal Aid: decoction of roots taken by the 

Koasati for dyspepsia (Taylor, 1940). Orthopedic 

Aid: the Micmac applied a poultice of bruised leaves 

to use on sprains and bruises; also a poultice of 

scraped root and spirits was applied to sprains and 

broken bones (Speck, 1917). Respiratory Aid: the 

root was chewed by Cherokee ball players “for wind”

(Hamel and Chiltoskey, 1975). Throat Aid: infusion 

of inner bark taken for lost voice and root chewed for

hoarseness by the Cherokee (Hamel and Chiltoskey, 

1975) and used by the Iroquois for mouth and throat 

abscesses (Herrick, 1977). Tonic: the bark was also 
used as a tonic by the Cherokee (Hamel and 

Chiltoskey, 1975).

Basketry and Weaving – The Papago split twigs in 

half lengthwise, sun dried and used as a foundation in 

coiled basketry and used for sewing coiled basketry; 

also used for curved structures in wrapped weaving 

(Castetter and Underhill, 1935). 

Dyeing Agent – A dye made from willow bark has 

good wash fastness and fair light fastness. The bark 

also contains a natural catechol tanning agent used to 

prepare leather for tanning (Cameo.mfg.org, 2010). 

The Patowatomi made a scarlet colored dye from the 

willows roots (Active Concepts, 2010). The roots are 

also used to make a yellow dye for dyeing porcupine 

quills (Prindle, 2010). 

Other – Rodent proof granaries (Anonymous No. 3, 

2008). 

Industry: Most black willow lumber goes into 

shipping boxes, baskets, and other containers, and 

into furniture (especially kitchen cabinets) and 

caskets. The lumber is sometimes used in building 

construction for roof and wall sheathing, and subflooring. It has been used for making charcoal, slack 

cooperage, veneer, cutting boards, woodenware, sash, 

doors, and other millwork, and for paper pulp. It is 

used sometimes as a core in hardwood plywood

(Panshin and deZeeuw, 1980; Anonymous No. 1, 

2008). 

Wood characteristics: The wood is of moderately 

light to light density (specific gravity approximately 

0.34 green, .42 oven dry), moderately soft. It does

not splinter easily, which makes excellent wood for 

toys, crates, and barn floors. When properly 

seasoned, it warps very little. The heartwood is 

grayish-brown or reddish-brown color, often with 

darker streaks along the grain. Sapwood is whitish or 

creamy yellow (Panshin and deZeeuw, 1980). The 

wood is uniformly textured, grain somewhat 

interlocking, and has no characteristic odor or taste 

(Anonymous No. 4, 2008).

Ornamental: Black willow can be planted as an 

ornamental where a fine-textured shade tree is 

desired. It will tolerate dry soils with reduced vigor 

(Ohio Trees, 2008).

Wildlife: The willows are among the first plants to 

provide honey bees, after long winters, with nectar 

and pollen. Domestic grazing animals browse in 

willow thickets. Elk and beaver browse on willow 

leaves in the summer and willow twigs in the winter. 

Willow shoots are common food of beaver, hares, 

and rabbits. Black willow and other willows are host 

plants for Viceroy and red-spotted purple butterflies 

(Anonymous No. 2, 2008) 

Status

Please consult the PLANTS Web site and your State 

Department of Natural Resources for this plant’s 

current status (e.g. threatened or endangered species, 

state noxious status, and wetland indicator values).

Description

General: About 90 species of Salix are native to 

North America, but only 27 of them attain tree size, 

of which, black willow is the most abundant. Most 

of the commercial willow timber is produced by S. 

nigra (Pitcher and McKnight, 1990). A member of 

the Willow Family (Salicaceae), black willow is a 

small to medium-sized tree 30 to 60 ft high and about 

14 inches in diameter (max. 140 by 9 ft) with a broad, 

irregular crown and a superficial root system (Dirr, 

1977). The leaves are simple, alternate, deciduous; 

narrow, lance-shaped, with tapered tip, rounded base, 

5-13 cm long, 8-12 mm wide; finely toothed margin; 

blade yellow-green on both sides with a few small 

hairs on the lower surface; petiole slender, 6-10 mm 

long. The bark is dark gray-brown to nearly blackish, 

divided into deep fissures separating thick, 

interlacing, sometimes scaly ridges (Harlow et al., 

1979). Black willow is named for its dark graybrown bark (Nix, 2010).

Black willow bark 

Twigs are light-red, slender, and flexible. Buds 

narrow, conical, orange-brown; leaf scars narrow, 

crescent shaped; broad, flat, often shaggy ridges; pith 

pale brown, small. Flowers of black willow: male 

and female catkins on separate trees. Catkins are 4-5 

cm long, on ends of leafy shoots, many small, 

yellow-green flowers without petals (Stephens, 

1969). 
The biggest tree, a champion black willow, according 

to The American Forestry Association’s Hall of Fame 

for Trees was in Traverse City, Michigan, with a 

circumference at breast height of 7.9 m (26 ft-1 in), a 

height of 25.9 m (85 ft), and a spread of 24.1 m (79 

ft) (American Forests, 2008). The estimated life span 

for black willow averages 65 years with a range of 40 

to 100 years (Stringer, 2006).

Flowering and Fruiting: Black willow flowers 

between February and April in the southern part of its 

range and as late as May or June in the northern part. 

Flowers usually appear with the leaves. The trees 

begin to bear fruit at about 10 years of age; however, 

optimum seed-bearing age ranges from 25 to 75 

years. The mature seeds fall between April and July

(Fowells, 1965). 

Distribution: Black willow ranges from New 

Brunswick to Manitoba, south to Florida and Texas 

(Steyermark, 1963). For current distribution, please 

consult the Plant Profile page for this species on the 

PLANTS Web site.

Habitat: This species is usually found on moist or 

wet soils along banks of streams, lakes, swamps 

around farm ponds, and pasture sloughs (Stephens, 

1969). 

Adaptation

Black willow ranges over most of the eastern half of 

the United States and attains tree size throughout the 

greater part of its range, commercial production of its 

lumber occurs mainly in the alluvial bottomlands of 

the lower Mississippi River. The species grows best 

where the average annual rainfall is 51 inches, of 

which 20 inches falls during the growing season, 

April through August. The willow survives 

temperature extremes of 115oF to -50oF in parts of its 

range. Typically, the average maximum is 93oF in 

summer and 60oF in winter (Fowells, 1965).

Photo Courtesy of Chris Hoag, Wetland Plant Ecologist, USDA 

NRCS, Aberdeen Plant Materials Center

Establishment 

Black willow is easily established from cuttings. 

Stringent requirements of seed germination and 

seedling establishment limit black willow to wet 

soils, especially flood plains where it grows in pure 

stands near water courses (Pitcher and McKnight, 

1990). 

Management

Stands of black willow can stagnate if not properly 

thinned. A light thinning to remove understory trees 

should occur early and frequently to forestall 

stagnation and mortality. Avoid over thinning as 

open stands are subject to heavy windthrow and stem 

breakage. A proper thinning should leave a stand of 

about 65-75 square feet of basal area per acre

(Fowells, 1965). 

Pests and Potential Problems

A number of insect species attack black willow but 

few cause serious damage. Forest tent capterpillar 

(Malacosoma disstria), gypsy moth (Lymantria 

dispar), cotton wood leaf beetle (Chrysomela 

scripta), willow sawfly (Nematus ventralis), and the 

imported willow leaf beetle (Plagiodera versicolora) 

sometimes partially, occasionally completely, 

defoliate willow trees, reducing growth but seldom 

killing. Stem borers, such as the cottonwood borer 

(Plectrodera scalator) attack willows and may kill by 

girdling the base. Twig borers such as the willowbranch borer (Oberea ferruginea), feed on the 

branches and cause deformities that may be 

undesirable in ornamentals (Pitcher and McKnight, 

1990). 

A number of diseases plaguing willows are 

transmitted by insects. Willow blight, Pollaccia

saliciperda, is transmitted by borers of which Salix 

species are the only known hosts (Pitcher and 

Black Willow 

Catkins 
McKnight, 1990). Symptoms are dead leaves and 

shoots due to fungal infection with striking black 

spots on the leaves shoot tips blackened and shaped 

like hooks. The damage can be so extensive that 

entire tree appears to have been denuded by feeding 

insects (Stihl, 2010). Phytophthora cactorum causes 

bleeding canker, lesions on the lower trunk that 

discharge a dark-colored, often slimy liquid. 

Confined to the phloem and cambium area, it can 

result in death if the canker girdles the trunk. 

Cytospora chrysosperma causes canker in poplar and 

willow. Under forest conditions, cytospora canker is 

of little consequence but when trees become 

weakened by drought, competition, or neglect, losses 

can be heavy. In nursery beds, losses of up to 75 

percent of cuttings have been reported. Leaf rust 

caused by Melampsora spp. is common on seedlings 

throughout the range of black willow. Mistletoes 

(Phoradendron spp.) damage and deform but seldom 

kill willows (Pitcher and McKnight, 1990).

 

Droughts that lower the water table can cause serious 

mortality where willow tends to be shallow-rooted as 

on clay-capped alluvial soils (Fowells, 1965).

Environmental Concerns

None known

Seeds and Plant Production 

Good seed crops occur almost every year with only a 

few interspersed poor crop years. Failures resulting 

from late freezes after the flower buds have begun to 

open are rare. Large volumes of seed are produced 

with an average of 2 to 3 million per pound. The 

seeds are widely disseminated by wind and water. 

When the seeds fall, the long silky hairs act as wings 

to carry the seed very long distances (Fowells, 1965).

Willow seed must be collected as soon as it ripens

and sown immediately. Stem cuttings are highly 

desirable to propagate trees (Brinkman, 1974). 

Fire Effects

Although fires are rare in the bottomland areas where 

black willow grows, black willow is very susceptible 

to fire. Hot fires can kill entire stands of willows. 

Slow, light fires can seriously wound willows, 

allowing wood rooting fungi to enter. Young 

seedlings and saplings will be destroyed by fire. 

Black willow will sprout at the base following fire 

(Tesky, 1992; Pitcher and McKnight, 1990).

Cultivars, Improved, and Selected Materials (and 

area of origin) ‘Webb’ compact willow is a 

“strikingly different vase-shaped form of black 

willow. It forms a small, dense tree. This unusual 

form occurred as a single tree on the farm of Mr. 

Charles Webb in Madison County, Florida” 

(Woodlanders, 2008).

Contact your local Natural Resources Conservation 

Service (formerly Soil Conservation Service) office 

for more information. Look in the phone book under 

“United States Government.” The Natural Resources 

Conservation Service will be listed under the 

subheading “Department of Agriculture.”

Control 

Please contact your local agricultural extension 

specialist or county weed specialist to learn what 

works best in your area and how to use it safely. 

Always read label and safety instructions for each 

control method. Trade names and control measures 

appear in this document only to provide specific 

information. USDA, NRCS does not guarantee or 

warranty the products and control methods named, 

and other products may be equally effective.

References

Active Concepts. 2010. ABS Willow Bark Extract. 

Technical Data Sheet. http://www.incosmetics.com/ExhibitorLibrary/830/ABS_Willow_

Bark_Extract_Powder-Technical_Data_Sheetv5_3.pdf [online: cited 25 Feb 2010].

arnatural.org. 2010. Willow-Nature’s Aspirin. 

Univ. of Arkansas, Div. of Agriculture, Co-op Ext. 

Serv. 

http://www.arnatural.org/Wildfoods/Uses_Trees.htm

[online: cited 25 Feb 2010].

Anonymous No. 1. 2008. Black willow wood 

properties by Connected Lines. 

http://www.connectedlines.com/wood/wood15.htm 

[online: cited 23 May 2008]. 

Anonymous No. 2. 2008. 

http://www.butterflygardeningandconservation.com/p

lant/host/s-nigra.php [online: cited 17 November

2008]. 

Anonymous No. 3. 2008. Southern California 

Culture

http://www.fourdir.com/southern_california_culture.

htm [online: cited 9 Dec 2008].

Anonymous No. 4. 2008.

http://www.exotichardwoodsnorthamerica.com/willow.htm [online: cited 17

November 2008]. 
American Forests, National Tree Register of Big 

Trees: Salix nigra. 

http://americanforests.org/resources/bigtrees/register.

php?details=623 [online: cited 23 May 2008].

Brinkman, K. A. 1974. In Schopmeyer, C.S. Tech. 

Cord. Seeds of woody plants in the United States. 

USDA-FS Agriculture Handbook No. 450.

Washington, DC.

Cameo.mfg.org. 2010. Material Name: willow bark. 

http://

[online: cited 25 Feb 2010].

cameo.mfa.org/browse/popup_print_material.as

p?materialid=10102&type=all

Castetter, E. F. and R. M. Underhill. 1935. 

Ethnobiological Studies in American Southwest II. 

The Ethnobiology of the Papago Indians. Univ. of 

New Mexico Bull. 4(3): 1-84.

Dirr, M. A. 1977. Manual of Woody Landscape 

Plants: Their Identification, Ornamental 

Characteristics, Culture, Progation and Uses. Stipes 

Publishing Co., Champaign, Ill.

Fowells, H. A. 1965. Silvics of Forest Trees of the 

United States. Agriculture Handbook No. 271. 

USDA Forest Service, Washington, DC.

Hamel, P. B. and M. U. Chiltoskey. 1975. Cherokee 

Plants and Their Uses – A 400 Year History. Herald 

Publ. Co., Sylva, N.C.

Harlow, W. H., E. S. Harrar, and F. M. White. 1979. 

p. 224-225. In Textbook of Dendrology. Sixth 

Edition. McGraw-Hill Book Co., New York. 

Herrick, J. W. 1977. Iroquois Medical Botany. 

State Univ. of New York, Albany, PhD Thesis.

Mausert, O. 1932. Herbs for Heath. 

www.meridianinstitute.com/echerb/Files/classics/ma

usert/matmedin.html [online: cited 25 Feb 2010].

Ohio Trees 2008.

http://www.ohiodnr.com/forestry/trees/willow_black/

tabid/5432/Default.aspx [online: cited 14 Nov 2008].

Nix, S. 2010. Black Willow, A Common Tree in 

North America.

http://forestry.about.com/od/hardwoods/tp/Salix_nigr

a.htm [online: cited 5 Mar 2010].

Panshin, A.J. and C. deZeeuw. 1980. p. 547-549. In

Textbook of wood technology, 4th Edition. McGrawHill Series in Forest Resources. McGraw-Hill Book 

Company, New York.

Pitcher, J. A. and J. S. McKnight. 1990. Salix nigra

Marsh. Black Willow. In Silvics of North America. 

USDA-FS Agriculture Handbook No. 654. 

http://www.na.fs.fed.us/spfo/pubs/silvics_manual/vol

ume_2/Salix/nigra.htm [online: cited 14 Nov 2008].

Prindle, T. 2010. Natural Dyes for Porcupine Quills. 

http://www.nativetech.org/quill/dyes.html [online: 

cited 25 Feb 2010].

Randall, C. E. 1969. A willow grows aslant a brook. 

Enjoying Our Trees. American Forestry Association. 

P. 101-107.

Speck, F. G. 1917. Medicine Practices of the 

Northeastern Algonguians. Proceedings of the 19th 

International Congress of Americanists. 

Speck, F. G. 1941. A List of Plant Curatives 

Obtained From the Houma Indians of Louisiana. 

Primitive Man 14:49-75.

Stephens, H.A. 1969. Trees, Shrubs, and Woody 

Vines of Kansas. Univ. Press of Kansas, Lawrence. 

Steyermark, J. A. 1963. Flora of Missouri. Iowa State 

University Press, Ames, Iowa. 

Stihl. 2010. Encyclopaedia of tree diseases. 

http://www.stihl.com [online: cited 4 Mar 2010].

Stringer, J. 2006. Two-age system and deferment 

harvests. Professional Hardwood Notes SP 679. 

http://www.uky.edu/Ag/Forestry/extension/pub/pdf/f

or103.pdf [online: cited 9 Dec 2008].

Taylor, L. A. 1940. Plants Used As Curatives by 

Certain Southeastern Tribes. Botanical Museum of 

Harvard Univ. Cambridge, MA.

Tesky, J. 1992. Salix nigra. In Fire Effects 

Information System, [Online]. USDA-FS Rocky 

Mountain Exp. Sta., Fire Sciences Laboratory

(Producer). 

http://www.fs.fed.us/database/feis/plants/tree/salnig/a

ll.html [online: cited 18 Nov 2008].

Woodlanders. 2008. Salix nigra “Webb” Willow, 

Webb, compact from Woodlanders, Inc. 

http://www.woodlanders.net/index.cfm?fuseaction=pl

ants.plantDetail&plant_id=229 [online: cited 17 Nov

2008].
Prepared By

John M. Row

USDA NRCS, Manhattan Plant Materials Center, 

Manhattan, Kansas

Wayne A. Geyer

Forestry Division, Kansas State University, 

Manhattan, Kansas

Edited: 

For more information about this and other plants, please contact 

your local NRCS field office or Conservation District, and visit the 

PLANTS Web site<http://plants.usda.gov> or the Plant Materials 

Program Web site <http://Plant-Materials.nrcs.usda.gov> 

The U.S. Department of Agriculture (USDA) prohibits 

discrimination in all its programs and activities on the basis of 

race, color, national origin, age, disability, and where applicable, 

sex, marital status, familial status, parental status, religion, sexual 

orientation, genetic information, political beliefs, reprisal, or 

because all or a part of an individual's income is derived from any 

public assistance program. (Not all prohibited bases apply to all 

programs.) Persons with disabilities who require alternative 

means for communication of program information (Braille, large 

print, audiotape, etc.) should contact USDA's TARGET Center at 

(202) 720-2600 (voice and TDD). 

To file a complaint of discrimination write to USDA, Director, 

Office of Civil Rights, 1400 Independence Avenue, S.W., 

Washington, D.C. 20250-9410 or call (800) 795-3272 (voice) or 

(202) 720-6382 (TDD). USDA is an equal opportunity provider 

and employer."

Read about Civil Rights at the Natural Resources Conservation 

Service. 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

540.78 Checklist for Plant Selection Studies

The following checklist may be used to track the progress of a Plant Selection Study 

and to identify the proper order for items to be completed when making a plant 

release.

Item

Date 

Completed

1. A study plan has been prepared to identify the goals of the release.

2. Adequate consideration has been given to existing releases or commercial 

availability of the species to avoid duplication of efforts.

3. Collection strategies to meet the objective have been well thought out and 

are defensible to meet the purpose of the release.

4. Evaluation data has been summarized showing justification for this release.

5. Advanced evaluation documentation has been prepared.

6. The plant being released has been adequately identified as to genus, species, 

and subspecies, if appropriate.

7. The plant has undergone the Environmental Evaluation process and will not 

pose significant adverse effects on the environment. The release has been 

subjected to the considerations referenced in Sections 540.33(A)(3) and

Section 540.83.

8. The cultivar or pre-varietal name has received clearance from the NPMC.

9. The approved name and new release is being registered with the appropriate 

authorities per Section 540.34(D)(6).

10. Consideration has been given to the desirability of seeking protection under 

the PVPA or patent statute.

11. Adequate seed, plants, or other propagules are available to meet expected 

demand by commercial producers.

12. A date has been estimated when seed or plants will be available 

commercially, which will serve as a public release date for promotional 

purposes.

13. The NPMC has been contacted regarding long-term storage of material in 

the National Plant Germplasm System.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Item

Date 

Completed

14. An information campaign has been developed to promote the new release, as 

per Section 540.34(H). This is to include a schedule for special 

demonstration plantings (Section 540.17(D)), if any are planned.

15. A release notice has been prepared. 

16. A release brochure has been prepared.

17. An existing Plant Fact Sheet or Plant Guide has been updated to include the 

new release or a new document prepared for the species.

18. A Conservation Plant Characteristics worksheet has been completed for the 

new release and submitted to the National Plant Data Center.

19. The PM Package has been provided to the PM Release Committee through a 

NTC Plant Materials Specialist for review.

20. All required signatures for the notice have been obtained. Note: The release 

is official on the date of the last signature, which is always the Director, 

ESD.

21. A paper copy of all documentation for the release (including evaluation 

documentation, cultivar name registration forms, signed release notice, and 

any articles, release brochures, and planting guides) has been distributed to 

cooperators on the release, and an electronic copy of these materials has 

been sent to the NPL.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010) 

540.79 ESCOP Policy Statement for Developing and Releasing Improved 

Plants

ESCOP Policy Statement for Developing and Releasing Improved Plants

Publication Preparation 

This revision was prepared by the Seed Policy Subcommittee of the Experiment Station Committee on 

Organization and Policy in 1988. The policy is still current:

K. A. Huston, Director-at-Large, North Central Region

C. R. Krueger, Pennsylvania, Northeast Region

P. A. Miller, ARS, USDA

M. H. Niehaus, Colorado, Western Region

R. L Thompson, Minnesota, ESCOP Representative to AOSCA

K. W. Tipton, Louisiana, Southern Region

R. L. Lower, Wisconsin, North Central Region

Publication History 

June, 1954

Revised April, 1962

Revised February 28, 1967

Revised April 20, 1972

Final Revision June 26, 1972

Approved by ESCOP September 12, 1972

Approved by ARS, USDA July 20, 1972

Approved by SCS, USDA July 28, 1972

Concurred in by NCCPB August 29, 1972

Revised and Approved by ESCOP November 16, 1988

 Policy is current as of August 2006

This revised statement has been approved by the four State Agricultural Experiment Station Directors' 

Association & and the Experiment Station Committee on Organization and Policy (ESCOP).

Before publication, informational copies of the guidelines were sent to ARS, SCS, FS, the American Seed 

Trade Association (ASTA) and the National Council of Commercial Plant Breeders (NCCPB).

For additional copies, address request to R.L. Lower, 136 Agriculture Hall. 1450 Linden Drive, Madison, 

WI 53706.

Contents

Foreword

I. Sources for New Germplasm Improvement

A. Collection, Introduction and Preliminary Evaluations of New Plant 

 Germplasm

B. Use of Introductions

C. Recognition of Originating Source of Introduced Materials
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010) 

II. Studies of Heredity and Methods of Improvement, Enhancement via Biotechnologies 

and the Conduct of Basic/Fundamental Research

A. Obligation of State Agricultural Experiment Stations 

B. Availability and Use of Basic Genetic Materials 

C. Prompt Availability of Results 

D. Acknowledgment of Use of Publicly or Privately Developed Basic Genetic 

Materials

III. Development of Superior Varieties and Novel Germplasm

A. A Function of the State Agricultural Experiment Stations

B. Interrelations with Private Plant Breeding Programs

IV. Testing and Evaluating Experimental Varieties

A. Adequate Comparisons with Standard Varieties

B. Interstate and Regional Tests

C. Testing for Special Requirements

D. Protecting Lines and Varieties Against Premature or Unauthorized Distribution

V. Guidelines for SAES Release of Germplasm

A. Availability and Use of Basic Genetic Materials

B. Releasing Finished Genetic Materials

C. Policy Committee or Board of Review for Variety Release

D. Interstate or Interagency Release Procedures

E. Protection and Restricted Release

F. Preserving Genetic Identity

VI. Naming and Registering Varieties 

 A. Designation

B. Use of Names

C. Registering Varieties

V11. Definition of Classes of Certified Seed and Certification Standards

VIII. Increase and Maintenance of Breeder Seed

A. Responsibility for Maintaining Breeder Seed

B. Supplying Sample of Seed to National Seed Storage Laboratory

IX. Increase, Maintenance and Distribution of Foundation Seed

A. Multiplying Foundation Seed

B. Distributing Foundation Seed

C. Basic Principles in Foundation Seed Programs

X. Preparation and Release of Information

A. Coordinating Publicity Among States and Agencies
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010) 

B. Matching Seed Production and Demand for Varieties

Appendix: Nomenclature

Foreword

This statement offers guidance to scientists and administrators of State Agricultural Experiment Stations 

(SAESs) concerning the development, release, and multiplication of germplasm of seed-propagated plants 

as either germplasm or crop varieties. Policies and practices addressed are those for which there is general 

agreement or for which uniformity or continued cooperation among the SAESs is critical.

In recent years, the policies and practices of SAESs have changed significantly in response to: continuing 

expansion of the private plant breeding industry; the changing needs of producers, growers, seedsmen and 

postharvest industries; the emergence of new research opportunities and industries in molecular genetics 

and biotechnology; continuing concern over adequacy of funding; public and private sector needs for new 

and replacement scientists; changes in state and U.S. Department of Agriculture (USDA) research policies, 

and new interpretations of patent laws. Less visible, but equally significant, have been the changing and 

diverging perceptions of universities and their state legislatures relative to public purpose doctrine and the 

use of public funds, intellectual property rights, academic freedom and conflict of interest.

Publicly supported germplasm development research by SAES began about a century ago. Since then, most 

SAESs have been directed into such work by congress and state legislatures in order to meet the specific

needs of agriculture of those states. New knowledge, new technologies, new and improved germplasm 

resources, and new varieties are major products. Cooperation among the SAESs, USDA organizations 

-Agricultural Research Service (ARS), Natural Resources Conservation Service (NRCS), Forest Service 

(FS) and private industry is positive and strengthens opportunities for germplasm improvement. Hallmarks 

of cooperation include free exchange of information and of germplasm materials and varieties, shared 

development and maintenance of germplasm resource banks, shared responsibility for regional 

multilocational testing of each other's materials and varieties, release of only truly superior materials and 

varieties individually or cooperatively as appropriate, to the relative investments in developing them and 

fostering infrastructures to ensure entry, movement and maintenance of public varieties in intra- and 

interstate commerce. Legislative mandates for SAESs today operate in markedly changed circumstances.

The SAESs contribute to the education and training of future plant breeders, geneticists, biotechnologists 

and other plant scientists through linkages with instructional programs of parent universities. Plant science 

instructional programs gain most of their capacity for continual updating and modernization by engaging 

SAES research scientists in instructional activities. These scientists reflect the diversity and changes in 

specialization characteristic of the frontiers of plant science research. Student opportunities to gain 

firsthand work experience in research are similarly enriched by SAES research programs. About 

three-fourths of the assistantships available to graduate students in agriculture are in SAES programs. But 

as research programs shift emphasis, so also must instructional programs change. Paradoxically, growth in 

private plant breeding and variety development programs reduces the need for some public breeding 

programs but increases the need for trained plant breeders on which private industry depends for that 

growth.

Since the 1930s, privately supported germplasm development has expanded greatly. Private firms then and 

now rely heavily on publicly funded research to supply new advances in genetics, breeding, science and 

technology, and improved germplasm resource materials. Today, many private firms contribute to 

germplasm needs of agriculture, particularly in varietal development, notably in the multimillion acre 

crops. This competition among firms enhances variety improvement essential to keeping U.S. producers 

competitive at home and abroad. Rapid variety improvements are sustained, in part, by continuing releases 

of public germplasm with special qualities such as resistance to a new local race of pathogens or improved 

protein. Public varieties also contribute, though public varietal development in many crops has given way 

to private varietal development.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010) 

In many states, a lack of suitable private varieties or special production or marketing conditions have 

enhanced public support for germplasm development and variety releases in some relatively large acreage 

crops. In most states, small acreage or specialty crops are economically important to the state but offer little 

incentive to private firms to develop either germplasm resources or varieties. The SAESs respond as 

resources permit.

Currently, SAESs face several troublesome and unresolved issues. Maintaining free exchange of 

germplasm among researchers and its relatively free use in developing new germplasm resources and 

varieties is a major issue. Another issue is the extent and impact of the use of utility patents to protect 

intellectual property rights in the public and private sector research. Yet another issue is the impact of 

varying university policies relative to public purpose doctrine and uses of public funds, intellectual property 

rights, academic freedom and conflicts of interest.

Finally, prospects of intensified long-term competition for domestic and foreign markets are causing states 

to seek a competitive edge through locally controlled supply, research and marketing programs. Similar 

competition occurs internationally as plant breeding moves to multinational firms. Such competition can 

impede free flow of information and germplasm.

SAES personnel will continue to cooperate jointly with ARS and other agencies of USDA and private 

industry, to preserve, evaluate and enhance germplasm and to advance graduate training in plant breeding. 

Products of joint research between SAESs and ARS will be handled as mutually agreed by the cooperators 

following their respective policy guidelines.

Responsibilities and Guidelines Concerning Development, Release and 

Multiplication of Publicly Developed Germplasm and Varieties of Seed-Propagated 

Crops

These guidelines are intended to identify those practices and policies relating to development, release and 

multiplication of germplasm and varieties in SAES programs which may best serve public interests. They 

cover both agronomic and horticultural crops. Cooperation among scientists and among SAESs, federal 

agencies and private firms takes many forms. One of the most important is sharing of germplasm and 

information about germplasm. In this document, germplasm includes seed and vegetatively propagated 

genetic material, cell and tissue culture lines, DNA fragments and pollen.

I. Sources for New Germplasm Improvement 

A. Collection, Introduction and Preliminary Evaluations of New Plant Germplasm

The USDA, through its ARS and the NRCS Plant Materials Center Program, in cooperation with 

the SAESs, collects, evaluates, preserves and distributes plant germplasm materials from foreign 

and domestic sources. Each introduction or accession is identified serially by an inventory number 

(PI no.) along with passport data. Through various cooperative arrangements, characteristics of 

accessions are evaluated and catalogued. These characteristics include reactions to insects, disease 

and climatic conditions, quality attributes, potential promising end-products, and other desirable 

traits. This information is made available to public agencies and the private sector through the 

USDA Germplasm Resources Information Network (GRIN) database.

State and federal agencies other than ARS also conduct domestic and foreign plant explorations. 

Such activities should be coordinated with those of the ARS to prevent duplicate introductions, 

evaluations and distributions of the same germplasm. Access to resulting plant collections by 

public and private plant breeders is encouraged; it is required of all ARS supported collections.

B. Use of Introductions

Persons receiving new materials through the National Plant Germplasm System are requested to 

report to donors their observations and performance test results of materials. These reports are 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010) 

compiled, annotated and disseminated through the four regional research (RRF) projects on plant 

introductions1. Lists of stocks maintained in the Germplasm System are available from GRIN. 

Individuals or organizations proposing to increase and distribute seed or plant materials of such 

introductions in their original genetic form are asked to make this intention known to the donor 

agency. Plans for joint SAES/ARS release, thereby, can be considered. Confusion that might arise 

from duplication of identifying names or numbers given to the same introduction by public or 

private interests thus can be avoided (see Section V).

C. Recognition of Originating Source of Introduced Materials 

Recipients of introduced materials should publicly acknowledge their source when such materials 

are increased or distributed in their original form. Recipients also should acknowledge their source 

when they create and release a demonstrably unique or novel line or variety by modifying the 

genetic makeup of the introduced materials. 

1

II. Studies of Heredity and Methods of Improvement, Enhancement via Biotechnologies 

and the Conduct of Basic/ Fundamental Research

Reference. The National Program for Conservation of Crop, Athens, Germplasm. A Progress Report on 

the Introduction, Screening and Preservation of Plant Material, June 1971. University of Georgia Georgia. 

done for modifications by conventional (selection, inbreeding, etc.) and unconventional means (rDNA, 

fusion, etc.). In addition, the agency providing the original material should be informed of the specific 

characters in the new variety or line that were derived from the introduced materials. Public 

acknowledgments should cite original plant inventory number (PI) or other identification.

A. Obligation of State Agricultural Experiment Stations

An objective of the SAESs is to research the characters and properties of plant materials, modes of 

reproduction, the inheritance of characters, and the modification and control of heredity.

B. Availability and Use of Basic Genetic Materials

Fundamental research on the inheritance, physiology and interaction of plants, pathogens and 

pests is a vital link in the development of improved varieties. The SAESs pursue this fundamental 

research to support the development of improved germplasm and varieties.

C. Prompt Availability of Results

The SAESs make the results of research studies available to all researchers, public or private, 

through prompt publication of research findings.

D. Acknowledgment of Use of Publicly or Privately Developed Basic Genetic Materials

Public acknowledgment of the use of publicly or privately developed basic genetic materials in the 

development of a new variety is the responsibility of the developer. Acknowledgment is strongly 

encouraged because it gives due recognition to the contribution of public or private programs.

III. Development of Superior Varieties and Novel Germplasm

A. A Function of the State Agricultural Experiment Stations

SAESs have r esponsibility to de velop i mproved g ermplasm a nd v arieties t o r educe p roduction h azards, 

improve quality and increase biological efficiency.

B. Interrelations with Private Plant Breeding Program

Free interchange of materials, specialized facilities, scientific competence in many disciplines, and 

the opportunity to test, observe, and to study reactions under a wide range of environmental 

conditions enhance the probability of a successful germplasm system. SAESs encourage 

germplasm exchange with private industry.

IV. Testing and Evaluating Experimental Varieties
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010) 

A. Adequate Comparisons with Standard Varieties

Experimental varieties and lines should be tested for yield, quality, survival, disease and insect 

reaction, and other important characteristics in comparison with standard varieties. Experimental 

designs and statistical techniques that assure valid measures of performance should be used.

B. Interstate and Regional Tests

Some varieties are widely adapted and not limited. Interstate testing and, when appropriate, 

international testing should be encouraged. Regional testing facilitates more general use of widely 

adapted varieties. It also reduces time needed to provide reliable information on varietal 

adaptations. Material can be included in regional/international tests only with the permission of 

the developer or owner.

C. Testing for Special Requirements

New crop varieties to be used for food must be tested for nutritive composition, concentration of 

toxic constituents, or stability in processing when they reasonably might be expected to vary 

significantly from varieties in commercial production. The term "vary significantly" has been 

defined as varying 10 percent in toxicological content and 20 percent in nutritive content. The 

Food and Drug Administration requires submission of data for proposed new food varieties that 

have had significant alteration of such composition.

Submitted data will permit determination as to whether the variety merits listing as "Generally 

Regarded as Safe" (GRAS). (Federal Register, Document 71-8976, page 12094, June 18, 

1971.)

New varieties of crops to be used for specialized industrial or other purposes should be tested for 

these uses. Potential users should have the opportunity to evaluate a variety before it is released.

D. Protecting Lines and Varieties Against Premature or Unauthorized Distribution

All reasonable precautions should be taken to protect the privileged or restricted status of 

propagating materials, experimental lines or experimental varieties during testing and seed 

increase to prevent pirating and premature or unauthorized distribution prior to release. The 

possibility that an application for some form of variety protection may be filed intensifies the need 

for such precaution.

V. Guidelines for SAES Release of Germplasm

SAESs d evelop an d r elease i mproved g ermplasm for t he b enefit o f a griculture within t heir s tates. 

Traditional releases have been as basic genetic materials, parental lines and varieties.

A. Availability and Use of Basic Genetic Materials

Germplasm from SAES programs should be made available under reasonable terms and 

provisions to foster research and cooperation by public and private scientists. International sharing 

of germplasm should stress reciprocity or other benefits to the donor.

Basic genetic materials should generally be made available to all plant breeders who request them. 

The term basic genetic material refers to plant material possessing one or more potentially 

desirable characters which, in the opinion of the plant breeders, may be of value in plant breeding 

and when, in their opinion, such general release is in the best interests of United States agriculture 

and the state research program.

Periodically, the originating station should make notification of germplasm releases, specifying 

limitations on use and on the amount of material available for distribution.

Every effort should be made to insure that basic genetic materials are not monopolized by any 

interests. Furthermore, inbreds, experimental lines and basic genetic materials normally should not 

be released in foreign countries prior to their release in the United States.

B. Releasing Finished Genetic Materials
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010) 

SAESs will release finished varieties and inbreds as accomplishments of research and educational 

programs. These releases should be accessible to the public.

A variety or inbred should not be released unless it is superior to existing varieties in one or more 

characteristics important for the crop, or it is superior in overall performance in areas where 

adapted and is satisfactory in other major requirements or is novel in some other way. A single 

major production hazard which a new variety can overcome, e.g., a highly destructive disease, 

may become the overriding consideration in releasing a variety. Varieties with a very limited 

range in adaptation should not be released unless performance in that limited range is superior, or 

the variety possesses values not otherwise available, including diversification of the germplasm 

base for a species.

C. Policy Committee or Board of Review for Variety Release

Decisions on the release of new varieties and the type of release should be made for each state by 

the SAES director. The SAES should appoint a policy committee or board of review charged with 

reviewing the proposal for the release of a new variety. Appropriate information concerning 

characteristics, performance, area of adaptation, specific use values, seed stocks, and proposed 

methods of varietal maintenance and increase and distribution should be presented to this 

committee.

D. Interstate or Interagency Release Procedures

When a variety or inbred has been tested on an interstate basis, opportunity to consider 

simultaneous release of the seed must be given each state in the interstate program.

If, for some reason, prior interstate testing was not conducted, the state which releases a new 

variety should offer seed of the new variety to all interested states for testing and increase; thus 

nearby states may obtain information to answer questions from potential users about the new 

variety. Regional advisory committees may set guidelines for sharing of Foundation Seed stocks 

among states.

When the development of a new variety is a cooperative effort by a state or states and a federal 

agency (USDA/ARS, USDA/SCS or USDA/FS), joint releases could potentially be made by the 

agencies involved. Appropriate use should be made of the services of the Association of Official 

Seed Certifying Agencies, the U.S. Plant Variety Protection Office and the U.S. Patent and 

Trademark Office in determining novelty of and in cataloging new varieties.

E. Protection and Restricted Release

A SAES may elect to protect (Plant Variety Protection (PVP) or patent) or otherwise restrict 

certain uses of germplasm. The major consideration for patenting and restricted release should be 

benefits to U.S. agriculture. Royalties or fees that accrue from protected germplasm should be 

distributed to enhance and support research according to local institutional policies. When an 

SAES collects royalties firms of seed of a variety sold in another state and the variety was 

developed by cooperative research between the two SAESs, these royalties should be shared.

Utility patents likely will be used commonly to protect plant germplasm. To hasten plant 

improvement, a SAES should seek variances in protection offered by utility patents. Such 

variances also would counteract the adverse effects of one SAES asking another SAES for fees for 

patented materials which that SAES had participated in developing. At risk are cooperative efforts 

such as free exchange of germplasm and information and the voluntary and free multilocational 

regional testing of each other’s germplasm and varieties.

Unlike PVP protection, utility patents do not automatically allow use of patented material in 

research or plant improvement programs without approval of or compensation to the patent holder. 

A "research clause", or exemption from seeking approval for research use, is recommended. Also 

recommended is a waiver of certain dominance rights of a patent over future patents on materials 

derived from the initial patent. Holders of patents on marketed materials derived from an earlier 

patent should be required to compensate the holder of that earlier patent only during the first 5 

years (time may vary according to local institutional policy) of the life of that patent rather than 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010) 

the 17 stipulated in the law. In both cases, users of patented materials should acknowledge the 

source of germplasm.

F. Preserving Genetic Identity

Identical genetic material should not be distributed or sold under different names, varieties or 

brands. The genetic identity (i.e., the parentage) of all materials should be available to the user. 

Advanced methodologies or techniques that enable identification include analyses of seed proteins 

and isozymes and nuclear restriction fragment length polymorphisms.

VI. Naming and Registering Varieties 

A. Designation

A new variety should be given a permanent designation before it is released. The designation 

should be acceptable to the states/agencies participating in the release, but the originating station 

or agency has the final responsibility for providing this designation and naming new varieties. 

Brevity in designation is desirable. When this designation is a name, one short word is preferable; 

two short words are, however, acceptable. Meaningful number designations or combinations of 

words, letters and numbers, consistent with accepted procedures, are also acceptable.

The International Code of Nomenclature for Cultivated Plants provides guidelines for naming 

varieties and should be consulted.

B. Use of Names

Identical germplasm can not be distributed or sold under different names. The same name should 

not be used more than once in a given crop. Similar names should also be avoided. Provisions of 

the Federal Seed Act (53 Stat. 1275) apply. 

Once established, a legitimate varietal name should not be changed. Varietal names which are 

misleading or which are identical or similar to brand names or trademarks associated with 

agricultural products should be avoided, as there may be an implied association of the variety and 

trade names or trademarks. Proposed names should be cleared to determine previous use of the 

proposed variety name and for possible infringement of trademarks by contacting the Livestock 

and Seed Division, Agricultural Marketing Service.

C. Registering Varieties

Information on new varieties of crops for which national variety review boards have been 

established should be submitted to the review board following consideration by the state variety 

committee but before final release.

New varieties of crops should be registered. Following release of the variety, information for the 

registration or listing should be submitted promptly to the Crop Science Society of America 

(CSSA) or the American Society for Horticultural Science (ASHS). Procedures for registering 

varieties are available from CSSA, and procedures for listing varieties are available from ASHS. 

Materials registered with the CSSA become a part of the National Plant Germplasm System and 

small amounts of seed are freely available to bona fide researchers. This is a voluntary program.

VII. Definition of Classes Certified Seed and of Certification Standards

The Association of Official Seed Certifying Agencies, in the current issue of its "Certification Handbook", 

defines the various classes of certified seed and certification standards and procedures. These definitions, 

now and as amended in the future, are a part of this policy.

VII. Increase and Maintenance of Breeder Seed 

A. Responsibility for Maintaining Breeder Seed

The originating SAES or agency should prepare a statement of plans and procedures for 

maintaining Breeder and Foundation Seed, including any limitations on the number of generations 

through which the variety may be sold by variety name.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010) 

When a variety is sufficiently promising to justify consideration for release, Breeder Seed should 

be increased to the volume needed to produce and maintain required Foundation Seed. So long as 

a variety is retained in the seed program of the originating state, that state should maintain a 

reasonable reserve of Breeder Seed, which will be used to replenish and restore Foundation Seed 

of the variety to the desired level of genetic purity. When the variety is distributed in several 

states, or when the originating state or agency ceases to maintain Breeder Seed of a variety, a 

mutually satisfactory plan should be formulated by the interested states or agencies regarding the 

maintenance of Breeder Seed. Interested states should be notified well in advance by the 

originating state or agency when it plans to discontinue maintenance of Breeder Seed of a variety.

When states jointly release a variety, they should formulate a procedure for making a supply of 

Foundation Seed available to each state.

B. Supplying Sample of Seed to National Seed Storage Laboratory 

A sample of Breeder Seed of all newly released varieties should be supplied by the originating 

state or agency to the National Seed Storage Laboratory (NSSL), Fort Collins, Colorado. 

Recording forms are provided by that laboratory. Seed deposit in the NSSL is required for CSSA 

registration.

IX. Increase, Maintenance and Distribution of Foundation Seed

A. Multiplying Foundation Seed 

An adequate and recurring supply of Foundation Seed is essential for multiplying a variety. 

Foundation Seed of publicly produced varieties should be increased by authorized parties who 

have the experience, facilities and skill to assure adequate supplies of seed with acceptable levels 

of genetic purity. 

B. Distributing Foundation Seed

To avoid problems, Foundation Seed of a new variety should be simultaneously released in all 

interested states. If Foundation Seed is distributed into another state where the variety is being 

distributed under allocation as a new release, the Foundation Seed should be offered through, or 

with the concurrence of, the official seed stocks or certifying agency in that state.

C. Basic Principles in Foundation Seed Programs

Foundation Seed should be released in a manner that provides greatest benefit to users and the 

public. Within this context, Foundation Seed programs should recognize the following basic 

principles:

1. Qualified seed growers and seedsmen should have an opportunity to obtain 

appropriate planting stocks of unrestricted varieties at an equitable cost; 

however, selective allocations may be necessary to achieve quality increases to 

meet the needs of potential users.

2. Release of Breeder and/or Foundation Seed of a variety to one or a few growers 

or seedsmen is appropriate when more widespread distribution will not insure an 

adequate seed supply on a continuing basis. When limited release is anticipated, 

federal and state agencies and private grower or seedsmen should be notified 

and given an opportunity to bid for that release.

3. Planting stocks of varieties developed cooperatively with the agencies of USDA 

ordinarily will be made available through or with the concurrence of the seed 

stocks or certifying agency of the cooperating state(s) at an equitable cost to 

qualified seed growers and seedsmen. In special circumstances, e.g., No. 2 

above, consideration may be given to, granting limited term exclusive rights. For 

this purpose, consideration should be given to applying for certificates of variety 

protection under the Plant Variety Protection Act or some other form of 

protection. 

X. Preparation and Release of Information
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010) 

A. Coordinating Publicity among States and Agencies

Seed producers, distributors and users should be informed as fully as possible, consistent with 

variety testing policies and procedures within each state, of the values and the adaptation of new 

varieties in comparison with other available varieties.

Pertinent information as to the basic facts of origin, variety characteristics, and data justifying the 

increase and release of a new variety shall be prepared by the fostering state(s) and agency(ies) 

and provided to other interested states or agencies. The information used in deciding upon release 

of a new variety should also be used to inform seed producers, distributors and the public of its 

value. 

Participating states or agencies should use this material, supported or modified by their own 

information, in state or national publicity. Publicity intended for national or region periodicals 

should include information on the regional adaptation of the variety. A uniform date for the release 

of initial publicity should be agreed upon by the fostering states and/or federal agencies.

Appropriate information concerning actions with respect to PVP, including certification 

requirements, should be included in publicity releases.

The above procedure is intended to provide information that is complete, fair and unbiased, and 

enable seed producers, distributors and users to make sound judgments in selecting varieties.

B. Matching Seed Production and Demand for Varieties

Seed production and demand must be considered together to assure that a variety will make its 

maximum contribution to agriculture. Thus, promotional publicity in advance of the release of a 

new variety, or before seed is available, or incomplete publicity following its release are not 

desirable. An educational program setting forth the superior characteristics, region of adaptation, 

and any special limitations which have been identified should be coordinated with seed supply.

Appendix: Nomenclature

In th is s tatement, th e te rm variety ( synonymous with th e te rm c ultivar) is u sed in a ccordance w ith t he 

International Code of Nomenclature of Cultivated Plants, 1969. The correctness of use of the terms Cultivar 

and V ariety i n t he E nglish l anguage i s frequently not cl early u nderstood. The I nternational Code o f 

Nomenclature of Cultivated Plants has adopted the term Cultivar as an international term which is proper 

for use in any language. In the English language, the term Variety may be used as an exact equivalent or as 

a s ynonym o f C ultivar. C are s hould b e t aken not t o c onfuse t he t erm with t he E nglish tr anslation o f 

Varieties, also Variety, which is a botanical classification. To insure differentiation between Variety when 

used for a c ultivated variety and Variety when used as a botanical classification, the abbreviation of the 

former is cv., and of the latter is var. 

In the English language editions of the Code prior to 1969, the term Variety was included in parentheses 

following the term Cultivar to indicate the complete equivalence of the terms Cultivar and Variety when 

referring to cultivated varieties. T his redundancy was eliminated in the 1969 edition by the International 

Commission for the Nomenclature of Cultivated Plants and the following explanations were included:

"The t erm c ultivar i s e quivalent t o t he t erm 'variety' in English, va rieties i n French, 

variedad in Spanish,...whenever these words are used to denote a cultivated variety."

Article 10, Note 4:

"The terms cultivar and variety (in the sense of cultivated variety) are exact equivalents. 

In translations or adaptations of the Code for special purposes either cultivar or variety 

(or its equivalent in other languages) may be used in the text."

Clearly, in no way does the 1969 edition change the policy regarding use of the English term Variety. In 

fact, i f t he Code were t o b e r eproduced f or popular us e i n t he E nglish l anguage, the I nternational 

Commission would sanction use of only the term Variety. There certainly is no regimentation in the Code 

for universal use of the term Cultivar when referring to cultivated varieties.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010) 

Good j udgment should p revail i n t he use o f t he e quivalent t erms. I n s cientific p apers which ha ve 

international consumption, t he in ternational te rm Cultivar may be most c learly understood. In papers or 

documents i ntended for us e by t he E nglish-speaking l ay public o r no n-scientific c ommunity, the te rm 

Variety may often be the more desirable synonym.

The term "variety" means a subdivision of a kind which is distinct, uniform, and stable: "distinct" in that 

the v ariety can b e d ifferentiated b y o ne o r more i dentifiable morphological, phy siological, or ot her 

characteristics from all other varieties of public knowledge; "uniform" in that variations in essential and 

distinctive c haracteristics ar e d escribable; an d "stable" i n t hat t he variety will r emain u nchanged t o a 

reasonable d egree o f r eliability i n its e ssential a nd d istinctive c haracteristics a nd its uniformity when 

reproduced or reconstituted as required by the different categories of varieties. This definition of a variety 

is un derstood t o i nclude t he f ollowing c ategories: c lonal v arieties, lin e varieties ( inbreds), m ultiline 

varieties, o pen-pollinated v arieties o f c ross-fertilizing c rops, s ynthetic v arieties, ( first g eneration a nd 

advanced generation), hybrid varieties (F1), and (F2) varieties.

This statement h as been developed with full co gnizance o f t he contents and i mplications of t he Variety 

Protection Act, Public Law 91-577. Mutually helpful working relationships among the SAES, the USDA, 

and private plant breeders and seed companies should be encouraged to enhance the effectiveness of both 

public and private plant breeding efforts.

The term "biotechnology" refers to the emerging techniques that include rDNA, protoplast fusion, genetic 

cross-protection and similar techniques.

[Editor’s Note: The 1994 International Code of Nomenclature for Cultivated Plants revised the definitions 

of “cultivar” and “variety” and no longer considers these terms equivalent. T he Plant Materials Program 

does not use the terms “cultivar” and “variety” interchangeably. See Section 540.34(B)(1).]
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE NRCS-ECS-580

 

NATURAL RESOURCES CONSERVATION SERVICE July 2010

SEED AND PLANT COLLECTION INFORMATION

 

 PLANT INFORMATION COLLECTION INFORMATION

Accession No. Date Collected 

Scientific Name Collector 

Plant Symbol 

Common Name 

Cultivar/Release Type of Collection Seed Vegetative

Plant Type Number of Plants from Which Collected 

For PMC Use: Date Received Quantity Received 

SITE INFORMATION

State County MLRA 

Township Range Section 

Latitude Longitude Location Map Provided Yes 

Soil Texture Soil Modifier 

Slope % Aspect N S E W Elevation ft or m

Annual Precipitation in or mm Water Depth Salinity Intertidal

Plants Growing in Association

 

SOILS INFORMATION

Soil Series & Texture 

Soil Survey Sheet # Soils Mapping Unit Symbol 

REMARKS 

 

Please fill in the above form as completely as possible, following the instructions below for collecting and handling seed and 

vegetative material. Attach a map showing local roads and the collection site or use the back of this sheet to draw a map. Be 

sure to label each collection as it is made so collections do not get confused. Send seed or plants to the Plant Materials 

Center serving the state, unless other specific instructions are provided.

Watch for superior plants that display unusual characteristics and record observations. Seed or cuttings from an individual 

plant or from several plants in the same colony can constitute a collection if warranted. Make separate collections of the same 

species if the growing site or location is different.

Seed Collection: Check each collection for filled seed and then attempt to get the equivalent of one-fourth pound of seed. 

Collection should be from a minimum population of 30-100 plants if possible. Mature seed is typically dry and hard and has 

separated from the rachis (grasses) or loosens easily from the pods, capsules, or flower heads. Do not collect unripe seed. 

Dry seed should be stored in paper envelopes or paper bags. Fleshy seed should be enclosed in a plastic bag. Keep all

collected seed in a cool place out of direct light.

Vegetative Material Collection: Collect only good healthy material. Use a sharp knife, scissors or pruners for cutting 

vegetative material. Root cuttings should be a minimum of 6" in length. Stem cuttings should be 6-8" or longer and have a 

minimum of 2 nodes. Wrap roots or cuttings with moist paper or cloth. Place in a plastic bag with a few small holes in it. 

Refrigerate or keep cool until shipped. Material should be shipped or delivered as soon as possible so that it does not dry out.

USDA IS AN EQUAL OPPORTUNITY PROVIDER AND EMPLOYER.
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE NRCS-ECS-580 

NATURAL RESOURCES CONSERVATION SERVICE July 2010 

SEED AND PLANT COLLECTION INFORMATION 

FORM INSTRUCTIONS 

Please fill in the associated form as completely as possible, following the instructions below for collecting and 

handling seed and vegetative material. Attach a map showing local roads and the collection site or use the 

back of this sheet to draw a map. Be sure to label each collection as it is made so collections do not get 

confused. Send seed or plants to the Plant Materials Center serving the state, unless other specific instructions 

are provided by the Plant Materials Center. 

Watch for superior plants that display unusual characteristics and record observations. Seed or cuttings from 

an individual plant or from several plants in the same colony can constitute a collection if warranted. Make 

separate collections of the same species if the growing site or location is different. 

Seed Collection: Check each collection for filled seed and then attempt to get the equivalent of one-fourth 

pound of seed. Collection should be from a minimum population of 30-100 plants if possible. Mature seed is 

typically dry and hard and has separated from the rachis (grasses) or loosens easily from the pods, capsules, 

or flower heads. Do not collect unripe seed. Dry seed should be stored in paper envelopes or paper bags. 

Fleshy seed should be enclosed in a plastic bag. Keep all collected seed in a cool place out of direct light. 

Vegetative Material Collection: Collect only good healthy material. Use a sharp knife, scissors or pruners for 

cutting vegetative material. Root cuttings should be a minimum of 6" in length. Stem cuttings should be 6-8" or 

longer and have a minimum of 2 nodes. Wrap roots or cuttings with moist paper or cloth. Place material in a 

plastic bag with a few small holes in it. Refrigerate or keep cool until shipped. Material should be shipped or 

delivered as soon as possible so that it does not dry out. 

Detailed directions for each form field are included below. 

Accession No. 

PLANT INFORMATION 

Accession number of the plant. This is assigned by the Plant Materials Center when the collection is 

received. 

Scientific Name 

Scientific Latin name of the species. Refer to the PLANTS database at http://plants.usda.gov/ for 

information regarding plant names if needed. 

Plant Symbol 

Four to six letter/number symbol assigned to the plant. Refer to the PLANTS database at 

http://plants.usda.gov/ for information regarding plant symbols if needed. 

Common Name 

Common name of the plant. 

Cultivar/Release 

Cultivar or release name, if applicable 

Plant Type 

Plant type, such as shrub, grass, forb 

For PMC Use: Date Received 

Date the PMC received the collection material from the field 

For PMC Use: Quantity Received 

Amount of material received by the PMC 
NRCS-ECS-580 

SEED AND PLANT COLLECTION INFORMATION 

FORM INSTRUCTIONS 

(Continued) 

Date Collected 

Date the material was collected in the field 

Collector 

Name, title, organization name, address, phone number and email address of the individual that made the 

collection (Please fill in all information that applies to ensure proper credit is given.) 

Type of Collection (Seed, Vegetative) 

Indicate whether the collection is seed or vegetative in nature 

Number of Plants from Which Collected 

Enter the number of plants from which the material was collected. Be as accurate as possible if an estimate 

is used. 

SITE INFORMATION 

State 

State where the collection was made 

County 

County where the collection was made 

MLRA 

The MLRA where the collection was made. Major Land Resource Areas are geographically associated land 

resource units (http://soils.usda.gov/survey/geography/mlra/ that can assist in determining the MLRA of the 

collection site. LRUs). Identification of these large areas is important in statewide agricultural planning and 

has value in interstate, regional, and national planning. An interactive map can be found at 

Township 

Township name where the plant material was collected, if applicable. This is used in the Public Land 

Survey System (PLSS). For more information and online access to PLSS maps, go to 

http://www.geocommunicator.gov/GeoComm/lsis_home/home/index.html 

Section 

Section where the plant material was collected, if applicable. This is used in the Public Land Survey 

System (PLSS). For more information and online access to PLSS maps, go to 

http://www.geocommunicator.gov/GeoComm/lsis_home/home/index.html 

Range 

Range where the plant material was collected, if applicable. This is used in the Public Land Survey System 

(PLSS). For more information and online access to PLSS maps, go to 

http://www.geocommunicator.gov/GeoComm/lsis_home/home/index.html 

Coordinates (GPS readings if available): 

Latitude 

The geographic latitude of the planting location in decimal degrees or degrees, minutes, and seconds 

Longitude 

The geographic longitude of the planting location in decimal degrees or degrees, minutes, and seconds
NRCS-ECS-580 

SEED AND PLANT COLLECTION INFORMATION 

FORM INSTRUCTIONS 

(Continued) 

COLLECTION INFORMATION 

Elevation (ft or m) 

The site elevation at the plant collection site. Check one box, either “ft” for feet or “m” for meters to indicate 

the unit of measurement represented 

Slope (%) 

The slope at the plant collection site, as a percentage 

Aspect/Exposure (N, S, E, W) 

The exposure of the site; check the box(es) corresponding to the plant collection exposure- N = north, S = 

south, E = east, W = west; more than one box may be checked 

Precipitation (in or mm) 

Indicate the site’s mean annual precipitation. The range in precipitation assigned to the soil series or soil 

complex is recommended. Check one box, either “in” for inches or “mm” for millimeters to indicate the unit 

of measurement represented. 

Water Depth 

The measurement of the depth of a waterbody from the surface to the top of the bottom sediments. 

Indicate water depth for a collection in inches or millimeters. 

Salinity 

The saltiness or dissolved salt content of a body of water. It is a general term used to describe the levels of 

different salts such as sodium chloride, magnesium and calcium sulfates, and bicarbonates. Please note 

the unit of expression – parts per thousand (ppt or ‰), mg/L or ppm (parts per million). 

Intertidal 

The area that is exposed to the air at low tide and underwater at high tide (for example, the area between 

tide marks). This area can include many different types of habitats, including steep rocky cliffs, sandy 

beaches, or wetlands (e.g., vast mudflats). Check the box if the collection was made in an area so 

described. 

Plants Growing in Association 

List any plant materials that seem prevalent in the collection area. 

Soil Series & Texture 

SOILS INFORMATION 

List the soil series or soil complex at plant collection site, as well as the dominant soil texture at the plant 

collection site 

Soil Survey Sheet # 

Web versions of soil survey maps can be obtained at http://soils.usda.gov/survey/online_surveys; for 

instructions on how to read and use a soil survey map, go to http://soils.usda.gov/survey/how_to/. 

Soils Mapping Unit Symbol 

The small letters or numbers that are within the same polygon as your area of interest, such as ScC, or 

KnC, or LaC designate a map unit. Note this map unit symbol – it is the key to finding information. Go to 

the text or tables for information on that map unit. 

REMARKS 

Describe any unusual findings or general observations about the plant collection site or the plant materials themselves. 

Also note any landmarks, crossroads, etc. that may assist in locating the site.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

540.83 Worksheet for Documenting an Environmental Evaluation of NRCS 

Plant Releases

A. Introduction

This worksheet is used to conduct and document an Environmental Evaluation of 

Plant Materials releases. Criteria relating to the biological characteristics of a plant, 

the potential impact on species interactions and ecosystems, the ease of managing the 

plant, and conservation need are scored. These scores and their interpretation are 

used with a decision flowchart to determine the appropriate course of action for 

making a release. As with any such ranking system, it is necessary to use sound 

judgment and experience when interpreting the final results. What is appropriate for 

developed or agricultural areas may not be appropriate for wildlands. Final judgment 

and restrictions for use of releases should consider if the materials are intended for 

use on wildlands and if the plant species occurs naturally at project sites. Consider 

also if the plant is likely to be used in proximity to ecological or genetic reserves, 

wildlife corridors, or along roadways and riparian habitats that connect fragmented 

wildlands. 

B. Understanding this Worksheet

The primary purpose for this worksheet is to determine if the plant release has the 

potential to adversely affect the environment or natural surroundings. It is possible 

for a plant to rate low on Part 1 (Impact on Habitats) and thus be released without 

further consideration, and still have a high rating on Part 4 (Biological 

Characteristics), indicating that the plant has the ability to propagate and maintain 

itself naturally. Good conservation plants usually need to persist to be able to solve 

the conservation problem or need for which they were intended. This is even more 

important for plants used in critical areas, i.e., severely eroding sites. In light of this 

fact, the most important criteria being used in this worksheet to determine release 

include those in Part 1 (Impact on Habitats) and Part 2 (Ease of Management). Parts 

3 (Conservation Need) and 4 (Biological Characteristics) are used when the decision 

is unclear, there is the potential for a high impact on habitats, and control may be 

moderate to difficult.

C. Instructions

1. Rate the plant or release based on the following criteria by circling your 

assessment. If the criterion does not apply to the species or release, then do not rate 

for those criteria. If you do not have enough information on the species or plant 

release to complete at least Parts 1, 2, and 4 in Section A, then additional data must 

be accumulated through literature searches, cooperators, or studies to be able to 

complete these sections. Lack of data does not allow choice of a response. Positive 

responses under Section A shall only be used when there is data in support of no 

impact. Additional notes which may be used to clarify or interpret the ranking should 

be included in the margins of this worksheet. For plant releases which may be 

considered nearly unacceptable for release, it may be helpful to have other PM staff 

or cooperators complete copies of this worksheet to provide additional 

documentation.

2. All rating criteria must be completed for a plant material to be approved for 

release, even if it is found in Section A, Part 1 that the plant has a low impact on the 

environment. Evaluation of all criteria will provide documentation that a thorough 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

evaluation was completed for the plant at the time of release. This documentation 

may be needed in the future if questions are raised about the potential invasiveness or 

control of the plant. 

3. When finished with ranking, interpretations, and decision making, record the final 

decision on the next page of this worksheet. A completed worksheet must be 

included with the release documentation and a copy sent to the NPMC for filing.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Environmental Evaluation of Plant Materials Releases

Name of person 

scoring: Date of scoring:

Scientific Name: Common Name:

Release Name:

Is the plant native to the United States? Yes No

Is the plant native to the area of intended use? Yes No

Authority used to determine native status:

What is the intended area of use for this plant?

What is the intended use for this plant?

Areas in which the release is known to be invasive 

or has a high probability of being invasive:

Summary of Criteria from Section A Score

Part 1. Impact on Habitats, Ecosystems, and Land Use

Part 2. Ease of Management

Part 3. Conservation Need and Plant Use

Part 4. Biological Characteristics

Final Determination of Release Based on the Environmental Evaluation:

OK to Release

OK to Release but qualify use and intended area of use*

Do Not Release - NPL determines if release is made*

Do Not Release - document and destroy materials

I certify that this Environmental Evaluation 

was conducted with the most accurate and 

current information possible.

Signature of Person Scoring Date

Signature of NPL indicating that it is OK to make the release:

National Program Leader, PM Date

* An Environmental Assessment (EA) and/or Environmental Impact Statement (EIS) may be 

required prior to release. If required, attach the EA and/or EIS to this worksheet and to the 

release notice. 

Section A. Scoring of Criteria for Impact, Management, Need, and Biological 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Characteristics 

Circle the appropriate number for each of the following criteria. Add up the scores for each part 

and record at the end of each part. Comments which clarify answers or provide supporting 

information may be included in the right margin of the worksheet or attached on a separate sheet 

of paper.

This section assesses the ability of the species or release to 

Part 1: Impact on Habitats, Ecosystems, and Land Use

adversely affect habitats, ecosystems, 

and agricultural areas. 

1) Ability to invade natural systems where the species does not naturally occur

a) Data show species not known to spread into natural areas on its own 0

b) Establishes only in areas where major disturbance has occurred in the last 20 

years (e.g., natural disasters, highway corridors)

3

c) Establishes in mid- to late-successional natural areas where minor disturbances 

occur (e.g., tree falls, streambank erosion), but no major disturbance in last 20-

75 years

6

d) Often establishes in intact or otherwise healthy natural areas with no major 

disturbance for at least 75 years

10

2) Negative impacts on ecosystem processes (e.g., altering fire occurrence, rapid 

growth may alter hydrology)

a) No perceivable negative impacts 0

b) Minor negative impacts to ecosystem processes 2

c) Known significant negative impacts to ecosystems processes 6

d) Major, potentially irreversible, alteration or disruption of ecosystem processes 10

3) Impacts on the composition of plant communities where the species does not 

naturally occur

a) No negative impact; causes no perceivable changes in native populations 0

b) Noticeable changes in community composition that have negative or unknown 

impacts on 1) biodiversity of natural systems, or on 2) desirable 

agricultural/developed systems

5

c) Causes major negative alterations in community composition 10

4) Allelopathy

a) No known allelopathic effects on other plants 0

b) Demonstrates allelopathic effects on seed germination or seedling growth of 

other plants

3

c) Demonstrates allelopathic effects to mature stages of other plants 5
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

5) Impact on habitat for wildlife (vertebrate or invertebrate) or domestic animals 

(aquatic and terrestrial), including threatened and endangered species 

(coordinate with the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service and State Heritage 

Programs, as appropriate)

a) No negative impact on habitat, or this criteria not applicable based on intended 

use for the plant (explain intended use, why not applicable, and how to ensure 

plant will not be used in an inappropriate, sensitive context) 

0

b) Minor negative impact on habitat or species interactions (e.g., decreased 

palatability; lower wildlife value; decreased value for undesirable animal 

species; shifts in herbivore frequency; shifts in disease frequency)

2

c) Significant negative impact on habitat or species interactions (e.g., foliage toxic 

to animals; significantly lower value for wildlife; excludes desirable animal 

species from a domesticated area or any native species from wildland area; 

increases exotic, invasive, or pest species in any area)

5

6) Impact on other land use

a) No negative impacts on other land uses 0

b) Minor impacts (plant could invade adjacent areas and decrease its value) 3

c) Significant impacts (plant may alter the system or adjacent lands significantly 

enough to prevent certain uses, or negatively affects biodiversity on same or 

adjacent wildlands)

5

Total Possible Points 45

Total Points for Part 1

This part evaluates the degree of management which might be needed to control the species or 

release if it becomes a problem, or eradicate the species or release if it is no longer desirable.

Part 2. Ease of Management

1) Level of effort required for control

a) Effective control can be achieved with mechanical treatment 0

b) Can be controlled with one chemical treatment 2

c) One or two chemical or mechanical treatments required or biological control is 

available or practical

5

d) Repeated chemical or mechanical control measures required 10

2) Effectiveness of community management to potentially control the plant release

a) No management is needed, the plant release is short-lived and will significantly 

decrease or disappear within 5 years under normal conditions without human 

intervention

0

b) Routine management of a community or restoration/preservation practices (e.g., 

reasonably practical and financially feasible control methods, including some 

forms of prescribed burning, flooding, controlled disturbance, pasture 

renovation) effectively controls the release

2

c) Cultural techniques beyond routine management can be used to control the 

release

4

d) Cultural techniques beyond routine management can be used but are unlikely to 8
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

occur in a timely manner due to expense or difficult logistics 

e) The previous options are not effective for managing or controlling the 

 release

10

3) Side effects of chemical or mechanical control measures

a) Control measures used on release will have little or no effect on other plants or 

wildlife

0

b) Control measures used on release will cause moderate effects on other plants or 

wildlife 

3

c) Control measures used on release will cause major effects on other plants or 

wildlife

5

**If spreads by seed, or both seed and vegetative means, go to #4

**If spreads by vegetative means only, go to #5

4) Seed banks

a) Seeds viable in the soil for 1 year or less 0

b) Seeds remain viable in the soil for 2-3 years 3

c) Seeds remain viable in the soil for 4-5 years 5

d) Seeds remain viable in the soil for more than 5 years 8

5) Vegetative regeneration under natural conditions

a) Regeneration from resprouting of cut stumps 1

b) Regeneration from pieces of the root left in the soil 4

c) Regeneration from root or stem parts left in the soil 6

6) Resprouts after cutting above-ground parts

a) Does not resprout or resprouts but the release is sterile and does not produce seed 0

b) Resprouts and produces seed in future years 5

c) Resprouts and produces seed in same year 8

Total Possible Points 47

Total Points for Part 2

This part evaluates the importance of the species or release to meet a conservation need. 

Describe the conservation need.

Part 3. Conservation Need and Plant Use

1) Potential Use(s) of the Plant Release

a) Used for low-priority issues or single use 1

b) Has several uses within conservation 2

c) Has many uses within conservation as well as outside of conservation 4

d) Has high-priority use within conservation 5

2) Availability of Other Plants to Solve the Same Conservation Need 

a) Many other plants available 1

b) Few other plants available 3

c) No other plants available 5
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

3) Consequences of Not Releasing This Plant

a) No impact to conservation practices 0

b) Minor impact on one or more conservation practice 1

c) Serious impact on one conservation practice 3

d) Serious impact on more than one conservation practices 5

Total Possible Points 15

Total Points for Part 3

This part evaluates the biological properties which indicate the natural ability of the species or 

release to propagate and maintain itself under natural conditions. Note: these criteria relate to 

the species 

Part 4. Biological Characteristics

under natural conditions, as opposed to the species under managed conditions used 

to increase the species, i.e., seed increase programs, or specific propagation methods which do 

not normally occur in nature. 

1) Typical mode of reproduction under natural conditions

a) Plant does not increase by seed or vegetative means (skip to #11) 0

b) Reproduces almost entirely by vegetative means 1

c) Reproduces only by seeds 3

d) Reproduces vegetatively and by seed 5

2) Reproduction (by seed or vegetative) in geographic area of intended use

a) Reproduces only outside the geographic area of intended use 1

b) Reproduces within the geographic area of intended use 3

c) Reproduces in all areas of the United States where plant can be grown 5

3) Time required to reach reproductive maturity by seed or vegetative methods

a) Requires more than 10 years 1

b) Requires 5-10 years 2

c) Requires 2-5 years 3

d) Requires 1 year 5

** If reproduces only by seed, skip to #5

4) Vegetative reproduction (by rhizomes, suckering, or self-layering) 

a) Vegetative reproduction rate maintains population (plant spreads but older parts 

die out)

1

b) Vegetative reproduction rate results in moderate increase in population size 

(plant spreads <3’ per year)

3

c) Vegetative reproduction rate results in rapid increase in population size (plant 

spreads >3’ per year)

5

** If reproduces only vegetatively, skip to #11

5) Ability to complete sexual reproductive cycle in area of intended use
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

a) Not observed to complete sexual reproductive cycle in the geographic area of 

intended use, but completes sexual reproduction in distant areas of the United 

States

1

b) Not observed to complete sexual reproductive cycle in the geographic area of 

intended use, but completes sexual reproduction in adjoining geographic areas

3

c) Observed to complete the sexual reproductive cycle in the geographic area of 

intended use

5

6) Frequency of sexual reproduction for mature plant

a) Almost never reproduces sexually 0

b) Once every five or more years 1

c) Every other year 3

d) One or more times a year 5

7) Number of viable seeds per mature plant each reproductive cycle

a) None (does not produce viable seed) 0

b) Few (1-10) 1

c) Few/Moderate (11-100) 3

d) Moderate seeded (>100 - 999) 5

 e) Many-seeded (>1,000) 8

8) Dispersal ability

a) Limited dispersal (<20’) and few plants produced (<100) 1

b) Limited dispersal (<20’) and many plants produced (>100) 3

c) Greater dispersal (>20’) and few plants produced (<100) 7

d) Greater dispersal (>20’) and many plants produced (>100) 10

9) Germination requirements

a) Requires open soil and disturbance to germinate 1

b) Can germinate in vegetated areas but in a narrow range 

or in special conditions

5

c) Can germinate in existing vegetation in a wide range of conditions 10

10)Interspecific Hybridization

a) Has not been observed to hybridize outside the species 0

b) Hybridizes with other species in the same genus 3

c) Hybridizes with other genera 5

11) Competitive ability (of established plants)

a) Poor competitor for limiting factors 0

b) Moderately competitive for limiting factors 5

c) Highly competitive for limiting factors 10

Total Possible Points 73

Total Points for Part 4
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

References

Many of the criteria used in this rating system were adapted from the following sources:

Hiebert, Ron D. and James Stubbendieck. 1993. Handbook for Ranking Exotic Plants for Management and 

Control. U.S. Department of the Interior, National Park Service, Denver, CO.

Randall, John M., Nancy Benton, Larry E. Morse, and Gwendolyn A. Thornhurst. 1999. Criteria for Ranking 

Alien Wildland Weeds. The Nature Conservancy, Arlington, VA.

Based on the scores from above, circle the points range you scored to determine the appropriate 

interpretation. The interpretation will be used to determine the course of action for the release.

Section B. Scoring and Interpretation

Part Points Scored Interpretation

Part 1. Impacts on Habitats, 

Ecosystems, and Land Use

0-15 Low chance plant is going to affect the 

environment

16-25 Moderate chance plant is going to affect 

the environment

26-45 High

Part 2. Ease of Management

chance plant is going to affect the 

environment

0-20 Easy to control

21-30 Moderate to control

31-47 Diff

Part 3. Conservation Need and 

Plant Use

icult to control

0-5 Low need

6-9 Moderate need

10-15 High

Part 4. Biological Characteristics

need

0-25 Low chance plant is going to propagate 

and increase itself

26-40 Moderate chance plant is going to 

propagate and increase itself

41-73 High chance plant is going to propagate 

and increase itself
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Follow the decision tree below based on the interpretation above. Start with your 

interpretation rating for Part 1 (Low, Moderate, or High) and follow the appropriate 

arrow to the next level until you reach a decision box. Once you reach a decision box 

you may stop and record the decision on the first page of this worksheet.

Section C. Action to Take for Releasing Plants

Worksheet Updated 6/14/2010

OK to Release

Part 3 -

Conservation Need

Low Mod. High

Part 4 - Biological

Characteristics

Low Mod. High

OK to Release

Part 1 - Impacts

Low Mod. High

Part 2 - Control

Easy Mod. Diff.

Part 2 - Control

Easy Mod. Diff.

OK to Release

Part 3 -

Conservation Need

Low Mod. High

Do Not Release; 

Document results and 

destroy plant materials.

OK to Release, but qualify use 

and intended area of use in 

release and marketing 

documentation so user is aware 

of potential impact. *

Do Not Release - send release notice and completed environmental 

impacts worksheet to NPL before obtaining any release notice 

signatures. NPL will determine if the release should be made. *

* Indicates that an Environmental Assessment or Environmental Impact Statement 

may need to be prepared prior to release (see NPMM Part 540.73(a)(3)).

OK to Release

Part 3 -

Conservation Need

Low Mod. High

Part 4 - Biological

Characteristics

Low Mod. High

OK to Release

Part 1 - Impacts

Low Mod. High

Part 2 - Control

Easy Mod. Diff.

Part 2 - Control

Easy Mod. Diff.

OK to Release

Part 3 -

Conservation Need

Low Mod. High

Do Not Release; 

Document results and 

destroy plant materials.

OK to Release, but qualify use 

and intended area of use in 

release and marketing 

documentation so user is aware 

of potential impact. *

Do Not Release - send release notice and completed environmental 

impacts worksheet to NPL before obtaining any release notice 

signatures. NPL will determine if the release should be made. *

* Indicates that an EA or EIS may need to be prepared prior to release (see NPMM 

Part 540.33(A)(3)).
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

540.84 Example of Information Found in a Documentation of Selection

UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE

NATURAL RESOURCES CONSERVATION SERVICE

Documentation of a Plant Accession Selected for Advanced Testing

Species: Elymus trachycaulus ssp. trachycaulus

Common Name: slender wheatgrass

Plant Symbol: ELTRT

Accession Number: 432403

Year Selected: 2002

Selecting PMC: MONTANA PMC

Lead PMC: MONTANA PMC

Lead PMS: MONTANA PMS

Selection Method: Selection was based on emergence, seedling vigor, and persistence under 

saline-alkaline conditions.

 

DESCRIPTION

Origin: Collected in Carbon County, Montana, in a saline swale, 13 miles north of 

the Montana-Wyoming border and 5 miles north of Warren.

Botanical Description: A short-lived, cool-season, native perennial bunchgrass. It has numerous, 

leafy stems with flat, broad leaves. Has an extensive, fibrous, root system 

that is relatively shallow.

Spread and Invasiveness:

Spread by Seed: medium

Spread Vegetatively: none

Potential Invasiveness: low

Area of Known Invasiveness: none

Mode of Reproduction: Self-Pollinated

Chromosome Number: 42

Out-crossing Percent: 5

Photosynthetic Pathway: c4

Plant Type: Grass

Growth Form: Perennial

Growth Habit: Bunch, Erect

Mature Height: 4.0

Seeds per pound: 97000

Seasons of Growth: spring

ADAPTATION

Climatic Conditions: 

Coldest Hardiness Zone: 2

Growing Season Days (Frost 

 Free Days): 

90

MLRA Potential: 32, 34, 52, 58, and 67

Maximum Precipitation: 25

Minimum Precipitation: 5
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

ADAPTATION (continued)

Soil Condition: 

Soil Texture Range: Fine Sandy Loam - Clay

Minimum Rooting Depth: 2

High pH: 8.9

Low pH: 5.5

Salinity Tolerance: 22

Inundation Tolerance: 1

Inundation in Days: 15

Drainage Tolerance: Slightly Drained

STRATEGY

Standards of Comparison: Revenue, Primar, or San Luis

Advanced Evaluation Strategy: Test in Intercenter Strain Trials in the Northwest.

Field Planting Strategy: Test in field plantings in the Northwest.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

540.85 Summary of Plant Release Types and Criteria for Release

Release Type

Germplasm

Basic genetic material possessing one or more desirable traits that may be useful in plant improvement, the release of which is in the best interests of U.S. agriculture and the state or agency research program; it should not be expected to enter commercial use.Typically involves purposeful genetic manipulation.Reduced priority for need that initiated evaluation, or material does not meet an NRCS priority and / or has a limitation that NRCS does not wish to overcome

Source-Identified

Seed, seedlings, or other propagating materials where no selection or testing of the parent population has been made; produced to ensure genetic purity and identity from either rigidly defined natural stands, seed production areas, seed fields, or orchards. Source identified releases within the Plant Materials Program will generally not be used because of a lack of performance information.No purposeful genetic manipulation involved (only “natural” track designation)High priority and urgent need; lack of commercially available, adapted materials, to meet need; high potential for immediate use; a local population source exists

Selected

The progeny of phenotypically selected plants of untested parentage that have promise but not proof of genetic superiority or distinctive traits, produced to ensure genetic purity and identity from either rigidly controlled and isolated natural stands or individual plants, or seed fields or orchards. Purposeful genetic manipulation may or may not be involved (may follow “genetically manipulated” or “ natural” trackHigh priority need; lack of (or low number of) commercially available, adapted materials to meet identified need

Tested

The progeny of plants whose parentage has been tested and has proven genetic superiority or possesses distinctive traits for which the heritability is stable as defined by the certifying agency; seed or plants must be produced to ensure genetic purity and identity from either rigidlycontrolled and isolated natural stands or individual plants, or seed fields or orchards Purposeful genetic manipulation may or may not be involved (may follow “genetically manipulated” or “ natural” track)High priority need; low number of commercially available, adapted materials; performance testing shown

Cultivar

An assemblage of cultivated plants clearly distinguished by characters (morphological, physiological, cytological, chemical, other) and when reproduced (sexually or asexually) retains these charactersTypically involves purposeful genetic manipulation (e.g. crossing within species, wide hybridization, recurrent selection, gene transfer), but may also follow “natural” track of no purposeful manipulation 

High priority need; commercially available materials do not perform adequately over a broad geographical and ecological area; performance testing, range of adaptation, and conservation value shown over a broad area

Definition of release typesGenetic Manipulation vs. Natural TrackWhen to use
Title 190 

– National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Release Type

Germplasm

Material has proven genetic superiority/ distinctivenessSpecies literature search to be conductedOriginal site and plant population dataIEP data, advanced evaluation data replicated at multiple sitesMultiple years of data (6+)Plant does not pose a threat (i.e., containing a poisonous substance or becoming invasive)

Source-Identified

Seed collection from at least 200 plants in a population (if possible) recommendedNo human selection of material; source identified releases can be initiated by anyoneSpecies literature search to be conductedOriginal site (soil, climate, other physiographic) and plant population dataNo evaluation dataPlant does not pose a threat (i.e., containing a poisonous substance or becoming invasive)No comparison to other accessionsUnlimited generations are allowed; all germplasm types collected from natural stands are designated G0

Selected

Based on initial data, population is better than others in some way that will meet client needsSpecies literature search to be conductedOriginal site and plant population dataIEP data on a site representative of conservation needOne or more years of data (1-4)Plant does not pose a threat (i.e., containing a poisonous substance or becoming invasive)Compared to other accessions/cultivarsIf field grown, generations limited to maximum of four and are indicated as G0 as equivalent to Breeder and G3 as equivalent to Certified class, if wild collected, unlimited generations allowed

Tested

Material has proven genetic superiority/ distinctivenessSpecies literature search to be conducted Original site and plant population dataIEP data, advanced evaluation data replicated at multiple sitesMultiple years of data (3-6+)Plant does not pose a threat (i.e., containing a poisonous substance or becoming invasive)Compared to other accessions/cultivarsIf field grown, generations limited to maximum of four and are indicated as G0 as equivalent to Breeder and G3 as equivalent to Certified class, if wild collected, unlimited generations allowed

Cultivar

Material has proven genetic superiority/distinctivenessSpecies literature search to be conducted Original site and plant population data

IEP data, advanced evaluation data replicated at multiple sites, field plantingsMultiple years of data (6-9+)Plant does not pose a threat (i.e., containing a poisonous substance or becoming invasive)Compared to other accessions/cultivarsIf field grown, generations limited to maximum of four and are indicated as Breeder, Foundation, Registered, and Certified; if a variety and wild collected, unlimited generations allowed

Size of CollectionSelection basisCriteria for releaseLimitation of Generations
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

540.86 AOSCA Guidelines for Release Types and Development Tracks

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010) 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

SEED CERTIFICATION TAGS AND NOMENCLATURE FOR

PLANT GERMPLASM TYPES

(Text which accompanies graphic in 540.86) 

1. This involves "purposeful selection", such as recurrent selection, crosses within or between species, 

mutation inducement, biotechnology methods, etc.

2. Protocols should be established to minimize involuntary "non-purposeful" selection. If desired, the 

(Natural) designation may be printed on Source Identified, Selected, or Tested class or variety/cultivar 

Foundation, Registered, or Certified tags to indicate the "natural" genetic integrity of the germplasm 

collection, accession, or ecotype.

3. May be native or naturalized germplasm; wild collected or orchard produced. Tag must list geographic 

location of seed collection or production. Comparisons with other germplasm collections, accessions, 

or ecotypes of the same species not known. 

4. Shows promise of superior and/or identifiable traits as contrasted with other germplasm accessions, 

breeding lines, or variety/cultivars of the species. Selection criteria and supporting comparative data is 

required. Seed of breeding lines at this stage would rarely be tagged; tagging and marketing wild 

collected or orchard produced seed of Selected class (Natural) germplasm may be commonly 

applicable in the reclamation seed industry.

5. Requires progeny testing to prove that traits of interest are heritable in succeeding generations. Testing 

procedures (number of sites, generations required, etc.) are outlined for each species by individual seed 

certification agencies (AOSCA guidelines are being developed).

Tagging of Tested class advanced generation breeding lines may be accommodated, but normally 

pre-empted by cultivar release or discarding of the line. Tested class (Natural) wild collected or 

orchard produced germplasm may be tagged (as is customary for individual forest trees). Named 

variety release should also be a consideration if the germplasm has been tested in several locations and 

appears to have wide adaptation and usage demand. 

6. Naming and recognition of a cultivar/variety must comply with Federal and State seed law definitions. 

Selected and Tested class germplasm may have a number or place designation associated with the 

species/kind listing on the tag (i.e., "ARS 2936 source" scarlet globemallow or "Maybelle origin" 

antelope bitterbrush), but it is not to be construed as a variety name in commerce.

7. Designation of generations through which germplasms may be multiplied. B = Breeder, F = 

Foundation, R = Registered, C = Certified. Source Identified, Selected and Tested Classes should use 

Generation 1 (G1) as equivalent to Foundation, and Generation 3 (G3) as equivalent to Certified. 

Number of generations allowed for seed production and length of stand for perennial plants varies by 

species.

8. When germplasm at any stage can be shown to have been significantly altered from the original 

collection or accession, it loses its non-manipulated (Natural) status and is routed to the bulk 

population (manipulated germplasm) track.

9. Tags are issued by individual seed certification agencies and clearly state the class of seed in block 

letters across the top of the tag. Tags also normally display agency insignia or logo along with other 

information that identifies and/or describes the variety or germplasm.

[Note: The Plant Materials Program does not use the terms “cultivar” and “variety” interchangeably. See 

Section 540.34(B)(1).]

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010) 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

540.87 Conservation Plant Release Review Worksheet

Conservation Plant Release Review Worksheet

SECTION 1 – To be completed by the originating PMC

Date:

Releasing PMC:

Contact Name:

Reviewing NTSC PMS:

Scientific Name:

Release Name:

Accession or PI No:

Purpose of Release:

-----------------------Materials Submitted in this Release Package-----------------------

(Indicate “Yes” or “No”)

Release Notice Release Brochure

Copy of the name clearance letter Plant Fact Sheet or Plant Guide

Verification of botanical 

identification

Press release or marketing plan

Completed Environmental 

Evaluation

Name registration notice

-----------------------Availability of Materials and Growers-----------------------

Materials Available: Seed: Quantity (PLS): 

Vegetative: Type and Quantity: 

Size of Production 

Field:

Acres or linear feet: 

Annual Production:

Certified as 

Foundation:

Yes or No: 

Number of potential 

growers:

How will materials be 

distributed:

Provide brief narrative regarding interest of seed and plant producers to grow and 

market this new release and how this interest was determined (are materials already 

in commercial production, are growers requesting this material, etc.): 

-----------------------Testing and Adaptation-----------------------

List other PMCs where this 

material has been tested:

Number of Field Plantings or 

demonstration sites 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

conducted: 

States where plant material 

has been tested:

Indicate where testing might 

be conducted in the future:

SECTION 2 – To be completed by the NTSC Plant Materials Specialist

Points 

available Requirement

Points 

earned

7* Release notice and testing documentation for Tested and Cultivar 

release classes, environmental evaluation prepared and submitted 

to NRCS Plant Release Committee and receives positive 

recommendation.

5* Release notice and testing documentation for Selected release 

class, environmental evaluation prepared and submitted to NRCS 

Plant Release Committee and receives positive recommendation.

1* Release notice and testing documentation for Source Identified 

release class, environmental evaluation prepared and submitted to 

NRCS Plant Release Committee and receives positive 

recommendation.

2 PMC has identified the quantity of foundation quality seed or 

other propagules in production (Required).

1 PMC has provided evidence that commercial growers are 

available and interested in producing release.

1 Release brochure prepared per NPMM.

3 New Plant Fact Sheet and/or Plant Guide developed, posted on 

web and provided to PLANTS, and/or new “plant characteristics” 

attributes table in PLANTS developed; plant images provided to 

PLANTS.

1 Revised Plant Fact Sheet and/or Plant Guide provided to 

PLANTS and/or “plant characteristics” attributes table in 

PLANTS revised, plant images provided to PLANTS.

1 Draft release registration abstract or article is prepared for 

publication in Native Plants Journal, Journal of Plant 

Registrations, HortScience, American Nurseryman, etc. Required 

for all releases. See section 540.34(D)(6).

Total Points (max 15)

* Point differentials reflect work required to obtain a plant release. “Source Identified” are plants which have been 

collected and increased at the PMC without any testing or evaluation.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

540.88 General outline for an official plant release notice for all release types

The following is a template and guideline for preparing release notices. Content may vary 

slightly depending on the type of release. Summaries of all supporting documentation 

(collection site information, superior performance, etc.) should be included within the release 

notice.

UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE

NATURAL RESOURCES CONSERVATION SERVICE

CITY, STATE

and

NAME OF COOPERATOR(S)

CITY, STATE

NOTICE OF RELEASE OF <RELEASE NAME> <COMMON NAME>

The Natural Resources Conservation Service, U.S. Department of Agriculture and <Cooperator 

Name> announce the naming and release of <Release Name> <common name> (<Scientific 

name Author>). <Release Name > <common name> has been assigned the NRCS Accession 

number <XXXXXXX> and the PI number <XXXXXX>.

If this is a pre-varietal release indicate the rationale for releasing it, e.g., there is a high demand 

or conservation need for materials of this level, additional selection or testing is not warranted, 

etc.

Collection Site Information: Include information such as site location (longitude and 

latitude), county, and State. Also note physiographic characteristics about site: soil series, 

taxonomy, pH, texture slope; elevation; aspect; hydrology (on wetland); climate; mean 

temperatures (low, high, averages, extremes, seasonal; mean annual precipitation); associated 

plants (habitat type, community). This section may not be appropriate depending on the 

method of selection. At a minimum, the range where initial collections were made should be 

included. For releases which are single collections and essentially unaltered include full 

collection site information. For composite releases (many collections) it may be useful to 

include a table of the collection sites. 

Description: Include a botanical description of plant: vegetative, floral, and seed 

characteristics; method of pollination, if known. Life history information from the literature 

review can be included here. This description should be specific to the plant being released and 

not a general description of the species. For cultivars and tested releases indicate the improved 

or unique characteristics for the plant release. For releases where there is significant variation 

indicate the extent of variation.

Method of Breeding and Selection: Identify how many collections/accessions were involved 

in initial evaluations, standards for comparison, what traits were selected for, how selection was 

made, and the time period over which initial evaluations were conducted. Identify any breeding 

methods used to develop the release. Include a table summarizing the most convincing 

evaluation for this release if appropriate.

Provide detailed information about advanced evaluations, including number and location of 

evaluation sites, time period, selection methods used, data compiled for evaluated traits. For 

pre-varietal releases include any criteria used for any selection which was done, or indicate if 

there was no selection.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Ecological Considerations and Evaluation: State the methods used to determine any 

potential impact of the release on the environment. State the effects the release might have on 

the environment and any limitations or cautions to its conservation use or geographic area of 

use. Include any significant negative or positive attributes on the Environmental Evaluation 

that should be disclosed.

Conservation Use: State conservation applications for which the plant release is 

recommended. Indicate which traits make this plant suitable for particular functions. Be as 

detailed and specific as possible. This section might be broken into two parts – one part 

indicating the conservation uses which were tested and are known and the other part indicating 

potential conservation uses.

Area of Adaptation: Provide information regarding areas suitable for establishment and 

growth of the released material. Include such details as soil type, hydrology (if applicable), 

elevation, precipitation, hardiness/heat tolerance zones, and MLRA designations. DO NOT 

include a general description of the range of the species or the range found in PLANTS. For 

cultivars, the area of adaptation should be well known and described. For pre-varietal releases 

indicate where the release is intended to be used or the limited range of its testing. For all 

releases also indicate if the release should not be used in a certain area or under certain 

conditions.

Release Production: Indicate any special requirements for producing seed or plants of the 

release. This may include limitations of generations or years of production, requirements of 

certification classes, etc.

Availability of Plant Materials: State which generation of seed (Breeder, Foundation) will be 

maintained by the Plant Materials Center and where seed or other propagules of the plant 

release can be obtained. Include any limitations of generations which may be applicable to 

seed producers.

References:

List any sources used in preparation of notice.

Example: Brown, B. B. 1947. Wetland Plants of the Intermountain West. Mountain 

Publishers. Aberdeen, ID.

Prepared by:

Provide name(s) and address(es) of individuals responsible for preparation of notice.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Signatures for the release of:

<Release Name> <common name> (<Scientific name>)

__________________________________ ____________

Name Date

State Conservationist

United States Department of Agriculture

Natural Resources Conservation Service

City, State

__________________________________ ____________

Name Date

Director

Cooperating Agency

City, State

__________________________________ ____________

Name Date

Director, Ecological Sciences Division

United States Department of Agriculture

Natural Resources Conservation Service

Washington, D.C.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE

NATURAL RESOURCES CONSERVATION SERVICE

COFFEEVILLE, MISSISSIPPI

and

MISSISSIPPI AGRICULTURAL AND FORESTRY EXPERIMENT STATION

MISSISSIPPI STATE, MISSISSIPPI

and

UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE

NATURAL RESOURCES CONSERVATION SERVICE

AMERICUS, GEORGIA

NOTICE OF RELEASE OF ‘HIGHLANDER’ EASTERN GAMAGRASS

The Natural Resources Conservation Service (NRCS), U.S. Department of Agriculture (USDA) 

and the Mississippi Agricultural and Forestry Experiment Station announce the naming and 

release of ‘Highlander’ eastern gamagrass [Tripsacum dactyloides (L.) L.]. Highlander was

tested under the accession number 9062680.

Collection Site Information: Highlander was collected in 1990 by Gregg Brann in 

Montgomery County, Tennessee (MLRA 122). Seeds were collected from plants on the Fort 

Campbell Army Base along Woodlawn Road at 36°32’ latitude and 88°30’longitude. It was 

growing on a southern exposure on a Dickson silt loam with a 3 % slope. Collection site 

elevation was 182 meters (600 feet) and average annual precipitation for this location is 1016 

millimeters (40 inches).

Description: Eastern gamagrass is a native grass that can be found from Massachusetts, west to 

Illinois and Nebraska, and south to the West Indies, Central America, and Brazil. Highlander 

eastern gamagrass forms large clumps, with thick, knotty, rhizomes. Mature foliage height 

ranges from 0.6 to 2 meters (1.5 to 5 feet) tall. Foliage is a bluish-green color and the blades are 

usually 1 to 2 centimeters wide and scabrous on the margins. Flowers are produced from June to 

August, with maximum seed production generally occurring in mid-July. Flowering culms are 

from 2 to 3.5 meters (5 to 9 feet) tall and may lodge somewhat when seeds mature. Racemes are 

15 to 25 centimeters (6 to 10 inches), with the separate staminate flowers held distally. Pistillate 

spikelets are 7 to 10 millimeters (0.25 to 0.4 inches) long (Hitchcock, 1951). Seeds are produced 

apomicically. The caryopses are contained in a fruitcase composed of hardened segments of the 

rachis and lignified outer glumes. Highlander is a tetraploid (2n = 72) (Chet Dewald, personal 

communication).

Potential Uses: Highlander is recommended for forage production. It is best used as a hay crop; 

however, it can be grazed if given appropriate management (i.e. rotational grazing) to prevent 

damage to the plant stand. It also has potential as a perennial silage crop and as a source of 

biomass for bioenergy production. It can be used in many types of conservation plantings, such 

as buffers and vegetative barriers.
Method of Breeding and Selection: 

Initial evaluation: Highlander was initially evaluated at the USDA-NRCS Jamie L. Whitten 

Plant Materials Center (PMC), Coffeeville, Mississippi, from 1992 through 1994. A total of 73 

accessions, collected from nine states in the Southeast and southern Great Plains of the United 

States, were included in the study. From these initial evaluations, Highlander was determined to 

have superior vigor, growth form and development, and disease resistance (Snider, 1995).

Regional Genotype Trial: Highlander was selected by the PMC for inclusion in an regional trial 

comparing 13 eastern gamagrass accessions from southern and western seed sources (Snider, 

1995). This trial was conducted from 1996 through 1998 at nine PMCs, including the Jamie L. 

Whitten PMC. Yield data was collected at of these six sites (Table 1) (Douglas et al., 2000).

Table 1. Average dry matter (DM yield) from 1996-1998 at six locations. (Adapted from Douglas et al., In Press.)

Accession Booneville, AR Knox City, TX Nacogdoches, TX Coffeeville, MS Americus, GA Brooksville, FL

--------------------------------------------------------------kg ha-1

Highlander

--------------------------------------------------------------

14 383 11 155 12 722 18 065 19 133 7522

Jackson 7930 * 14 492 12 427 19 049 † 3201

434493 12 830 13 682 8172 14 041 18 616 † 12 898

9043629 9032 8120 14 448 12 121 12 858 † 7398

9043762 13 324 16 423 11 724 * 16 812 9967

9055975 * * 2715 * 7455 10 957

9059213 * 2820 9179 * 14 791 13 306

9059215 * 3533 6799 * 16 579 15 131

9058465 11 436 11 269 11 823 15 653 16 158 † 9405

9058495 13 665 12 553 10 261 18 436 14 508 † *

9058569 9214 8013 4742 10 626 7204 † *

9062708 11 625 8588 10 691 15 359 18 040 † 8158

9066165 13 707 13 083 11 042 14 723 18 810 † 5942

Mean 11 714 9631 9909 14 606 15 385 8644

LSD (0.05) 2903 3586 7132 ------ 2940 ‡ 5969

* Indicates that plants died after the first winter.

† Plants were not harvested in 1998 because they succumbed to disease.

‡ Because this column contains both two-year and three-year yield averages, no LSD was determined.

Accessions 9055975, 9059213, and 9059215 were Florida accessions that did not survive the 

first winter at Booneville, Arkansas or Coffeeville, Mississippi and 9043762 from the 

Nacogdoches PMC also did not survive at Coffeeville. Plants of all accessions except 

Highlander died in the winter of 1997 or the early spring of 1998 at the Coffeeville location due 

to a disease problem. Plant and soil samples were taken and it was determined that Pythium spp. 

and Rhizoctonia spp. were present, but inoculations would be required to confirm whether either 

or both of the organisms were the cause of the mortality.

Genotype testing in Mississippi: Yields of Highlander, Pete and Jackson eastern gamagrass were 

compared at Coffeeville, Prairie, and Raymond, Mississippi (Table 2). Dry matter yields of 

Highlander and Jackson were comparable at all locations except Coffeeville, where Jackson once 

again succumbed to same disease discussed previously. Yields of Pete were lower at all 

locations, however, the difference was only significant in 2001 at the Prairie location.
Additional genotype testing was conducted at Mississippi State, Mississippi, comparing 

Highlander to other superior accessions from the initial evaluations at the Coffeeville PMC. Dry 

matter yields from 2000 and 2001 are presented in Table 3 (Lang et al., 2002). Highlander was 

the highest yielding accession in 2000. Although 9058543 produced significantly higher yields 

in 2001, Highlander was the most uniform producer during the two years.

Table 2. 2001 and 2002 dry matter yield of Highlander and Jackson eastern gamagrass at Coffeeville, Prairie, and Raymond, 

Mississippi.

Coffeeville Prairie Raymond

2001 2002† 2001 2002 2001 2002

------------------------------------------------kg ha-1

Highlander

------------------------------------------------

13 801 8316 16 165 14 371 ---- 21 600 §

Pete 10 972 7409 11 581 12 454 ---- 26 280

Jackson 12 415 ----‡ 18 822 16 199 ---- 18 130

LSD (0.05) NS 2971 NS NS

† Two harvests were made this year as opposed to three harvests in 2001.

‡ No plants survived after 2001. Plants showed signs of Pythium spp. and Rhizoctonia spp damage.

§ Not harvested in 2001.

Table 3. 2000 and 2001 dry matter yield of eastern gamagrass accessions at Mississippi State, Mississippi.

Accession 2000 2001

-----------------------------kg ha-1

Highlander

-----------------------------

13 011 12 073

9058543 8667 14 067

9062708 6351 11 248

9062714 5402 11 219

LSD (0.05) 3786 1672

Forage Production Comparisons of other Warm Season Grasses: Studies were conducted at the 

PMC from 1996 through 1998 to determine how forage yield and quality of Highlander, ‘Tifton 

44’ bermudagrass , and ‘Alamo’ switchgrass responded to 30 and 45-day clipping frequencies 

(Table 4).

Table 4. Average yield of three warm season grasses clipped on 30 and 45-day frequencies from 1996-1998 at Coffeeville, 

Mississippi. (Adapted from Edwards et al., 2000.)

Species 30-day 45-day LSD (0.05)

--------------------------------------kg ha-1

Highlander eastern gamagrass

--------------------------------------

10 957 13 952 2821

Tifton 44 bermudagrass 12 078 11 155 777

Alamo switchgrass 7454 8722 1046
Table 5. Average forage quality estimates of three warm season grasses clipped on 30 and 45-day frequencies from 1996-1998 at 

Coffeeville, Mississippi. (Adapted from Edwards et al., 2000.)

Highlander

Eastern gamagrass

Tifton 44

Bermudagrass

Alamo

Switchgrass

30-day 45-day 30-day 45-day 30-day 45-day

% CP 10 (8-12) † 10 (6-11) 9 (6-12) 7 (5-9) 10 (7-13) 8 (6-10)

%ADF 38 (36-41) ‡ 39 (37-41) 36 (33-40) 38 (35-39) 35 (33-38) 37 (33-40)

%NDF 68 (66-70) § 70 (68-72) 71 (70-74) 73 (71-75) 68 (65-71) 69 (65-71)

† Crude protein. Numbers in parentheses are the range of values over all clippings in the study.

‡ Acid detergent fiber. Numbers in parentheses are the range of values over all clippings in the study.

§ Neutral detergent fiber. Numbers in parentheses are the range of values over all clippings in the study.

A 45-day clipping frequency typically represents two to three harvests per growing season in the 

lower southern states, but is greatly influenced by moisture and length of growing season. 

Highlander clipped at 45 days produced an average dry matter yield of 13 952 kg ha-1 over the 

three years with no significant variation between years. Bermudagrass clipped at 30 days 

resulted in one more clipping per year but only produced an average DM yield of 12 078 kg ha1. Clipping on a 30-day frequency reduced stands allowing weeds to invade both Highlander 

and Alamo. A 45-day clipping frequency is recommended for Highlander for sustainable yields.

Highlander’s response to N fertilization was evaluated at three locations, Coffeeville, Prairie and 

Mississippi State, Mississippi, in 2001 and 2002. (Figures 1-3) (Douglas et al., In Press). Results 

of these tests indicate that Highlander responds to increasing rates of N on silt loam and clay 

soils and has the capability to produce substantial amounts of biomass.

0

2000

4000

6000

8000

10000

12000

14000

0 134 268 402 536

N Rate (kg ha-1)

kg ha-1

Fig. 1. Season total dry matter yield for Highlander in 2001 

and 2002 as a function of N rates at Prairie, Mississippi.

 2001 Y = 7431 + 10.07N r2 = .69

 2002 Y = 2807 + 20.38N r2 = .95
Fig. 2. Season total dry matter yield for Highlander in 2001 

and 2002 as a function of N rates at Coffeeville, Mississippi. 

Fig. 3. Season total dry matter yield for Highlander in 2001 

and 2002 as a function of N rates at Mississippi State, Mississippi.

Silage Production: A study comparing production and quality of silage from Highlander to 

silage from hybrid corn was established in 2001 at Newton and Holly Springs, Mississippi. 

Highlander was harvested two to three times during the growing season, whereas corn yields are 

from a single harvest (Table 6).

0

2000

4000

6000

8000

10000

12000

14000

16000

18000

0 134 268 402 536

N Rate (kg ha-1)

kg ha-1

0

2000

4000

6000

8000

10000

12000

14000

0 134 268 402 536

N Rate (kg/ha-1)

kg/ha-1

 2001 Y = 2870 + 26.0 N – 0.025N2 R2 = .60

 2002 Y = 3037 + 28.3 N – 0.020N2 R2 = .92

 2001 Y = 8652 + 26.46 N – 0.032N2 R2 = .80

 2002 Y = 5436 + 22.46 N – 0.021N2 R2 = .91
Table 6. 2002 silage yield and quality estimates of Highlander eastern gamagrass and corn varieties at Holly Springs and 

Newton, Mississippi.

Variety Yield CP † ADF ‡ NDF § IVTD ¶ #

----Mg ha-1---- ----------------------------------------%---------------------------------------

Holly Springs

Highlander 42.6 †† 10 42 74 54

Pioneer 32K61 35.9 8 32 54 77

Newton

Highlander 61.6 ‡‡ 10 36 68 64

McNair 508 26.5 9 31 53 80

Northrup King N91-R9 31.4 9 28 64 77

† Silage yields based on 35% dry matter; ‡ crude protein; § acid detergent fiber; ¶ neutral detergent fiber; # in vitro true 

digestibility; †† forage quality estimates are the average of the 19 June and 5 August harvests; ‡‡ forage quality estimates are 

from 12 July harvest only (additional harvests 21 May and 2 October).

Total silage yields of Highlander exceeded those of corn at both locations. Forage quality 

estimates of crude protein, acid detergent fiber, and neutral detergent fiber were similar for 

Highlander and the corn varieties but digestibility is higher for corn.

Seed Production: Average seed yields of Highlander at Coffeeville range from 105 to 160 

kg ha-1. These are similar to those reported for Pete grown in Kansas (USDA-SCS, 1988). 

Timing of harvest is critical for optimum seed yield, as seed heads are vulnerable to shattering. 

Typically, eastern gamagrass plants produce 25 to 30 percent reproductive shoots and 75 to 80 

percent vegetative shoots. Counts of reproductive shoots at Coffeeville have shown that 

Highlander produces 45 to 50 percent more reproductive shoots per plant than Jackson, enabling 

it to have much higher seed yield potential.

Field Establishment: It is well documented that dormancy in eastern gamagrass seeds adversely 

affects field establishment. Stratification has been shown to improve germination of eastern 

gamagrass seeds (Ahring and Frank, 1968) and research by Douglas and Grabowski (2000) 

confirmed the benefit of stratification on germination of Highlander seed (Table 7).

Table 7. Germination percentage of Highlander eastern gamagrass as influenced by cold, moist stratification for six weeks and 

no stratification at 7, 14, 21, and 28 days after planting in a growth chamber.

Seed Treatment Days in Germinator

7 14 21 28

------------------------------------%------------------------------------

Stratification 11a 48a † 52a 52a

No stratification (control) 0b 1b 3b 3b

† Means in columns under days in germination chamber followed by different letters are significantly different at P<0.05.

Indeterminate seed maturity is another factor that may indirectly influence field establishment of 

eastern gamagrass. A typical combine-run harvest consists of complete seed units (cupulate 
fruitcase with filled seed), incomplete seed units (cupulate fruitcase with unfilled seed) and other 

non-viable inert matter. Inability to adequately separate filled seeds from unfilled seeds may 

lead to poor seed lot quality and therefore poor establishment (Ahring and Franks, 1968). 

Douglas et al. (2000) found that by utilizing a gravity separator or an air fractionating aspirator it 

was possible to significantly increase quality of a seed lot cleaned with an conventional air 

screen cleaner; therefore, improving field establishment potential.

Ecological Considerations and Evaluation: An Environmental Evaluation of Plant Materials 

Releases was completed using guidelines established by NRCS (USDA-NRCS, 2000), and the 

best available information for this species. Results of this evaluation determined that 

Highlander was suitable for release based on the criterion contained in this document. This 

conclusion is mainly due to the fact that eastern gamagrass is a naturally occurring species in the 

southeastern United States and planting Highlander would therefore not constitute an 

introduction of a foreign species into local ecosystems. Any negative impacts on other native 

plant species would likely be minimal to non-existent. Also, in addition to the substantial 

evidence that Highlander provides excellent forage for livestock, it also provides critical wildlife 

habitat and harbors beneficial insects and butterflies.

Conservation Use: Highlander can be used for forage and biofuel production, erosion control, 

wildlife habitat, and water quality improvement. It has a high degree of tolerance to 

environmental stresses and will tolerate wet, heavy soils. The apparent resistance to the disease 

problem encountered at the PMC also corroborates the need to release this plant.

Area of Adaptation: Highlander is well adapted for use in the eastern portions of USDA 

Hardiness Zones 6b to 8a, using Interstate 35 as its western limit. Current testing has not 

completely substantiated Zone 6b as the northern limit of its range of adaptation, so it may be 

adapted in more northern zones.

Availability of Plant Materials: Breeder seed will be maintained by the USDA-NRCS Jamie 

L. Whitten Plant Materials Center.

References:

Ahring, R. M. and Frank, H. 1968. Establishment of eastern gamagrass from seed and vegetative 

propagation. J. Range Manage. 21:27-30.

Douglas, J. L., Grabowski, J. M., Keith, B. C. 2000. A comparison of seed cleaning techniques 

for improving quality of eastern gamagrass seed. Seed Sci. & Technol. 28:163-167.

Douglas, J. L., Grabowski, J. M. 2000. Germination of two genotypes of eastern gamagrass 

with and without the cupulate fruitcase and stratification. USDA-NRCS Jamie L. 

Whitten Plant Materials Center. Technical Report. Vol. 15 No. 4.

Douglas, J. L., Houck, M. J., Brakie, M. R., Tharel, L. M., Owsley, C. M., Pfaff, S. L. 2000. 

Yield, Quality and Persistence of 13 Accessions of Eastern Gamagrass in the Southern 

U.S. In Eastern Gamagrass Technology Update. Jamie L. Whitten Plant Materials 
Center, Coffeeville, MS. 45-55.

Douglas, J. L., Edwards, S. D., Lang, D. J., Elmore, R. L., Ivy, R. L., and Howell, J. L. In Press. 

Eastern gamagrass response to N fertilizer. In Proceedings of the Third Eastern Native 

Grass Symposium, October 1-3, 2002, Chapel Hill, NC (publication pending).

Edwards, S., Douglas, J., and Bloodworth, H. 2000. Clipping effect on yield and quality of 

eastern gamagrass, switchgrass, and bermudagrass In Proceedings of the Third Eastern 

Native Grass Symposium, Baltimore, MD, November 17-19, 1999, UDSA, Agricultural 

Research Service, and the USDA, Natural Resources Conservation Service, Beltsville, 

MD 121-126.

Hitchcock, A. S. 1951. Manual of the grasses of the United States. Miscellaneous Publication 

200. United States Department of Agriculture. Washington, DC.

Lang, D. J., Boyd, B., Edwards, Jr., N. C., Elmore, R., Evans, R., Howell, J., Ivy, R., Johnson, 

B., Macoon, B., and Smith, T. 2002. Mississippi Forage Crop Variety Trials, 2002. 

MAFES Info. Bulletin # 391, 14 pp.

Snider, J. 1995. Initial Evaluations of Eastern Gamagrass Ecotypes for the Mid-South. 

Technical Note 6. Jamie L. Whitten Plant Materials Center, Coffeeville, MS.

USDA-Soil Conservation Service. 1988. Seed Production Record. In Proceedings of Eastern 

Gamagrass Workshop, Manhattan, KS, May 17-18, 1988.

USDA-Natural Resources Conservation Service. 2000. National Plant Materials Manual, Title 

190 (Washington, D.C., U.S. Government Printing Office, June, 2000).

Prepared by:

Janet Grabowski

USDA-NRCS Jamie L. Whitten Plant Materials Center

2533 County Road 65

Coffeeville, MS 38922

Joel Douglas

USDA-NRCS Jamie L. Whitten Plant Materials Center

2533 County Road 65

Coffeeville, MS 38922

David Lang, Ph.D.

Dept. of Plant and Soil Sciences

Box 9555

Mississippi State, MS 39762
Signatures for release of:

‘Highlander’ Eastern gamagrass [Tripsacum dactyloides (L.) L.]

__________________________________ ____________

Homer Wilkes Date

State Conservationist

United States Department of Agriculture

Natural Resources Conservation Service

Jackson, MS

__________________________________ ____________

Leonard Jordan Date

State Conservationist

United States Department of Agriculture

Natural Resources Conservation Service

Athens, GA

__________________________________ ____________

Vance Watson, Director Date

Mississippi Agricultural and Forestry Experiment Station

Mississippi State, Mississippi

__________________________________ ____________

Director, Ecological Sciences Division Date

United States Department of Agriculture

Natural Resources Conservation Service

Washington, D.C.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE

NATURAL RESOURCES CONSERVATION SERVICE

BROOKSVILLE, FLORIDA

NOTICE OF RELEASE OF GATOR GERMPLASM BLUE MAIDENCANE

TESTED CLASS OF NATURAL GERMPLASM

The Natural Resources Conservation Service, U.S. Department of Agriculture announces the release of a 

tested ecotype of blue maidencane [Amphicarpum muehlenbergianum (Schult.) Hitchc.].

This plant will be referred to as Gator Germplasm blue maidencane. It was tested under the NRCS accession 

number 9059971. It is being released as a vegetatively propagated material, increased from the original 

source collection.

This alternative release procedure is justified because there are no existing commercial sources of blue 

maidencane. This accession was selected for its outstanding vigor, spread, and stand persistence. The 

potential demand for this release is very high due to the need for additional wetland plants for use in reclaimed 

mined lands, constructed wetlands, and freshwater restoration sites in Florida. There is no potential to create 

improved materials through breeding due to its geocarpic seed production mechanism.

Collection Site Information: Gator Germplasm was collected in Citrus County, Florida, not far from its 

northeastern border with Marion County. It was found on the south side of state Hwy 200, 5 miles east 

(northeast) from the junction with US Hwy 41 at Hernando, Florida. The collection site is north of Tsala 

Apopka Lake and is in the floodplain of the Withlacoochee River, so it is often seasonally flooded. Soil type at 

the collection site is a Tavares fine sand, 0 to 5 percent slopes. Mean annual precipitation in the area is 53 

inches, average maximum temperatures are 83 oF and average minimum temperatures are 59 oF, with 

approximately 300 frost-free days per year.

Description: Blue maidencane is a rhizomatous grass with erect culms that grow 15-100 cm tall. The fairly 

stiff leaves are bluish green, lanceolate, often with a narrow white margin, 5-15 mm wide and 10-15 cm long, 

without a prominent midrib. The genus name Amphicarpum is derived from the Greek word that means doubly 

fruit-bearing because this grass produces two types of spikelets. The obvious ones on the aerial inflorescence 

are bisexual, held in an open panicle that is 10-25 cm long. These spikelets are sterile. The subterranean 

fertile female spikelets are cleistogamous, produced on slender branches from the base of the culm (or 

occasionally from the lower nodes) and are 7-9 mm long. Due to its underground seed formation, this species 

is also commonly referred to as goobergrass.

Method of Breeding and/or Selection: Gator germplasm was selected from an assembly of 157 accessions 

of blue maidencane collected from throughout Florida from 1993 to 1998. Vegetative material, consisting of 

shoots, rhizomes, and roots, was collected from each site for testing. In March of 1999, these accessions were 

planted in an initial evaluation block at the Plant Materials Center (PMC) in Brooksville, Florida (Hernando 

County) in replicated 5’ x 5’ plots spaced 4 feet apart. Five plants were planted in each plot, with four plants on 

the corners and one in the middle to form the shape of an “X”. ‘Halifax’ maidencane (Panicum hemitomon J.A. 

Schultes) was used as a standard of comparison. The blue maidencane accessions spread so quickly, that 

the plots began to grow together by the end of first year, which precluded continued evaluation; however, there 

was sufficient data to select eleven superior accessions for advanced evaluation (Table 1). These accessions 

were planted in tubs in March 2000 to confine them and ensure their isolation from the other blue maidencane 

accessions. Accessions 9059859, 9060309, and 9060311 had similar performance and were from a similar 

geographic location, so they were combined in one tub, which was assigned the accession number 9060489. 

Accessions 9059866, 9060066, and 9060067 were also combined in one tub for similar reasons and given the 

accession number 9060490 (Table 2). This resulted in seven tubs containing the superior blue maidencane 

accessions.
Table 1. Summary of initial evaluation results for eleven selected blue maidencane accessions at Brooksville, FL.

Accession Cover Height

Foliage 

Abund.

Foliage 

Vigor 1

Spread 

Potential 1

Seedhead 

Abund. 1

Disease 

Injury 1

Insect 

Injury 2

Weed 

Comp. 2 2

---%--- --cm--

9059859 87 48 2.3 2.3 3.0 6.0 6.0 5.0 2.0

9060309 67 48 2.2 2.3 3.0 6.3 5.3 5.0 2.0

9060311 68 39 2.5 2.0 2.0 4.7 6.7 5.0 2.3

9059866 83 42 2.8 2.7 2.7 5.3 6.0 5.0 2.3

9060066 83 41 3.3 2.7 5.7 7.0 5.7 5.0 2.3

9060067 88 38 3.3 3.0 3.0 7.0 5.0 5.3 2.7

9059869 60 38 3.7 4.0 5.0 4.3 5.0 5.0 2.3

9059956 88 27 3.8 3.0 5.7 5.3 5.7 5.0 2.0

9059971 75 47 3.0 3.0 5.7 5.8 5.7 5.0 2.0

9060008 88 30 3.7 2.7 5.0 4.3 5.0 5.0 2.0

9060295 60 40 2.7 3.0 2.7 4.0 5.3 5.0 2.0 1 Visual Observation Rating Scale: 9 = least; 5 = average; and 1 = most. 2

Table 2. Florida counties of origin and collectors for eleven superior blue maidencane accessions.

Visual Observation Rating Scale: 1 = least; 5 = average; and 9 = most.

Accession No. County of Origin Collectors

9059859 Pasco Pfaff/Gonter

9060309 Pasco Deal/Pfaff

9060311 Pasco Deal/Pfaff

Combined as 9060489

9059866 Charlotte Pfaff/Gonter

9060066 Sarasota (Myakka State Park) Lackmann/Perry

9060067 Sarasota (Myakka State Park) Perry/Lackmann

Combined as 9060490

9059869 Palm Beach Gonter/Pfaff

9059956 Madison Gonter/Black

9059971 Citrus Pfaff/Santucci

9060008 St. Johns Pfaff/Santucci

9060295 Polk Gonter/Pfaff

Two advanced evaluation plantings using rhizomes of these accessions were planted in 2000, one in Collier 

County, Florida, near Naples and the second in Polk County, south of Bartow. The Collier County site was a 

flatwoods site that had previously been treated to control Brazilian pepper (Schinus terebinthifolius Raddi) and 

the Polk county site was on reclaimed mined land, adjacent to a small lake. Halifax and Citrus Germplaasm 

common maidencane were planted as standards. A row of eastern gamagrass [Tripsacum dactyloides (L.)L.] 

was planted between the maidencane plots to act as a barrier to prevent the plots from growing together. 

Cattle grazing initially impacted growth on the Collier County site; however, after the site was fenced to exclude 

the cattle, the plants recovered nicely (Table 3). The height differential between the blue maidencane 

accessions and the common maidencane is due to inherent size differences between these two species.
Table 3. Performance of blue and common maidencane accessions on a flatwoods site in Collier County, 

Florida 11 months after planting.

Accession

Plant 

Height

Canopy

Width Vigor

Ground 

Cover 1

Spread 

Rate

Drought

Tol. 1

Disease

1 Resist.

Insect 

Resist. 1

Weed 

Competition 1 2

---------cm-------- ---%---

9059869 9.7 7.0 4.3 18.8 3.5 4.5 5 5 6

9059956 6.0 4.7 5.3 5.3 6.7 6.3 5 5 6

9059971 9.0 7.7 4.0 12.0 4.0 4.7 5 5 4

9060008 7.7 7.0 3.8 21.8 3.5 5.0 5 5 4

9060295 7.7 5.3 5.6 7.5 5.0 6.0 5 5 4

9060489 9.5 5.5 5.8 7.8 5.8 5.8 5 5 6

9060490 10.5 6.3 4.0 14.5 3.5 4.6 5 5 5

Citrus 19.0 11.0 3.5 16.0 3.8 4.3 5 5 4

Halifax 12.5 5.8 5.0 7.8 6.0 5.8 5 5 6 1 Visual Observation Rating Scale: 9 = least; 5 = average; and 1 = most. 2

Soils at the Polk County site consisted of overburden with a heavy clay fraction. These soils tend to be sticky 

when wet and crust badly as they dry. These soil physical characteristics negatively affected emergence 

because shoots of all accessions had difficulty penetrating the crust. A heavy infestation of bermudagrass 

[Cynodon dactylon (L.) Pers.] and torpedograss (Panicum repens L.) created severe competition that affected 

survival of the plants. Citrus Germplasm exhibited the best survival, with an average emergence of 10.5 

shoots when the plots were evaluated seven months after planting. All of the blue maidencane accessions 

averaged less than 3 shoots that had emerged at this same evaluation date. The taller stature of the common 

maidencane and its greater affinity for heavy textured soils probably gave it a competitive edge over blue 

maidencane at this site.

Visual Observation Rating Scale: 1 = least; 5 = average; and 9 = most.

A third advanced evaluation plot was planted in 2001 in Hamilton County, Florida, near Jasper. These plots 

were on disturbed soils near a cypress marsh. A similar planting scheme, using the same accessions and 

rows of eastern gamagrass between the plots was used. Partial shading at the site affected growth of Citrus 

and Halifax, resulting in tall spindly plants (Table 4). All of the blue maidencane accessions were better 

adapted to the shade and their growth was much more vigorous. Ample access to moisture from the marsh 

prevented evaluation of drought tolerance.

Table 4. Performance of blue and common maidencane accessions on a cypress swamp border site Hamilton 

County, Florida 6 months after planting.

Accession

Plant 

Height

Canopy

Width Vigor

Ground 

Cover 1 Spread Rate

Drought

Tol. 1

Disease

1 Resist.

Insect 

Resist. 1

Weed 

Competition 1

2

---------cm-------- ---%---

9059869 22.3 7.3 5.7 3.0 8.7 --- 5.8 5 2

9059956 21.5 8.3 4.8 4.5 7.5 --- 4.8 5 2

9059971 20.8 6.3 5.5 3.5 8.3 --- 5.5 5 2

9060008 26.5 19.8 3.3 9.0 6.5 --- 3.1 5 2

9060295 26.0 9.3 5.5 3.5 8.3 --- 5.3 5 2

9060489 22.0 4.0 6.5 1.5 9.0 --- 6.0 5 2

9060490 53.5 26.3 4.0 17.0 6.8 --- 5.0 5 2

Citrus 39.0 12.5 5.0 7.5 7.8 --- 5.3 5 2

Halifax 22.3 7.3 5.7 3.0 8.7 --- 5.8 5 2

1 Visual Observation Rating Scale: 9 = least; 5 = average; and 1 = most.

2 Visual Observation Rating Scale: 1 = least; 5 = average; and 9 = most.
Accession 9059971 consistently ranked near, but not necessarily at the top, in the evaluation criteria examined 

during these advanced evaluation plantings; however, the decision to release this germplasm was made based 

on its superior stand persistence under adverse conditions. The seven tubs at the PMC were provided minimal 

maintenance, other than regularly scheduled irrigation, for five years after planting. When examined in the fall 

of 2005, the other five accessions had mostly succumbed to severe weed pressure, but the tub containing 

9059971 still had a fairly dense stand of shoots that were competing well with the weeds.

Ecological Considerations and Evaluation: Gator Germplasm is a clonal line increased from materials naturally 

occurring in the region of anticipated use of this release. Its vegetative rate of spread is not significantly 

greater than that of other blue maidencane plants found in its native range and the potential for widespread 

dispersal by seed is extremely limited. For these reasons, it is not anticipated to have the potential to displace 

other native species or have a negative affect on environmental quality. Gator Germplasm was evaluated 

through the Plant Materials Program Environmental Evaluation worksheet and was found to pose no problems 

for release.

Conservation Use: Blue maidencane is classified as a facultative wetland species; therefore, Gator 

Germplasm is well adapted for use in freshwater wetland restoration sites and constructed wetlands for 

wastewater treatment. Gator will form colonies with dense networks of roots and rhizomes and can provide 

excellent erosion control along the edges of ponds, streams, and ditches. Harvesting and spreading rhizomes 

on restoration sites can be mechanized, using standard agronomic equipment commonly available in Florida.

Blue maidencane is a palatable grass that is considered to be an important component of flatwoods rangeland 

in southern Florida. It is classified as a decreaser species that can provide grazing for up to 9 months. The 

University of Florida, IFAS Extension report yields for blue maidencane during the summer months averaged 

4000 lb/ac of dry matter. Yield data for Gator Germplasm was not collected during the evaluation process, but 

should be comparable to these reported levels. Although vegetative planting of forages is generally 

considered to be prohibitively expensive, it is not an uncommon practice for many pasture grasses (i.e., hybrid 

bermudagrass, limpograss) used in Florida. Although commercial planting in those instances utilizes shoot 

material, since Gator Germplasm rhizomes can also be planted mechanically, using this grass in pastures and 

restored rangelands with suitable soils and hydrology is feasible. Deer will also graze blue maidencane and 

hogs will root up the rhizomes in the winter.

Anticipated Area of Adaptation: Gator Germplasm has been planted in northern (Hamilton County), central 

(Hernando and Polk Counties), and southern (Collier County) Florida. It grew well in all these areas, with the 

exception of the Polk County site, with its adverse soils and intense weed pressure. It has not undergone 

testing outside Florida; however, the native range of the species extends north to the coastal areas of Georgia 

and southern South Carolina. It is well adapted to acid to neutral sandy soils that are wet for part of the year. 

It will not grow in deep, stagnant water. Blue maidencane is reported to be tolerant of shade and Gator 

Germplasm grew well in the damp, shaded area at the Hamilton County site.

Availability of Plant Materials: G0 planting stock will be maintained by the Brooksville Plant Materials Center. 

Rhizomes can be requested from the Florida Plant Materials Specialist, Gainesville, Florida.
References:

Brooksville FL, PMC. 2002. 2001 Activity Report. pp. 9-10. Available from the USDA, NRCS Plant Materials 

Center, 14119 Broad St., Brooksville, FL 34601.

Clayton, W.D., K.T. Harman, and H. Williamson. 2007. GrassBase – the online world grass flora. [Online]. 

http://www.kew.org/data/grasses-db.html. (accessed 17 July 2007).

Leithead, H.L., J.L. Yarlett, and T.N. Shiflet. 1971. 100 native forage grasses in 11 southern states. Agric. 

Handbook 389, Soil Conservation Service, USDA, Washington, D.C.

Radford, A.E., H.E. Ahles, and C.R. Bell. 1968. Manual of the vascular flora for the Carolinas. Univ. of North 

Carolina, Press, Chapel Hill.

University of Florida, Center for Aquatic and Invasive Plants. 2002. Aquatic, wetland and invasive plant 

particulars and photographs, Amphicarpum muhlenbergianum. [Online]. http://aquat1.ifas.edu/amphmuh.html. 

(accessed 17 July 2007).

University of Florida, IFAS Extension, West Florida Research and Education Center at Milton. No Date. 

Range grasses of Florida little blue maidencane, goobergrass. Adapted from J.J. Mullahey and G.W. Tanner, 

Florida Range Grasses Impacting Grazing Management. [Online]. 

http://wfrec.ufl.edu/range/grasses/litlblu.html. (accessed 24 July 2007).

Watson, L., and Dallwitz, M.J. 1992. Grass genera of the World: descriptions, illustrations, identification, and 

information retrieval; including synonyms, Amphicarpum Kunth. [Online]. http://www.biologie.unihamburg.de/b-online/delta/grass/www/amphicar.htm. (accessed 17 July 2007).

Williams, M.J., and J. Grabowski. In Press. Brooksville Plant Materials Center: developing sources of native 

wetland plants for revegetation in Florida. Proceedings of the 33rd

Yarlett, L. L. 1996. Common grasses of Florida and the Southeast. The Florida Native Plant Society, Spring 

Hill, FL.

Annual Conference on Ecosystems 

Restoration and Creation, Plant City, FL, 2-3 Nov. 2006.

Prepared by:

Janet M. Grabowski and Mary Anne Gonter

USDA, NRCS Brooksville Plant Materials Center

14119 Broad Street

Brooksville, FL 34601

M. J. Williams

USDA, NRCS

2614 N.W. 43rd

Gainesville, FL 32606-6611

Street
Signatures for release of:

Gator Germplasm blue maidencane [Amphicarpum muehlenbergianum (Schult.) Hitchc.]

__________________________________ ____________

State Conservationist Date

United States Department of Agriculture

Natural Resources Conservation Service

Gainesville, Florida

__________________________________ ____________

Director, Ecological Sciences Division Date

United States Department of Agriculture

Natural Resources Conservation Service

Washington, D.C.
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE

NATURAL RESOURCES CONSERVATION SERVICE

PLANT MATERIALS CENTER

KINGSVILLE, TEXAS

and

TEXAS AGRICULTURAL EXPERIMENT STATION

BEEVILLE, TEXAS

and

TEXAS A&M UNIVERSITY

KINGSVILLE, TEXAS

NOTICE OF RELEASE OF MARIAH GERMPLASM HOODED 

WINDMILLGRASS

SELECTED CLASS OF NATURAL GERMPLASM

The Natural Resources Conservation Service (NRCS), U.S. Department of Agriculture 

(USDA), Texas A&M University-Kingsville, and the Texas Agricultural Experiment Station 

at Beeville, Texas announce the release of a selected ecotype of hooded windmillgrass 

(Chloris cucullata Bisch.) for the south Texas ecoregion. Mariah Germplasm was tested 

under the accession number 9085313 or 313.

This plant will be referred to as Mariah Germplasm hooded windmillgrass and is released as a 

selected plant material class of certified seed (natural track).

This alternative release procedure is justified because there are no existing commercial 

sources of hooded windmillgrass. The potential for immediate use is high especially for 

roadside plantings and critical site revegetation.

Collection Site Information: Accession 9085313 was collected in 1999 from native plants 

located near the headquarters of the La Paloma Ranch in Kenedy county at 27° 15’ N. 

latitude and 97° 54’ W. longitude (MLRA 83C). It was growing on a Delfina loamy fine 

sand soil type with a 1% slope. Collection site elevation was 16 meters (52 feet) and average 

annual precipitation for this location is 63.5 centimeters (25 inches).

Description: Hooded windmillgrass is a native, perennial bunch grass. Mature foliage 

height ranges from 15 to 60 centimeters (0.5 to 2.0 feet) tall. Leaves are glabrous to scabrous 

with the sheaths almost always being glabrous. The leaf blades are linear to 20 centimeters (8 

inches) long and 2 to 4 millimeters wide. It has a ligule that is a short-ciliate crown. Hooded 

windmillgrass will flower multiple times over the growing season, and flowers can be 

produced from May through October. The inflorescence will have 10 to 20 branches that are 

2 to 5 centimeters long. The branches are flexuous or arcuate, borne in several close 

radiating verticels. Spikelets are at first straw-colored but later becoming tawny, closelyspaced and widely divergent, with about 14 to 18 spikelets per centimeter of rachis. Glumes 

are lanceolate to obovate and glabrous except for the scabrous midnerve. The first glume is 

0.5 to 0.7 mm long and the second glume is 1 to 1.5 mm long. The lower lemma is broadly 

elliptic and glabrous except for the appressed-pilose keel and margins. It is 1.5 to 2.0 mm 
long with an obtuse apex and an awn that is 0.3 to 1.5 mm long. Spikelets have one sterile 

floret, markedly inflated, with the upper margins inrolled usually 1.0 to 1.5 mm long, 

unawned or with an awn to 1.5 mm long. The chromosome number is 2n=40. Hooded

windmillgrass is found in northeastern Mexico and throughout Texas especially in the central 

and western parts of the state. 

Potential Uses: Mariah Germplasm is recommended for roadside plantings, critical site 

revegetation and in range seeding mixes. It can be used in many types of conservation 

plantings, such as grassed waterways, streamside buffers, filter strips, and pond 

embankments.

Method of Breeding and Selection: 

Initial evaluation: Mariah Germplasm was initially evaluated at the USDA-NRCS E, 

”Kika” de la Garza Plant Materials Center (PMC), Kingsville, Texas, from 2000 through 

2001. A total of 43 accessions of windmillgrass were collected from throughout the state of 

Texas and were included in the study. From these initial evaluations, accessions 9085301 

and 9085313 were determined to be the best accessions of hooded windmillgrass for vigor, 

growth form and development, and disease resistance (Table 1 and 2).
Table 1. Summary of Initial Evaluations of Windmillgrasses (Chloris spp.) 

from 2000 through 2001 on clay soils at Kingsville, Texas

Accession 

Number

Source

(County)

Percent 

Survival

Foliage 

Density*

Seed 

Production*

9076951 Frio 100 5.2 3.9

9076977 Palo Pinto 95 6.5 4.5

9076946 Kleberg 100 5.3 5.4

9085229 Coleman 95 6.9 5.0

9085308 Lampasas 100 6.6 5.1

9085235 Lubbock 100 7.0 5.5

9085300 Bee 100 5.3 5.1

9085289 San Patricio 100 4.4 4.0

9085316 Kenedy 100 4.3 4.9

9085243 Burnet 100 6.1 3.7

9085285 Howard 100 6.2 4.8

9085288 Burleson 100 5.4 3.6

9085242 Austin 100 4.5 3.7

9085309 Kleberg 100 5.5 5.0

9085258 Goliad 100 4.6 4.8

9076968 Knox 100 7.0 4.3

9085264 DeWitt 100 4.4 4.8

9085260 San Patricio 100 3.1 3.8

9085240 Dimmit 95 5.3 4.5

9085234 Lubbock 100 7.4 4.8

9085301 Duval 100 5.4 4.7

9076971 Brown 100 6.5 4.3

9085313 Kenedy 100 4.6 5.0

9085245 Burnet 100 5.8 4.8

9076955 Kleberg 100 4.8 4.9

9085262 Refugio 100 2.9 4.3

BELL - 100 3.3 4.2

9085265 DeWitt 100 4.1 4.8

9085259 Kleberg 100 4.4 4.8

9085271 Hidalgo 100 4.5 4.8

9085233 Andrews 100 7.4 3.8

9076974 Lubbock 100 7.7 4.5

9085283 Calhoun 100 3.7 3.8

9085276 Starr 100 5.3 4.3

9085291 Webb 100 4.9 4.8

Means All Counties 99 5.5 4.6

 *Ocular estimate (1 = Best)
Table 2. Summary of Initial Evaluations of Windmillgrasses (Chloris spp.) 

from 2000 through 2001 on sandy soils at Kingsville, Texas.

Accession 

Number

Source

(County)

Percent 

Survival

Foliage 

Density*

Seed 

Production*

9076951 Frio 100 6.4 5.3

9076977 Palo Pinto 85 7.1 4.7

9076946 Kleberg 95 5.5 4.5

9085229 Coleman 95 6.8 4.7

9085308 Lampasas 100 7.1 5.0

9085235 Lubbock 90 6.7 5.2

9085300 Bee 100 5.4 5.4

9085289 San Patricio 95 5.2 4.0

9085316 Kenedy 100 4.8 4.6

9085243 Burnet 100 6.3 4.0

9085285 Howard 80 6.6 5.5

9085288 Burleson 100 5.5 4.2

9085242 Austin 100 5.9 4.8

9085309 Kleberg 83 6.5 6.5

9085255 Jim Hogg 100 5.8 4.7

9076968 Knox 85 7.2 4.6

9085240 Dimmit 90 5.0 4.7

9085234 Lubbock 65 7.1 5.0

9085301 Duval 85 5.8 4.5

9076971 Brown 100 7.0 4.7

9085313 Kenedy 100 5.5 5.5

9085245 Burnet 80 6.5 5.5

9076955 Kleberg 81 5.8 5.9

9085262 Refugio 100 4.0 4.8

BELL - 100 4.0 5.0

9085258 Goliad 100 5.3 4.6

9085265 DeWitt 100 5.5 5.1

9085259 Kleberg 100 5.7 4.8

9085271 Hidalgo 100 5.9 4.6

9085233 Andrews 60 7.5 5.6

9076974 Lubbock 100 7.5 4.4

9085283 Calhoun 100 4.5 5.0

9085276 Starr 100 5.8 4.9

9085291 Webb 80 6.1 5.0

9085264 DeWitt 100 5.3 5.3

9085260 San Patricio 100 3.8 5.1

Means All 

Counties

95 6.1 4.9

*Ocular estimate (1 = Best)
Advanced Evaluations: Advanced evaluation plots were established in 2002 at both the 

PMC in Kingsville and the Texas Agricultural Experiment Station (TAES) in Beeville. The 

Advanced evaluation plots at the PMC consisted of accessions 9085300, 9085301, and 

9085313. The advanced evaluation plots at Beeville consisted of accessions 9085301, 

9085313, and 9085316. Accessions 9085301 and 9085313 had the best field performance on 

these plots at the PMC during 2002 and 2003 (Table 3). Dr. Bill Ocumpaugh ranked 

9085316 and 9085313 as his top two accessions at Beeville in 2002. Seed production 

rankings appear to favor accession 9085316 (Table 4). However, it became apparent upon 

looking at the growth form, harvest time and percent active germination that accession 

9085316 was an intermediate form between hooded and shortspike windmillgrass. It was 

therefore eliminated from the hooded evaluations. The goal was a hooded windmillgrass that 

would have high active germination (>90%), have a high 2-day germination, produce 

multiple seed crops, and produce a satisfactory seed yield. 

Table 3. Hooded Windmillgrass Advanced Evaluation in 2003 at Kingsville, 

Texas 

Accession 

Number

Growth 

Habit

Percent 

Survival

Plant 

Vigor*

Foliage 

Density*

Seed 

Production*

Seed 

Shatter*

300 Bunch 100 5.4 5.4 5.5 5.0

301 Bunch 100 5.0 5.2 4.4 5.0

313 Very 

Spreading

100 5.3 4.6 6.8 5.0

 *Ocular estimate (1 = Best)

Table 4. Hooded Windmillgrass Seed Harvest and Germination from 

Beeville, Texas in 2003. 

Accession

Number 

Total Grams

Harvested

2 Day

Germination

Total 

Germination

300 65 93% 96%

301 118 76% 97%

313 97 87% 93%

316 318 56% 70%

• 12 hours dark 20oC (68oF) / 12 hours light 30oC (86oF).

Initial seed germination results indicated low germination from harvested seed at the PMC 

(ATR, 2001). In order to understand the cause of the low germination results from harvested 

seed, samples of the 2002 harvest from accession 9085313 was sent to two seed labs. Hulsey 

Seed Lab got 91% germination and Giddings TDA Seed Lab got 24% germination. Upon 

further investigation it was discovered that the majority of the harvested seed did not contain 

filled seed. Germination tests previously had been run on spikelets (apparently mostly 

empty), not bare caryopsis. Seed was collected from each plant of the advanced evaluation 

plots at Beeville in 2003. This harvest was tested in 2004 (Table 4). All of the accessions 
appear to have good germination. Hooded windmillgrass appears to have a very high active 

germination (>90%) whereas shortspike windmillgrass will have an active germination of 60-

70% and 20-30% dormant seed. 

A field emergence study was established in May 2004 on a Victoria clay soil at the PMC. 

Ten by twenty foot flat plots were seeded at a rate of 20 PLS/ ft2

Table 5. Windmillgrass Field Emergence Evaluation in 2004 at Kingsville, 

Texas

and replicated three times 

for accessions 9085260, 9085283 and 9085313. These plots were not irrigated. Evaluation 

of these plots in November of 2004 (Table 5) indicated that accession 9085313 produced 

from 15 to 35% foliar cover. 

Accession 

Number

Rep % 

Cover

Plant 

Vigor*

Foliage 

Density

*

Foliage 

Production

*

Uniformity

*

Development 

Stage

260 1 50 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 Seed

260 2 60 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 Seed

260 3 70 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 Seed

283 1 35 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 Seed

283 2 30 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 Seed

283 3 70 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Seed

313 1 15 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 Seed

313 2 35 5.0 6.0 6.0 5.0 Seed

313 3 15 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 Seed

 *Ocular estimate (1= Best)

Seed Production: Average annual seed yields of Mariah Germplasm hooded windmillgrass 

at Kingsville have been 225 pounds per acre (252 kg ha-1

Indeterminate seed maturity is a factor that may influence economical seed yields of hooded 

windmillgrass. A typical combine-run harvest consists of complete seed units or filled seed, 

incomplete seed units or unfilled seed and other non-viable inert matter. Filled seed at 

Beeville, Texas ranged from 1.5 % to 3.7 % in 2003 (Table 7) and from 2.9% to 5.7% from 

an early May harvest in 2003 from Kingsville, Texas (Table 8). However, seed fill may be 

influenced by environmental conditions such as temperature and soil moisture. Data from 

hooded windmillgrass, accession 9085313, for both month of harvest as well as location 

shows a large variability in percentage of seed fill (Table 9 and 10). Therefore, location and 

ability to irrigate may dictate where seed production plantings of windmillgrass can be most 

economically grown. 

) (Table 6). 

Seed quality of harvested seed can be easily manipulated. Seed harvested by a combine at the 

PMC in Kingsville and then run through a Westrup Laboratory brush machine (used for 

polishing, hulling or scarifing seed), hammermill, and tabletop Clipper seed cleaner produced 

95% pure seed.
Table 6. Seed Attributes for Hooded Windmillgrass Harvested in Kingsville

Acc # Year 

Harvested

Harvest Weight 

(lb/acre)

Clean Seed 

(lb/acre)

Seeds/ lb Seed Rate

(PLS lb/acre)

Available 

Seed (lb)

313 2004 310 33 2,564,646 0.33 3.3

313 2005 143 6 2,424,360 0.33 0.6

301 2005 423 26 2,899,244 0.33 1

Table 7. Seed Fill Percentages from Windmillgrass Harvest in 2003 from 

Beeville, Texas

Species Acc# Harvest Weight 

(grams)

Total Grams 

Clean

Seeds/ 

Gram

Germ 

Average

Seed Fill

Hooded 300 645 6 4257 96% 9.5%

Hooded 301 118 9 6386 97% 8.0%

Hooded 313 97 5 5649 93% 5.8%

Hooded 316 318 11 6211 70% 3.5%

Table 8. Seed Fill Percentages from Windmillgrass Harvest on May 21, 

2003 from Kingsville, Texas

Species Acc# Harvest Weight

(grams)

Total Grams 

Clean

Seeds/ 

Gram

Germ 

Average

Seed Fill

Hooded 300 331 16 4539 86% 5%

Hooded 301 444 21 6843 90% 5%

Hooded 313 83 4 5340 94% 5%

Hooded 316 100 5 5447 83% 5%

Table 9. Seed Fill Percentages from Hooded Windmillgrass, Accession 313 

Harvested in September, 2004 at Kingsville, Texas

Date Harvested Percent Filled Seed Average Filled 

Seed 

Rep 1 Rep 2 Rep 3

9/21/2004 23 29 26 26%

8/25/2005 10 7 8 8%

11/08/2005 33 26 30 30%
Table 10. Seed Fill Percentages from Hooded Windmillgrass, Accession 

313 Harvested at Different Locations and Different Years.

Location Percent Filled Seed by Year

2003 2004 2005

Kingsville 7 15 8

Beeville 11 19 -

Knox City - 15 42

Ecological Considerations and Evaluation: An Environmental Evaluation of Plant 

Materials Releases was completed using guidelines established by NRCS (USDA-NRCS, 

2000), and the best available information for this species. Results of this evaluation 

determined that Mariah Germplasm hooded windmillgrass was suitable for release based on 

the criterion contained in this document. This conclusion is mainly due to the fact that 

hooded windmillgrass is a naturally occurring species in Texas and planting it would 

therefore not constitute an introduction of an exotic species into local ecosystems. Any 

negative impacts on other native plant species would likely be minimal to non-existent. Also, 

release of this species will make available an additional native species for rangeland planting, 

will provide a good seed source for quail and other birds and may provide unknown benefits 

by maintaining and contributing habitat that harbors beneficial insects and butterflies. It will 

also provide a native alternative to planting exotics species on highway right of ways.

Conservation Use: Mariah Germplasm hooded windmillgrass will provide a new native 

species for rangeland planting, erosion control, wildlife habitat, and water quality 

improvement. It has high active germination (>90%), has a high 2-day germination, and 

produces multiple seed crops. These species characteristics, along with its preferred 

adaptation to central and western portions of Texas, make it a good complimentary species 

with Welder Germplasm shortspike windmillgrass. 

Area of Adaptation: Mariah Germplasm hooded windmillgrass is well adapted for use in 

the southern and central portions of Texas, coinciding with MLRA 83 (Rio Grande Plain), 

MLRA 78 (Central Rolling Red Plains), MLRA 80 (Central Prairies), MLRA 81 (Edwards 

Plateau), MLRA 82 (Texas Central Basin) and MLRA 150 (Gulf Coast Prairies). Current 

testing has not completely substantiated the northern limit of its range of adaptation. Existing 

test sites in Texas include Knox City and Nacogdoches. Additional will be planted in 2006 in 

Stephenville, TX, Oklahoma, Louisiana, and New Mexico. 

Availability of Plant Materials: Breeder seed will be maintained by the USDA-NRCS E. 

“Kika” de la Garza Plant Materials Center, Kingsville, Texas.
References:

AOSA. 1992. Seedling Evaluation Handbook. Contrib. No. 35. 84-87. Association of 

 Official Seed Analysts, Las Cruces, NM. 130 pp.

Correl, D. S. and M. C. Johnston.1996. Manual of the Vascular Plants of Texas. University 

 of Texas at Dallas. Richardson Texas. p. 238-242.

Brecke, B. J. and W. B. Duke. 1980. Dormancy, germination, and emergence characteristics 

 of fall panicum (Panicum dichotomiflorum) seed. Weed Science. 28: 683-685.

Fulbright, T. E. and K. S. Flenniken. 1988. Causes of dormancy in Paspalum plicatulum

 (Poaceae) seeds. The Southwestern Naturalist 33(1): 35-39.

Gould, F. W. 1975. The Grasses of Texas. Texas Agricultural Experiment Station. Texas 

 A&M University Press. College Station. p. 316-327.

Hitchcock, A. S. 1971. Manual of the Grasses of the United States, Volumes 1& 2, 2nd

Kelly, K. M., J. V. Staden, and W. E. Bell. 1992. Seed coat structure and dormancy. Plant 

 Growth Regulation 11: 201-209. 

 edition. Revised by Agnes Chase. Dover Publications, New York. 1051 pp.

SAS Institute. 2000. Multiple Comparisons and Multiple Tests Using SAS System: 

 Workbook/Peter H. Westfall, D. Tobias. Cary, NC.

Simpson, G. M. 1990. Seed Dormancy in Grasses. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, 

 UK.

Prepared by:

John Lloyd-Reilley

USDA-NRCS E. ”Kika” de la Garza Plant Materials Center

3409 N. FM 1355

Kingsville, TX 78413

Shelly Maher

USDA-NRCS E. ”Kika” de la Garza Plant Materials Center

3409 N. FM 1355

Kingsville, TX 78413
Signatures for release of:

Mariah Germplasm hooded windmillgrass (Chloris cucullata Bisch.)

__________________________________ ____________

Dr. Larry Butler Date

State Conservationist

United States Department of Agriculture

Natural Resources Conservation Service

Temple, TX

__________________________________ ____________

Texas Agricultural Experiment Station Date

College Station, Texas

__________________________________ ____________

Dr. Fred Bryant, Director Date

Caesar Kleberg Wildlife Research Institute

Texas A&M

Kingsville, Texas

__________________________________ ____________

Robert Escheman Date

National Plant Materials Program Leader

United States Department of Agriculture

Natural Resources Conservation Service

Washington, D.C.
1

THE

UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE

NATURAL RESOURCES CONSERVATION SERVICE

SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY

WASHINGTON D.C.

and

MONTANA DEPARTMENT OF NATURAL RESOURCES AND CONSERVATION

HELENA, MONTANA

and

MONTANA AGRICULTURAL EXPERIMENT STATION

BOZEMAN, MONTANA

and

WYOMING AGRICULTURAL EXPERIMENT STATION

LARAMIE, WYOMING

NOTICE OF RELEASE OF DUPUYER STREAMBANK GERMPLASM

SILVERBERRY

SOURCE-IDENTIFIED CLASS OF NATURAL GERMPLASM

The United States Department of Agriculture (USDA), Natural Resources Conservation Service 

(NRCS, formerly the Soil Conservation Service) and the Montana Department of Natural Resources 

and Conservation announce the naming and release of Source-Identified germplasm of Dupuyer 

Streambank Germplasm silverberry, Elaeagnus commutata Bernh. ex. Rydb. This germplasm was 

identified by the USDA/NRCS Montana Riparian Team, Bozeman, Montana and the USDA/NRCS 

Plant Materials Center at Bridger, Montana.

Dupuyer Streambank Germplasm silverberry has been assigned the NRCS accession number 9081339. 

It was selected primarily for its vigorous sprouting, potential tolerance of temporary inundation, ease 

of propagation, and hardiness in the northern Plains for use in streambank stabilization applications, 

wildlife habitat projects, and potentially, windbreak and shelterbelt systems.

COLLECTION SITE INFORMATION: Dupuyer Streambank Germplasm silverberry was 

identified and collected by the NRCS Montana Riparian and Wetlands Team in Pondera County along 

Dupuyer Creek approximately 0.25 miles due south of the Dupuyer Diversion. The site is located in 

Section 28, Township 29N, Range 6W at a North Latitude of 48°14’30.53” and a West Longitude of 

112°23’15.45”. The area is classified as Major Land Resource Area 46, Northern Rocky Mountain 

Foothills. The elevation of the original collection site was 1,175 meters (3,857 feet), on a 2 percent or 

less slope with a westerly exposure. The soils are mapped as Havre/Ryell fine loams. The original 

collection site is located in USDA Hardiness Zone 3b (-30° to -35°F) or 4a (-25° to -30°F) in annual 

precipitation zone of 305 to 356 millimeters (12 to 14 inches). Plants growing in association include 

sandbar willow Salix exigua, cottonwood Populus species, and miscellaneous sedges Carex species 

and rushes. Seed collections were originally made on November 6, 1997 by Joe Carleton of the 

Intermountain Riparian and Wetlands Resource Technical Team, Bozeman, Montana.

SELECTION STATEMENT: Dupuyer Streambank Germplasm silverberry was identified for its 

ability to stabilize and armor streambanks by the vegetative spread of underground shoots. It appears 

to tolerate saturated soil conditions well, at least for short periodic events. It was also identified for its 

hardiness in Montana and its ease of propagation by seed and stem cuttings. Limited commercial 

availability of local ecotypes and an urgent need for species diversity in riparian restoration and

stabilization work in the northern Plains warrants the use of the prevarietal release procedure. Field 
2

testing of this ecotype, as well as two additional ecotypes, has been initiated in plantings at Huntley, 

Montana; Pinedale, Wyoming; and Cutbank, Montana.

Dupuyer Streambank Germplasm silverberry is one of two Source-Identified germplasms currently 

being released by Montana NRCS for riparian stabilization. Dupuyer Streambank Germplasm 

silverberry is recommended for lower riparian, bottomland sites characterized by high levels of soil 

moisture and periods of temporary inundation. In contrast, Pondera Floodplain Germplasm silverberry 

is recommended for upper streambank and floodplain terraces characterized by fairly well drained sites 

and adequate, but not excessive, available soil moisture. These recommendations are based on the site 

conditions observed at each respective germplasm source, under naturally occurring field conditions.

ECOTYPE DESCRIPTION: 

Botanical Characteristics: Dupuyer Streambank Germplasm silverberry has the same general 

botanical, foliage, fruit, seed and phenological attributes noted below for the species as a whole. Slight 

variations in stem form, leaf shape and color, and rates of growth have been noted between Dupuyer 

Streambank Germplasm silverberry and other seed sources, but are not considered significant. 

Dupuyer Streambank Germplasm silverberry is a native shrub with potential use in streambank 

stabilization, wildlife habitat, windbreaks, and naturalistic landscaping projects. It is a multi-stemmed, 

suckering, deciduous shrub ranging from 1.5 to 3.6 m (5 to 12 ft.) tall. In Montana, heights of 1.5 to 

2.4 m (5 to 8 ft.) are most common. It has an erect, upright habit with slender and sometimes twisted 

branches. The new stems are initially a light to medium brown color, the bark becoming dark gray, but 

remaining smooth, with age. The leaves are deciduous, alternate, 38 to 89 mm (1.5 to 3.5 in.) long and 

19 to 38 mm (0.75 to 1.5 in.) wide (see Figure 1). The leaf shape is described as oval to narrowly 

ovate with an entire leaf margin. Both the upper and lower leaf surfaces are covered with silvery white 

scales, the bottom sometimes with brown spots. The highly fragrant, yellow flowers are trumpetshaped (tubular), approximately 13 mm (0.5 in.) in length, and borne in the leaf axils in large numbers 

in May or June. The fruit is a silvery-colored, 7.6 mm (0.3 in.) long, egg-shaped drupe that ripens in 

September to October. Some fruit may persist on the plant until well into December. It can spread 

vegetatively by underground stems, forming thicket-like colonies. This species has several 

characteristics that distinguish it from its exotic relative, Russian olive. Silverberry is a multi-stemmed 

shrub averaging about 1.8 m (6 ft.) in height, whereas Russian olive is a multi-stemmed tree reaching 

heights of 6 m (20 ft.) or more on favorable sites. Russian olive has pronounced thorns, silverberry 

does not. The leaves of Russian olive are about the same length as silverberry but are much narrower, 

usually only about 12.7 mm (0.5 in.) wide and, therefore, linear in shape. Silverberry is also confused 

with silver buffaloberry Shepherdia argentea because of similarity in common name and silvery-green 

foliage. Silverberry is distinguishable from this species because silver buffaloberry has thorns, 

opposite leaves and buds, and a red or yellow-orange, berry-like fruit. Silverberry is native from 

eastern Canada to the Northwest Territories, south to Minnesota, South Dakota, and Utah. It is the 

only Elaeagnus native to North America.

Propagation by Seed: The seed of silverberry can be hand-collected in October through December, 

depending on location. The seed is readily cleaned by processing in a macerator, using water to float 

off the pulp, and then air drying the cleaned seed. Cleaned seed can be stored in sealed containers at 6 

to 14 percent moisture content for up to 2 years with good viability. Greenhouse propagation by seed 

is easy, the fresh seed germinates readily with little or no cold chilling. Although the literature 

recommends 30 to 90 days of cold chilling prior to sowing, tests at the Bridger Plant Materials Center 

(PMC) indicate that, at least for certain seed sources, fresh seed germinates well without cold chilling 

(see Table 1). It should be noted that old or improperly processed/stored seed may benefit from a cold 

chilling period. Sow fresh seed onto a commercial peat-lite mix with moderate nutrition. The growth 

of this species is rapid, so fairly large (20 cubic inch or greater) containers are needed for a 5 to 6 

month growing season. If the plants are seeded in the greenhouse in the fall, and kept actively growing 

until the following fall, they need to be planted or potted up in 2 gallon pots. Few problems are 

reported, but include aphids, scale, and branch canker. Late-fall sown seed germinates the next spring. 

Seed sown too early in the fall, however, may germinate prematurely if warm temperatures and 

adequate moisture prevail. Fresh seed sown in the field in the spring often germinates within 2 to 4 
3

weeks. Use a 60-day artificial chilling pretreatment prior to sowing to ensure good germination. Put 

the seed in a lightly moistened, sand:peat mix in a ziploc bag and place in cold storage at 0.55° to

2.8°C (33° to 37°F). Bareroot production in a nursery bed is similar to that of other easy-to-grow 

species. Cultivate a fairly well-drained soil to eradicate weeds and allow good seed:soil contact. 

Rototilling followed by light packing works well. Sow the seed by hand, with a push-type, one-row 

belt seeder, or other mechanical planter. Because germination is normally high, sow 15 to 20 seeds per 

linear foot of row. If hand planting, cover the seed with approximately 6.3 mm (0.25 in.) of soil. The 

use of an agronomy cloth covering over the seeded rows may increase germination by reducing erosion 

and animal predation, and by maintaining optimum soil moisture. Root prune production beds early in 

year two if a 2-0 or older plant is to be produced. Harvest 1- or 2-year old stock in the early spring or 

late fall as dormant material. Follow established guidelines for the handling, storage, transport, and 

planting of bareroot material.

Table 1. Germination results of three germplasms of silverberry, Bridger PMC 1998.

Seed-Source Accession 

Number Origin Seed Age

Number 

Seeded

Number 

Germinated

Percent 

Germination

PMC Source 9005352 Wheatland County, MT 1998 98 56 57

Streambank 9081339 Pondera County, MT 1998 98 71 72

Floodplain 9081340 Pondera County, MT 1998 98 81 83

Grand 

Mean:

(70)

Vegetative Propagation: Greenhouse asexual propagation of this species is by dormant, hardwood 

cuttings taken in January through February. Tests conducted at the PMC indicate a rooting percentage 

of 80 percent or better when the cuttings are taken from wildlings (see Table 2). Percentages should 

increase when the cuttings are taken from cultivated plants. Take 20 to 30 cm (8 to 12 in.) long stem 

cuttings that are 6.3 to 12.7 mm (0.25 to 0.50 in.) in diameter, making sure that at least two internodes 

(and hence, buds) are included. Place the cuttings in a ziploc bag, lightly moisten with a spray bottle, 

then place in cold storage at 1° to 2.8° C (34° to 37°F). Although the cuttings should store well for 

several days, prepare and place them in the greenhouse propagation bench as soon as possible. Prepare 

cuttings by trimming them to a uniform size. Recut the base of each cutting at a 45° or greater angle 

with a sharp grafting knife to increase water uptake. Wound the bottom of the stem with a shallow, 2.5 

to 3.8 cm (1 to 1.5 in.) vertical slice that just exposes the bark cambium. Lightly mist the base of the 

cutting prior to treatment with 3,000 to 5,000 ppm indole-3-butyric acid (IBA) powder. Place the 

cuttings in a well-drained, sterile media such as a mix of sand, perlite, and/or vermiculite. Use 

overhead, intermittent mist and 21° to 24°C (70° to 75°F) bottom heat. As an alternative, cuttings may 

be placed directly into 4 to 6 inch pots under mist until rooting. In such cases, amend the propagation 

mix with a 50 percent peat-lite mix. Cuttings should root in about 8 weeks. Pot into a 1- to 2-gallon 

pot in a well-drained, peat-lite mix with baseline nutrition. Harden-off for 2 months outdoors 

prior to field planting. Anticipate losses of 10 to 15 percent as a result of lifting and transplanting. No 

information is available on softwood propagation or root cuttings, but both are assumed to work well. 

Information on the field propagation of this species by dormant, unrooted hardwood cuttings is not 

available, but may prove successful on favorable sites.
4

Table 2. Adventitious rooting of three germplasms of silverberry, Bridger PMC 1998.

Seed-Source

Accession

Number Origin

Treatment 

(hormone)

Number

Stuck

Number 

Rooted

Percent 

Rooting

PMC Source 9005352 Wheatland Co., MT Rootone 18 ® 17 94

(at Bridger PMC) 16,000 ppm 18 18 100

45,000 ppm 14 14 100

Dip-N-Gro 18 ® 17 94

Mean: (97)

Streambank 9081339 Pondera Co., MT Rootone 18 ® 17 94

16,000 ppm 18 17 94

45,000 ppm 18 16 89

Dip-N-Gro 18 ® 17 94

Mean: (93)

Floodplain 9081340 Pondera Co., MT Rootone 18 ® 18 100

16,000 ppm 18 16 89

45,000 ppm 18 15 83

Dip-N-Gro 18 ® 18 100

Mean: (93)

Grand Mean: (94)

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT: Dupuyer Streambank Germplasm silverberry 

demonstrates growth, reproductive habits, and ecological niche functions comparable to the species as 

a whole, as observed in its original collection site and as compared to silverberry performance overall 

in Montana. It is a native species that spreads readily via underground shoots and is capable of 

forming dense colonies of thicket-like growth. In naturally occurring populations in Montana, 

silverberry is not invasive. It can be considered comparable to colonizing members of the Genus 

willow Salix, quaking aspen Populus tremuloides, and other sprouting native species such as American 

plum Prunus americana and snowberry Symphoricarpos albus. It tends to spread vegetatively more 

readily on moist, high fertility sites where competition from other species is moderate. It may spread 

between and within rows of windbreak and shelterbelt systems but is usually controlled by frequent 

mechanical cultivation as part of standard windbreak maintenance operations.

ANTICIPATED CONSERVATION USE: Dupuyer Streambank Germplasm silverberry has several 

valuable conservation uses. It readily sprouts by suckers, especially on moist, fertile sites, making it 

useful in streambank stabilization work (NRCS Montana is currently testing three ecotypes for this 

purpose). It is adaptable to high pH (8.0) and saline soils. It is quite drought tolerant and will grow 

well in 279 to 305 mm (11 to 12 in.) annual precipitation zones in eastern Montana, once established. 

It is a potential shrub component in windbreak and shelterbelt systems, although it may, however, 

prove unacceptably vigorous on moist, high fertility sites. Mechanical cultivation between rows has 

effectively controlled the spread of suckers into adjacent rows in a long-term planting at the PMC. It is 

recommended for Conservation Tree/Shrub Suitability Groups 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 9 (see Subgroups for 

more specific information). Silverberry provides dense, thicket-like cover for numerous wildlife 

species. The buds and fruit are food for song and game birds. Although this species provides 

emergency food for deer during critical winter periods, it has a lower palatability for deer and cattle 

than many other sources of browse. Moose are also thought to utilize silverberry for browse. It is also 

susceptible to girdling by rodents and rabbits.

POTENTIAL AREA OF ADAPTATION: Dupuyer Streambank Germplasm silverberry should grow 

well in all areas where the species is found occurring in Montana and Wyoming east of the Continental 

Divide. It may also perform well in western Montana and Wyoming but has not been field tested in 

those areas to date. It is considered USDA Hardiness Zone 2 hardy, capable of tolerating average 
5

minimum winter temperatures of -40° to -46°C (-40° to -50°F). Although it prefers moist, welldrained sites associated with riparian and streambank environments, it will tolerate relatively low 

annual precipitation zones (12 inches) and heavy soils given proper establishment care and regular 

weed maintenance.

AVAILABILITY OF PLANT MATERIALS: Seed and cuttings of Dupuyer Streambank Germplasm 

silverberry are available from the original collection site with permission of the private landowner. 

Contact the USDA/NRCS Plant Materials Specialist, Federal Building, Room 443, 10 East Babcock 

Street, Bozeman, Montana 59715 or the Bridger Plant Materials Center, Route 2, Box 1189, Bridger, 

Montana 59014 for more information. Propagules may also be available from the Nursery Supervisor, 

Montana Conservation Seedling Nursery, 2705 Spurgin Road, Missoula, Montana 59804. Propagules 

may also be available from commercial nurseries as advertised.

REFERENCES: Dietz, D.R.; Uresk, D.W.; Messner, H.E.; and McEwen, L.C. 1980. Establishment, 

survival, and growth of selected browse species in a ponderosa pine forest. Res. Paper RM-219, Rocky 

Mt. For. and Range Exp. Sta., Forest Service, USDA.

Dirr, M.A. 1983. Manual of woody landscape plants. Their identification, ornamental characteristics, 

culture, propagation and uses. Stipes Publishing, Champaign, IL.

Herman, D.E.; Stange, C.M. and Quam, V.C., editors. 1996. North Dakota Tree Handbook. N.D. Sta. 

Soil Conserv. Com., USDA-NRCS, NDSU Ext. and West. Area Power Admin.

Schopmeyer, C.S., Technical Coor. 1974. Seeds of woody plants in the United States. Forest Service, 

USDA, Washington, D.C. Ag. Handb.

PREPARED BY: Joseph D. Scianna, Research Horticulturist, USDA/NRCS Plant Materials Center, 

Route 2, Box 1189, Bridger, MT 59014 and Joe Carleton, Conservation Agronomist USDA/NRCS 

Intermountain Riparian and Wetlands Resource Technical Team, Bozeman, MT.
6

APPROVALS

____________________________________________ ________________

SHIRLEY A. GAMMON

State Conservationist Date

Natural Resources Conservation Service

Montana

____________________________________________ ________________

LINCOLN E. BURTON

State Conservationist Date

Natural Resources Conservation Service

Wyoming

____________________________________________ ________________

SHARRON QUISENBERRY

Director Date

Montana Agricultural Experiment Station

Dean, College of Agriculture

____________________________________________ ________________

JAMES J. JACOBS

Director Date

Wyoming Agricultural Experiment Station

____________________________________________ ________________

BUD CLINCH

Director Date

Montana Department of Natural Resources and Conservation

____________________________________________ ________________

DIANE GELBURD

Director Date

Ecological Sciences Division

United States Department of Agriculture

Natural Resources Conservation Service
1

UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE

NATURAL RESOURCES CONSERVATION SERVICE

and

NEW YORK STATE COLLEGE OF

AGRICULTURE AND LIFE SCIENCES,

CORNELL UNIVERSITY

Notice of Germplasm Release of 'SG4X-l' eastern gamagrass 

The United states Department of Agriculture, Natural Resources Conservation Service and New York 

State College of Agriculture and Life Sciences, Cornell University announce the germplasm release 

of SG4X-l (PI-59l482) eastern gamagrass (Tripsacum dactyloides (L.) L. forma prolificum, Dayton et 

Dewald. SG4X-l designation reflects the sexual gynomonoecious and tetraploid nature of this 

germplasm. It was developed cooperatively at The Big Flats Plant Materials Center and Cornell 

University.

SG4X-l was developed by the chromosome doubling of a gynomonoecious diploid, GSF-I, PI483447, (2n=2x=36), to the tetraploid level (2n=4x=72). Chromosome doubling was induced by the 

application of 20 micromolar solution of aminoprophos-methyl using a tissue culture microtillering 

technique. 

Present cultivars of eastern gamagrass are of a diploid nature. They have a monoecious 

inflorescence which limits their seed production potential. The high seed producing 

gynomonoecious inflorescence found in eastern gamagrass occurs naturally at the diploid level. 

Tetraploid germplasm of eastern gamagrass is more robust, with thicker stems, a later flowering 

date and an apomictic reproductive system. Tetraploids, due to their apomictic nature have 

limited potential to be improved by conventional breeding techniques. The production of a 

gynomonoecious sexual tetr aploid would allow for breeding at the tetraploid level. This would 

enable the recombination of desirable characteristics of tetraploid genotypes, and to incorporate 

the gynomonoecious inflorescence onto new tetraploid lines. Superior genotypes will be able to 

be stabilized by using apomictic plants as pollen parents. 
2

SG4X-l is vegetatively similar to PI 483447. It is semi-prostrate in growth habit, with relatively

narrow dark green leaves. The inflorescence exhibits the gynomonoecious form with no 

modification to the inflorescence or seed, due to the increased ploidy level. It is fertile with a 

seed set of 43%. Crosses with known diploids and tetraploids have produced triploids and 

tetraploids respectively. It differs from other tetraploids by being able to reproduce sexually 

instead of apomictally and by having the gynomonoecious inflorescence having 20 times more 

pistil bearing florets than the monoecious inflorescence. 

The germplasm will be maintained vegetatively at the Big Flats Plant Materials center, USDA 

NRCS. Limited quantities of vegetative material will be provided to interested people upon 

receipt of a written request and agreement to make appropriate recognition of its source a matter 

of open record when the germplasm contributes to the development of a new cultivar or hybrid. 

Approvals for Notice of Release of SG4X-l eastern gamagrass

__________________________________________

Director, Ecological Sciences Division

United States Department of Agriculture

Natural Resources Conservation Service

Washington, D.C.

_________________________________________

State Conservationist

United States Department of Agriculture

Natural Resources Conservation Service

Syracuse, New York

_________________________________________

Associate Dean/Director of Research

College of Agriculture and Life Sciences

Cornell University

Ithaca, New York
Description

Welder Germplasm shortspike 

windmillgrass (Chloris × 

subdolichostachya Muell. (pro sp.) 

[cucullata × verticillata]) was collected 

in San Patricio County, Texas. 

Shortspike windmillgrass is a naturally 

occurring hybrid between the native 

grasses Chloris cucullata and Chloris 

verticillata. Welder Germplasm is a 

cooperative release between the USDANRCS Plant Materials Program, South 

Texas Natives, and the Texas 

Agricultural Experiment Station at 

Beeville. It is a perennial grass which 

produces seed and also spreads 

vegetatively by stolons. The mature 

foliage height ranges from 1 to 3 feet 

tall. It may produce seed heads from 

May to October, but most of the seed is 

produced in September and October. 

Uses and Adaptation

Welder Germplasm is recommended for 

use in roadside plantings, critical site 

revegetation, and rangeland seed mixes. 

It can be used in many types of 

conservation plantings, such as grassed 

waterways, riparian buffers, filter strips, 

and pond embankments. 

Welder Germplasm has performed well 

at locations in the Rio Grande Plain, 

Gulf Coast Prairies and Marshes, Rolling 

Plains, and Pineywoods regions of 

Texas. Shortspike windmillgrass also 

occurs naturally in the Blackland Prairie, 

Edwards Plateau, and Oak Woods and 

Prairies regions. Welder Germplasm 

may be adapted to these regions as well, 

but this has not been verified through 

field testing. 

Planting Methods

Seedbed preparation should begin well 

in advance of planting. Establish a 

clean, weed-free seedbed by either 

tillage or non-residual herbicides. Prior 

to planting, the site should be firm and 

have accumulated soil moisture. 

Seeding should occur in early spring, or 

where there are few cool-season weeds,

windmillgrass can be seeded in the fall.

Welder Germplasm can be seeded using 

a grass drill with a small seed box. 

Broadcast seeding may be used in areas 

not easily planted with a drill, but 

additional practices to encourage good 

seed to soil contact, such as cultipacking, 

harrowing, etc., may be necessary. Sand 

can be mixed with seed to aid in 

distribution. There are approximately 

3,000,000 seeds per pound of shortspike 

windmillgrass.

Seed should be planted 1/8 to 1/4 inch 

deep. It is better to plant too shallow 

than too deep. A seeding rate of 1/4to 

1/2 pound of pure live seed (PLS) per 

acre is recommended. This corresponds 

to planting 20 to 40 live seeds per square 

foot. When planting a mixture, the rate 

of windmillgrass should be reduced 

according to the total percentage desired 

in the mixture. 
Management

Welder Germplasm shortspike 

windmillgrass can be grazed the first 

year once the stand is established. 

Contact you local NRCS office to 

develop a grazing management plan. It 

is recommended that it be mowed or 

grazed to a 2 to 3 inch stubble height at 

least once per year. Welder Germplasm 

should not be burned. 

Availability

Welder Germplasm was released in

2006. Breeder and foundation seed will 

be maintained by the E. Kika de la Garza 

Plant Materials Center in conjunction 

with Texas Foundation Seed Service. 

Breeder seed may be obtained by 

contacting the PMC.

For More Information 

Kika de la Garza Plant Materials Center

3409 North FM 1355

Kingsville, Texas 78363

Phone: (361) 595-1313

http://plant-materials.nrcs.usda.gov/stpmc/

or

Plant Materials Specialist 

USDA-NRCS

WR Poage Federal Building

101 South Main Street

Temple, Texas 76501-7682

Phone: (254) 742-9888

or

South Texas Natives

CKWRI-TAMUK

MSC 218, 700 University Blvd.

Kingsville, Texas 78363

Phone: (361) 593-5550

http://www.southtexasnatives.org

or

Any USDA Natural Resources Conservation 

Service Office

"The U.S. Department of Agriculture (USDA) prohibits 

discrimination in all its programs and activities on the basis 

of race, color, national origin, age, disability, and where 

applicable, sex, marital status, familial status, parental status, 

religion, sexual orientation, genetic information, political 

beliefs, reprisal, or because all or a part of an individual's 

income is derived from any public assistance program. (Not 

all prohibited bases apply to all programs.) Persons with 

disabilities who require alternative means for 

communic0ation of program information (Braille, large print, 

audiotape, etc.) should contact USDA's TARGET Center at 

(202) 720-2600 (voice and TDD). 

To file a complaint of discrimination write to USDA, 

Director, Office of Civil Rights, 1400 Independence Avenue, 

S.W., Washington, D.C. 20250-9410 or call (800) 795-3272 

(voice) or (202) 720-6382 (TDD). USDA is an equal 

opportunity provider and employer."

Revised February 2007

Welder Germplasm

Shortspike Windmillgrass

Chloris × subdolichostachya Muell. 

(pro sp.) [cucullata × verticillata]

E. “Kika” de la Garza

Plant Materials Center

Kingsville, Texas
S T O R A G E I N F O R M A T I O N F O R M (SIF)

USDA-ARS

NATIONAL CENTER FOR GENETIC RESOURCES PRESERVATION (NCGRP)

Submitted for Registration in Crop Science Submitted for inclusion in NPGS

Cultivar Parental Line Genetic Stock

Germplasm Mapping Population

Name of Donor or Contact Person Phone No.( )

Institution or Company Email

Address

The policy of the National Plant Germplasm System (NPGS) is that all non-restricted material 

deposited in the NPGS will be freely distributed to scientists for research purposes. For all material 

registered in Crop Science, the donor is expected to maintain and distribute seed for a minimum of 

five years following registration after which time unrestricted material will be entered into the 

NPGS for public distribution. For PVP, Utility Patent or other restricted use crop material being 

registered in Crop Science, the material is deposited in NCGRP but the owner is responsible for 

maintenance and distribution throughout the duration of the restriction unless different 

arrangements are made with the NPGS. 

Submitted material will be released into the NPGS (check one box):

 Immediately upon receipt. After processing, NPGS will distribute the material publicly to any 

qualified person globally who requests the material. To facilitate distribution of Crop Science 

Registered samples received from foreign countries, permission will be sought from the owner 

for distribution by the NPGS after quarantine requirements are met.

 After five years. For material of US origin registered in Crop Science the donor agrees to 

maintain and distribute the seed for a minimum of five years.

 After some other designated period. For material covered by PVP or a patent, or for non-PVP or

non-patented material where the owner desires restricted access (not to exceed 20 years), the 

owner agrees to maintain and distribute the material throughout the duration of the restriction 

unless different arrangements are made with the NPGS. If this box is checked, the owner must 

identify a date (or indicate that the restriction is tied to expiry of PVP or patent) when material 

is to become available for unrestricted public distribution by the NPGS.

The owner’s institutional legal signature on this SIF authorizes the NPGS to distribute from the 

CSR sample after the expiry date of restriction noted below. Distribution will be done under the 

prevailing NPGS policy. 

Date of release to unrestricted public distribution by the NPGS (not to exceed 20 years) (Date of 

release is required for CS Registration): 

Authorized Institutional Legal Signature (required) Date 

Official Title of Authorized Signatory

Revised 8/15/2006
NOMENCLATURE:

Genus Species Sub-species

Common name 

Variety/cultivar name and/or designation number 

PI Number (if previously assigned) 

Other Identifiers

(For Mapping Population, provide a list of identifiers for mapping lines and parents)

SEED REQUIREMENTS: (UNTREATED SEED REQUIRED) 

Cross/Open Pollinated (Cultivar, Germplasm): 7500 seeds

Self Pollinated (Cultivar, Parental Line, Germplasm, Mapping Population Parents, Genetic 

Stocks*); 5000 seeds

Mapping Population Lines: 500 seeds

*Difficult Genetic Stocks (those where seeds are difficult to grow, maintain or analyze):

50-1000 seeds

Percent Germination determined by Donor Date of test

Date harvested Approx. percent self fertilization under normal field conditions:

Seed provided to NPGS active collection? YES NO Date provided

NPGS Active Site Location Amount of seed supplied

Seed provided to NCGRP YES______ NO ______ Date provided _______________________

RESTRICTIONS:

PVP Applied for or Granted? YES NO PVP Number

Utility Patent Applied for, Granted, or incorporated? YES NO UP Number

Plant Patent Applied for or Granted? YES NO PP Number

Restricted use materials: describe condition(s) for access and distribution (Material Transfer Agreement, 

Research Agreement, License & Sales Agreement, etc.) and additional contact information if different than 

above:
GROWTH HABIT:

Annual: Spring Winter Facultative

Biennial Perennial

FORM RECEIVED:

Seed Bud Pollen Tissue Culture

DESCRIPTIVE INFORMATION: In order for each entry to be properly identified, donors are asked to 

prepare a narrative and pedigree of each entry. Key features in the narrative might include agronomically 

important traits such as maturity, plant height (metric terms or dwarf, semi-dwarf, etc.), seed characteristics 

(size, oil content, milling quality, type, etc.), nutritive value, tolerance to diseases, insects, nematodes, cold, 

lodging, and others. Identify transgenes and the traits that they govern. Give the scientific names of pest 

organisms. Avoid comparisons with other cultivars or lines unless these are part of the parentage, or unless

the comparisons are important for rating disease and insect resistance levels. Accessions deposited in the 

NPGS will be documented in the Germplasm Resources Information Network (GRIN) database of the 

National Plant Germplasm System, except for mapping populations.

PEDIGREE: (The pedigree should not exceed 500 characters.)

NARRATIVE: (The narrative can be no more than 2000 characters in length.)

Ship to:

National Center for Genetic Resources Preservation

Attn: Storage Samples

1111 S. Mason St.

Fort Collins, CO 80521-4500 

Tel: 970-495-3200

Fax: 970-221-1427

Email: Judy.Grotenhuis@ars.usda.gov
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

540.96 Seed Storage Policy of the National Center for Genetic Resources 

 Preservation

UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE

AGRICULTURAL RESEARCH SERVICE

NATIONAL CENTER FOR GENETIC RESOURCES PRESERVATION 

1111 South Mason Street

Fort Collins, Colorado 80521-4500

ABBREVIATED POLICY STATEMENT

1. The Laboratory is a federal facility and all seed accepted for storage comes under 

the jurisdiction of the U.S. Government.

2. Only seed will be accepted for storage.

3. Valuable seed stocks will be accepted by the Laboratory from federal and state 

institutions, commercial seed interests, and private individuals.

4. Any bona fide research worker of the United States, its territories, and 

possessions, can receive seed from collections stored at the Laboratory, subject to 

restrictions in item 5. However, seed will not be provided by the Laboratory if 

they are available commercially or are in working stocks of research agencies. 

The Laboratory will suggest sources of supply.

5. The Laboratory will not provide bulk supplies or seasonal stocks.

6. Inventories of the stocks held in storage are available on GRIN and hard copies 

can be obtained upon request.

7. Only clean seed of reasonably high germination is acceptable for storage. If seed 

of low viability (below 60 to 65 percent germination) is received, they will be 

held on a tentative basis until the donor is able to provide replacement seed of 

higher viability (85 percent germination or better).

8. No charge will be made by the Laboratory for furnishing seed.

9. If seed has been accepted officially, the National Plant Germplasm System will be 

responsible for the increase of stocks if, during storage, viability drops to a point 

that there is a danger of loss of the accession or if stocks become depleted as a 

result of seed distribution.

10. The Laboratory will not assume responsibility for replenishing stocks if the 

accessions received are subminimal in quantity or in viability.

11. The principal objective of the Laboratory is long-term holding of valuable seed. 

Research projects related to the Laboratory’s objective (physiological problems in 

seed viability and longevity) will be conducted at the Laboratory. 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

In addition to the policy above, recommendations have been made as to what constitutes 

“valuable seed.” The following categories of seed will be accepted by the Laboratory.

All newly released varieties or cultivars, whether private, public, or commercial origin, 

including reselections from varieties or cultivars continuing in current use.

New Varieties or Cultivars:

All new Alternative release which fall within the AOSCA accepted categories of either 

Tested, Selected, Germplasm, or Source Identified releases. 

New Alternative Releases:

Varieties and cultivars currently in use and under registration by respective crop group 

organizations, or otherwise documented as to specific origin and distinguishing 

characteristics. This group includes varieties approaching obsolescence that have been 

superseded by new or currently popular varieties or cultivars.

Current Varieties and Cultivars:

Stocks representing earlier varieties or types of specific crops that have been or will be 

replaced in the commercial field by hybrids.

Open-Pollinated Varieties:

Samples representing holdover material from earlier research programs and of no 

immediate interest.

Obsolescent Germplasm:

Materials of academic and genetic interest, such as marker genes, mutants, translocations, 

monosomics, trisomics, and other chromosomal aberrations. Replenishment of such 

stocks, if in a heterozygous state, is the obligation of the donor. For the later type of 

stocks, the Laboratory serves only as an insurance against loss.

Genetic Stocks:

From regional and federal introduction stations or other agencies (NRCS) as seed is 

increased beyond “working stocks.”

Plant Introductions:

All inquiries concerning minimum quantities of seed required for specific crops, 

documentation, seed condition or quality, and other routine information should be 

addressed to the USDA-ARS, National Center for Genetic Resources Preservation, 1111 

South Mason Street, Fort Collins, Colorado 80521-4500.
1 

U.S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE NRCS-ECS-001

NATURAL RESOURCES CONSERVATION SERVICE July 2010

REQUEST FOR PLANT MATERIALS ALLOCATION AND DISTRIBUTION

Order To Address Ship To Address

Allocate and/or ship the following seed or stock as indicated below, in accordance with approved allocation of seed and/or planting 

stock:

PMC

Accession Number and/or 

Variety

Scientific name and/or Common 

Name

Certification 

Class

Request 

Amount

Unit of Measure 

and/or Type

NRCS-ECS-596 (D&D #): Order Prepared By: Date 

SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS

 

State/Area: 

Purpose: Contact email: 

Contact phone: Study No.: 

Field Planting No.: Cooperator: 

 

Plant Materials Order No.: Order Date: Approx. Date Needed: 

Order By.: 
2 

REQUEST FOR PLANT MATERIALS ALLOCATION AND DISTRIBUTION

(CONTINUED)

PMC

Accession Number and/or 

Variety

Scientific name and/or Common 

Name

Certification 

Class

Request 

Amount

Unit of Measure 

and/or Type

USDA IS AN EQUAL OPPORTUNITY PROVIDER AND EMPLOYER
3 

U.S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE NRCS-ECS-001 

NATURAL RESOURCES CONSERVATION SERVICE July 2010 

REQUEST FOR PLANT MATERIALS ALLOCATION AND DISTRUBUTION 

FORM INSTRUCTIONS 

These instructions will assist in completing form NRCS-ECS-001. 

Plant Materials Order No.

Plant materials order number assigned by the Plant Materials Specialist or Plant Materials Center Manager

Order Date

Date the material was requested

Approximate Date Needed

Approximate date the material will be needed for pick-up or shipment

Order By

Name of the Plant Materials staff member responsible for initiating the plant material allocation

Order To

Name and address of the individual or organization that is making the request for the plant materials; this is 

also where the Distribution & Delivery record from POMS will be sent

Ship To

Individual or organization that will receive and utilize the plant materials, which may differ from the 

requestor

Cooperator

Name of the land owner, individual or organization that is working with or is associated with these plant 

materials

Contact phone

Phone number of the land owner, individual or organization working with or associated with these plant 

materials 

Contact email

Email address of the land owner, individual or organization working with or associated with these plant 

materials

State/Area

State or area where the plant materials will be utilized

Field Planting No.

Enter the unique number assigned by the Plant Materials Center staff or Plant Materials Specialist if this is 

a Field Planting. The format for field plantings is identified in the National Plant Materials Manual, sections 

540.14(F)(5) and 520.66. This number should correspond to a POMS database record if applicable.

Study No.

Enter the unique number assigned by the Plant Materials Center staff or Plant Materials Specialist for this 

study. The format for studies is identified in the National Plant Materials Manual, sections 540.12(C) and 

520.66. This number should correspond to a POMS database record if applicable

Purpose

Describe the purpose of the plant material allocation (PMC seed increase, grower increase, field planting, 

etc.)

Special Instructions

Describe any special instructions necessary to ensure proper plant handling and storage; this could include 

packaging instructions or requirements, storage environment requirements, planting instructions, etc.
4 

NRCS-ECS-001 

REQUEST FOR PLANT MATERIALS ALLOCATION AND DISTRUBUTION 

FORM INSTRUCTIONS

(Continued)

NRCS-ECS-596 (D&D #)

Once the material has been allocated in POMS, a D&D number will be generated. Enter that number here 

to link this allocation to the Distribution & Delivery record

Order Prepared By

Name of the individual that prepared/packaged the order

Date

Date the order was prepared

PMC

5 letter PMC code for the Center (e.g., NYPMC, AZPMC)

Accession Number and/or Variety

Accession number and/or the variety of the plant material to be allocated

Scientific Name and/or Common Name

Scientific name and/or the common name of the plant material to be allocated

Certification Class

Certification class of the plant material being allocated;

• BR = breeder

• FD = foundation

• RE = registered

• CE = certified

• CO = common

Request Amount

Amount of plant material that has been requested

Unit of Measure and/or Type

The unit of measure and/or type for the amount requested. This could include bushels, pounds, grams, 

rhizomes, bundles, etc. Make clear indications of quantities – for example, if 50 bundles of whips are being 

allocated, be sure to indicate the number of whips in a bundle. If Pure Live Seed is required indicate “lbs. 

PLS”

Continue filling out one row for each separate plant material allocation.
DISTRIBUTION AND DELIVERY RECORD

Order Date: Ship Date: 3/1/2010 3/1/2010

ECS-1 Number: Delivered

Number of Packages: 4

D&D To:

Powell, WY 82435

PO Box 983

Ship To:

Powell, WY 82435

PO Box 983

U.S. Department of Agriculture

Natural Resources Conservation Service

Bridger Plant Materials Center, Bridger, MT

Ship via:

Seed Certification Service Seed Certification Service

Mike Moore Dwight Gilbert

NRCS-ECS-596

(8/02)

Phone: (307) 754-9815; Fax: (307) 754-9820 Phone: (307) 754-9815; Fax: (307) 754-9820

747 Road 9 747 Road 9

University of Wyoming University of Wyoming

Accession

Scientific Name (Symbol) / 

Common Name

Test 

Lot Number Date

Cert 

Class

Total 

Viab

Bulk 

Age Shipped 

PLS 

Purity U/M Shipped

D&D Number: MTPMC-10-005

469235 \ 

Critana

Elymus lanceolatus ssp. lanceolatus SFD-09-FLD5/6E 96 FD 99.07 lbs 2/24/2010 126.1734 120

(ELLAL) / streambank wheatgrass

Remarks:

Ordered By: MTPMC

Ordered Filled By: Darren Zentner

PLEASE SIGN AND RETURN ONE COPY TO:

Bridger Plant Materials Center

98 South River Rd.

Bridger, MT 59014-9718 Field Planting #:

Study #:

For PMC Use

Phone: (406) 662-3579

Fax: (406) 662-3428

Received By:

Name/Title:

Date:

Approved By:

Name/Title:

Date:

D &D By: Roger Hybner

Purpose: Grower Increase

Page 1 of 1
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)
Worksheet to Discontinue PMC Production of a Plant Materials Release

Requesting PMC: Date:

Requestors Name:

Species Name:

Release Name:

Reason for Discontinuing the Release (check all that apply):

No or Limited Foundation Seed Requested

No or Limited Commercial Production

Replaced by Improved Release(s)

Considered Invasive and Potentially Harmful to the Environment

Other (indicate)

Justification for dropping the release (provide brief details):

Attach relevant documentation, such as production information, evaluation information, or 

the environmental evaluation

Is the germplasm in the National Plant Germplasm System for long term preservation?

Yes No Explain:

Have the cooperating agencies been notified and they concur with the dropping of the release?

Yes No Explain:

Recommended By:

Cooperating Agency Date Cooperating Agency Date

State Resource Conservationist (or equivalent) Date

Approvals:

Approved

Not Approved

State Conservationist (Chair PMC Advisory Committee) Date

Approved

Not Approved

National Program Leader, Plant Materials Date

**Once approved, the PMC should discontinue Foundation production. The PMC should also notify Certification 

Agencies, commercial nurseries, and NRCS S.O. in states that may recommend it as a conservation plant. All State 

Offices should remove the release from the all NRCS Technical Guides. Specific courses of action may vary 

depending on the release and the reason for which the release is being discontinued.

Revised July 2010
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Part 541 - Information Management

Subpart A – Plant Materials Reporting

541.0 General

A. The NPL maintains overall responsibility of information management activities in the 

PMP. A National PM Information Steering Committee may be appointed by the NPL on an 

ad hoc basis and provides recommendation and assistance to the information needs of the 

Program. At a minimum, the committee will consist of a NTSC PM Specialist , a PMC 

Manager, a PM Specialist, the NPMC Manager, the PM Webmaster, and the PM Information 

Coordinator. 

B. All information management activities will conform to agency procedures and guidelines. 

All hardware, software, and procedural changes that impact information management 

activities nationally will be cleared through the PM Information Coordinator and changes 

reviewed and issued by NHQ as appropriate. NRCS policy should be followed regarding

computer security, passwords, etc., according to the General Manual.

541.1 Plant Materials Operations and Management System (POMS)

A. Description and Use

(1) The POMS database is the primary system for recording plant materials management, 

activities and accomplishments by PMCs and PM Specialists. The objective of 

POMS is to facilitate rapid and cost-effective accumulation, processing, and 

dissemination of data to assist in realizing NRCS goals and objectives. Each PMC or 

PM Specialist is responsible for recording data into their POMS database and for 

creating exports of their database to populate the National POMS database.

(2) The POMS database consists of the following components:

(i) Accessioning – records source information on seed and plant collections.

(ii) Inventory – maintains information on seed and vegetative materials; 

generates inventories and usage reports.

(iii) Distribution and Delivery – creates delivery records for the distribution of 

seed and vegetative materials; generates ECS-596 forms.

(iv) Studies, Field Plantings, and Conservation Field Trials – records basic 

information on each type of study and planting.

(v) Releases – includes information on past and pending conservation plant 

releases.

(vi) Publications – records citations and information on technical and popular 

documents prepared by plant materials staff.

(vii) Presentations – records information on formal presentations, tours, training 

sessions, and field days by plant materials staff.

(viii) Seed and Plant Production – records information on release production at the 

PMC and commercially, foundation seed and plant maintenance for releases 

at PMCs, and other seed and plant production at PMCs.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

(ix) Customers Assisted – records technical assistance provided to NRCS offices, 

cooperators, and the general public.

(x) Address Book – used to maintain addresses for the Distribution and Delivery 

module and serve as a “rolodex” for the office.

(xi) PMC/ PM Specialist Operations – Includes staff information, time spent on 

activities, and other items relevant to PM operations.

B. Entering data into the POMS database

(1) POMS is a Microsoft Access database which utilizes forms for a user-friendly 

interface for data entry and reporting. Knowledge of Access is not required.

(2) PM staff should ideally update the information in POMS as it occurs to ensure 

completeness of the data. Data entry should also be as up-to-date as possible prior to 

the end of each quarter, when a POMS export is run and sent to the NPMC. All 

primary and secondary fields in POMS must be filled in for a complete record of 

activities and accomplishments. Primary fields might include a publication citation. 

Secondary fields, in this case, would include related species and releases, related 

studies, NRCS programs, resource concerns, etc.

(3) Training sessions on how to use POMS will be conducted periodically. These 

sessions are usually done over Internet conferencing and are conducted by the NPMC 

Manager, PM Information Coordinator, or NPL. Contact one of these persons if 

additional assistance is needed. Additional information in the form of user guides or 

other guidance is distributed as available or needed.

C. POMS Exports

(1) PMC staff and PM Specialists will create an export of their POMS database quarterly 

and send it to the PM Information Coordinator or the manager of the NPMC (or as 

instructed by the NPL). Instructions on the creation of exports are found within the 

POMS database. 

(2) POMS quarterly exports copies of all new, updated and deleted records from the 

PMC or PM Specialist database to an export database. All records in the database are 

then marked as “exported.” The next export will repeat this process of copying all 

new, updated, and deleted records. It is essential that all quarterly exports which are 

created are sent to the NPMC for consolidation into the national POMS database.

(3) The due date for the quarterly export is the last business day of the first, second, and 

third quarters of the fiscal year. The due date for the annual (and final) export of the 

fiscal year is the second Friday in September of each year. The exact date in 

September will vary each year.

(4) The PM Information Coordinator or the Manager of the NPMC will consolidate 

POMS exports from each PMC and PM Specialist and import data into the national 

POMS database.

(5) The Total Export option in POMS is used when requested by the PM Information 

Coordinator or the Manager of the NPMC for data maintenance purposes or for 

rebuilding databases.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

D. Utilization of Data

POMS information gets used in many different ways and at many different levels.

(i) Locally at the PMC or PM Specialist Level – Maintenance of accessioning 

and seed and plant inventory data is critical for recording the maintenance 

and use of Government-processed seed. Information on studies, seed and 

plant production, and plant materials products such as releases, publications,

and presentations gets recorded so there is a history of what was done by a 

PMC or PM Specialist. The Address Book can be used to improve 

efficiencies with mailings and for communicating with partners and others.

(ii) Nationally – All data is combined nationally into the national POMS 

database. This database is maintained by the NPMC. Information on 

studies, releases, and publications gets processed to populate PMCs and the 

national program Web sites. Several standard reports, such as the “Plant 

Materials Staff Directory” and the “Improved Conservation Plants Releases 

by NRCS and Cooperators,” are generated directly from the national POMS. 

Data is also used to assess the performance of PMCs and to generate the 

Performance Index annually (see Section 541.2(C)).

(iii) By NRCS, USDA, and other groups – POMS information is used to generate 

reports on specific topics for NHQ and USDA, answer questions from the 

Office of Management and Budget (OMB) and Congress, and is used to 

generate reports needed to support budget requests and Congressional 

hearings.

(iv) Requests for custom queries or reports from individual databases or the 

national POMS database may be directed to the NPMC Manager or PM 

Information Coordinator.

E. Maintenance and Development of POMS

(1) The NPMC Manager and/or PM Information Coordinator have primary responsibility 

for the maintenance and development of the POMS database. Additional PM staff 

may be involved in the overall design for future development of POMS. The current 

architecture of the POMS database can be found in Section 541.10.

(2) Database or data maintenance questions or issues should be directed to the NPMC 

Manager or PM Information Coordinator.

541.2 Plant Materials Performance Index

A. General

The goal of the Plant Materials Performance Index is to monitor the performance of each 

PMC and PM Specialist to ensure they are engaged in all facets of the program.

B. Content

(1) The Index is scaled on a total of 100 and accounts for differences in full-time 

equivalents among PMCs. Each task or accomplishment on the Iindex is assigned a 

point value. There are 9 major categories of the Index which reflect the majority of 

activities and accomplishments by PMCs. Each of these sections is capped at a 

maximum value. Section 541.11 includes these categories, a description, and their 

maximum point value.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

(2) In addition to the “capped” score out of 100, the total uncapped score will also be 

calculated and multiplied by the capped score to achieve a cumulative score. The 

cumulative score is a reflection of the overall productivity of each PMC.

(3) The content of the Index is reviewed annually by the National Plant Materials 

Technical Committee, and minor modification to the Index are made to ensure that it 

accurately and equitably captures the activities and accomplishments of the PMP.

C. Use of the Index

(1) The scores from each PMC are tallied and an average is calculated for the entire 

Program. This Program average is used for performance reporting to NHQ and 

OMB.

(2) The Index can be used by PMC Managers or by States with PMCs to identify 

strengths and weaknesses in a program and areas for specific improvement. 

Weaknesses, such as lack of written technical documents, can be addressed in future 

years to help strengthen a PMC’s overall program. The Index can be used by the 

NPL to assess the effectiveness of each PMC and for determining performance-based 

awards or funding for the next fiscal year’s budget allocations to PMCs.

541.3 NRCS Reporting through the Performance Results System

The Performance Results System (PRS) is the agency system for recording specific 

performance activities. PM reports the number of new release and number of technical 

documents developed and transferred. These numbers should be reported a minimum of 

each quarter and inputted into the Web-based PRS either by the PMC Manager or the 

State office.

541.4 Plant Materials Reports

A. Plant Materials Progress Report of Activities

(1) General

(i) It is essential that all NRCS offices and others interested in PM work be 

informed of progress and new developments on a frequent basis. The PM 

Progress Report will contain an interpretive summary of significant PMrelated activities. This interpretive summary describes why the activity or 

study was undertaken, the progress or results of the activity or study, and the 

application or impact to NRCS field activities or natural resources activities.

(ii) The PMC Manager and PM Specialist prepare the report. The report 

provides information on new plant materials developments to NRCS field 

offices, cooperating agencies, and groups. The Plant Materials Progress 

Report of Activities should be concise, relevant to field staff (what new 

information was found), is typically about 4 pages long (no more than 8

pages), and should be oriented to conveying results of PMC activities. This 

report should be attractive and easy to read. Section 541.12 is an example of 

a Plant Materials Progress Report of Activities.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

(2) Content

The PM Progress Report may include the following sections:

• Header – Include the USDA-NRCS logo, identify the title, office, office 

contact information, and date of the document.

• Summaries – Provide brief summaries of some of the major activities or 

findings from the previous year. Put the most significant accomplishments 

towards the front of the document. Utilize pictures and graphs effectively to 

tell the story. Emphasize new findings and information of relevance to the 

PMC’s customers. Special consideration should be given to describe the 

impact that the study will have to field offices and to implementing 

conservation practices. If there is a technical article available on the Internet,

provide a link to that document. 

• References – Provide the title for significant new documents not already 

referenced in the report. Provide a descriptive sentence or two on how this 

document might be useful and provide a URL address.

Do not include summaries of every single 

PMC study or activity, especially those items which had minimal progress or 

are of lower importance to PMC cutomers.

• General Information – Towards the end of the document, remind readers 

what the PMC does, major changes at the PMC, priorities at the PMC, 

staffing, etc. This section should be brief.

• Do not

(3) Frequency

provide detailed explanations of experimental design, vague results of 

initial evaluations, complex tables or charts, and lengthy descriptions of 

facility upgrades. Avoid the use of study numbers and other terms which 

may be unfamiliar to non-PMP readers. 

The Plant Materials Progress Report of Activities is to be developed and published 

annually. The report will be compiled on a calendar year basis and be prepared and 

distributed no later than January 15 of the year following the report year.

(4) Distribution

(i) Minimum distribution includes the State office(s), appropriate field offices, 

all other PMCs and PM Specialists, NTSC PM Specialists, and the NPL. 

Other suggested distribution includes: NTSCs, the National Association of 

Conservation Districts, Resource Conservation and Development offices, 

cooperators, and elected officials.

(ii) An electronic file should be sent to the PM Webmaster for archiving and for 

inclusion on the Internet.

(iii) The issuing PMC is to maintain file copies of each report and an electronic 

copy of the file.

B. PMC Annual Technical Report

(1) General

 The PMC Annual Technical Report (ATR) summarizes studies and activities for a 

PMC in a technical format. It serves as a reference source for work done by the 

Center. The summary provides the basis for making needed adjustments to the study 

activities in the coming year and serves as a source of information for the PM 

Progress Report. The PMC staff, under the direction of the Manager, prepares the 

report with input from the PM Specialists, as appropriate.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

(2) Contents

The PMC ATR will contain, at a minimum:

• Study titles, numbers, and brief description of the study;

• Summarized data presented in tabular form for each study for the reporting 

period; and

• A brief summary (1/2 page or less) of the tabular data for each study.

(3) Frequency

 The PMC ATR is prepared annually. The technical report is compiled on a calendar 

year basis and is prepared by May 1 of the year following the report year.

(4) Distribution

(i) Minimum distribution includes the PM Specialists(s) which serves the PMC, 

other PMCs and PM Specialists with closely related activities, NTSC PM 

Specialists, and the NPL. Other suggested distribution includes cooperators 

that might have a direct interest in the technical nature of the study.

(ii) An electronic file should be sent to the PM Webmaster for archiving and for 

inclusion on the Internet.

(iii) The issuing PMC is to maintain file copies of each report and an electronic 

copy of the file.

C. Periodic Reports

(1) General

 The NPL or PM Information Coordinator may be required to compile Program 

information periodically. PMCs or PM Specialists may also need to prepare progress 

reports or summaries of studies or activities.

(2) Types and Formats of Periodic Reports

(i) Examples of recurring reports which may need to be compiled include:

• Outreach Activities - support provided to underrepresented or disadvantaged 

groups.

• Civil Rights issues - consists of Civil Rights concerns and violations.

• Pesticide Usage and Disposal - quantities and dollars spent or projected to be 

spent on pesticide or chemical disposal.

• PMC Security – updates of progress made on security assessments.

• Reports or information for management or Congress - topics may include 

new releases, performance goals and updates, and implementation of 

Program Strategic Plans.

• Progress Reports - might include project or study summaries, updates on 

reimbursable activities, and facility upgrades.

(ii) Formats for these reports are usually determined by the person or office 

compiling the report, or by the person or office requesting the report.

(3) Frequency

 The frequency and due dates of these reports depend on the type of report and how 

much information is requested.

(4) Distribution
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

 Distribution depends on the type of report and, in part, by the person preparing the 

report or the person who requested the information.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

541.10 POMS Database Architecture

• POMS = Plant Materials Operations and Management System

• POMS is a MS Access 2007 database with a forms interface using VisualBasic

• Opening POMS launches a custom toolbar and startup screen. From the startup screen the 

user can go to different modules to enter or view data and print reports. Each Module 

contains Sections related to the broad module topic.

• Since POMS is modular, additional modules can be developed as needed. Modules and 

Sections in Italics are proposed but have not been developed.

Accessioning

Add/Edit Accessions

Accession Reports

Inventory

Add/Edit Inventory

Inventory Reports

Distribution and Delivery

Add/Edit D&D

Credit D&D

D&D Reports

Products & Technology Transfer

Releases

Publications

Presentations

Customers Assisted 

Tech Transfer Reports

Seed and Plant Production

Release Production

Other Production

Production Reports

Addresses

Address Book

PM Sites

PM Staff

Reports

Studies and Plantings

National Projects (Review)

Studies

 Studies - Plans, Details

Field Plantings

 Plantings - Plans, Details

Conservation Field Trials

 Trials - Plans, Details

Reports

PMC/PMS Operations

Staff

Time Spent on Activities

Long Range Planning

Annual Business Plan

Workload Analysis

Annual Goals

Budget Planning

Expenses

Marketing

Outreach

Training Courses

Scheduling

Reports

Database Reports and Maintenance

Data Exports

Quarterly Accomplish

Yearly Accomplishments

Data Imports

Evaluations

Plot Plans

Data and Evaluations

Evaluations - Field Offices

Reports
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)
Page 1 of 7

Plant Materials Performance Index

2010 Update (11-16-09)

Area/ Activity

Unit of 

Measure

Points 

per unit

Max 

Points

Center 

Data

Specialist 

Data

Total 

Points

Adjusted 

Uncapped 

Points

Adjusted 

Capped 

Points Definition

Base measurements

Staff FTEs number 1 0 1.0 The FTEs of all staff, permanent and intermittent, at the 

PMC. For PM Specialist, the amount of FTE that the 

Specialist spends on PM activities related to the 

performance index.

Releases-# number 

active 

releases

1 All plant releases for which the PMC is the "Prime PMC" 

which have not been discontinued.

Pre-Release Activities 15.00

Collections new acc. 

Entered

0.250 0.0 Number of accessions entered into POMS. It does not 

matter when the collection was actually made.

Active non-replicated 

plant studies

number of 

assemblies

1.50 0.0 The evaluation of the characteristics and comparative 

performance of an assembly of plants under controlled 

conditions. There are no minimum number of collections 

established for what constitutes an assembly, but it 

should include enough collections to be representative of 

the area the release is intended for. (Collaborative 

interagency studies would fit here, but not projects where 

we are only producing seed or plants).

Active replicated plant 

studies

number of 

assemblies

3.00 0.0 The more intensive and rigorous testing of plants May 

not be necessary for all types of releases. (Collaborative 

interagency studies would fit here, but not projects where 

we are only producing seed or plants).

Active Off-Center 

Evaluations

number of 

assemblies

5.00 0.0 Plantings used by PMCs to evaluate releases or 

technology off the center; data is collected and analyzed 

statistically; was previously named “field evaluation 

planting.”

Your PMC
Page 2 of 7

Area/ Activity

Unit of 

Measure

Points 

per unit

Max 

Points

Center 

Data

Specialist 

Data

Total 

Points

Adjusted 

Uncapped 

Points

Adjusted 

Capped 

Points Definition

Your PMC

Field Plantings - release 

selection

number of 

plantings

1.00 0.0 Final stage of technology development or plant selection; 

plantings used primarily by PM Specialists to develop 

new methods or technology or evaluate the adaptability 

of new releases; data is collected.

Observational Nursery 

Plantings evaluated for 

other PMCs

number of 

accessions

1.00 0.0 Informal evaluations of plants (from another PMC) in 

advanced testing or recently released for the purpose of 

determining adaptation.

Inter-Center Strain Trials 

conducted with other 

PMCs

number of 

trials

5.00 0.0 Formal, controlled, repeatable evaluations where 

scientific methods and experimental designs are used to 

study plants and techniques from multiple PMCs where 

each PMC plays an equal role. Useful to determine state 

and regional plant performance and adaptation.

0.0 0.0 0.0

New Releases 0.00 This section is not adjusted for staff FTEs

Releases points varies 0.0 0.0 Pionts for new releases as assigned by the Regional Plant 

Materials Specialist

Release Maintenance 10.00 This section is not adjusted for staff FTEs

Maintain Releases number 

maintained

1.00 0% 0.0 0.0 Unless releases are formally discontinued, they are still 

active. To qualify, there must be foundation production 

or adequate seed stored to meet reasonable commercial 

demand.

Release Production Field Size: These values are only included in the uncapped points.

 Acres 0.25 0.0 0.0 Total acres for release production

 Linear Feet 0.001 0.0 0.0 Total linear feet for release production
Page 3 of 7

Area/ Activity

Unit of 

Measure

Points 

per unit

Max 

Points

Center 

Data

Specialist 

Data

Total 

Points

Adjusted 

Uncapped 

Points

Adjusted 

Capped 

Points Definition

Your PMC

Technology Development 15.00

Technology Development 

Studies

number 6.00 0.0 Studies which are classified in POMS under Purpose as 

"Technology Development", excluding Studies related to 

National Action Plans.

Field Plantings - 

technology development

number of 

plantings

1.25 0.0 Final stage of technology development or plant selection; 

plantings used primarily by PMSs to develop new 

methods or technology or evaluate the adaptability of 

new releases; data is collected.

Field Plantings - 

demonstrations

number of 

plantings

0.75 0.0 Final stage of technology development or plant selection; 

plantings are used primarily by PM Specialists to 

develop new methods or technology or evaluate the 

adaptability of new releases.

Conservation Field Trials number 1.00 0.0 Identified in the NRCS General Manual 450-403 as a 

tool for evaluating new technology, species, or plant 

releases that address local soil and water resource 

problems; type of study used by many disciplines; in the 

PM program may be used to develop new technology, 

evaluate releases, and promote PM products to address a 

specific resource problem; typically coordinated by the 

PM Specialist; qualitative or quantitative data may be 

collected.

0.0 0.0 0.0

National Action Plan Studies 10.00

Pollinators number 10.00 0.0 Studies coded in POMS as related to the national project 

for pollinators.

Energy number 10.00 0.0 Studies coded in POMS as related to the national project 

for energy.

Climate Change number 10.00 0.0 Studies coded in POMS as related to the national project 

for climate change.

Air Quality number 10.00 0.0 Studies coded in POMS as related to the national project 

for air quality.

Transition to Organics number 10.00 0.0 Studies coded in POMS as related to the national project 

for transition to organics.
Page 4 of 7

Area/ Activity

Unit of 

Measure

Points 

per unit

Max 

Points

Center 

Data

Specialist 

Data

Total 

Points

Adjusted 

Uncapped 

Points

Adjusted 

Capped 

Points Definition

Your PMC

Plant Attribute Data 

Collection

number 12.00 0.0 Studies coded in POMS as related to the national project 

for plant attribute data collection. These are formal 

studies organized with the NTSC Plant Materials 

Specialist.

0.0 0.0 0.0

Technical Documents 15.00

FOTG Standards/Specs number 2.00 0.0 FOTG Standards, Specifications, Job Sheets or other 

guides which have been written or significantly revised 

by PM staff.

Major Publications number 20.00 0.0 Major technical publication , 90% of which is developed 

by PM staff, which is a comprehensive treatment of a 

subject, has multiple chapters, is typically in excess of 25 

pages, and has been peer reviewed by NTSC PMS and 

others.

Miscellaneous Technical 

Document

number 2.00 0.0 Technical information written in general format; this 

category to be used when the document is not classified 

as another type. (e.g., propagation protocols)

Plant Fact Sheets number 3.00 0.0 Information for a species giving an overview of plant use 

and characteristics; usually in a 2-page format

Plant Guides number 6.00 0.0 Detailed information on a plant species and/or release or 

planting technology; longer than a Plant Fact Sheet

PMC Annual Technical 

Report

number 20.00 0.0 Technical report which gives details of studies and 

activities; usually not for general distribution; compiled 

annually

Scientific Poster number 2.00 0.0 Technical Information in poster format given at a 

technical or professional meeting

Progress Report number 2.00 0.0 Reports compiled to update others on the status of 

cooperative agreement projects. Does not include annual 

updates of regular PMC studies.

Published Abstracts number 1.00 0.0 Abstract or a paper or poster which is published in a 

program or proceedings of a professional meeting
Page 5 of 7

Area/ Activity

Unit of 

Measure

Points 

per unit

Max 

Points

Center 

Data

Specialist 

Data

Total 

Points

Adjusted 

Uncapped 

Points

Adjusted 

Capped 

Points Definition

Your PMC

Published Symposium 

Proceedings

number 4.00 0.0 Paper which is published in the proceedings from a 

technical or professional meeting

Refereed Journal Articles number 4.00/8.00 0.0 Articles which has had NTSC and peer-review and been 

published in a professional journal; co-author = 4 pts. 

and principal author = 8 pts.

Release Brochure number 2.00 0.0 A brochure or flyer describing the characteristics, uses, 

establishment and management of a plant release.

Technical Notes number 6.00 0.0 New or major revision; used to convey technical 

information; conforms to NRCS or state guidelines for 

preparing and issuing the information and has had NTSC 

review.

0.0 0.0 0.0

Popular Documents 10.00

Information Brochures 

and Flyers

number 3.00 0.0 Information developed by PM staff to promote or explain 

PM programs or activities. (e.g., general PMC brochure)

Newsletters number 5.00 0.0 Newsletter-type written materials prepared by the PMC 

and/or PM Specialist on a regular basis

Plant Materials Progress 

Report of Activities

number 8.00 0.0 Report giving highlights of some of the studies and 

activities at the PMC; compiled and distributed widely 

annually; typically 4-6 pages long.

Popular Journal or 

Magazine Articles

number 8.00 0.0 Article written by PM staff published in a popular journal 

or magazine which has not been peer-reviewed

Video/Media Production number 5.00 0.0 A video, TV, or radio production developed by PM staff 

or made with major contribution of PM staff.

0.0 0.0 0.0
Page 6 of 7

Area/ Activity

Unit of 

Measure

Points 

per unit

Max 

Points

Center 

Data

Specialist 

Data

Total 

Points

Adjusted 

Uncapped 

Points

Adjusted 

Capped 

Points Definition

Your PMC

Training 10.00

Training Session number of 

hours

2.00 0.0 0.0 0.0 Training must be technical in nature, i.e., provide new 

technical information or update trainees on plant science 

information in a formal training session. If a session is 

coordinated by the PMC, then include the total hours for 

the session. If the session is coordinated by someone 

else and PMC staff delivers some of the training, include 

only the amount of PMC presentation time. Preparation 

time for the presentation is not to be included in the 

number of hours. If it does not meet these qualifications, 

then session may be classified as a presentation (state, 

regional, or national) to get credit under Other 

Presentations. Tours and general presentations do not 

qualify as formal training.

Presentations 10.00

Tour number 3.00 0.0 Organized tour (minimum of 1.5 hours) to highlight 

programs, activities, and technology of the PMC or the 

Plant Materials Program.

Field Day number 7.00 0.0 A formal, advertised field day, open house, or similar 

type of event involving a minimum of 20 people and 

lasting a minimum of 4 hours to highlight programs, 

activities, and technology of the PMC or the Plant 

Materials Program.

Presentation-State number 4.00 0.0 Formal presentations made to groups at a local or 

statewide meeting, workshop or conference.

Presentation-Regional number 5.00 0.0 Formal presentations made to groups at a regional 

meeting, workshop or conference.

Presentation-National number 5.00 0.0 Formal presentations made to groups at a national (or 

international) meeting, workshop or conference.

Exhibit Set-Up & Staff number 2.00 0.0 Setting up an exhibit at a conference or workshop to 

advertise the programs, activities, or technology of the 

PMC or the Plant Materials Program.

0.0 0.0 0.0
Page 7 of 7

Area/ Activity

Unit of 

Measure

Points 

per unit

Max 

Points

Center 

Data

Specialist 

Data

Total 

Points

Adjusted 

Uncapped 

Points

Adjusted 

Capped 

Points Definition

Your PMC

Other Seed and Plant Production 5.00

Seed bulk pounds 0.01 0.0 The total amount of seed produced and processed at the 

PMC which is not for Release Maintenance production.

Plants or Vegetative 

Material

each unit 0.001 0.0 The total number of vegetative plant usits produced and 

processed at the PMC which is not for Release 

Maintenance production. All units regardless of type 

have equal weight.

0.0 0.0 0.0

0.0 Total measured product output of the program, no 

maximum.

0.0 Score which indicates the balance of the program, 

maximum score is 100.

Total Productivity Score = (Uncapped x (Capped/100)) 0 Indicates the true balance and productivity of the PMC 

program.
Staff Calculator for the Performance Index

Instructions:

- fill in categories below as requested.

- ALL staff, regardless of funding or employment, should be included.

- Estimate the FTE for seasonal, WAE and volunteer staff

Staff FTE (Full Time Equivalent)

Plant Materials Center

Manager

Professioanl Staff/ Assistant Manager

Technicians

Secretary/Administrative

Non-NRCS funded Year-round Staff

Seasonal/WAE/Student/Temporary Staff

Volunteers

Total for PMC FTEs 0.00

Plant Materials Specialist

Total for PMS FTE 0.00
James E. “Bud” Smith Plant Materials Center

2009 Progress Report of Activities 

 

3950 FM 1292 

Knox City, TX 79529 

Phone: 940-658-3526 

Fax: 940-658-3095 

http://plant-materials.nrcs.usda.gov/txpmc/

Evaluating Warm Season Grasses for Biofuel 

A great deal of emphasis is being placed on 

finding native plants that can be used in 

biofuel production. Crops are grown for 

direct combustion or gasification to 

generate electricity; ethanol production for 

transportation fuel; or thermochemical 

conversion into other by products. Time 

and frequency of harvest play a major role 

in biofuels quality. 

Preliminary data has shown that from the end of 

the growing season through the winter there is no 

statistical difference between harvest dates of the 

same variety for biomass production. While the 

yield may not change throughout the winter, the 

quality of the biomass will. Analysis to date has 

shown that the biomass looses minerals the longer 

it remains in the field and is subjected to the 

elements. A special thank you to Michelle Auger 

and David Hinojosa for their help with clipping 

plots and processing plant materials. 
Growth Curve Study of Warm Season Forage Grasses Under Low and 

High Fertility Management 

This year we completed a three year study which evaluated 

different warm season grasses with different fertility levels. 

Results from this study provide important information to 

livestock producers and NRCS conservationists when 

making pasture and grazing management decisions. Warm 

season grass cultivars investigated in this study can provide 

the nutritional needs to meet the physiological and 

performance demands of various classes of beef cattle. 

Data showed that ‘Selection 75’ Kleingrass 

(Panicum coloratum) and San Marcos Germplasm 

eastern gamagrass (Tripsacum dactyloides) 

provided all the digestibility and crude protein 

requirements for a 1,200 lb. lactating cow. The 

two varieties also produced considerable amounts 

of biomass. A special thank you again to Michelle 

Auger and David Hinojosa for helping perform 

forage clippings. For more information, see tech 

note at http://www.plant-materials.nrcs.usda.gov/pubs/txpmctn9139.pdf

Adaptability of ‘Tropic Sun’ Sunn Hemp 

Our PMC is a participant in a nation wide test to determine the 

adaptability of sunn hemp as an alternative leguminous cover 

crop and potential biofuels plant. Sunn hemp is a tropical or 

sub-tropic plant that can produce from 5,000-6,000 pounds of 

biomass per acre. It is an annual plant when grown in the 

continental United States, and can produce 120-140 pounds of 

nitrogen in 60-90 days. Plants at the PMC averaged 111⁄2 feet 

tall (under supplemental irrigation) when the growing season 

was complete. The plots did produce seed pods, but no viable 

seed was harvested. 

New Collections 

The PMC is collecting five native, perennial plant species 

for evaluation for various conservation uses. The species 

are blue grama (Bouteloua gracilis), Indian ricegrass 

(Achnatherum hymenoides), three-flower melicgrass 

(Melica nitens), vine-mesquite (Panicum obtusum), and 

showy menodora (Menodora longiflora). For more 

information on these plant species, see the website at 

http://www.tx.nrcs.usda.gov/ technical/pmc and click on 

James E. “Bud” Smith PMC. These plant species will be 

evaluated for potential use in conservation practices such 

as Range Planting, Upland Wildlife Habitat Management, 

Conservation Cover Riparian Herbaceous Cover, and 

others. , 
Plant Collection and Equipment Training 

The staff at the James E. “Bud” Smith PMC conducted 

trainings on plant collection and equipment and tillage 

practices. Forty-seven NRCS employees from throughout 

Texas traveled to attend the training. Gary Rea opened the 

day by welcoming everyone and discussing center 

activities. Brandon Carr gave a presentation explaining

different tillage practices and different types of equipment 

used on farms, ranches, and in urban areas. Dale Carroll 

followed the equipment presentation with a tour 

the equipment used here at the center. He 

discussed the differences in size compared to 

normal farming and ranching operation. He also 

showed how the equipment at the center was 

modified to meet the research needs of the center. 

After a brief break for lunch, Rob Ziehr discussed 

the history of the center and explained the 

importance of plant collections from Field Office 

staff. Rudy Esquivel gave a presentation on how to determine seed maturity, and how to make a successful

seed and vegetative plant material collection. Following the presentations, the group participated in a tour 

of the center which highlighted research tests and PMC plant productions. The day provided NRCS Field

Office employees the opportunity to meet one another and discuss ways we could work together to 

facilitate the needs of our c

of 

a 

ustomers and the public. 

Prescribed Burn Training 

On August 12th and 13th, the PMC hosted a prescribed burning training course. Lem Creswell coordinated 

the training which provided initial and continual credits for thirty NRCS employees. Attendees were 

educated on the laws and procedures for conducting safe and beneficial burns for customers. 

Seed Production 

The PMC is responsible for producing breeder, foundation, and germplasm select seed which is sold by the 

Texas Foundation Seed Service to area seed companies. Currently, the PMC supplies the seed service with 

twelve releases. A full list can be obtained from their website at http://tfss.tamu.edu or by calling them at 

(940) 552-6226. The PMC also maintains another seventeen releases by storage and breeder blocks. These 

releases include grasses, legumes, forbs, and woody plants. A complete list of plant releases can be found 

at our website at http://Plant-Materials.nrcs.usda.gov/txpmc/.

New Soil Conservationist Added to the USDA-NRCS James E. “Bud” 

Smith Plant Materials Center 

Brandon Carr has been selected to join the staff as a Soil Conservationist at the 

USDA Natural Resources Conservation Service’s James E. “Bud” Smith Plant 

Material Center (PMC). Brandon graduated from Petersburg, TX in 1997. He 

received a BS degree in Environmental Science with an emphasis in Agriculture 

and a BS degree in Plant Science with an emphasis in Integrated Pest 

Management. Both degrees were received from Lubbock Christian University 

in 2002. Brandon has six years of experience as an assistant cotton breeder. He 

resides in Haskell, TX with his wife and new baby girl. 
Program Emphasis 

The mission of the James E. “Bud” Smith PMC is to develop and transfer effective state-of-the-art plant 

science technology to meet customer and resource needs. The PMC conducts plantings and studies at the 

Center and off center with cooperating partners. Plant and technology development objectives of the PMC 

include: 

 Erosion Control - wind and water 

 Range and Pasture Improvement 

 Wildlife Habitat Improvement 

 Water Quality Improvement on Agricultural Land 

 Biofuels 

 Saline Site Restoration 

James E. “Bud” Smith Plant Materials Center 

The United States Department of Agriculture (USDA) 

Natural Resources Conservation Service (NRCS) James E. 

“Bud” Smith Plant Materials Center (PMC) located near 

Knox City, Texas, was establish in 1965. It is one of the 27 

Centers located throughout the United States. The Center is 

responsible for developing conservation plants and cultural 

techniques for use within targeted Major Land Resource 

Areas (MLRA) in Texas, Oklahoma, Kansas, Colorado, and 

New Mexico. The Center is also responsible for producing 

Breeder and Foundation seed of plant releases and assisting 

in commercial development and promoting their use in 

natural resource conservation. The PMC serves all or 

portions of 136 counties in Texas that comprises parts of 25 

MLRAs, and the areas served in all or portions of 39 counties in southwestern Oklahoma comprising par

of thirteen MLRAs. The PMC also serves a portion of seven counties in southwestern Kansas including 

parts of four MLRAs, a portion of one county in the southeastern corner of Colorado comprising parts of 

three MLRAs, and a portion of seven counties in eastern N

ts 

ew Mexico comprising parts of seven MLRAs. 

The PMC is located approximately four and a half miles northwest of Knox City, Texas, in the Rolling Red 

Plains MLRA. 

James E. “Bud” Smith PMC Personnel 

 Dr. Gary Rea- Manager 

 Rudy G. Esquivel- Soil Conservationist 

 Brandon Carr- Soil Conservationist 

 Billy (Dale) Carroll- Biological Science 

Technician (Plants)

 Mark S. Bennett- Biological Science Aid (part-time, summer only)

Visit the PMC website for more information and publications: 

http://Plant-Materials.nrcs.usda.gov/txpmc/ 

The U.S. Department of Agriculture (USDA) prohibits discrimination in all its programs and activities on the basis of race, 

color, national origin, age, disability, and where applicable, sex, marital status, familial status, parental status, religion, sexual 

orientation, genetic information, political beliefs, reprisal, or because all or part of an individual's income is derived from any 

public assistance program. (Not all prohibited bases apply to all programs.) Persons with disabilities who require alternative

means for communication of program information (Braille, Large print, audiotape, etc.) should contact USDA's Target Center 

at 202-720-2600 (voice and TDD). 

To file a complaint of discrimination, write USDA, Director, Office of Civil Rights, 1400 Independence Avenue, S.W., 

Washington, D.C. 20250-9410 or call 800-795-3272 (voice) or 202- 720-6382 (TDD). USDA is an equal opportunity provider 

and employer. 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

542.0 Acronyms Found in the NPMM

Acronym Meaning

AC Area Conservationist

AgNIC Agriculture Network Information Center

AGRICOLA AGRICultural Online Access

AMS Agriculture Marketing Services

AOSCA Association of Official Seed Certifying Agencies

APHIS Agricultural and Plant Health Inspections Service

APO Annual Plan of Operations (now referred to as 'Business Plan')

ARS Agricultural Research Service

ATR Annual Technical Report

CAA Clean Air Act

CERCLA Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability Act

CFR Code of Federal Regulations

CFT Conservation Field Trials

CPAIS Corporate Property Automated Information System

CRIS Current Research Information System

CRA Common Resource Area

CRP Conservation Reserve Program

CSP Conservation Security Program

D&D Distribution and Delivery

DC District Conservationist

EEO Equal Employment Opportunity

EPA Environmental Protection Agency

EQIP Environmental Quality Incentives Program
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Acronym Meaning

ESCOP Experiment Station Committee on Organization and Policy

FAR Federal Acquisition Regulations

FEP

FEP

Federal Employee Program

Field Evaluation Planting

FIFRA Federal Insecticide, Fungicide, and Rodenticide Act

FO Field Office

FOTG Field Office Technical Guides

FTTA Federal Technology Transfer Act

GRIN Germplasm Resources Information Network

GS General Schedule

HWM Hazardous Waste Management

ICST Intercenter Strain Trials

IRM Information Resources Management

IRT Interdisciplinary Resource Team

IT Information Technology

KSA Knowledge, Skills, and Abilities

LRP Long Range Plan

MLRA Major Land Resource Areas

NACD National Association of Conservation Districts

NAL National Agricultural Library

NCP National Conservation Program

NEDC National Employee Development Center

NEPA National Environmental Policy Act

NHQ National Headquarters

NPGS National Plant Germplasm System
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Acronym Meaning

NPJ Native Plants Journal

NPL National Program Leader, Plant Materials

NPGRC National Plant Genetic Resources Center

NPMC National Plant Materials Center

NPMM National Plant Materials Manual

NPMS National Plant Materials Specialist (now referred to as NPL)

NRCS Natural Resources Conservation Service

NSSL National Seed Storage Laboratory (now the NPGRC)

NTSC National Technology Support Center

OGC Office of General Council

OMB Office of Management and Budget

OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration

OTT Office of Technology Transfer

PAS Public Affairs Specialist

PCB Polychlorinated Biphenyls

PI Plant Introduction

PLANTS Plant List of Accepted Nomenclature, Taxonomy and Symbols

PM Plant Materials

PMAAA Plant Materials Annual Activities and Accomplishments

PMC Plant Materials Center

PMCM Plant Materials Center Manager

PMP Plant Materials Program

PMS Plant Materials Specialist

PO Plan of Operations (now referred to as 'Business Plan')

POMS Plant Materials Operations and Management System
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Acronym Meaning

PRP Potentially Responsible Party

PRS Performance Reporting System

PVP Plant Variety Protection

PVPA Plant Variety Protection Act

RC Regional Conservationist

RC&D Resource Conservation and Development

RCRA Resource Conservation and Recovery Act

RFO Responsible Federal Officer

SCS Soil Conservation Service (now called the NRCS)

SO State Office

SRC State Resource Conservationist

STC State Conservationist

SWAPA Soil, Water, Air, Plant and Animals

SWCD Soil Water Conservation District

TSCA Toxic Substances Control Act

USDA United States Department of Agriculture

WHIP Wildlife Habitat Incentive Program

WRP Wetlands Reserve Program
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

GLOSSARY OF TERMS

FOR USE IN PLANT MATERIALS

Abiotic – Non-living components of an ecosystem; basic elements and compounds of the 

environment.

Absorption – The process by which a solution passes from one system to another.

Accession – Plant material (plant, seed, or vegetative part) collected and assigned a 

number to maintain its identity during evaluation, increase, and storage.

9 million numbers – NRCS numbers used to identify plant accessions; i.e., 

9056783

900 numbers – NRCS numbers used to identify plant accessions, now referred to 

as 9 million numbers; i.e., 9056783

Achene – Small, dry, one-seeded fruit.

Acid equivalent - The theoretical yield of parent acid from an active ingredient.

Acid mine drainage - Water mixed with sulfuric acid and having a pH of less than 6.0. 

This mixture can be discharging from an active mine or abandoned mine. Ore or other 

minerals containing sulfides (iron pyrite) oxidate (when exposed to water, air, or other 

weathering processes) and form sulfuric acid. The sulfuric acid mixes with water and 

flows out of the mine into surrounding areas as acid mine drainage. 

Acid spoil/waste - Spoil material containing sufficient pyrite so that weathering produces 

acid water, and the pH of the soil determined by standard methods of soil analysis is 

between 4.0 and 6.9.

Acid soil – Soil that has a pH below 6.6.

Acid tolerance – Ability of a plant to tolerate acid soil.

Active ingredient - The chemical compound in a product that is responsible for the 

chemical (i.e., herbicidal) affect.

Acuminate – Having a leaf tip whose sides are concave and tapering to an elongated 

point.

Acute – Leaf shape having margins tapered to a point.

Ad libitum feeding - Daily feed offerings that allow free-will consumption, generally fed 

to have a daily excess of 15% of feed remaining.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Adsorption – The process by which an ion in a solution bonds to a charged surface.

Advanced evaluation - The more intensive testing of plants that have been selected as 

being superior in one or more attributes to the initial evaluation.

Adventitious bud – A bud that develops at the base of a needle cluster on a root or on a 

woody tissue on a branch or leader, when the end of the branch or leader is injured or cut 

off.

Aftermath – Crop residue and/or regrowth of forage crops, including growth of 

volunteer plants, used for grazing after a machine harvest.

Age-class – A descriptive term to indicate the relative age of plants.

Aggressiveness - Seedling vigor related to ease of establishment. Also, capacity of wellestablished plants to compete with or out-compete associated grasses, legumes, or woody 

species.

Air-dry weight – The weight of a substance, usually vegetation, after it has been allowed 

to dry to equilibrium with the atmosphere, usually without artificial heat. 

Alien species - A species introduced and occurring in locations beyond its known 

historical range. This includes introductions from other continents, bioregions, and also 

those not native to the local geographic region. Executive Order (E.O.), Invasive 

Species, February 3, 1999, more narrowly defines an alien species and ties the definition 

to an occurrence outside a native.

Alkaline soil – A soil that has a pH above 7.3.

Alkaloids – Bitter tasting organic compounds of plant origin that have alkaline properties 

and a complex molecular structure containing nitrogen. They reduce dry matter intake 

and interfere with digestion of grazing animals.

Allele - One member of a pair or series of genes occupying a specific position (locus) in a 

specific chromosome; one of the alternative forms of a gene. Normally an individual has 

only two alleles for any trait - one gene derived from its male parent, the other from its 

female parent.

Allelopathy – Chemical inhibition of one organism by another.

Allopolyploid - A polyploid containing genetically different sets of chromosomes; for 

example, sets from two or more species.

Alternate – Bud or leaf arrangement (singly) along a stem at spiraled intervals.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Alternate grazing - Repeated grazing and resting of two or more pastures in succession.

Amphidiploid - A polyploid whose chromosome compliment is made up of the entire 

somatic complements of two species.

Aneuploid - An organism whose somatic number is not an even multiple of the haploid 

number.

Angle of repose – The greatest angle to the horizontal that any loose or fragmented solid 

material will stand without sliding or come to rest when poured or dumped in a pile or on 

a slope. 

Animal day - One day's tenure upon a pasture by one animal. Not synonymous with 

animal unit day.

Animal unit (AU) - One mature, non-lactating cow weighing 1,100 pounds and fed at the 

maintenance level, or the equivalent, expressed as (body weight)0.75

Animal unit day (AUD) - The forage required to feed an AU for one day. Generally

considered to be about 25 pounds of forage dry matter. A lactating cow with calf would 

need about 33 pounds forage dry matter per day.

; in other kinds or 

classes of animals, based on the average daily consumption of 25 pounds dry matter per 

day. The AU is often used by public land management agencies when referring to a 

1,100 lb cow with calf, 1.4 yearling cattle, or 5 dry ewes.

Animal unit equivalent (AUE) – The amount of forage consumed by the different kind 

and class of animals expresses as a portion of an AU.

Domestic Animal Kind-Class AUE Wildlife Animal Kind-Class

Cow – dry 1.00 Antelope 0.10

AUE

Cow with calf 1.00 Bison 1.00

Bull – mature 1.25 Deer – whitetail 0.13

Calf – weaned 0.60 Deer – mule 0.17

Steer/Heifer - 2 years 0.80 Elk 0.48

Sheep – mature ewe or ram 0.20 Goat – mountain 0.14

Sheep – yearling 0.15 Moose 0.83

Goat 0.17 Sheep – bighorn (ewe) 0.14

Horse – mature 1.25- 2.00 Sheep – bighorn (ram) 0.18

Animal unit month (AUM) - The forage required to feed an AU for one month (30 

days). Not synonymous with animal month. The term AUM is commonly used in three 

ways: (a) stocking rate, as in “X acres per AUM;” (b) forage allocations, as in “X AUMs 

in Allotment A;” and (c) utilization, as in “X AUMs taken from Unit B.” 

Annual plant - A plant that completes its life cycle from seed in a single year or growing 

season.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Annual ring – The growth layer of one year, as viewed on the cross section of a stem, 

branches, or roots.

Anther – The pollen containing part of a stamen.

Apical dominance – Domination and control of meristematic leaves or buds located on 

the lower stem, roots, or rhizomes by hormones produced by apical meristem located on 

the tips and upper branches of plants, particularly woody plants.

Apiculate – Ending abruptly in a short pointed leaf tip. 

Apomixis - Reproduction in which sexual organs or related structures take part but 

fertilization does not occur, so that the resulting seed is vegetatively reproduced. Only a 

single parent contributes genes to the offspring.

Apparent trend - An interpretation of a trend based on a single observation. Apparent 

trend is described in the same terms as measured trend except that when no trend is 

apparent, it shall be described as "not apparent." See “Trend.”

Appressed – Lying close and flattened against.

Approximate Original Contour - Backfilling and grading previously mined areas so 

that the mined area resembles the general surface configuration of the land and 

surrounding area prior to mining.

Arcuate venation – To arch or curve like veins in dogwood (Cornus).

Ascending – Rising somewhat obliquely and curving upward.

Aspect – The predominate direction (north, south, east, west) of slope of the land.

Assembly - A systematic collection of plants (seed or vegetative material) of one or more 

species to be evaluated for a planned purpose.

Astringent – Pungent, strong odor or taste.

Autecology – A subdivision of ecology that deals with the relationship of individuals of a 

species to their environment.

Autopolyploid - A polyploid arising through multiplication of the complete haploid set 

of one species.

Autotoxicity – A specific type of allelopathy where the presence of adult plants of a 

species interferes with the germination and development of seedlings from that species.

Auxin – A plant hormone promoting or regulating growth.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Available forage - That portion of the forage, expressed as weight of forage per unit land 

area, accessible for consumption by a specified kind, class, sex, age, size, and 

physiological status of a grazing animal. Calculated as: (lbs DM/paddock) = total forage 

(lbs DM/A) * paddock area (A/paddock) * desired utilization (%).

Available soil water - The portion of water in a soil that can be absorbed by plant roots.

Awl-shaped – Oval shaped, with a sharp pointed end (e.g., juniper leaves).

Axillary – Pertaining to the area where the leaf petiole and stem are connected (the axil).

Backcross - The crossing of a hybrid with either of its parents. In genetics, the crossing 

of a heterozygote with a homozygous recessive.

Band-seeding - The placement of seed in rows directly above, but not in contact with, a 

band of fertilizer.

Band treatment - An application to a continuous restricted area such as in or along a 

crop row, rather than over the entire field area.

Bare ground – All land surface not covered by vegetation, rock, litter, or crytogam.

Bare-root - A plant harvested from a field without any soil on its roots.

Basal area – The cross sectional area of the stem, or stems of a plant, or of all plants in a 

stand. Herbaceous and small woody plants are measured at or near ground level; larger 

woody plants are measured at breast or other designated height.

Basal treatment - Herbicide applied to the stems of woody plants at or just above the 

ground.

Biennial - A plant that completes its life cycle in 2 years. The first year it produces 

leaves and stores food. The second year it produces fruits and seed.

Biodiversity – (1) The total variability within and among species of living organisms and 

the ecological complexes that they inhabit. Biodiversity has three levels - ecosystem, 

species, and genetic diversity - reflected in the number of different species, the different 

combination of species, and the different combinations of genes within each species. (2) 

The totality of genes, species, and ecosystems in a region or the world.

Bioengineering – See soil bioengineering.

Biological control – The use of organisms or viruses to control parasites, weeds, or other 

pests.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Biomass – The total amount of living plants and animals above/or below ground in an 

area at a given time.

Biotype - A group of individuals within a population occurring in nature, all with 

essentially the same genetic constitution. A species usually consists of many biotypes. 

See also “ecotype.”

Bipinnate – Twice pinnate (as in honey locust leaves).

Blade – The broad, flat, green part of the leaf.

Blend - A mixture of seed of known proportions of two or more lots or variation of the 

same species.

Blind cultivation - Cultivating before a seeded or planted crop emerges.

Bloat - Excessive accumulation of gases in the rumen of animals because loss through 

the esophagus is impaired, causing distension of the rumen.

Bole – The main trunk of a tree.

Boot stage – Growth stage when the sheath of the upper most leaf encloses a grass 

reproductive seedhead.

Botanical variety - The botanical nomenclature division consisting of more or less 

recognizable entities within species that are not genetically isolated from each other, 

below the level of subspecies, and is indicated by the abbreviation “var.” in the scientific 

name. Usage: the abbreviation in roman type; the name in italics; no capitals. See also 

“variety.”

Bract – A modified leaf from the axil of which a flower or flower cluster arises. 

Branching density – The amount of branching per unit area often described in 

percentage. 

Branching pattern – The pattern secondary woody limbs and stems grow from the main 

trunk or stem of a tree or shrub.

Breeder seed - Seed or vegetative propagating material which is directly controlled by 

the originating or, in some cases, the sponsoring plant breeder, institution, or firm, and 

which supplies the source for initial and recurring increase of foundation seed. See seed 

certification classes.

Breeder's rights - The assurance that the owner of a crop variety has exclusive control 

over the increase, distribution, and merchandising of a variety. The protection may be 

afforded by legislation and regulatory control by agreement among individuals 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

concerned, or by biological factors inherent in the variety. The breeder is assured that 

his/her authorization must be obtained before the variety can be reproduced or sold by 

anyone else. See “Plant Variety Protection Act."

Breeding system - A system of usage to select or modify a plant to yield new progeny 

with desired characteristics.

Broadcast seeding – Process of scattering seed on the soil surface prior to natural or 

artificial means of covering seed with soil. 

Browse – That part of leaf and twig growth of shrubs, woody vines, and trees available 

for forage consumption.

Browseline – The uppermost limit on trees and tall shrubs to which livestock and/or 

wildlife graze.

Brush – Various species of shrubs or small trees usually considered undesirable for 

livestock or timber management. The same species may have value for browse, wildlife 

habitat, or watershed protection.

Brush layering – A soil bioengineering terracing technique using unrooted willow 

cuttings placed in layers with the ends buried going up the slope. These willow cuttings 

will sprout branches and roots to help stabilize the slope or bank. The technique can be 

used for upland or streambank erosion control.

Brush mattress – A soil bioengineering technique that uses a wall or mat of willow 

cuttings placed vertically up the slope of an eroding bank. This mat will sprout branches 

and roots to help stabilize the bank. This technique is equal to rock riprap in terms of 

streambank protection.

Brush trench – A soil bioengineering technique using unrooted branches of willows and 

other woody material buried upright in a trench placed along the top of an eroding bank. 

The willow cuttings will sprout branches and roots to help decrease rill, gully, and 

concentrated flow erosion.

Bunchgrass – A grass so-called because of its characteristic growth habit of forming a 

bunch.

Business Plan - A document to indicate how the PMC resources are to be used and 

action items to be completed. It should be brief, flexible, realistic, and open-ended. It 

should be consistent with NRCS guidelines.

Buttressed – Broadened base or arched root flare of the tree trunk.

C-3 plants - Species having a photosynthetic pathway that results in 3-carbon 

compounds as initial products of photosynthesis. Includes most legumes, forbs, and cool 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

season grasses, as well as most trees and shrubs. Usually significantly less efficient users 

of soil and water nitrogen than are C-4 plants. Optimum temperature for photosynthesis 

and growth is 18 to 25° Celsius (64 to 77° Fahrenheit). See also “photosynthesis.”

C-4 plants - Species having a photosynthetic pathway which results in 4-carbon 

compounds as initial products of photosynthesis. Includes most warm season grasses, 

tropical grasses, a few forbs, and at least one shrub. Usually significantly more efficient 

users of soil nitrogen and water than are C-3 plants. Total biomass production is 

generally substantially greater than plants with other photosynthetic pathways. Optimum 

temperature for photosynthesis and growth is in the range of 27 to 35° Celsius (84 to 

100° Fahrenheit). See also “photosynthesis.”

Cactus – A spiny, succulent plant of the Cactaceae family.

Calcareous soil – Soil containing sufficient free calcium carbonate (lime) or calcium 

magnesium carbonate (dolomite) to effervesce visibly when treated with cold 0.1 M HCl 

in water. Excess level may affect plant growth and/or which plants may grow.

Calyx – Outermost whorl of modified leaves in a flower, usually green, but sometimes

showy colors.

CAM plants - Abbreviation for “Crassulacean Acid Metabolism.” Species whose 

photosynthetic pathway primarily involves fixation of carbon dioxide during the dark 

period. Includes desert succulent plants such as cactus. Under good moisture and 

temperature conditions, carbon fixation may occur in the light via either C-3 or C-4 

pathways. Generally the least productive of the three photosynthetic pathways. See also 

“photosynthesis.”

Cambium – The layer of cells between the inner bark and wood of a tree or shrub where 

cell division takes place.

Candle – The new bright green and tender shoot growth all conifers produce in the 

spring.

Canopy – The vertical projection downward of the aerial portion of vegetation, usually 

expressed as a percent of the ground so occupied. A generic term referring to the aerial 

portion of vegetation.

Canopy cover – The percentage of ground covered by a vertical projection of the 

outermost perimeter of the natural spread of foliage of plants. Small openings within the 

canopy are included.

Capsule – A fruit structure consisting of two or more chambers. 

Carbohydrates, nonstructural - Products of photosynthesis in the plant in the form of 

solute or stored material as in sugars, starch, fructosans, and hemicellulose. These 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

function as readily metabolizeable compounds and excludes structural compounds such 

as cellulose, lignin.

Carrier - A liquid or solid material added to a chemical compound or seed to facilitate its 

application in the field.

Carrying capacity - The maximum stocking rate that will achieve a target level of 

animal performance, in a specified grazing method, that can be applied over a defined 

time period without deterioration of the ecosystem. (See seasonal carrying capacity.)

Catkin – A scaly-bracted spike of unisexual flowers.

Center of diversity - The geographic region in which the greatest variability of a species 

occurs. A primary center of diversity is the region of true origin and secondary centers of 

diversity are regions of subsequent spread of a species.

Center of origin - The geographic region containing a concentration of genetic diversity 

of one or more species; also called a gene center.

Certified seed - The progeny of Breeder, Foundation, or Registered seed that is handled 

to maintain satisfactory genetic identity and purity, and that has been approved and 

certified by the certifying agency. Certified tree seed is defined as seed from trees of 

proven genetic superiority, as defined by the certifying agency, produced to ensure 

genetic identity. See also “seed certification classes.”

Chaining (Cabling) - The use of a large cable or chain pulled between two large tractors 

(usually crawler tractors) to pull down or uproot brush. Chaining uses a large ship anchor 

chain, with each chain link weighing 80 to 100 pounds.

Chasmogamous – Plant type in which the perianth of flowers opens for pollination to 

occur. See also “cleistogamous.”

Chlorosis – A leaf symptom due to mineral deficiencies where the leaf will remain green 

next to the veins and become yellow from the margins inward.

Chlorophyll – The green photosynthetic substance in plants which allows the capture of 

solar energy.

Ciliate – Fringed with hairs on the margin.

Cleistogamous – Plant type in which flowers self-pollinate inside the closed buds. 

Climax (climax plant community) – (1) The final or stable biotic community in a 

successional series that is self-perpetuating and in dynamic equilibrium with the physical 

habitat; (2) the assumed end in succession. See also “historic climax plant community.”
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Cline – A gradual morphological or physiological change in a group of related organisms 

across their range, usually associated with environmental or geographic transition.

Clone - A group of genetically identical plants produced by vegetatively propagating a 

single plant over one or more vegetative generations.

Clump planting – A soil bioengineering technique commonly using large equipment to 

dig and transplant both root clump and top growth of willow and other live woody plants 

from one location to another to protect an eroding bank.

Cold stratification – Keeping seed in a cool, moist environment for a period of time to 

simulate over-wintering, thereby reducing dormancy and increasing seed germination.

Combining ability – In general, the average performance of a strain in a series of 

crosses. More specifically, deviation from performance predicted on the basis of general 

combining ability.

Commercial seed - Seed produced by commercial industry; may or may not be 

recognized as improved varieties of seed.

Common seed - Non-certified seed. Such seed may be a named variety but are not 

grown under the certification program. Also, a term applied to seed that cannot be 

identified as to variety; sometimes used to denote local strains resulting from natural 

selection.

Community (plant community) - An assemblage of one or more populations of plants 

and/or animals in a common spatial arrangement. An assemblage of plants occurring 

together at any point in time, while denoting no particular ecological status. A unit of 

vegetation. 

Community type - An aggregation of all plant communities distinguished by floristic 

and structural similarities in both overstory and undergrowth layers. A unit of vegetation 

within a classification.

Companion crop - A crop sown along with another crop; used particularly for small 

grain with which a forage crop is sown. Companion crop is preferred to the term “nurse 

crop.”

Compatible - Compounds or formulations that can be mixed and applied together 

without undesirably altering their separate effects. This term can be applied also to 

species mixtures.

Competition – A process of struggling between organisms of the same species 

(intraspecific) or different species (interspecific) for light, water, essential elements, or 

space within a trophic level, resulting in a shortage of essential needs for some 

individuals or groups. 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Composite - The combining of genetic material from several sources. This is one of the 

alternatives of the mass selection technique and should not be confused with a polycross. 

See also “mass selection” and “polycross.”

Compound – A leaf that is made up of more than one leaf blade, termed leaflets.

Concentration - The amount of active ingredient or acid equivalent in a given volume of 

liquid or in a given weight of dry material.

Conical – Cone shaped.

Conifer – A tree belonging to the order Coniferales, which is usually evergreen, conebearing and with needle, awl, or scale-like leaves such as pine, spruce, fir, and cedar. 

Often referred to as “softwood.”

Coniferous – Cone bearing trees and shrubs.

Conservation District – A public organization created under State-enabling law as a 

special purpose district to develop and carry out a program of soil, water, and related 

resource conservation, uses, and development within its boundaries. Often called Soil 

Conservation District, Soil and Water Conservation District, or Resource Conservation 

District. 

Conservation Field Trial - Identified in General Manual 450-403 as a tool for 

evaluating new technology, species, or plant releases that address local soil and water 

resource problems; type of study used by many disciplines; in the Plant Materials 

Program (PMP) may be used to develop new technology, evaluate releases, and promote 

plant materials (PM) products; typically coordinated by the Plant Materials Specialist 

(PMS); qualitative or quantitative data may be collected.

Constructed wetland system – A series of wetland cells designed and constructed to 

remove pollutants such as sediment and nutrients from surface water using wetland 

plants. Cells may include a sediment basin, primary vegetative filter, shallow wetland, 

deep-water pond, and/or vegetative polishing filter.

Contact herbicide - A herbicide that kills a plant primarily by contact with plant tissue 

rather than by translocation.

Containerized stock - Plant materials grown in containers.

Continuous grazing - Commonly used as the unrestricted grazing of an entire grazing 

unit throughout a large portion of the growing season – not desirable. However, since no 

animal grazes continuously, a better term is continuous stocking.

Convex – Curved like the outer surface of a sphere.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Cool-season plant - A plant that makes its major growth during the cool part of the year, 

mainly in spring but in some localities in the fall or winter (C-3 plant). They have 

temperature optimums of 59 to 77°F (15 to 25°C), and exhibit C3

Cooperative Agreement - A written document evidencing the intent of two or more 

parties to cooperate in an undertaking that will result in mutual benefit to the parties 

concerned. The parties work jointly in the undertaking – not each working within its own 

sphere of work and authority as under a memorandum of understanding relationship. The 

cooperative agreement is a fiscal document, and the period of time covered must not 

exceed the period for which funds are available for obligation.

photosynthesis.

Coppice – To regrowth wholly or mainly from sprouts.

Corymb – Flat-topped or convex flower cluster, outer flowers opening first.

Cover crop – Close-growing crop grown primarily for the purpose of protecting and 

improving soil between periods of regular crop production.

Cover type - The existing vegetation of an area.

Crenate – Toothed with round, shallow teeth.

Critical area – (1) An area to be treated with special consideration because of inherent 

site factors both physical and chemical, size, location, condition, values, or significant 

potential conflicts among uses. (2) A severely eroded sediment producing area that 

requires special management to establish and maintain vegetation in order to stabilize soil 

conditions.

Cross pollination - The transfer of pollen from one flower (artificially or naturally) to 

the stigma of another; may occur on the same plants or on different plants, depending on 

the species and other conditions. 

Crossing-over - The exchange of corresponding segments between chromatids of 

homologous chromosomes during meiotic prophase. The genetic consequence is the 

recombination of linked genes.

Crown – The branches and foliage of a tree, the upper portion of a tree; the base of stems

where roots attach.

Crown Cover – The canopy of green leaves and branches formed by the crowns of all 

trees present in a forest.

Crude fiber (CF) – Fiber made up primarily of plant structural carbohydrates, such as 

cellulose and hemicellulose, but also contains some lignin.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Crude protein (CP) - Total protein in a feed. To calculate the protein percentage, a feed 

is first chemically analyzed for nitrogen content. Since proteins average approximately 

16 percent nitrogen, the percentage of nitrogen in the analysis is multiplied by 6.25 to 

give the percent CP.

Cryptogam – A plant in any of the groups Thallophytes, Byophytes, Pteridiophytes –

mosses, lichens, and ferns.

Culm – The stem of a grass that has elongated internodes between nodes (joints). 

Culmless – A vegetative tiller of some grasses that holds its growing point close to the 

ground by not elongating internodes until it is ready to initiate reproductive growth. 

Cultivar - The international term cultivar denotes an assemblage of cultivated plants that 

is clearly distinguished by any characters (morphological, physiological, cytological, 

chemical, or others) and when reproduced (sexually or asexually), retains its 

distinguishing characters. The term is derived from “cultivated variety,” or their 

etymological equivalents in other languages. For cultivated plants, the term cultivar is 

the equivalent of a botanical variety, in accordance with the International Code of 

Nomenclature of Cultivated Plants 1980. Usage: cultivar names are not italicized and

are indicated by single quotes at first use, or the word cultivar (but not both). The 

abbreviation cv. is properly used only with a binomial name: Genus species cv. cultivar 

name. Omit the abbreviation if single quotes are used: Genus species ‘cultivar name.’

Cultural evaluation - Studies designed to obtain information regarding the 

establishment, management, and production of plant materials. They may be conducted 

on or off the Center at any stage of the evaluation process.

Cultural practices – The practices commonly performed to prepare a site for seeding or 

planting.

Cuneate – Wedge shaped.

Cured forage – Forage, either standing or harvested, that has been naturally or 

artificially dried and preserved for future use.

Cutting – A soil bioengineering technique using unrooted branches from 18-70 inches 

(or longer) long of live willow, cottonwood, dogwood, or other species. These cuttings 

are placed into the soil, resulting in sprouting and rooting of the material to stabilize a 

bank.

Cyme – Flat-topped flower cluster; central flower opens first.

Damping off – The rapid rotting of seed or seedlings before they emerge from the soil, or 

the rapid rotting of the stem bases and toppling of seedlings after emergence.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

DBH – Abbreviation of diameter-at-breast-height, a common tree measurement.

Deciduous – A plant whose parts, particularly leaves, are shed at regular intervals or a 

given stage of development.

Decurrent – Spreading branches, lacking a central leader.

Deferred grazing - The delay of livestock grazing on an area for an adequate period of 

time to provide for plant reproduction, establishment of new plants, or restoration of 

vigor.

Defoliation – The removal of plant leaves, i.e., by grazing or browsing, cutting, chemical 

defoliant, or natural phenomena such as hail, fire, or frost. 

Defoliant - A compound that causes the leaves or foliage to drop from a plant.

Dehiscent – Splitting open along a seed capsule or pod to emit individual seeds.

Demonstration planting - A planting used primarily to promote use and acceptance of 

new technology or releases; commonly no evaluations are completed and no data is 

collected.

Dentate – Teeth along leaf margins are pointed outward.

Den tree – A hollow tree used as a home by a mammal.

Deposition tolerance – A plant’s ability to tolerate burying by soil, commonly silt via 

flooding or sand via wind deposition.

Desertification - The process by which an area or region becomes more arid through loss 

of soil and vegetative cover. The process is often accelerated by excessive, continuous 

overstocking and drought.

Desiccant - A compound that promotes dehydration or removal of moisture from plant 

tissue.

Desired plant community - A plant community which produces the kind, proportion, 

and amount of vegetation necessary for meeting or exceeding the minimum quality 

criteria for the soil, water, air, plant, and animal resources, and the land use plan/activity 

plan objectives established for an ecological site(s). The desired plant community must 

be consistent with the site's capability to produce the desired vegetation through 

management, land treatment, or a combination of the two. 

Dicotyledon (dicot) – A member of the Dicotyledonae; one of two classes of 

angiosperms usually characterized by the following: two seed leaves (cotyledons), leaves 

with net venation.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Dieback – The progressive dying, from tip downward, of twigs, branches, or tops.

Digestible dry matter (DDM) - Estimates the percentage of forage that is digestible. It 

is calculated from acid detergent fiber (ADF) values and is similar to total digestible 

nutrient (TDN). The more ADF a feed contains, the lower the DDM value will be. DDM 

values are calculated using the equation DDM% = 88.9 – (ADF% x 0.779).

Diluent - Any liquid or solid material serving to dilute an active ingredient in the 

preparation of a formulation.

Dioecious - Having staminate and pistillate flowers occurring on different plants that

have distinct male and female plants (e.g., buffalograss). Male and female flowers on 

separate plants.

Diploid - Having two chromosomes of each kind. Having the basic chromosome number 

doubled.

Direct application - Method of applying chemicals or fertilizers directly to a restricted 

area, such as a row or a bed, at the base of plants.

District Seed Increase (DSI) – Providing Plant Material Center (PMC) foundation seed 

through a conservation district to a district cooperator for the increase of that seed. 

Commonly used for new releases to speed the availability of seed on the commercial 

market.

Disturbed area - An area that has been disturbed by mining or other activities. This 

includes the area from which overburden, vegetation, topsoil, tailings, waste materials, 

minerals, or coal have been removed and placed. It also includes tailings ponds, waste 

dumps, roads, conveyor systems, leach dumps and all similar excavations or coverings 

that have resulted from mining operations.

Diversity - The distribution and abundance of different plants and animal communities 

within an area. Also a measure of the number of species and their relative abundance 

within a given association of organisms. Areas of high diversity are characterized by a 

great variety of species; usually relatively few individuals represent any one species. 

Areas with low diversity are characterized by a few species; often relatively large 

numbers of individuals represent each species.

Dominant vegetation – Plant species or species groups that, by means of their number, 

coverage, or size, have considerable influence or control upon the conditions of an

existence of associated species.

Dormancy – (1) An internal condition of the chemistry or stage of development of a 

viable seed that prevents its germination, although temperature and moisture are adequate 

for growth; (2) A living plant that is not actively growing aerial shoots.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Dormant seeding - Planting seed during late fall or early winter after temperatures 

become too low so that seed germination occurs the following spring.

Doubly serrate – Many large and small serrations along the leaf margin.

Drift – Vegetative material moved and deposited by wind and water. 

Drill seeding – Planting directly into the soil with a machine in rows, spacing is usually 6 

to 48 inches apart. cf. broadcast seeding.

Drought - A period of dryness causing extensive damage to plant production.

Drought tolerance – The ability of a plant to withstand lack of rainfall for a portion of 

the year or for extended periods, sometimes multiple years. 

Drupe – Fleshy fruit with a pit or stone.

Dry matter (DM) - That part of feed which is not water. Percent DM = 100% - moisture 

%. Feed values and nutrient requirements for ruminants are expressed on a dry matter or 

moisture-free basis to compensate for the large variation in moisture content of feeds 

commonly fed to cattle. To convert “as fed” nutrient values to a dry matter basis, simply 

divide the “as fed” nutrient value by the percent dry matter and multiply by 100.

Dry matter intake (DMI) - Estimates the maximum amount of forage dry matter a cow 

will eat. It is expressed as a percent of body weight and is calculated from neutral 

detergent fiber (NDF) by: DMI (% of body weight) = 120/NDF%.

Early head – Flower head (seedhead) of a grass is emerging or emerged from the flag 

leaf sheath, but not shedding pollen. 

Ecesis - Establishment and development of a plant in the plant community.

Ecocline - Series of biotypes within a species that shows a genetic gradient correlated 

with a gradual environmental gradient.

Ecological niche - Role of an organism in an ecological system. Includes the physical 

space in a habitat occupied by an organism; its functional role in the community (e.g., its 

trophic position); and its position in environmental gradients of temperature, moisture, 

pH, soil, and other conditions of existence.

Ecological optimum - The most favorable conditions in the environment for the growth 

and reproduction of an organism.

Ecological race - Group of local populations within a species in which individuals have 

similar environmental tolerances. Wide-ranging species may consist of many ecological 

races.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Ecological response unit - A unit of land that is homogeneous in character such that 

similar units will respond in the same way to disturbance or manipulation. Synonyms:

ecological site, ecological type.

Ecological site - A kind of land with a specific potential natural community and specific 

physical site characteristics, differing from other kinds of land in ability to produce 

vegetation and to respond to management. Synonyms: ecological type, ecological 

response unit.

Ecological status - (1) The present state of vegetation and soil protection of an ecological 

site in relation to the potential natural community for the site. Vegetation status is the 

expression of the relative degree of which the kinds, proportions, and amounts of plants 

in a community resemble that of the potential natural community. If classes or ratings are 

used, they should be described in ecological rather than utilization terms. For example, 

some agencies are utilizing four classes of ecological status ratings (early seral, midseral, 

late-seral, potential natural community) of vegetation corresponding to 0-25%, 26-50%, 

51-75%, and 76-100% of the potential natural community standard. Soil status is a 

measure of present vegetation and litter cover relative to the amount of cover needed on 

the site to prevent accelerated erosion. This term is not used by all agencies. (2) The 

present state of vegetation and soil protection of an ecological site in relation to the

historic climax plant community for the site. Vegetation status is the expression of the 

relative degree of which the kinds, proportions, and amounts of plants in a community 

resemble that of the historic climax plant community. If classes or ratings are used, they 

should be described in ecological rather than utilization terms.

Ecological system - See “ecosystem.”

Ecological type - A land classification category that is more specific than a phase of a 

habitat type. Ecological types are commonly used to differentiate habitat phases into 

categories of land, which differ in their ability to produce vegetation or their response to 

management. Synonyms: ecological response unit, ecological site.

Ecophene - Plants differing in appearance, especially in the size of vegetative parts, 

numbers of stems, erectness, and reproductive vigor but belonging to essentially 

homogeneous genetic stock. Their distinctness is due entirely to environmental 

influences, for when different ecophenes are transplanted into the same habitat these 

differences disappear.

Ecosystem – (1) Energy-driven complex of one or more organisms and their 

environment. (2) Organisms, together with their abiotic environment, forming an 

interacting system, inhabiting an identifiable space. (3) The whole system, in the sense 

of physics, including not only the organism complex but also the whole complex of 

physical factors, forming what we call the environment. (4) The complex of living and 

nonliving components in a specified location that comprise a stable system in which the 

exchange of material follows a circular path such as a biome. (5) A community of 

organisms and the environment in which they live. (6) A system of ecological 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

relationships in a local environment, including relationships between organisms, and 

between the organisms and the environment itself. Synonym: ecological system.

Ecotone – (1) Transitional zone between two vegetation types or vegetation regions. (2) 

A transition area of vegetation between two communities, having characteristics of both 

kinds of neighboring vegetation and characteristics of its own. Varies width depending 

on site and climatic factors. (3) A transition line or strip of vegetation between two 

communities, having characteristics of both kinds of neighboring vegetation and

characteristics of its own.

Ecotype - (1) A population of plants that has become genetically differentiated in 

response to the conditions of a particular habitat. The plants may vary in growth habit, 

maturity, and other characteristics such as pubescence and flower color. Sometimes 

referred to as a geographical race. (2) A transition area of vegetation between two 

communities, having characteristics of both kinds of neighboring vegetation and

characteristics of its own. Width varies depending on site and climatic factors. 

Transition zone between two vegetation types or vegetation-type regions. (3) A 

transition line or strip of vegetation between two communities, having characteristics of 

both kinds of neighboring vegetation and characteristics of its own. (4) A locally adapted 

population within a species which has certain genetically determined characteristics; 

interbreeding between ecotypes in not restricted. (5) A variety or strain within a given 

species that maintains its distinct identity by adaptation to a specific environment. (6) A 

locally adapted population of a species which has a distinctive limit of tolerance to 

environmental factors. (7) A variant type within an ecospecies.

Ecovar - The offspring of native species that have been developed from original plant 

material collected from a specific ecological region. Selection is done with minor 

emphasis on improving agronomic characteristics and major emphasis on maintaining 

genetic diversity. See also “ecotype.”

Educational plantings – Plantings designed to introduce the establishment and uses of 

new or potential releases to the public. Educational plantings show one or more 

conservation practice uses for the plant material, possibly in comparison to a standard 

cultivar or species; plantings may be established on or off-center. See also 

“demonstration plantings.”

Edge effect – (1) The influence of one adjoining plant community upon the margin of 

another, affecting the composition and density of the populations. (2) The effect executed 

by the adjoining communities on the population structure within the margin zone.

Elliptic – Longer than wide, with rounded ends.

Emulsifying agent - A surface-active material that facilitates the suspension of one 

liquid in another.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Emulsion - The suspension of one liquid as minute globules in another liquid; for 

example, oil dispersed in water.

Endemic – Native to or restricted to a particular area, region, or country.

Endocarp – The inner layer of the pericarp of a seed, e.g. stone fruit.

Entire margin – Unbroken, without teeth or lobes.

Environment - The sum of all external conditions that affect an organism or community 

to influence its development or existence. 

Environmental range - Range of environmental conditions in which, at a given time, the 

members of a species live.

Epicormic branching – Branches which grow out of the main stem of a tree, arising 

from buds under the bark. Increases knottiness, thus reducing the quality of sawn lumber.

Epinasty - Increased growth on the upper surface of a plant organ or part (especially 

leaves) that causes it to head downward.

Epithet - The final word or combination of words in a name that denotes an individual 

taxon.

Erose – Irregularly toothed or eroded.

Evapotranspiration - The total soil moisture lost to the air by plant transpiration 

(evaporation from the plant surface) and evaporation from the soil surface. 

Evergreen plant – A plant that has leaves all year round and sheds them more or less 

regularly through all seasons, commonly on a 2-3 year cycle.

Excurrent – Tree growth is pyramidal, similar to a spruce tree; central leader.

Exfoliate – The natural habit of trees for the bark to peel off in shreds or thin layers.

Exotic – (1) A term describing an organism introduced from another country or 

continent. (2) An organism or species that is not native to the region in which it is found.

Exposure – See “aspect.”

Facine – See “willow bundle.”

Facultative weed - Weed found growing both wild and in association with human 

activity.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Fascicle – A small bundle, e.g., 2 to 5 needles per cluster in pines.

Fertilizer - Any organic or inorganic material of natural or synthetic origins (excluding 

liming materials) that is added to a soil to supply one or more elements essential to the 

growth of plants.

Fiber - The cell wall portion of roughages (forages) that is low in TDN and hard to digest 

by monogastric animals.

Fiberschine – A soil bioengineering technique using coconut-fiber filled rolls that are 

planted with wetland plant plugs and hardwood cuttings. The fiberschine is placed at the 

toe of the slope to protect and stabilize an eroding.

Fibrous root system – A plant root system having a large number of small, finely 

divided, widely spreading roots but no taproots. Typified by grass roots.

Field Evaluation Planting (FEP) - Old name for off-center evaluations; term not 

currently used by the PMP. See “off-center evaluations.”

Field Plantings (FP) - Final stage of technology development or plant selection; 

plantings used primarily by PMS’ to develop new methods or technology or evaluate the 

adaptability of new releases; data is collected and analyzed statistically.

Field-scale increase - The reproduction of plant materials for use in field plantings and 

by cooperating agencies to obtain the final data needed to determine the feasibility of a 

variety release.

Filament – Portion of the stamen composing the stalk.

Fireblight – Bacterial disease causing leaves of susceptible plants to blacken but remain 

attached to the twigs. Affects pear, apple, crabapple, cotoneaster, and mountain ash.

Firm seed - Seed, other than hard seed, that neither germinates nor decays during a 

prescribed test period under prescribed test conditions. Firm ungerminated seed may be 

alive or dead.

Fissures – Pertains to furrows created in bark as the tree grows.

Fixation – A soil process that renders available plant nutrients unavailable or fixed in the 

soil.

Flood tolerance – A plant’s ability to withstand water inundation for periods ranging 

from days to months.

Flora – (1) The plant species of an area. (2) A simple list of plant species or a taxonomic 

manual.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Fodder - Coarse grass such as corn and sorghum harvested with the seed and leaves and 

cured for animal feeding.

Foliage – The green or live leaves of plants.

Foliar cover – The percentage of ground covered by the vertical projection of the aerial 

portion of plants. Small openings in the canopy and intraspecific overlap are excluded. 

Foliar cover is always less than canopy cover, either may exceed 100 percent.

Follicle – A dry, dehiscent fruit developed from a simple ovary and splitting along one 

suture.

Food reserves – The excess carbohydrates in plants produced during photosynthesis and 

stored in a readily available form in the various plant parts. Depending on forage species, 

they may be stored in the roots, stem bases, stolons, or rhizomes. Often erroneously 

called root reserves.

Forage – (1) The vegetative portion of plants in a fresh, dried, or ensiled state which is 

fed to livestock. (2) Grasses and legumes cut at the proper stage of maturity and stored to 

preserve quality. (3) All browse and herbage that is available and acceptable to grazing 

animals or that may be harvested for feed purposes.

Forage allowance - The mass of forage dry matter available per animal or AU at a 

particular point in time; the inverse of grazing pressure.

Forage production - The weight of forage that is produced within a designated period of 

time on a given area. The weight may be expressed as either green, air-dry, or oven-dry. 

The term may also be modified as to time of production such as annual, current year, or 

seasonal forage production.

Forb - Any non-woody plant that is not a grass, sedge, or rush.

Forestland – Land on which the historic climax plant community is dominated by trees.

Foundation seed – The progeny of breeder seed that is handled to most nearly maintain 

specific genetic identity and purity. Production may be carefully supervised by the 

originating agency and approved by the certifying agency, the agricultural experiment 

station, or both. See also “seed certification classes.”

Fresh weight - The weight of plant materials at the time of harvest. Synonym: green 

weight.

Frost crack – A vertical split in the wood of a tree, generally near the base of the bole, 

from internal stresses and low temperatures.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Frost-free period - The period, number of days, or both between the last frost in spring 

and the first frost in fall.

Fruit – The ripened ovary or ovaries of a seed-bearing plant, along with its accessory 

parts, containing the seeds and occurring in numerous forms.

Furrowed – Having longitudinal grooves or fissures.

Gall – A pronounced swelling or outgrowth on a plant.

Gene bank - A storage facility where germplasm is stored in the form of seeds, pollen, or 

in vitro culture, or in the case of a field gene bank, as plants growing in the field.

Gene flow - The transfer of genes from one population to another. See also “genetic 

flow.”

Gene frequency - The relative frequency with which a particular gene is present in a 

particular population of a species or other group.

Gene pool - The total stock of genes in a breeding population, with each gene 

representing a number of alleles. See also “genetic pool.”

Genetic diversity – (1) The total amount of genetic variation present in a population or 

species. (2) Having a heterogeneous constitution, reacting differently to diverse external 

condition. (Applied to a breeding population, variety, or species.) (3) The genetic 

constitution of an individual or group.

Genetic drift – (1) Chance occurrences in small populations which lead to changes in 

gene frequencies from generation to generation. (2) The tendency, within small 

interbreeding populations, for heterozygous gene pairs to become homozygous for one 

allele or the other by chance, rather than by selection. (3) A change in gene frequency 

that occurs in small populations as a result of random sampling error during reproduction. 

(4) The fluctuation in gene frequency occurring in an isolated population, presumably 

due to random variations from generation to generation.

Genetic engineering - The use of in vitro techniques to produce DNA molecules 

containing novel combinations of genes, or other sequences in living cells, that make 

them capable of producing new substances or performing new functions. Usage: A 

popular term for such technologies as a whole.

Genetic erosion - The loss of genetic diversity between and within populations of the 

same species over time; or a reduction of the genetic base of a species due to human 

intervention, environmental changes, etc.

Genetic flow - The exchange of genes between different populations. Also termed 

migration, it is considered to be a source of genetic variation. A single introduction of 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

genes into a new population is known as gene exchange. If gene migration is constant 

and recurrent, it is known as gene flow. The closer populations are related spatially and 

genetically, the more likely the chances of gene flow.

Genetic pool – (1) The totality of genes and gene complexes of a given population at a 

given time. (2) The sum of all genetic information carried by all individuals of an 

interbreeding population. (3) All of the alleles of all the genes in a population.

Genetic shift - A change in the germplasm balance of a cross-pollinated variety, usually 

caused by environmental selection pressures.

Genetic vulnerability - Having a narrow range of genetic diversity and reacting 

uniformly to diverse external conditions. (Applied to breeding populations of varieties or 

species.)

Genotype – (1) The genetic constitution of an individual or group of plants. Individual 

plants may vary in appearance (phenotypically), but they must have the genetic 

characteristics of the genotype. (2) The genetic constitution, latent or expressed, of an 

organism, as contrasted with the phenotype. (3) The sum total of all genes present in an 

individual.

Geographic range - Geographic limits of the ecological range; geographic extent of 

actual occurrences of a species.

Germination - The initiation of growth by the embryo which results in rupturing the seed 

coat and the emergence of the radical and development of a young plant from seed.

Germplasm – Genetic material that determines the morphological and physiological 

characteristics of a species.

Glabrescent – Becoming hairless at maturity.

Glabrate – Nearly glabrous or becoming glabrous with age.

Glabrous – Without hair, smooth.

Glandular – Small, usually shiny bumps on the surface.

Glaucescent – Slightly glaucous.

Glaucous – Covered with a waxy bloom or whitish material that rubs off readily.

Globose – Spherical.

Graminoid – Grass or grass-like plants.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Grass – A member of the family Poaceae (Gramineae). 

Grassland – Land on which the vegetation is dominated by grasses, grass-like plants, 

and/or forbs.

Grass-like plant – A plant of the Cyperaceae or Juncaceae families that vegetatively 

resembles a true grass of the Gramineae family.

Grass tetany (hypomagnesemia) - A malady or condition of cattle and sheep with the 

symptoms of staggering, convulsions, coma, and death. This is a nutritional imbalance of 

rations resulting from a low level of blood magnesium.

Graze - The partial defoliation of a plant by livestock.

Grazier - One who pastures (grazes) livestock.

Grazing cell - An area of pasture which a specific group of animals are confined to for 

the grazing season. 

Grazing cycle – (1) The time elapsed between the beginning of one grazing period and 

the beginning of the next grazing period in the same paddock where the forage is 

regularly grazed and rested. One grazing cycle includes one grazing period plus one rest 

period. (2) The combined time animals are permitted to graze the paddock forage and the 

time that the paddock forage is permitted to recover.

Grazing period - The time that the animals are exposed to the paddock.

Grazing pressure - The relationship between the number of AUs or forage intake units 

and the weight of forage dry matter per unit area at any one point in time; an animal-toforage relationship. 

Grazing season - The total period of time during which animals may harvest standing 

forage from pasture. It is composed of the “growing season,” when temperature and 

moisture are conducive to plant growth, and the “non-growing season,” when animals 

may harvest any forage remaining after the growing season. 

Grazing system - A specialization of grazing management which defines the periods of 

grazing and non-grazing. Descriptive common names may be used; however, the first 

usage of a grazing system name in a publication should be followed by a description 

using a standard format. This format should consist of at least the following: the number 

of pastures (or units); number of herds; length of grazing periods; length of non-grazing 

periods for any given unit in the system followed by an abbreviation of the unit of time 

used. cf. deferred grazing, deferred-rotation, rotation, rest-rotation, and short duration 

grazing. 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Grex - A collective term applies to the progeny of an artificial cross from known parents; 

each and every crossing of any two parents belonging to different taxa that bear the same 

pair of specific, intraspecific, interspecific, grex, or cultivar epithets.

Green chop – Mechanically harvested forage fed to animals while still fresh.

Green manure crop – A crop that is plowed under while still living to increase organic 

matter in soil.

Ground cover – The percentage of material, other than bare ground, covering the land 

surface. It may include live and dead standing vegetation, litter, cobble, gravel, stones, 

bedrock, and cryptogams. Ground cover plus bare ground would total 100 percent.

Growing season - (1) The period, number of days, or both between the last frost in 

spring and the first freeze threshold temperature of the crop or other designated 

temperature threshold. (2) The amount of time a plant is able to actively grow.

Growth form – The characteristic shape or appearance of a plant.

Growth rate – The volume, value, or other types of increase in plants, e.g., trees and 

shrubs expressed in terms of number of rings per inch.

Growth rings – The layers of wood laid down each growing season (annual rings).

Habitat type - The collective area which one plant association occupies or will come to 

occupy as succession advances. The habitat type is defined and described on the basis of 

the vegetation and its associated environment. 

Half-shrub – A perennial plant with a woody base whose annually produced stems die 

each year.

Hardiness – The ability to survive exposure to harsh conditions.

Hard wood – A term used to describe broadleaf, usually deciduous, trees such as oaks, 

maples, ashes, elms, etc. It does not necessarily refer to the hardness of the wood.

Hard seed – See Seed, hard.

Hay - Dried forage (grasses, alfalfa, clovers) used for feeding farm animals.

Heartwood – The inner core of a woody stem wholly composed of nonliving cells and 

usually differentiated from the outer enveloping layer (sapwood) by its darker color.

Hedging – The persistent browsing of terminal buds of browse species causing excessive 

lateral branching and a reduction in main stem growth. Also resulting in highlining in 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

some species where buds no longer grow and are above the level available to browsing 

animals. 

Heel-in – To store young trees prior to planting by placing them in a trench and covering 

the roots or rooting portions with soil.

Herb – Any flowering plant, except those developing persistent woody stems, above 

ground. 

Herbaceous - A vascular plant that does not develop woody tissue.

Herbage – (1) Total above ground biomass of plants, including shrubs, regardless of 

grazing preference or availability. (2) Leaves, stems, and other succulent parts of plants 

upon which animals feed or forage.

Herbage allowance - Weight of forage available per AU on the land at any instant. 

Herbicide – (1) A phytotoxic chemical used for killing or inhibiting the growth of plants. 

(2) A chemical which kills herbaceous (non-woody) plants.

Herbivore - An animal, insect, or other higher animal that subsists principally or entirely 

on plants or plant materials. 

Herbivory - The act of animals eating plants or their seeds and fruits; defoliation. In 

most cases, the plants do not die. 

Heritability - The proportion of observed variability due to heredity; the remainder is 

due to environmental causes.

Heterosis - Hybrid vigor such that the F1

Heterozygous - Having unlike alleles at one or more corresponding loci (such as Yy).

hybrid falls outside the range of the parents 

with respect to some character or characters.

Hispid – Covered with bristly hairs.

Historic climax plant community – (1) The original natural plant community that 

represents the final or highest stable level in a successional series that is in dynamic 

equilibrium with ecosystem components - soils, vegetation, climate, etc. The assumed 

end point in primary as well as secondary succession. (2) The plant community that was 

best adapted to the unique combination of factors associated with the ecological site. It

was in a natural dynamic equilibrium with the historic biotic, abiotic, climatic factors on 

its ecological site in North America at the time of European immigration and settlement. 

Synonym: climax plant community. See “climax.”
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Homozygous - Having alike alleles (such as YY). An organism may be described as 

homozygous at one, several, or all loci.

Horizontal bundles – A soil bioengineering technique using bundles of willow cuttings 

placed in a horizontal trench along the toe of an eroding slope. Approximately half of the 

bundle is placed in the ground and the other half is exposed to the water and air. These 

bundles will protect the toe of the streambank and, if planted properly, sprout branches 

and roots to help stabilize the bank.

Horticultural annual - A biennial or perennial which may be treated as an annual in 

parts of the country where the usually persistent plant parts do not survive more than one 

growing season.

Humus layer – The top portion of the soil that owes its characteristic features to its 

content of organic matter.

Hybrid – (1) Offspring of a cross between genetically dissimilar individuals. (2) Firstgeneration progeny resulting from the controlled cross-fertilization between individuals 

that differ in one or more genes.

Hybrid vigor – The increased performance (rate of growth/gain) associated with F1 

cross-breeding.

Ice-cream species (plant) – A slang term used to indicate obvious grazing preference by 

grazing animals. Such species are the first grazed and are often over-utilized by a grazing 

animal. 

Imbricate – Overlapping, like shingles on a roof.

Imperfect flower type – Lacking stamens or pistols, but not both.

Impressed – Bent inward, furrowed as if by pressure.

Improved pasture – Grazing land permanently producing introduced or domesticated 

native, forage species that receives varying degrees of cultural treatment to enhance 

forage quality and yields. 

Inconspicuous – Small, not readily noticed by the naked eye.

Increase plantings – Production of seed or other reproductive parts of plant material to 

be made available for use in evaluations, field plantings, demonstration plantings, 

educational plantings, or for distribution. See also “initial increase.”

Incurved – Curved inward.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Indicator species - (1) Species that indicate the presence of certain environmental 

conditions, range condition, previous treatment, or soil type. (2) One or more plant 

species selected to indicate a certain level of grazing use.

Indigenous - Born, growing, or produced naturally (native) in a specified area, region, or 

country.

Infestation – Invasion by large numbers of parasites, pests, weeds, or other unwanted 

species.

Infiltration – The downward entry of water into the soil. This is distinct from 

percolation, which is movement of water through soil layers or material.

Initial Evaluation (IE) - The evaluation of the characteristics and comparative 

performance of an assembly of plants under controlled conditions so that promising 

plants can be selected for further evaluation.

Initial increase - The production of small quantities of seed or other reproductive parts 

of materials selected from initial or advanced evaluations to be used for further 

evaluation and exchange.

Insecticide – Any chemical used to destroy insects and other small invertebrates.

Insipid – Lacking taste, smell, or quality; dull.

Intake – The quantity of forage or feed consumed by an animal during a specified 

period; usually expressed in units of lb/day.

Inter-Center Strain Trial (ICST) - Controlled, repeatable evaluations where scientific 

methods and experimental designs are used to study plants and techniques, and to

determine State and regional plant performance and adaptation.

Internode – Part of a stem between two nodes.

Interplant – To set young trees among existing forest growth of similar age and/or size, 

planted naturally, to bring the stand to a fully stocked condition.

Interseeding - Seeding into established vegetation cover. Often involves planting seeds 

into the center of narrow seedbed strips, commonly of variable spacing prepared by 

mechanical or chemical methods. 

Introduced - A species not part of the original fauna or flora of the area in question, but 

introduced from another geographical region through human activity. Synonym: exotic. 

Introduced is not synonymous and should not be confused with the term “invasive 

species.”
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

In vitro - In glass; in test tubes, as in in vitro digestion.

In vitro digestible dry matter (IVDDM) - The weight of dry matter lost upon filtration 

following incubation of forage in test tubes with rumen microflora, usually expressed as a 

percentage: (weight dry matter sample-weight residue)/weight dry matter sample.

In vivo - In a living organism.

Invader - (1) Plants not a part of the original plant community that invade an area due to 

disturbance and/or plant community deterioration. (2) Plant species that were absent in 

undisturbed portions of the original vegetation of a specific range site and will invade or 

increase following disturbance or continued heavy grazing. 

Invasion - The migration of organisms from one area to another area and their 

establishment in the latter.

Invasive plants – Plants that reproduce rapidly and spread aggressively from the area in 

which they originally occurred or were planted, posing a threat to natural area diversity or 

managed/agricultural area productivity. See also “invasive species.”

Invasive species – (1) A species that demonstrates rapid growth and spread, invades 

habitats, and displaces other species. (2) Species that are prolific seed producers, have 

high seed germination rates, easily propagated asexually by root or stem fragments, 

and/or rapidly mature predispose a plant to being an invasive. For example: The hybrid 

cattail (Typha x glauca), a cross between native cattails, is extremely aggressive and outcompetes its parents and other native species when established. Introduced species that 

are predisposed to invasiveness have the added advantage of being relatively free from 

predators (herbivores, parasites, and disease) and can, therefore, expand more energy for 

growth and reproduction. Invasive species should not

Jointed – A grass stem that has distinct, elongated internodes between nodes.

be confused with “introduced 

species.”

Killing frost - A temperature that affects the shoot apex enough to stop growth but does 

not kill all the leaves; generally considered to be about 24° F for upright legumes that 

have the apices near the top of the canopy.

Kind - One or more related species or subspecies that singly or collectively is known by 

one common name; for example, wheat, vetch, and sweetclover.

Lanceolate – Lance shaped, broadest at the base of a leaf blade. Much longer than 

broad, tapers to the leaf tip.

Lateral bud – Those buds below the terminal buds where side branches arise.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Layering – A method of propagation in which adventitious roots form on a stem while 

still attached to the parent plant. Occurs naturally with some species, i.e., dogwood

species.

Leader – A terminal leader is the uppermost branch or vertical tip of the tree. It 

eventually becomes the tree stem or trunk.

Leaf area index – Sum of leaf area expressed as a percentage of ground surface. Leaf 

area index may exceed 100 percent.

Leaflet – A single segment of a compound leaf.

Leaf margin – Refers to the leaf edge.

Leaf scar – The mark that remains where a leaf falls off a twig.

Leggy – Pertains to overgrowth of trees or shrubs where stem growth is lengthened and 

weak. Devoid of lateral branches.

Legume - Plant member of the family Fabaceae (Leguminosae), including clovers, 

alfalfa, and similar crops with the characteristic of forming nitrogen-fixing nodules on its 

roots. Rhizobia bacteria in the nodules use atmospheric nitrogen and allow the plant to 

use it as a source.

Lenticel – A breathing pore in young bark, appearing as a light colored, often lens 

shaped dot, e.g., birch.

Life form – Characteristic form or appearance of a species at maturity, e.g., tree, shrub, 

forb, grass, etc.

Lignin - A compound which, with cellulose, forms the cell walls of plants. It is 

practically indigestible.

Limited generations - A restriction placed by the developer on the number of 

generations through which a variety may be sold by variety name.

Line - A group of individuals of common ancestry. Genetically, a more narrowly defined 

group than a strain or a variety.

Liner - Plant material which is grown in one location and then “lined-out” in another 

location for finishing off. Plants may be started in seedbeds and lifted bare-root or grown 

in containers. Either type of these liners may finish their production cycle in the ground 

or in containers.

Linkage - Association of genetic factors; the genes are in the same chromosome.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Litter – The upper most layer of organic debris on the soil surface; essentially the freshly 

fallen or slightly decomposed vegetal material.

Local native - A genetically local source that originated at or within the same seed zone 

and elevation band as the project site (planned planting). See also “range site” and 

“woodland site.”

Local population - Group of individuals of the same species growing near enough to 

each other to interbreed and exchange genes.

Lodging - The falling down of a crop due to either stalk breakage or uprooting.

Long Range Plan (LRP) - A plan which directs plant materials activities of the PMC, or 

within a State, or the PMC service area.

Main stem – The portion of a tree between ground level and the division into major 

branches, usually referred to as the bole.

Major Land Resource Area(s) (MLRA) – A system of land classification composed of 

geographically associated land resource units; MLRAs are important in agricultural and 

other types of regional planning. Land resource units are geographic areas, usually 

several thousand acres that are characterized by a particular pattern of soils, climate, 

water resources, and land uses. 

Management-intensive grazing (MiG) - A goal-driven approach to grazing 

management with emphasis on intensive management. It is characterized by balancing 

animal demand with forage supply through the grazing season, and allocating forage 

based on animal requirements.

Management site potential - The kinds of levels of productivity or values of a range site 

that can be achieved under various management prescriptions.

Marsh – A flat, wet, treeless area usually covered by standing water at least part of the 

year and supporting grasses and grass-like, water loving forbs.

Mast – Nuts, acorns, fruit, and similar plant products that may be consumed by animals.

Mass selection - Selection of individual plants and propagation of the next generation 

from the aggregates of that seed.

Meadow – An area of perennial herbaceous vegetation, usually grasses or grass-like, 

used primarily for hay production and grazing.

Mesa – A flat-topped mountain or other elevation bounded on at least one side by a steep 

cliff.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Memorandum of Understanding - A written instrument evidencing the intent of two or 

more parties to cooperate in carrying out an undertaking that will result in mutual benefit 

to the parties concerned. Each party works within its own sphere of work and authority. 

It is not a fiscal document used as a basis for obligating funds, and may run for an 

indefinite time or be limited.

Mineral - Any ore, rock, or substance (other than oil, gas, or uranium) that is taken from 

below the surface or from the surface of the earth for the purpose of milling, 

concentration, refinement, smelting, manufacturing, or other use, or for stockpiling for 

future use. Calcium (Ca), phosphorus (P), magnesium (Mg), potassium (K), and sulfur 

(S) are normally expressed as a percentage of each in the feed.

Miscible liquids - Two or more liquids capable of being mixed; they will remain mixed 

under normal conditions.

Mixture - More than one kind of seed or variety; each is present in excess of 3 percent of 

the whole.

Mixed grazing - Grazing by two or more species of grazing animals on the same land 

unit, not necessarily at the same time, but within the same grazing season. 

Moisture, wet basis - The weight of water in a forage sample divided by the total weight 

of water and dry matter.

Monocotyledon (monocot) – A member of Monocotyledonae; one of two classes of 

angiosperms, usually characterized by: one seed leaf (cotyledon), leaves with parallel 

venation, and root systems arising adventitiously and usually diffuse (fibrous).

Monoecious - Staminate and pistillate flowers borne separately on the same plant.

Morphology - A branch of biology dealing with the form and structure of organisms.

Mott – A group of trees and/or shrubs.

Mottled – An irregular spotting or alternating color on leaves, stems, and other plant 

parts.

Mucronate – Abruptly terminated by a short, sharp leaf tip.

Mulch – (1) A layer of dead plant material on the soil surface. (2) An artificial layer of 

material, such as plastic or paper, on the ground surface. (3) Cultural practice of placing 

rock, straw, paper, plastic, or other material on the soil surface. Commonly used to 

improve surface conditions to establish desired vegetation.

Native grazing land - Land used primarily for the production of native forage plants 

maintained or manipulated primarily through grazing management. Native grazing land 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

includes grazed rangeland, grazed forestland, and native and naturalized pasture, 

individually or collectively.

Native plant - A plant species indigenous to an area; not introduced from another 

environment or area. See “native species.”

Native species – (1) A species which is a part of the original fauna or flora of the area in 

question. (2) A native plant species is one that occurs naturally in a particular region, 

State, ecosystem, and habitat without direct or indirect human actions. Climate, soil, and 

biotic factors determine its presence and evolution in an area. Synonyms of native 

species include indigenous, endemic, and aboriginal.

Natural potential - Occasionally used as synonym for climax with reference to range 

vegetation.

Naturalized plant - A plant introduced from other areas that has become established in,

and more or less adapted to, a region by long, continued growth. See also “naturalized 

species.”

Naturalized species - A species introduced from other areas that has become established 

in, and more or less adapted to, a region by long, continued growth there. Does not 

require artificial inputs for survival and reproduction, and has established a stable or 

expanding population. Examples: cheatgrass, Kentucky bluegrass, starling, etc.

Near infrared reflectance spectroscopy (NIRS) - A method of forage quality analysis 

based on the measurement of light energy in the near infrared region absorbed by the 

sample. 

Needle – Elongate, linear, sharp-pointed leaf.

Neutral detergent fiber (NDF) - A measurement of fiber after digesting in a nonacidic, 

nonalkaline detergent as an aid in determining quality of forages. Contains the fibers in 

ADF plus hemicellulose. Measures the structural part of the plant, the plant cell wall 

which consists of lignin, cellulose, and hemicellulose. NDF gives bulk or fill to the diet 

and is negatively correlated with feed intake. Because NDF can be used to predict intake, 

it is one of the most valuable analysis to have conducted on forages for dairy rations. 

Low NDF is usually desired. As maturity of the plant at harvest increases, cell wall 

content of the plant increases and NDF increases.

Nitrate poisoning - A serious condition resulting when an animal ingests forage 

containing a high nitrate concentration. Rumen bacteria convert nitrate to nitrite; nitrites 

usually are converted to other forms of nitrogen but, if not, will compete with the 

oxygen-carrying mechanism in the blood, resulting in suffocation.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Nitrogen (N) - A fertilizer element needed in large amounts by growing forages. It 

promotes the growth of leaves and stems and increases plant vigor. It ensures a dark, 

healthy, green color in grass. An important component of protein.

Nodule - A tubercle formed on legume roots by the symbiotic nitrogen-fixing bacteria of 

the genius Rhizobium.

Non-protein nitrogen (NPN) - Nitrogen which is not in the protein form. It can be used 

by rumen microorganisms to synthesize protein if adequate carbohydrates are available.

Node – Joint on a stem, represented by point of origin of a leaf or bud.

Nonselective herbicide - A chemical that is toxic to plants, generally without regard to 

species.

Noxious species – A plant species that is undesirable because it conflicts, restricts, or 

otherwise causes problems under management objectives. Not to be confused with 

species declared noxious by laws (see “noxious weed”).

Noxious weed - A weed arbitrarily defined by law as being especially undesirable, 

troublesome, and difficult to control. It grows and spreads in places where it interferes 

with the growth and production of the desired crop. Definition varies according to legal 

interpretations.

Nurse crops - See “companion crop.”

Oblique – Lop-sided; one side of leaf base is larger, wider, or more rounded than the 

other.

Oblong – Two to three times longer than broad.

Obovate – Inversely ovate.

Obovoid – Leaf shape that is inversely egg-shaped or obovate.

Obtuse – Rounded, approaching semi-circular.

Off-Center Evaluations - Plantings used by PMCs to evaluate releases or technology 

off-site; data is collected and analyzed statistically; was previously named “field 

evaluation planting.”

On-Center Evaluations - Plantings done on the PMC to evaluate new technology or new

plant selections; data is collected and analyzed statistically.

Open pollination - Natural, as opposed to controlled, pollination. Open pollinated seed 

contrasts with hybrid seed.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Opposite – Buds or leaves growing in pairs but separated by a stem.

Oval – Twice as long as broad, widest at the middle, both ends rounded.

Ovate – Egg shaped in outline, narrower at the tip.

Overgrazing - The grazing of animals on a given area that, if continued to the end of the 

planned grazing period, will result in less than satisfactory animal performance and/or 

less than satisfactory pasture forage production.

Over-seeding - The practice of spreading seed over an existing pasture without prior 

seedbed preparation.

Overstory – The canopy in a stand of trees. In contrast to the understory, which is low 

growing woody or herbaceous vegetation, forming a layer beneath the overstory.

Ovoid – Three dimensional, egg shaped.

Paddock - A subdivision of the cell in which the animals are confined for a grazing 

period. A paddock may be of a fixed or variable size depending on the system selected. 

Palatability – (1) The relish with which a particular species or plant part is consumed by 

an animal. (2) The animal preference based on plant characteristics eliciting a choice 

between two or more forages or parts of the same forage, conditioned by the animal and 

environmental factors that stimulate a selective intake response.

Palmate – With 3 or more lobes, veins, or leaflets arising from 1 point, often 5-7.

Panicles – Loose, irregular compound flower clusters.

Pasture – Grazing land comprised of introduced or domesticated native forage species 

that is used primarily for the production of livestock. Receives periodic renovation 

and/or cultural treatment such as tillage, fertilization, mowing, and weed control, and 

may be irrigated. 

Pasture carrying capacity - Number of animals a given pasture will support at a given 

time or for a given period of time.

Pasture planting – Establishing adapted herbaceous species on land to be treated and 

grazed as pasture.

Pasture renovation - Improvement of a pasture by the partial or complete destruction of 

the sod, plus liming, fertilizing, seeding, and weed control as may be required to establish 

desirable forage plants.

Pectinate – Like a comb, with many or few narrow pinnate divisions.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Pedestaled – A condition where soil has eroded from around individual plants or objects, 

such as small rocks, leaving them on small pedestals of soil. Sometimes the result of 

frost heaving.

Peduncle – Primary flower stalk.

Pendulous – Hanging down, drooping.

Perennial - A plant that lives more than 2 years.

Perfect (flower type) – Having both functional stamens and pistils.

Performance Trial – A planting designed to test a potential plant release for reliability in 

a particular conservation application. May require multiple plantings and/or off-center 

sites. Standards for comparison are to be included if available.

Pericarp – Sometimes used to designate a fruit; technically the ovary wall.

Persistent – Hanging on through winter or a long period of time, e.g., plant parts: fruit, 

seeds, leaves, etc.

Petiole – The stalk of a leaf.

pH – The measure of the acidity or alkalinity of soil. Descriptive terms commonly 

associated with certain ranges in pH are: extremely acid <4.5; very strongly acid 4.5-5.0; 

strongly acid 5.1-5.5; moderately acid 5.6-6.0; slightly acid 6.1-6.5; neutral 6.6-7.3; 

slightly alkaline 7.4-7.8; moderately alkaline 7.9-8.4; strongly alkaline 8.5-9.0; and very 

strongly alkaline >9.1.

Phenology - A branch of science dealing with the relationship between climate and 

periodic biological phenomena. Also dates or sequence of occurrence of different growth 

stages of plants.

Phenotype - (1) The external appearance or discernible characteristics of an organism, 

resulting from interaction between an organism's genetic makeup (genotype) and the 

environment. A group of individual plants may appear alike (phenotypically) but not 

have the same genotype, or they may vary in appearance and have the same genotype. 

(2) Observable characteristics. 

Phloem – The tissue in higher plants which transports organic nutrients manufactured in 

leaves to other portions of the plant.

Phosphorus (P) - Designated as P205, phosphoric oxide, in fertilizer. It is an element 

that promotes rapid growth, hastens maturity, and stimulates flower, seed, and fruit 

production. Absolutely necessary in every plant cell.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Photosynthesis – (1) The process which produces carbohydrates from carbon dioxide 

and water, chloroplasts or chlorophyll-bearing cell granules, and the energy from 

sunlight. (2) The metabolic pathway by which plants produce food. See also “C-3 

plants,” “C-4 plants,” and “CAM plants.”

Phytomass – Total amount of plants, including dead attached parts, above and below 

ground in an area at a given time. See "biomass.”

Pilose – Long, soft hairs.

Pinnate – Compound leaf with leaflets on either side of the central axis.

Pioneer species - The first species or community to colonize or recolonize a barren or 

disturbed area in primary or secondary succession.

Pith – Spongy center of a twig; if it has crosswalls, it is called chambered.

Pitting - Making shallow pits or basins of suitable capacity and distribution on range to 

reduce overland flow from rainfall and snowmelt. Also used in seedbed preparation to 

aid in collecting water to aid in seed germination and plant establishment.

Plain – A broad stretch of relatively level treeless land.

Plan of Operations (PO) - See “Business Plan.”

Plantation – An artificially reforested area established by planting or direct seeding. 

Plant association - A kind of climax plant community consisting of stands with 

essentially the same dominant species in corresponding layers.

Plant code or symbol – A 4 or more character code system for identifying either the 

plant common or scientific name.

Plant community type - Each of the existing plant communities that can occupy an 

ecological site. Several plant community types will typically be found on an ecological 

site, including the historic climax plant community for that site.

Plant growth curve – The percent growth occurring at a specific location expressed as a 

monthly percent of total annual production. Growth curves reflect differences in 

ecological condition.

Plant growth regulator - A substance used for controlling or modifying plant growth 

processes without severe phytotoxicity.

Plant moisture content – The percent of plant weight that is water.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Plant Variety Protection Act (PVPA) - Approved on December 23, 1970, the PVPA 

offers legal protection to developers of new releases or varieties of plants that reproduce 

sexually, that is, through seed. Developers of plants that reproduce asexually have 

received protection from the U.S. Patent Office since 1930. The law states that 

protection will be extended to a “novel variety" if it has these three qualifications: 

Distinctness - The variety must differ from all known prior varieties by one or more 

identifiable morphological, physiological, or other characteristic; Uniformity - If any 

variations exist in the variety, they must be describable, predictable, and commercially 

acceptable; and Stability

Plant vigor – See “vigor.”

- When sexually reproduced, the variety must remain unchanged 

in its essential and distinctive characteristics to a degree expected of similarly developed 

varieties.

Plumed – Feathery.

Poisonous plant – A plant containing or producing substances that cause sickness, death, 

or a deviation from the normal state of health of animals. 

Polycross - Open-pollination of a group of genotypes (generally selected) in isolation 

from other compatible genotypes in such a way that each of the original selections has an 

equal opportunity at pollinating, or being pollinated by, any of the others.

Polygamo-dioecious – Part of flowers are perfect and part are unisexual with male and 

female flowers on separate plants.

Polygamo-monoecious – Sexual condition in which some perfect and staminate flowers 

are on the same plant.

Pome – Fleshy fruit with a core, such as an apple.

Population - (1) The aggregate of organisms which inhabit a particular area or region. 

(2) A (specified) portion of such an aggregate, usually a group of organisms of the same 

kind occupying an area small enough to allow interbreeding.

Population genetics - A branch of genetics dealing with the frequency and distribution 

of genes, mutants, genotypes, etc., among populations of organisms. Population genetics 

is now based upon an increasing input of laboratory and field observations under an array 

of environments; much of this work involves the documentation and interpretation of 

genetic variability in natural populations.

Post-emergence - After the emergence of a specified weed or crop.

Post planting – A soil bioengineering technique using large diameter cuttings, normally 

cottonwood or willow species, to revegetate an eroding bank. These cuttings are placed 

into the soil resulting in sprouting and rooting of the material to stabilize the bank.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Potash (K20) - A term designating potassium oxide (K2

Potential natural community - The biotic community that would become established on 

an ecological site if all successional sequences were completed without interference by 

humans under the present environmental conditions. Natural disturbances are inherent in 

its development. 

0) and often used 

interchangeably with the word "potassium" (K). Potassium stimulates root growth and 

the growth of strong stems, imparts resistance to disease, and improves winter survival 

and persistence of legumes.

Precipitation – Rainfall including snow, hail, and sleet.

Pre-emergence - Before the emergence of a specified weed or crop.

Pre-planting - Any time before the crop is planted.

Pristine - A state of ecological stability or condition existing in the absence of direct 

disturbances by modern man. See also “relict.”

Project - A national PM activity that is broad in nature and serves as an umbrella for 

PMC studies. Refer to Part 540.51 of the NPMM for more information on PM projects.

Project statement - A document that outlines the details of a national PM project. Refer 

to Part 540.51 of the NPMM for more information on PM project statements.

Propagule – Any part of an organism produced sexually or asexually that is capable of 

giving rise to a new individual.

Proper use – A degree of utilization of current year’s growth that, if continued, will 

achieve management objectives and maintain or improve the long-term productivity of a 

site. Proper use varies with time and system of grazing.

Protein, crude (CP) - An estimate of protein content based on determination of total 

nitrogen (N). All nitrogenous substances contained in feed stuffs ( % crude protein = % 

N x 6.25).

Pruning – The removal of live or dead branches from standing trees.

Prussic acid – A poisonous, hydrocyanic acid released when forages contain cyanogenic 

glysosides, and the proper enzymes are chewed by a grazing animal.

Pubescent – Covered with short, soft hairs.

Pure line - Succession of generations of organisms homozygous for all genes.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Pure Live Seed (PLS) - The product of the percentage of germination plus the hard seed 

and the percentage of pure seed divided by 100.

Purity - (1) The name or names of the kind, type, or varieties, and the percentage or 

percentages thereof. (2) The percentage of other agricultural seed or crop seed; the 

percentage of inert matters. (3) The percentage of weed seed, including noxious weed 

seed, and the names of the noxious weed seed and the rate of occurrence of each. Seed 

purity is the percentage of the desired species in relation to the total quantity, including 

other species, weed seed, and foreign matter.

Quiescence – A temporary resting phase characterized by reduced activity, inactivity, or 

cessation of development.

Race - A term sometimes used to denote ecotypes.

Racemes – Pedicled flowers along one stem.

Range or rangeland – (1) Land supporting indigenous vegetation (predominately 

grasses, grass-like plants, forbs, or shrubs) that is grazed or that has the potential to be 

grazed, and is managed as a natural ecosystem. Not a use but a type of land. (2) Lands, 

native and naturalized pasture, forest, and riparian areas that support an understory or 

periodic cover of herbaceous or shrubby vegetation useful for grazing or browsing by 

wildlife or livestock, and that are amenable to management principles or practices.

Range condition - A generic term relating to present status of a unit of range in terms of 

specific values or potentials. Specific values or potentials must be stated. Some agencies 

define range condition as follows: the present state of vegetation of a range site in 

relation to the climax (natural potential) plant community for that site. It is an expression 

of the relative degree to which the kinds, proportions, and amounts of plants in a plant 

community resemble that of the climax plant community for the site. 

Range condition class - Confusion has existed regarding both definition and use of this 

term. The following fits the thinking expressed in the definition range condition: one of 

a series of arbitrary categories used to either classify the ecological status of a specific 

range site in relation to its potential (early, mid, late, or potential natural community) or 

classify management-oriented value categories for specific potentials, e.g., good 

condition spring cattle range.

Range degradation - The degeneration of a site caused by biotic or abiotic factors which 

results in a lowered successional status to the point that ecological potential is changed. 

See also “range site degeneration.”

Range retrogression - The degradation of a site caused by biotic or abiotic factors which 

results in movement of the site to a lower successional status within the same ecological 

potential.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Range seeding – (1) The process of establishing vegetation by the artificial 

dissemination of seed. (2) Establishing adapted plant species on ranges by means other 

than natural revegetation. See also “reseeding.”

Range site - An area of rangeland having the potential to produce distinctive kinds and 

amounts of vegetation, resulting in a characteristic plant community under its particular 

combination of environmental factors, especially soils and climate. Each range site is 

typified by an association of species that differ from that of other range sites in the kind 

or proportions of species, or in total production. Synonymous with ecological site when 

referring to rangeland. Some agencies use range site based on the climax concept, not 

potential natural community. Synonym: ecological site.

Range site degeneration - The degradation of a site caused by biotic or abiotic factors 

which results in an ecological shift to a lower successional status and possibly a lower 

ecological potential for production. Synonym: retrogression. See also “range 

degradation.”

Ration - The amount of feed supplied to an animal for a definite period, usually 24 hours.

Reciprocal cross - A second cross involving the same characters as the first but with the 

sex of the parents interchanged.

Reclaim - To make a site usable again for a particular land use or crop.

Reclamation – (1) Restoration of a site or resource to a desired condition to achieve 

management objectives or stated goals. (2) The construction of plant, soil, and 

topographic conditions, after disturbance, which permits the disturbed site to function 

adequately within its ecosystem. However, the constructed conditions may not be 

identical to predisturbance conditions. (3) The process of reconverting disturbed lands to 

their former uses or other productive uses.

Recovery - The rate or amount of regrowth following harvesting of a forage species or a 

dormant season.

Recurrent selection - A method of breeding designed to concentrate favorable genes 

scattered among a number of individuals by selecting, in each generation, among the

progeny produced by intermating of the selected individuals of the previous generation.

Registered seed - The progeny of foundation seed that is handled to maintain satisfactory 

genetic identity and purity, and that has been approved and certified by the certifying 

agency. This class of seed should be of a quality suitable for production of certified seed. 

See also “seed certification classes.”

Registered variety - (1) For grasses and agricultural species: A variety accepted, 

numbered, and registered as a recognized improved variety by the Committee on Varietal 

Standardization and Registration of the Crop Science Society of America. (2) For other 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

species: A variety, which has been registered with the appropriate International Species 

Registrar.

Rehabilitation – (1) Return of land to a form and productivity that conforms to a prior 

land use plan, including a stable ecological state that does not contribute substantially to 

environmental deterioration and is consistent with surrounding aesthetic values. (2) 

Improving a site to a more desired condition than previously existed, usually as result of a 

major disturbance. Implies that the land will be returned to a form and productivity in 

conformity with a prior land use plan, including a stable ecological state that does not 

contribute substantially to environmental deterioration and is consistent with surrounding 

aesthetic values. Synonymous with reclamation.

Rejuvenation – Restore to a healthy vigorous growth, often through weed control, 

pruning, fertilization, irrigation, or treatment for insects and diseases.

Relative feed value (RFV) - Developed primarily for use with legume or legume/grass 

forages, RFV combines digestibility and intake estimates into one number for an easy and 

effective way to identify and market quality hay. RFV is expressed as a percent 

compared to full bloom alfalfa at 100 percent RFV. RFV above 130 are considered good 

dairy quality hay. The higher the value the better, RFV in the range of 150 is desirable. 

RFV is calculated by: RFV% = DDM (%) x DMI (% of body weight)/ 1.29.

Release – To free trees from competition by cutting or otherwise removing or killing 

nearby vegetation and branches.

Released variety - A new variety of proved value that is made available to the public, 

according to ESCOP standards, for a conservation purpose. See also “variety.”

Relict - A remnant or fragment of the climax plant community that remains from a 

former period when it was more widely distributed. See also “pristine.”

Reseeding – (1) A crop variety or inbred line that has been evaluated and made available 

to the public. (2) To make available to the public. (3) To seed again, usually soon after 

an initial seeding has failed to achieve satisfactory turf establishment.

Resinous – Sticky with resin.

Resistance - (1) The ability of a plant or crop to grow and produce even though infected 

or infested with a pest. (2) The ability of a plant to survive a period of stress such as 

drought, cold, or heat.

Respiration - The process in which tissues and organisms exchange gases with their 

environment; generally associated with oxidation of sugars to release energy for the plant 

to grow and reproduce.

Rest - To leave an area of grazing land ungrazed or unharvested for a specific time.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Rest period. The grazing cycle time minus the grazing period. 

Restoration – (1) The process of restoring site conditions as they were before land 

disturbance. Returning a disturbed site to precisely the same state it was prior to the 

disturbance. This may require rebuilding the soil, precise placement of trees and rocks, 

and use of only native plants and animals to repopulate the site. (2) The process of 

restoring site conditions as they were before the land disturbance. Note: restoration 

involves restoring a site to a specific point in time. 

Reticulate – Like a net, netted venation.

Revegetation – (1) Establishing or re-establishing desirable plants in areas where 

desirable plants are absent or of inadequate density, by management alone (natural 

revegetation) or by seeding or transplanting (artificial revegetation). Planting reclaimed 

land with grasses, flowers, shrubs, and trees. (2) The reestablishment or improvement of 

vegetation through management practices or chemical or mechanical means. (3) To 

provide a site with vegetation again. Implies that original amounts and types of 

vegetation of the site are not required. (4) Plants or growth, which replaces original 

ground cover, following land disturbance. (5) Establishing or re-establishing desirable 

plants in areas where the plant community is not adequate to meet management 

objectives by management techniques alone. A general term for renewing the vegetation 

on a project site. Refers to the vegetation construction phase of reclamation.

Revolute – Stem or leaf rolled lengthwise to expose the top side and conceal the bottom 

side.

Rhizobia - A species of bacteria that live in symbiotic relationship with leguminous 

plants within nodules on their roots, are able to fix nitrogen from the atmosphere, and 

make it available to the plant.

Rhizome – A horizontal underground stem that usually sends out roots and above ground 

shoots from the nodes.

Rhombic – With 4 nearly equal sides, but unequal angles.

Riparian – Area, zone, and/or habitat adjacent to streams, lakes, or other natural free 

water which have a predominant influence on associated vegetation or biotic 

communities.

Riparian community type - A recurring, classified, defined, and recognizable 

assemblage of riparian plant species. 

Riparian ecosystems - (1) Those assemblages of plants, animals, and aquatic 

communities whose presence can be either directly or indirectly attributed to factors that 

are water influenced or related. (2) Interacting system between aquatic and terrestrial 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

situations, identified by soil characteristics and distinctive vegetation, which requires or 

tolerates free or unbound water.

Riparian species - Plant species occurring within the riparian zone. Obligate species 

require the environmental conditions within the riparian zone; facultative species tolerate 

the environmental conditions, therefore, may also occur away from the riparian zone.

Roots – The portion of a plant which is generally underground and functions in nutrient 

absorption, anchorage, and storage of food and waste products.

Root wad – A mass of roots with a 12-20 feet length of trunk that is placed into a 

streambank perpendicular to the flow of the stream with roots in the water. A series of 

root wads are placed adjacent to each other around a bend to reduce stream velocity and

bank erosion and to provide fish habitat. Generally, the root wads are dead materials and 

will not sprout. 

Rotational grazing - System of pasture utilization embracing periods of heavy stocking 

followed by periods of rest for herbage growth recovery during the same season.

Roughage - Consists of pasture, silage, hay, or other dry fodder. It may be of high or 

low quality. Roughages are usually high in crude fiber (more than 18 percent) and 

relatively low in NFE (approximately 40 percent).

Rufous – Reddish brown.

Rugose – Rough, covered with wrinkles.

Rumen - The first compartment of the stomach of a ruminant or cud-chewing animal, 

i.e., cow, sheep, deer, elk, etc.

Saline soil – A soil condition in which soluble salts are present in the soil in sufficient 

quantities to affect the ability of plants to absorb water from the soil. Measured in 

deciSiemens per meter (dS/M) or millimhos per centimeter (mmhos/cm) the following 

quantifies the ranges of salinity: <2 not saline; 2-4 very slightly saline; 4-8 slightly saline; 

8-16 moderately saline; and >16 strongly saline.

Salt tolerance - Relative ability of a plant to reproduce and grow under saline conditions.

Samara – Dry, one-seeded fruit with a membranous wing.

Scale – Bud covering or tiny, blunt leaf.

Scalping - Removal of vegetation before mining.

Schizocarp – Winged, paired samara-like fruits, e.g., maples.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Scurfy – Scaly or flaky on the surface.

Seasonal carrying capacity - The stocking rate that is economically and 

environmentally sustainable for a particular grazing unit for the entire grazing season.

Seasonal utilization rate - The fraction of the annual forage production that will be 

harvested by the grazing livestock. 

Seed – A fertilized ripened ovule of a flowering plant.

Seed, certified - The progeny of foundation, registered, or certified seed that is handled 

to maintain satisfactory purity, as certified by a certifying agency, e.g., the Idaho Crop 

Improvement Association, Incorporation. A system whereby the seed of plant cultivars 

(and pre-varietal releases) is produced, harvested, and marketed under authorized 

regulation to ensure seed of high quality and genetic purity.

Seed certification classes - Classes of seed produced by a grower to ensure the purity of 

the genetic material. Seed, which undergoes the certification process, is typically 

inspected during the growing season or at harvest and is tested. Certification classes 

include: Breeder, Foundation, Registered, Certified, and Common. See also “Breeder 

seed,” Foundation seed,” “Registered seed,” “Certified seed,” and “common seed.”

Seed certifying agency - General term for the State or other agency responsible for the 

release and certification of crop varieties, and for inspecting and approving seed 

produced under one of the seed certification classes. Most seed certification agencies are 

members of the Association of Official Seed Certifying Agencies (AOSCA).

Seed, dormant – Live seed in a non-germinative condition because of internal 

inhibitions in the seed; i.e., hard seed, or unfavorable environmental conditions.

Seed, hard – Live seed in a physiological condition that prevents or delays germination, 

even when a favorable environment exists.

Seed inoculation - The addition of effective Rhizobia bacteria on a culture to legume 

seed prior to planting. Treatment of legume seed with rhizobium bacteria before planting 

to enhance subsequent nitrogen fixation. This promotes N fixation. 

Seed lot - A definite quantity of seed identified by a lot number, every portion or bag of 

which is uniform, within permitted tolerances, for the factors that appear on the labeling.

Seed purity – The percentage of the desired species in relation to the total quality, 

including other species, weed seed, and foreign matter. See “Ppure Llive Sseed.”

Seed scarification – Mechanical or acid treatment of seed coats to improve moisture 

absorption and enhance germination.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Seedbank – Seed stored in the soil, generally as hard or dormant seed, which are viable 

and will germinate given proper conditions. This seedbank is principally built up by 

seed-producing plants growing on or adjacent to the site over many years. Species long 

gone may still be represented if their seed is especially long-lived.

Seedbed preparation – Soil treatment prior to seeding to: enhance the soil surface layer 

for seed deposition and optimum opportunity for germination and seedling growth;

reduce or eliminate existing vegetation; reduce the effective supply of weed seed; modify 

physical soil characteristics; and enhance temperature and water characteristics of the 

microenvironment.

Seedhead – The inflorescence (flowering part) of a grass where the seed will develop.

Selected class release - (1) Seed that is the progeny of rigidly selected seed or stands of 

untested parentage that has promise but not proof of genetic superiority, and for which

geographic source and elevation shall be stated on the certification label. (2) One of the 

classes of pre-varietal releases recognized by AOSCA.

Selection - Selecting an accession or accessions from an assembly, or individuals from 

within an accession, to obtain the plants having the best characteristics for a particular 

conservation use.

Selective herbicide - A chemical that is more toxic to some plant species than to others.

Self pollination - The transfer of pollen from the anther of a flower to the stigma of the 

same flower, or different flowers on the same plant.

Senesce – The yellowing and withering of older, lower leaves of plants as higher, 

younger leaves shade them. Nutrients in the older leaves are translocated to younger 

tissue.

Senescence – Refers to old age, decline in health.

Seral - Refers to species or communities that are eventually replaced by other species or 

communities within a sere.

Seral community - One of a series of biotic communities that follow one another in time 

on any given area. Synonym: successional community.

Seral stages - The developmental stages of an ecological succession.

Sere - All temporary communities in a successional sequence. The complete series of 

ecological communities occupying a given area over hundreds or thousands of years from 

the initial to the final or climax stage.

Serrate – Fine, sharp teeth that point upward or forward along the leaf margin.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Serrulate – Finely saw-toothed leaf margin.

Sessile – With no stalk or petiole.

Setose – Leaf margins are covered with bristles.

Shade tolerance – Relative ability of a plant to reproduce and grow under shade.

Showy – Attractive, pertaining to aesthetic value.

Shrub – A plant that has persistent, woody stems, a relatively low growth habit, and 

generally produces several basal shoots instead of a single bole. It differs from a tree by 

its low stature and non-arborescent form.

Sinus – The space between lobes.

Slope – A term of measurement in percentage indicating the increase in height over 

distance measured. An increase of 1 foot over a distance of 5 feet is expressed as a 20 

percent slope.

Snag – A standing dead tree used by many species of birds and mammals for feeding, 

nesting, and cover.

Sod – Vegetation that grows to form a mat of soil and vegetation, i.e., turf. 

Sod grass – Stoloniferous or rhizomatous grasses that form a sod or turf.

Sod seeding - Direct drilling of seed into sod of existing vegetation with no mechanical 

seedbed preparation.

Sodic soil – A soil with pH >8.5 that contains sufficient sodium to adversely affect plant 

growth, plant production, and soil structure. Sodic soils may be associated with saline 

soils.

Softwood – Generally, one of the botanical groups of trees that, in most cases, have 

needle or scale-like leaves; the conifers; also, the wood produced by such trees.

Soil application - Chemical applied mainly to the soil surface rather than to vegetation.

Soil bioengineering – Integrating living woody and herbaceous materials with organic 

and inorganic materials to increase the strength and structure of the soil.

Soil incorporation - Mechanical mixing of a chemical with the soil.

Soil injection - Mechanical placement of a chemical beneath the soil surface with a 

minimum of mixing or stirring.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Soil sterilant - A biocide that prevents the growth of plants and kills all living organisms 

when present in the soil. Soil sterilization effects may be temporary or permanent.

Soil texture – The relative portion of sand, silt, and clay in the soil.

Source-identified seed - (1) Source identified propagating materials are seed, seedlings, 

or other propagating materials collected from natural stands, seed production areas, seed 

fields, or orchards where no selection or testing of the parent population has been made. 

(2) One of the classes of pre-varietal releases recognized by AOSCA.

Species composition – The proportions of various plant species in relation to the total on 

a given area. It may be expressed in terms of cover, density, weight, etc.

Spoil - Overburden material disturbed or removed from its natural state, or non-ore 

material removed in gaining access to the ore or mineral material during the mining 

process. Spoil and mining waste materials are disposed of or piled in waste dumps and/or 

spoil piles.

Sprout – A tree or shrub that grows from the stump or root sucker of a parent plant (not 

of seed origin).

Spur – A saclike or tubular projection on a sepal or petal, or a very short fruiting 

branchlet on apple, pear, or other woody plants.

Stage of maturity – The development of a forage used to describe a point in time in its 

progress toward maturity and readiness for harvest of forage, hay, or seed.

Stalked bud - Bud whose outer scales are attached to stalk above the base of the bud 

axis.

Stamen – Male organ in the flower, pollen bearing. 

Stand - (1) A population of plants. (2) Density of population or number of individuals 

per unit area.

Standard plant - (1) A commonly used species or, if available, variety for which an 

evaluation is being made. (2) A plant which serves as the standard for comparison.

Stem – The portion of a plant that supports the branches; in trees, also called the bole. 

Stocking rate - The total number of animals or live weight assigned to the cell for the 

grazing season.

Stocking density - The total number of animals or live weight assigned to a specific 

paddock for the grazing period. 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Stockpiling – Allowing standing forage to accumulate for grazing at a later period, often 

for fall and winter grazing after dormancy.

Stolon – A horizontal stem which grows along the surface of the soil and roots at the 

nodes.

Stomata – Minute openings on the surface of leaves and stems through which gases (e.g., 

oxygen, carbon dioxide, water vapor) and some dissolved minerals pass into and out of 

plants.

Stomatiferous – Many pores on the epidermis of a leaf and appearing as many white 

dots or nodes.

Stone – A hard, one-seeded endocarp of a drupe.

Strain - (1) A group of organisms of common origin having one or more definite 

morphological or physiological characteristics that are heritable. (2) A term to include 

breed differences within a species, or as a group of plants differing little, if any, in 

morphology yet physiologically distinct in some additional quality such as yield or vigor: 

i.e., the northern and southern strains of smooth brome. Strain also means variety, 

ecotype, biotype, type, or a group of these.

Striate – With fine longitudinal lines or ridges.

Strip grazing - Confining animals to an area of forage to be consumed in a short period 

of time, usually a day.

Strobili – Inflorescence marked by scales, as in a cone.

Stubble – The basal portion of herbaceous plants remaining after the top portion has been 

harvested either mechanically or by grazing.

Study - An activity at a PMC that develops a product to address a conservation need 

identified in the PMC LRP. A PMC study must be outlined in a study plan and be 

identified in the PMC Business Plan and Workload Analysis. Refer to Part 540.12 of the 

NPMM for more information on PMC studies.

Study plan - A comprehensive document that outlines the details of a PMC study. Refer 

to Part 540.12 of the NPMM for more information on PMC study plans. 

Subcordate – Nearly heart shaped.

Subglobose – Somewhat or nearly round.

Subopposite – A bud/leaf arrangement in which they are close to being opposite from 

each other, but one is slightly lower than the other.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Subsessile – Nearly stalkless.

Subshrub – A woody or somewhat woody, perennial, winter hardy plant. The stems 

annually die back partially or wholly to ground level. Resprouts every spring.

Subspecies - A grouping within a species used to describe geographically isolated 

variants, a category above “variety,” and is indicated by the abbreviation “ssp.” in the 

scientific name.

Succession - (1) The progressive replacement of plant communities on a site which leads 

to the potential natural plant community, i.e., attaining stability. Primary succession 

entails simultaneous successions of soil from parent material and vegetation. Secondary 

succession occurs following disturbances on sites that previously supported vegetation, 

and entails plant succession on a more mature soil. (2) The progressive development of 

vegetation toward its highest ecological expression, the climax replacement of one plant 

community by another.

Sucker (suckering) – A shoot arising from a root or lower part of the stem of a plant. 

Synonymous with sprout.

Sulfate - A chemical compound containing the sulfate (SO4) radical. Sulfates are salts or 

esters of sulfuric acid formed by replacing one or both of the hydrogens with a metal 

(e.g., sodium) or a radical (e.g., ammonium or ethyl). Sulfates are widely distributed in 

nature. Barium sulfate occurs as barite; calcium sulfate is found as gypsum, alabaster, 

and selenite; and Epsom salts is magnesium sulfate.

Sulfide - A mineral compound characterized by the linkage of sulfur with a metal. Some 

examples of sulfides include galena (with lead), chalcopyrite (with copper), and pyrite 

(with iron).

Sunscald – A type of winter injury in which the bark on the southwest side of a stem, 

branch, or trunk is killed.

Suppressed – The condition of a plant characterized by low growth rate and low vigor 

due to competition.

Surfactant - A material that facilitates and accentuates the emulsifying, dispersing, 

spreading, wetting, and other surface-modifying properties of herbicide formulation.

Suspension - A system consisting of very finely divided solid particles dispersed in a

solid, liquid, or gas.

Sward - The grassy canopy of a pasture.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Swath – A strip of cut herbage lying on the stubble left by a cutter bar, blade, flail, rotary 

drum, mower, mower-conditioner, binder, swather, or small grain head on a combine. 

Swaths are wider than windrows and have not been subjected to raking.

Symbiotic nitrogen fixation - The fixation of atmospheric N by Rhizobia growing in 

nodules on roots of legumes.

Synergism - Cooperative action of different chemicals or organisms such that the total 

effect is greater than the sum of the independent effects.

Synthetic variety - Advanced generation progenies of a number of clones or lines (or of 

hybrids among them) obtained by open pollination.

Tacking/Tackifying - The process of binding mulch fibers together by the addition of a 

sprayed natural or artificial chemical agent.

Tailings/tailing impoundment - The refuse material resulting from washing, 

concentrating, or treating ground/crushed ore that is discharged from a mill. 

Tailing pond/tailing dam - A pond of water with a constraining wall or dam into which 

mill effluents (tailings) are deposited.

Taproot – A plant root system dominated by a large primary root, normally growing 

straight downward, from which most of the smaller roots spread out laterally.

Terminal bud – Bud at the tip or distal end.

Testcross - A cross of a double or multiple heterozygote to the corresponding multiple 

recessive to test for homozygosity or linkage.

Tested Seed - (1) Seeds or plants that have been through additional testing on more than 

one generation and, will include testing on multiple sites with replicated plots to verify 

performance and heritability of desirable traits. The material has proven genetic 

superiority or possesses distinctive traits for which heritability is stable as defined by the 

certifying agency. (2) One of the classes of pre-varietal releases recognized by AOSCA.

Tetraploid - An organism having 4 basic sets of chromosomes.

Tiller – (1) An erect shoot that arises from the crown of a grass. (2) A grass that is 

growing tillers. (3) The asexual development of a new plant from a meristematic region 

of the parent plant. (4) A branch or shoot originating at a basal node in a grass.

Tomentose – Densely wooly, soft hairs; matted.

Topcross progeny - Progeny from outcrossed seed of selections, clones, or lines crossed 

with a single variety or line that serves as a common pollen parent.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Topsoil - The upper surface lay of soil, usually darker and richer than the subsoil, that is 

naturally present and necessary for the growth and regeneration of vegetation on the 

surface of the earth.

Total annual production – The annual production of a single species or all plant species 

of a plant community.

Total digestible nutrients (TDN) - The sum of the digestible crude protein, digestible 

nitrogen-free extract, digestible crude fiber, and 2.25 times the digestible ether extract 

(fat). This value is often calculated from ADF. It is less accurate than NE for 

formulating diets containing both forage and grain. Most rations are now formulated 

using NE; however, TDN is still used to calculate beef cow rations where the diet is 

primarily forage.

Toxic Spoil/Waste - See “acid spoil”. Includes acid spoil with pH below 4.0. Also 

refers to soil or water having amounts of toxic, heavy metals in excess of Environmental 

Protection Agency standards and usually have adverse effects on plant growth. Heavy 

metals include aluminum, arsenic, copper, lead, iron, and manganese. 

Translocated herbicide - A herbicide that is distributed throughout the plant from the 

point of entry. Synonymous with systemic herbicide.

Transplant – A plant which has been removed from its original seedbed and replanted 

one or more times (common in nurseries).

Tree – A woody perennial, usually a single stemmed plant, which has a definite crown 

shape and reaches a mature height of at least 4 meters. The distinction between woody 

plants known as trees and those called shrubs is gradual. Some plants grow as either 

trees or shrubs.

Tree or brush revetment – A soil bioengineering technique using whole trees or shrubs 

attached together to form a porous barrier to the toe of an eroding bank. The revetment 

slows the stream’s current, diverts the current away from the bank, traps sediment from 

the stream, and reduces sloughing of the eroding bank. Generally, the trees or shrubs are 

dead and will not sprout. 

Trend - The direction of change in ecological status or resource value rating observed 

over time. Trend in ecological status should be described as toward, or away from the 

potential natural community, or as not apparent. Trend in a resource value rating for a 

specific use should be described as up, down, or not apparent. Trends in resource value 

ratings for several uses on the same site at a given time may be in different directions, 

and there is no necessary correlation between trends in resource value ratings and trend in 

ecological status. Some agencies use trend only in the context of ecological status. 

Synonym: range condition trend. See “apparent trend.”

Trifoliate - Three leaflets per leaf.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Trilobed – Three-lobed, e.g., leaves or fruits.

Truncate – Shape of leaf base that attaches to the petiole, ends abruptly, as if cut off.

Trunk – Main stem or bole of a tree.

Tuber – A short, thickened organ; e.g., potato.

Two ranked – Appearing to come from only two sides of a twig; not equally distributed 

around the twig, e.g., elm.

Type - A group of varieties so nearly similar that the individual varieties cannot be 

clearly differentiated except under special conditions. For further information, refer to 

the Federal Seed Act Rules and Regulations.

Umbel – Flower cluster with peduncles springing from the same point.

Understory – Plants growing beneath the canopy of other plants. Usually refers to 

grasses, forbs, and low shrubs under a tree or tall shrub canopy.

Undesirable species – (1) Species that are not readily eaten by animals. (2) Species that 

conflict with, or do not contribute to, the management objectives. 

Usable forage – The portion of the standing forage crop that can be grazed without 

damage to the forage plant. It varies by species, season of use, and companion plant 

species.

Use groups - The artificial grouping for the comparative testing of plant materials having 

similar uses.

Valvate – Edges coming together without overlapping.

Variety - (1a) The botanical nomenclature division consisting of more or less 

recognizable entities within a species that are not genetically isolated from each other, 

below the level of subspecies, and is indicated by the abbreviation “var.” in the scientific 

name (see “botanical variety”); (1b) The rank of taxa below subspecies but above forma; 

a plant which retains most of the characteristics of the species, but differs in some way 

such as flower or leaf color, size of mature plant, etc. A variety is added to the specific 

binomial and preceded by "var.," such as saxatilis in the epithet Juniperus communis var.

saxatilis. (2) Term used in some national and international legislation to denominate one 

clearly distinguishable taxon from another; equivalent to “cultivar.” (Note: the PMP

does not recognize the terms “variety” and “cultivar” as equivalent.)

Vegetation type - A kind of existing plant community with distinguishable 

characteristics described in terms of the present vegetation that dominates the aspect or 

physiognomy of the area. Synonym: type. 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Vegetative - A term designating stem and leaf development in contrast to flower and 

seed development.

Venation – Pertaining to the vein pattern in the leaf blades.

Vertical bundle – A soil bioengineering technique using bundles of willow cuttings, 

placed in vertical trenches along an eroding bank. These cutting bundles extend from the 

streambed to the top of the bank, are covered with soil, and staked into the bank. The 

bundles will sprout branches and roots that will help stabilize the bank. This technique 

allows the planting of woody plant materials in areas where digging is difficult or 

impractical.

Vesicular – Arbuscular Mycorrhizae Fungi (VAM) or Vesicular Mycorrhizae (VM):

These are symbiotic fungi that live within a plant’s root system. The term “mycorrhiza” 

means fungus-root. Mycorrhizal fungi produce hyphae (small filament-like tubes) that 

grow within plant roots and extend out into the soil. Also, the fungi produce spores that 

function as dispersal mechanisms and long-term survival agents. The plant provides 

carbohydrates and other essential nutrients to the fungus that the fungus cannot produce,

and the fungus provides immobile nutrients such as phosphorus, iron, zinc, and copper,

and mobile nutrients such as nitrogen and calcium to the plant.

Vigor – Relates to the relative robustness of a plant in comparison to other individuals of 

the same or similar species. Primarily the size and, perhaps, color of a plant and its parts 

in relation to its age and the environment in which it is growing reflect it.

Warm-season plant - A plant that completes most of its growth during the warm part of 

the year, generally late in spring and summer (C-4 plant).

Water table – The highest point in a soil profile where water continually saturates the 

soil on a seasonal or permanent basis.

Water tolerance - Relative ability of a plant to reproduce and grow under saturated or 

flooded conditions.

Wattle – See “willow bundle.”

Weed – (1) Any growing unwanted plant. (2) A plant having a negative value within a 

given management system.

Weed barrier material – A weaved carbon-based material commonly used in windbreak 

and shelterbelt applications to retard or reduce weed growth, weed competition, and to 

enhance moist retention through reduction in evaporation and competitive use by other 

plants.

Wetland communities - Plant communities that occur on sites with soils typically 

saturated with, or covered with, water most of the growing season.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Wetlands – Areas characterized by soils that are usually saturated or ponded; i.e., hydric 

soils, and that support mostly water-loving plants; i.e., hydrophytic plants.

Whorl – A group of three or more leaves at a node.

Wildlife habitat – The environment of an animal, ideally providing all elements required 

for life and growth; food, water, cover, and space.

Wildlife value – A rating value of woody plants to wildlife species.

Willow bundle – A bundle of willows used in a number of soil bioengineering 

techniques. When the bundles are placed in the soil, they will sprout branches and roots 

to help stabilize the bank. See “horizontal bundle” and “vertical bundle.”

Windbreak – One or more wind barrier rows of living trees and shrubs maintained for 

the purpose of protecting fields, crops, feedlots, roadways, homes, gardens, orchards, etc.

Windbreak suitability group – A guide for selecting the species best suited for different 

types of soil and for predicting height growth and performance on those soils.

Windrow – (1) Curing herbage dropped or raked into a narrow swath sized to be picked 

up easily by the head of a baler, combine, or forage harvester. (2) To cut or rake into 

windrows.

Wolf plant – (1) An individual plant that is generally considered palatable, but is not 

grazed by livestock. (2) An isolated plant growing to extraordinary sizes, usually from 

lack of competition or utilization.

Woody – A term used in reference to trees, shrubs, or browse that characteristically 

contain persistent ligneous material.

Xeric – Having very little moisture; tolerating or adapted to dry conditions.

Xylem – The tissue in higher plants which transports water, dissolved salts, minerals, and 

other materials (e.g., pesticides) from roots to aerial portions of the plant.

Yield – (1) The quantity of a product in a given space and/or time. (2) The harvested 

portion of a product.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

References

A Glossary of Terms Used in Range Management. SRM. 3rd

Association of Seed Certifying Agencies, 1993.

Edition. 1989.

Bentrup, G., and J.C. Hoag, The Practical Streambank Bioengineering Guide, USDANRCS, Aberdeen Plant Materials Center, May 1998.

Biodiversity of Rangelands, Neil E. West, Journal of Range Management 46:1, January 

1993.

Biology, C.A. Villee, 1977.

Biology of Plants, P.H. Raven, R.F. Evert, and H. Curtis, 1981.

Federal Native Plant Conservation MOU, 1994

Forest Ecology, S.H. Spurr and B.V. Barnes, 1980.

Genetics: Its Concepts and Implications, A.C. Pai and H. Marcus-Roberts, 1981.

Genetics, Elseth and Baumgardner, 1984.

Glossary of Crop Science Terms, Crop Science Society of America, July 1992.

Glossary of Genetics and Cytogenetics-Classical and Molecular, R. Rieger, A. Michaelis 

and M.M. Green, 1976)

Glossary, Natural Resources Conservation Service, National Handbook of Grazing Land 

Ecology and Management, draft, 12/93.

Glossary of Terms Used in Range Management, Society for Range Management, 1989.

International Plant Genetic Resources Institute, 1995.

North Dakota Tree Handbook, NDSU-USDA (NRCS), 300+, 1996.

Practical Handbook of Disturbed Land Revegetation, Frank F. Munshower, 1994.

Policy on the Use of Native Plant Materials in Restoration and other Revegetation 

Projects, Pacific Southwest Region, USFS, Draft 1994.

Resource Conservation Glossary, Soil Conservation Society of America, Third Edition, 

1982.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

A.G. Tansley, Ecology, 1935 as reprinted in The Fundamentals of Ecology and Field 

Biology, R.L. Smith, 1977).

The American Heritage Dictionary of Science, Houghton Mifflin Company, Boston, 

1986.

The North Dakota Tree Handbook, NDSU, USDA-NRCS, NDSSCC, 1996. 

The Fundamentals of Ecology and Field Biology, R.L. Smith, 1977.

USDA-NRCS, California native plant policy, 1994.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

542.2 Plant Nomenclature

The scientific, or Latin, names of plants, both wild and cultivated are formulated and written 

according to rules governed by the International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, July 2005 

(Vienna Code). Distinguishable groups of cultivated plants, whose origin or selection is due 

primarily to mankind, are given epithets (i.e., names, such as cultivar names) formed 

according to the rules and provisions of the International Code of Nomenclature for 

Cultivated Plants, February 2004. The aim of these codes is to promote uniformity, accuracy 

and stability in formulating the scientific names of all plants (Botanical Code) and in 

formulating the cultivar names of agricultural, forestry, and horticultural plants (Cultivated 

Plant Code). The following text is adapted from these two Codes.

Genus and Species Names

Plant names may include a genus, specific epithet, a name rank below species (such as a 

subspecies and/or botanical variety), Latin name authorities, and the cultivar or release name. 

The genus, species, and variety or subspecies names are always italicized or underlined. 

Authorities should always be included with the Latin name the first time the plant name is 

used. A scientific plant name may be written in either of the following ways:

Ammophila breviligulata Fern. OR Ammophila breviligulata

Hybrid Names

Fern.

Validly published hybrid names are signified by the symbol “x” and are not italicized. 

Hybrids at the generic level are written with an “x” immediately prior to the genus name, 

such as in the following example:

xElyleymus colvillensis (Lepage) Barkworth

For a hybrid at the species level an “x” is placed immediately prior to the specific epithet, as 

in this example:

Quercus xdeamii Trel.

(Quercus xdeamii was found to be a product of the cross Quercus macrocarpa Michx. x 

Quercus muehlenbergii Engelm.)

Subspecific and Varietal Names

The terms “subspecies” and “variety” are used to designate the first and second divisions of a 

species. A “subspecies” is a grouping within a species used to describe geographically 

isolated variants, a category above “variety”, and is indicated by the abbreviation “subsp.” in 

the scientific name. A “variety” consists of more or less recognizable entities within species 

that are not genetically isolated from each other, below the level of subspecies, and are 

indicated by the abbreviation “var.” in the scientific name. These terms are not italicized.

When the subspecies or variety name is the same as the specific epithet (this is called a 

typical expression), then the authority is included only after the species name, as in the 

following example: 

Cornus sericea L. subsp. sericea

When the subspecies name or variety is different than the species name, then both the species 

authority and the subspecies or variety authority are used, as in the following example:

Cornus sericea L. subsp. occidentalis (Torr. & Gary) Fosberg
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Abbreviating Scientific Names

When a scientific name is used more than once, it is acceptable to abbreviate the genus name 

as long as the abbreviated name cannot be confused with other scientific names used in the 

same text. The authority name does not need to be included in the scientific name after the 

first time the scientific name is used. For example:

Use Panicum virgatum L. the first time, then use Panicum virgatum OR P. virgatum

thereafter.

Plant Cultivars

A “cultivar” is a taxon that has been selected for a particular attribute or combination of 

attributes, and this is clearly distinct, uniform, and stable in its characteristics that when 

propagated by appropriate means, retains those characteristics. The cultivated plants covered 

by the International Code of Nomenclature for Cultivated Plants may arise by deliberate 

hybridization or by accidental hybridization in cultivation, by selection from existing 

cultivated stock, or may be a selection from variants within a wild population and maintained 

as a recognizable entity solely by continued propagation. Cultivar names may be given to the 

following types of propagated materials: clones, graft-chimeras, seed (as long as the 

propagated material retains the unique characteristics of the parents), line, multi-line, F1 

hybrids, and genetically modified plants.

The words “variety” and “form” are not synonyms for the word cultivars according to the 

International Code of Nomenclature for Cultivated Plants. The Code considers these terms 

botanical classifications. The Association of Official Seed Certifying Agencies (AOSCA) 

considers the terms “cultivar” and “variety” equivalent. Because of the confusion with using 

the term variety to describe a cultivar, the Plant Materials Program does not consider variety 

and cultivar synonymous.

Formulating Cultivar Names

The following rules will be used when formulating cultivar names according to the 

International Code of Nomenclature for Cultivated Plants, 2004:

• Cultivar epithets must be a word or words in the modern English language. Latin 

word or words which may be considered Latin may not be used unless they are the 

classical name or an ancient Roman person, or of a place.

• Cultivar epithets may not be repeated within a genus, species or denomination class. 

A denomination class is a grouping of similar genera. For example, the same cultivar 

name may not be applied to a species of both Festuca and Lolium. [Note: the NPMC 

has lists of denomination classes that are checked when clearing names for new 

cultivar releases.]

• Cultivar epithets must consist of no more than 10 syllables and no more that 30 

letters or characters, excluding spaces and demarcation marks. [Note: the Plant 

Materials Program limits the length to 30 characters, including spaces and excluding 

demarcation marks, because of database restrictions.]

• Cultivar epithets may not consist solely of common descriptive words (such as 

‘Large’ or ‘Variegated’) in a modern language unless the descriptive word is used 

with a non-descriptive word (such as ‘Velvet Cream’), or unless the epithet is a 

recognized name of a color (such as ‘Indigo’ or ‘Majestic Red’).

• Cultivar epithets may not contain the following words: variety, var., cross hybrid, 

grex, group, maintenance, mutant, seedling, selection, sport, strain, improved, and 

transformed.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

• Cultivar epithets may not contain punctuation marks except for the apostrophe (‘), the 

comma (,), a single exclamation mark (!), the hyphen (-), and the period (.).

Writing Cultivar Names 

The full name of a cultivar is the accepted botanical name in Latin form, followed by the 

cultivar name. Each word of a cultivar epithet must start with an initial capital letter unless it 

is a word after a hyphen or a conjunction or preposition which is not the first word of the 

epithet. Cultivar names are indicated by enclosing the name within demarcation single 

quotation marks (‘...’).

The following are examples of the proper method to write a cultivar name”

Spartina patens ‘Sharp’

Panicum virgatum ‘Cave-in-Rock’

Double quotation marks and the abbreviations “cv.” and “var.” are not to be used within a 

name to distinguish cultivar epithets. Note that past usage of the abbreviation “cv.” is no 

longer acceptable. The following methods must not be used when writing cultivar names:

Spartina patens “Sharp”

Spartina patens cv. Sharp

Common Names

There is no authority on writing common names for plant species. The commonly accepted 

convention for common names is all letters in lowercase except for capitalizing the first letter 

of the parts of a common name which are proper nouns. The following are correct methods 

of writing common names: 

bitter panicum

eastern gamagrass

Utah sweetvetch

Sargent crabapple

References

J. McNeill, F. R. Barrie, H. M. Burdet, V. Demoulin, D. L. Hawksworth, K. Marhold, D. H. 

Nicolson, J. Prado, P. C. Silva, J. E. Skog, J. H. Wiersema, N. J. Turland (eds.). 2006. 

International Code of Botanical Nomenclature (Vienna Code) adopted by the Seventeenth 

International Botanical Congress, Vienna, Austria, July 2005. Regnum Vegetabile 146.

C.D. Brickell (Commission Chairman), B.R. Baum, W.L.A. Hetterscheid, A.C. Leslie, J. 

McNeill, P. Trehane, F. Vrugtman, J.H. Wiersema (eds.). 2005. International Code of 

Nomenclature for Cultivated Plants. 7th Edition, adopted by the IUBS Commission for the 

Nomenclature of Cultivated Plants February 2004. Regnum Vegetabile, 144.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

542.3 Guidelines for Preparing Botanical Specimens

Preparing Botanical Specimens

The collection and pressing of plant materials that are to be released by a PMC is an 

important part of the formal release process. Plant mounts need to be prepared for all of the 

five release types recognized by NRCS. Botanical specimens prepared for cultivars or 

varieties should include a "standard" specimen. The standard is the official botanical mount 

which identifies the unique features of the cultivar release, and can be used to differentiate 

one cultivar from another. Standards are usually deposited with the registrar for a species or 

in the National Arboretum's standards collection.

Plant mounts can assist in supporting the identification of superior phenotypic characteristics 

that may be present in a plant release (e.g., leaf width, color, etc.). Desirable specimens may 

only be available during a particular season of the year. If a large number of plants are 

collected and pressed when the opportunity occurs, they can be identified later when more 

time is available. Another reason for collecting plants is so that the identification may be 

checked by submitting the specimen to an authority. Most experts are willing to check 

material if the specimen is well collected and pressed and has complete and accurate data 

attached. (Harrington 1985)

Collection

The first consideration when starting a plant collection is to ensure that representative 

specimens of the species are collected and that the specimen includes all the plant parts 

needed for proper identification. Select an average plant or collect several specimens to show 

the range in variation. Collect a plant with both flowers and fruits if possible, or make 

collections of different plant parts over the growing season. Whenever possible, the entire 

plant should be collected, including the roots if the plant is herbaceous. The roots may 

contain important identifying features, such as bulbs, corms, and rhizomes, and give clues as 

to whether the plant is an annual or perennial, or is a bunch-type or rhizomatous.

Appropriate tools are necessary in order to conduct field collections. A digging tool such as a 

pick, shovel, hand trowel, or a strong hunting knife is necessary for digging the roots of some 

species. A pair of clippers or a sharp knife is needed to cut off twigs and other parts of 

woody plants. If plants are not being pressed immediately in the field, then a container is 

necessary to prevent desiccation. The most convenient method is to place specimens into 

ZiplocTM type plastic bags. A special container called a vasculum, which is specifically made 

for this purpose, can be purchased from forestry or herbarium supply catalogues. Another 

option is to place the plant at once into a temporary press called a hand press. A hand press 

consists of many single sheets of paper within a stiff cover, supported by straps, attached to a 

handle for convenience in carrying. Once the specimens are brought back to the laboratory, 

they may be transferred to a full size press until ready for mounting. (Harrington 1985)

Field Preparation

Large plants may be folded to fit the press, or representative portions can be selected when 

dealing with very large plants. For instance, when preparing woody specimens such as Pinus, 

a representative sample would include the leafy branches, seed-producing and pollenproducing cones, and bark (Benson 1979). Another important point to make is that the plant

be placed in the press immediately upon collection because it is impossible to make a good 

specimen from a wilted plant. Accurate collection information needs to be kept about each 

plant, preferably with the plant specimen, as most of this information will appear on the label. 
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

If a label is misplaced or its information is inaccurate, it can cause a great deal of trouble and 

confusion later on. (Harrington 1985)

Mounting Permanent Specimens

To prepare for permanent mounting, the plant specimen should be arranged to show 

distinguishing features and thoroughly dried. To start, the specimen should be placed in a 

once-folded newspaper sheet approximately 16.5 x 11.5 inches in size. The accession 

number or other identifier for the plant should be noted on this sheet. The plant should be 

arranged so that the floral parts and other distinguishing features are well displayed. If 

necessary, you may bend the stem one or more times and/or remove some leaves. Place the 

folded newspaper sheet containing the pressed specimen between two more sheets of folded 

newspaper, which act as blotters to soak up moisture from the plant. Replace these blotters 

with dry ones as needed. If the specimens are needed in a hurry or if the air is humid, then it 

is necessary to use artificial heat to dry the fresh specimens. Although more expensive than 

newspapers, some botanists prefer to use soft felt blotters, which can be ordered from a 

herbarium supply store, such as Pacific PapersTM. 

When the plant has been pressed flat and is completely dry, it is placed onto a thin cardboard 

sheet 11.5 x 16.5 inches in size and mounted. The pressed specimen is then glued or taped to 

the sheet to hold it in place, leaving space in the bottom right-hand corner for the label. 

Herbarium supply stores sell acid free mounting paper and acid free herbarium glue and tape. 

These materials allow specimens to be preserved indefinitely, but they can be expensive and 

are generally only used in a herbarium setting. (Harrington 1985)

Labeling

Having accurate and complete information on the label is essential. The following 

information must be on the permanent label:

• Scientific name;

• Common name;

• Cultivar name (if applicable);

• The NRCS accession or Plant Introduction number;

• Collection location information, such as State, county, city/town, road names, and 

landmarks so that the original site may be relocated if needed;

• Details of the collection site including latitude and longitude, elevation, aspect, and 

soil conditions at the site;

• Date collection was made; and

• Collector's name and address.

The following information may be optional depending on the species being collected:

• Color of the flowers, as they may be partially or completely obscured in the pressing;

• Height of the plant if only a portion of the plant was collected;

• The location of the plant the sample collected from, such as whether from 

decumbent, prostrate, or ascending branches; and

• Any technical information that is needed to identify the plants but does not show up 

well on pressed specimens. This may be floral characteristics such as the depth of 

indentation in the lobes of the calyx or the relative lengths of the stamens.
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)

Storage

The pressed and mounted specimens should be stored in a place that is easily accessible and 

away from excessive heat and moisture and potential insect damage. Specimens should be 

deposited in a herbarium for long-term preservation.

The most common practice of arranging specimens in a herbarium is to place the species of a 

genus in a folded cardboard cover and to arrange the genera by families. These folders can 

be stored in cabinets or cases, but they should be monitored to prevent damage from insects. 

(Harrington 1985)

Literature Cited

Benson, L. D. 1979. Plant Classification. Lexington, Mass.: Heath.

Harrington, H. D. 1985. How to Identify Plants. Athens, Ohio: Swallow Press.

Prepared by:

Travis M. Bean

Tucson PMC, Tucson, Arizona

August, 1999

___________________________________________________________________________

Detailed information for preparing herbarium specimens, and for preparing “hard to prepare” 

herbarium specimens may be found in:

USDA Agriculture Information Bulletin No. 348

Washington D.C.

Issued September 1971

Prepared by: C. Earle Smith, Jr., Botanist, USDA-ARS, Beltsville, Maryland

This publication may be obtained from the National Plant Materials Center or from the 

Southern Illinois University, Carbondale Web site at:

“http://www.siu.edu/~ebl/prepare.htm”
Title 190 – National Plant Materials Manual

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

(190-V-NPMM, Fourth Edition, July 2010)
542.4 Photographing Plant Materials

United States 

Department of Agriculture

Natural Resources

Conservation

Service

Plant Materials Photography – A Basic Overview

Making effective photographs of 

plants on location or in a controlled 

environment is demanding. It 

requires patience, planning, and an 

understanding of photographic 

processes, lighting, and 

composition. Always remember 

that you are making photographs, 

not just taking pictures. The 

difference can readily be seen and 

is determined by your effort and 

skill. The following guidelines will 

help provide a basic understanding 

of the equipment, techniques, and 

effort needed to help make your 

photography of plant materials 

successful.
The Plant as Subject

Success in photographing plant materials requires time and careful study. Many plants are delicate, 

colorful, highly detailed, and must be observed for a period of time to determine their best and most visible 

attributes. Plants are individuals-each species has its own "personality." And, it's the photographer's 

responsibility to depict each plant in a way that portrays its best visual qualities while also providing 

appropriate technical information about the plant for the viewer.

Much of the photographer's time in working with plant materials involves searching. Photographs don't 

just happen, they're made! So the time one spends viewing a single plant or a landscape filled with a 

variety of plants will greatly improve the photographer's understanding.

Grasses that are slender, tall (10 inches and up) or generally found in small bunches (switchgrass, for 

example) may perhaps best be photographed as individuals rather than in bunches. This may help highlight 

details such as seed heads or leaf blades. Grasses that are used for lawns or other carpet-like purposes may 

best be photographed in mass.

Plants that flower or produce berries may best be photographed while in one of these stages whenever 

possible. The photographer has the choice of an overall view of the subject or a close up of a branch or 

stem in flower. Consider how the image will be used (slide show, color magazine layout) and the subject's 

most important features when determining the best view.

Before making any photographs look at the areas around, behind, or under plants. Dead stems, leaves or 

foreign material may degrade the subject and should be removed. Remember, the plant material is the 

subject and all other elements in the photograph will compete for attention. Some careful cleaning before 

you make the photograph will help eliminate distractions and greatly improve the image and interest for the 

viewer.

Equipment

Ideally, the photographer should not consider cost when choosing equipment. With photographic 

equipment, you usually get what you pay for. However, the following list is geared to the advanced 

amateur and should not be a problem for most budgets.

Cameras: Most digital cameras or 35mm single lens reflex (SLR) cameras with interchangable lenses on 

the market today are acceptable for plant materials photography. Nikon, Minolta, Canon, and Pentax are all 

excellent choices and offer a variety of lenses and features suitable for plant materials photography. You 

may wish to consider purchasing a camera whose maximum flash syncronization shutter speed is above the 

standard 1/60th of a second. Synchronization speeds of 1/125th and 1/250th are very useful when using a 

strobe to fill in shadow areas under daylight conditions. I generally do not suggest the use of fully 

automated cameras (auto exposure only) for plant materials photography. The photographer must have the 

capability to adjust exposures manually as lighting conditions change. Meters in many fully automated 

cameras under or over-compensate for some lighting conditions found in the practice of plant materials 

photography. And the photographer must be able to manually adjust exposures as each situation presents 

itself.

Lenses: A macro lens in the 50 - 60min range that accommodates one-to-one reproduction is a must. 

Purchase the fastest (f2.8 or faster) macro lens available. For close-ups of flowers, small grasses, small 

branches with leaves/flowers/berries the macro lens is indispensable. You will find a use for other lenses in 

the 20 - 135mm range as well. A good basic lens outfit should consist of the 50 60mm macro, 28mm, and a 

lens in the 85 - 105mm range. Most lenses in focal lengths above 135min would generally not be used in 

plant materials photography.
Tripod: Like the macro lens, a tripod is a necessary piece of equipment. I strongly recommend the Gitzo 

line of tripods. They are rugged, versatile, available in a wide variety of sizes, and can be purchased 

through most retail photographic shops.

When choosing a tripod (especially for plant materials photography) look for the following features:

• Tripod legs that will allow the photographer to obtain a firm set-up on uneven 

ground. This means having legs that are not braced by extensions to the center 

column. Legs that swing out at a variety of angles from the center are the most 

useful.

• A center column that will invert and allow the photographer to position the camera 

from below, extending toward the ground (upside down). This will help the 

photographer obtain angles of view that might not be possible otherwise.

• A center column that is elevated via a crank may prove useful for small adjustments 

in angle and position. This feature is often undesirable, but in photographing plant 

materials, it can be an advantage.

• Tripod legs whose leg extensions are tightened via a screw collar are preferable. 

Legs that are tightened via a locking lever have a tendency to slip when wet and 

when worn due to heavy use.

Cable Release: The use of a cable release is highly suggested any time the exposure involves shutter 

speeds below 1/60th of a second. Many beginning photographers think that a tripod alone will provide a 

stable platform. This is true in most cases. However, many situations will involve very slow shutter speeds 

and a tripod alone will not always guarantee that the image will be sharp.

Technique and Composition

Photographic composition of plant materials may be handled using many of the basic techniques employed 

with other subjects. You may not wish to "frame" your subject with another plant (like using a tree in 

scenic photography). But the standard rule of thirds and leading lines techniques should all be used as each 

situation presents itself. 

When making a picture of a low growing plant mass (grasses, for example) try placing the horizon line high 

in the frame and move in as close as possible (with a wide-angle lens). And fill the frame with as much of 

the subject as possible while keeping what is on the horizon line visible. This will provide the viewer with 

a sense of "place" while still focusing upon the plants. It is often important for the viewer to understand 

how a particular plant species "fits" into the environment as well as to have a close view of the plant.

The treatment of plant materials in photography can become very subjective. I subscribe to a literal 

depiction in most situations. Other photographers may desire a more poetic rendering with soft focus or 

some type of distortion. However, the treatment applied to most images used in USDA and other 

government publications tend toward a literal interpretation of the subject. In short, this means well 

composed, properly exposed, and tack sharp!

Depth-of-field: Many beginning photographers have a difficult time understanding depth-of-field and how 

to control it. Simply stated, it is the area within a photograph that is of acceptable sharpness to the viewer. 

It is controlled by the lens opening (f-stop), the exact point of critical focus, the focal length of the lens, and 

the camera's proximity to the subject. Two general guidelines will help the photographer to determine the 

focal length of lens and lens opening when making photographs. First, the smaller the lens opening, the 
greater the depth-of-field is. Second, the longer (higher focal length) the lens, the shallower the depth-offield is. Experience is the best teacher in gaining a full understanding of which combination of factors 

produce the most desirable effects.

The depth-of-field used when making a picture depends upon how much of the subject the photographer 

wishes to be in focus and/or whether the photographer wishes to have background or foreground objects in 

or out of focus.

When photographing plant materials that are large or perhaps bushy (trees and shrubs) the photographer 

may wish (for composition purposes) to show only a tip of a branch instead of the entire subject. In this 

situation a relatively shallow depth-of-field may also be desired to allow the background to go out of focus. 

However, the degree to which this will occur will depend upon the three factors. The depth-of-field will 

become a function of the camera's proximity to the subject as well as lens opening and lens focal length. In 

some situations even an exposure at f16 may only render a part of the branch in focus.

For overall views of plant materials, a wide-angle lens may be appropriate. The photographer will want

enough depth-of-field so that the entire subject is in focus. It is also important to observe the foreground 

and background carefully. The angle of view may require study in order to eliminate objects that compete 

for attention with the subject (like telephone poles, street lamps, wires, cars, and signs).

When photographing subjects that are carpet-like (legumes, grasses, and other ground covers) the 

photographer may wish to present the subject as a large expanse of interlaced stems. In this case the depthof-field should be measured and coordinated with a proper point of critical focus . Generally, the 

photographer will want to focus about 1/3 the distance into the picture and use a small f-stop (f-11 or f-l 6). 

This will help insure that most of the subject is in focus at the time of exposure. To calculate the depth-offield, examine the distance indicator marks on the lens barrel. It will show the distance to which the depth 

of focus will extend based on the exact point of critical focus and f-stop used (refer to your camera's 

manual for a diagram explaining lens depth-of-field indicators).

Lighting: Three lighting factors should be observed when determining when to photograph plant materials 

on location - the angle of the sun above the horizon and its direction, the quality of the light (harsh, soft, 

hazy, clear, overcast, etc.), and the light's color.

The angle of the sun determines the photographer's ability to create "depth" (the third dimension) in a 

photograph. Low sun angles (45° or less) allow the photographer to photograph the subject with strong 

side highlights and shadows in most cases. Therefore, the ability to create depth is great. 

To view a clear example of this factor, look at a silo, or similar large, round object under two different 

lighting conditions. First, examine a silo (from a distance) with strong side lighting by viewing it with the 

sun at a 90° angle to your position. You will see the side of the silo closest to the sun in strong highlight. 

The opposite side will be in shadow. The visual relationship of highlight to shadow makes the silo appear 

round to the viewer.

Next, change your position so that the sun is at your back. The sun will cast full light upon the silo and the 

silo will appear flat.

Now, apply this same principle to plant materials. Trees, shrubs, even close views of grasses all have 

round stems, branches or general shapes and are effected the same as a silo by light. By placing the sun at 

the side and at a low angle, the shapes of many plant materials will be delineated by a highlight to shadow 

relationship and the appearance of depth will be created.

The color of light also directly affects how the plant materials will appear to the viewer. Strong low angle 

light in early morning or late afternoon is often very warm in color. The hours before sunset or just after 

sunrise are called the "Golden Hours" because they are warm and often very flattering to subjects. 
Overcast days produce little or no shadows and often render a bluish cast in color photographs. Knowing 

how the color of light will affect the appearance of a particular subject will determine if the kind of 

condition and time of day chosen to make the photograph is appropriate.

The third factor to consider is timing and the light's quality. There are conditions that cause light to be soft 

(overcast or haze) and to be strong or harsh (clear mornings). Quality varies, so the photographer may wish 

to postpone a photograph if a desired effect does not exist at the time planned for making the picture. If a 

strong intensity is desired, this usually means shooting in the early morning or late afternoon, but varies 

depending upon the time of year. From April through September this means being in the field just after 

sunrise until about 10:00 AM and from about 3:30 PM until sunset. The period from October through 

March generally allows for shooting all day, as the sun is always low angle and often warm in color during 

this time of year.

Many of the Audubon Society, National Geographic, and general garden plant references contain 

photographs of high quality and will serve as excellent examples. The point is that all photographers learn 

from examining their own pictures and those examples around them to learn which qualities make 

photographs good or bad.

Lighting Aids: Even on the most beautiful days a subject may not be lighted appropriately. Deep shadows 

may exist or areas that should be well lit are not. The photographer has a number of aids available that will 

reflect light into areas that need extra illumination. Often a white piece of illustration board will add just 

the needed amount of light into shadow areas. A dull white card provides soft, even reflected light. 

Mirrors, aluminum foil, polished metal and other highly reflective materials provide direct and often harsh 

reflected light. These kinds of reflectors should be used with caution. The object is to add just enough 

light to provide added detail. This does not mean to flood a dark area to the point it overpowers the natural 

highlight areas. The photographer will need to experiment with a variety of reflectors to see what works in 

a given situation. Portable flash equipment can also be used to add light to subjects. I have often found this 

added equipment to be a burden rather than a help. And I prefer to work with the above kinds of reflectors 

because one can observe the reflected light much more easily. However, a small flash unit, properly 

adjusted, may be just the thing when reflected light is low or absent. I suggest that the photographer test 

the flash equipment in a variety of situations to learn how much and at what angles it will be able to 

provide assistance. A set of notes concerning the use of a particular flash-fill system will be valuable when 

in the field.

In this illustration, light bounced from a white card will improve 

the shadow detail in the subject. This technique is easily done 

and will help improve the photography of subjects lit by strong 

cross or back light.

Environmental Problems: Problems associated with wind, rain or poor sun angle cause difficulties for all 

photographers at times. The effort one takes to remedy the situation often is rewarded with a pleasing

photograph. The point is that the photographer must often take some action or the photograph becomes 

impossible to salvage. There is no such thing as "focus fluid" to improve image sharpness despite the many 

wishes of many photographers. And excuses serve only to point out one's laziness or lack of imagination.

Wind may become a problem when photographing plant materials. When a close up of a branch or plant 

stem moves even just a bit, it can often result in a blurred picture. Fast shutter speeds may be used to 

counteract this problem. However, this may result in too shallow of a depth-of-field.
Two remedies are available for this problem. If the subject is not an endangered species, the photographer 

may move it to a wind-free location. This may mean cutting a stem or moving the whole plant (if 

possible). An alternative is to construct a wind shield that eliminates the problem. Often a person's jacket 

or small piece of cloth are effective. I often carry a piece of 4 ft. cloth and clothes pins on assignments for 

just such occasions. One other choice is to use the vehicle you are travelling in as a wind screen. This may 

not be practical in many situations, however. Do not be afraid to invent a remedy. I've used old fertilizer 

bags, the shirt off my back (but not my pants), and large pieces of plywood on occasion. And, do not shy 

away from asking your traveling companion to hold the screen.

Exposure: Exposure readings of plant subjects can be very deceiving. The beginning photographer may 

point the camera at the subject, expose the film according to what the camera's meter says is correct, and 

then wonder why the picture is too light or too dark. This could account for improperly made readings of 

subjects that are back lit or cross lit. The photographer must learn how to correctly make exposure readings 

for these situations. Back lit subjects (subjects that are photographed with the main light source behind the 

subject) with opaque leaves should be treated like any other back lit subject. Make the reading by 

excluding the bright sun from the viewfinder and filling the frame with just the subject (move in or back up 

accordingly). 

Back lit subjects with leaves that transmit some light require experimentation, but can generally be 

rendered well by using the camera meter reading and bracketing at least one full stop above and below. 

Cross lit subjects require interpretation of just how much light is falling on the subject and from what angle 

the photo will be made. I suggest that the photographer begin by filling the frame with half the subject in 

light and the other half in shadow. Then bracket exposures at least one full stop above and below the 

reading provided by the camera meter.

Two aids will assist photographers with exposure readings. The first is a good quality incident meter like 

the Minolta IIIR Incident meters read light falling upon subjects rather than reflected from the subject. 

Meter readings must be made from the subject at the angle from which the camera will be pointed.

An 18% gray card may also provide some assistance. This card is used to calibrate all camera meters and 

represents the average amount of reflected light in an average scene. It can be used to make readings in 

situations where the camera meter reading is in doubt. If the subject is light in value against a light 

background (or vice versa), the light reading may be taken off the gray card, rather than the subject. This 

serves little use in cross lit situations and no use for back lighting, however.
Plant Cultivar Release Photos

Use the following guidelines for making and submitting photographs for 

plant cultivar release brochures.

Cover:

Compose the photo using a vertical format.

Isolate a stem, seed head, or branch that best provides plant 

details. Or isolate a small bunch or grouping if shooting 

grasses, but be sure that stems in the immediate foreground are 

in sharp focus, and don't cut off the seed heads.

• Shoot during the early morning or late afternoon when the 

wind doesn't blow the plant(s) and the light is warm and 

provides depth.

• Shoot from a low angle (same height as plant or lower).

• It's OK to clip and move single stems, branches, leaves, to 

another location for better lighting, background, or to avoid 

the wind (provided the plant is not an endangered one).

• Observe the background and adjust your angle if necessary to avoid distracting elements.

• The best backgrounds are out of focus and simple (blue sky or other pleasing color -

black is OK),

• Insure that you use enough depth-of-field to render the subject sharply but shallow 

enough to provide an out of focus background.

Supporting Photos:

• Rather than isolating plant details, show the plant in a natural environment.

• Shoot either horizontal or vertical format as appropriate.

• Fill the frame using good composition tech
Glossary

This glossary is composed of general photography related terms. Not all of the terms directly apply to plant 

materials photography.

Available Light - The light condition that the photographer finds existing at the subject position. The term 

usually implies an in door or outdoor light condition of low intensity requiring fast film, large lens opening, 

and slow shutter speed.

Back Light - Illumination from a source behind the subject, as seen from the camera position, which tends 

to silhouette the subject.

Blocked - Refers to an area of the negative image so overexposed, and therefore dense, as to obscure 

details and texture.

Bounce Light - Reflected light; specifically, light directed away from the subject toward some near-by 

light toned surface so as to reach the subject diffused by reflection.

Bracket - To make a series of exposures (some greater and some less than what is considered to be 

"normal") in addition to the "normal" one, with the intent of getting one near-perfect exposure.

CC Filters - Color compensating filters, intended for use in color photography to modify the overall color 

balance of the image. They are available in six colors and several degrees of saturation.

Click Stops - Detents in the diaphragm or shutter scale of a lens which produce a tactile indication and an 

audible click to mark the significant scale settings.

Contrast - Density difference, usually of adjacent areas of the image.

Coverage - The area of the image (formed by a lens) which is of useful quality. Also, the area of the 

subject which the lens can record as an image of useful quality.

Crop - To trim, or sometimes to cover, the boarders of an image for any reason, but usually to improve the 

composition.

Cross Light - Light striking the subject from one side.

Daylight - Sunlight or skylight or any mixture of the two. For the purpose of color photography, daylight 

is considered to have a color temperature of from about 5500 degrees K to 6000 degrees K.

Depth-of-field - The area of acceptably sharp focus around the subject position, extending toward the 

camera and away from it, from the plane of sharpest focus (critical focus point). The boundaries of the 

depth-of-field are referred to as the near limit and the far limit.

Depth of Focus - The little zone including the focal plane of the lens through which the film can be moved, 

toward, and away from the lens, and still record an acceptably sharp image.

Diffusion - Of light, the random scattering of rays as by transmission through a turbid medium or by 

reflection from a matte surface.

Dispersion - The separation of a light ray into its component colors as by a prism.

Fast - A term used to describe a lens of relative large aperture or a film of high light sensitivity.

Fill Light - Light directed into the shadow areas of a subject to improve detail lighting or reduce lighting 

contrast.

Flash Synchronization - The adjustment of the timing of the application of a firing current to a flashbulb 

and the actuation of the shutter release so that the peak flash intensity occurs while the shutter is open.

Focal Length - The distance from a lens' rear nodal point to the image plane when the lens is focused on 

infinity. Loosely, the "length" or "size" of a lens as expressed in millimeters.

Frame - (1) The adjustment of the position and angle of the camera with respect to the subject for the 
purpose of composing the image within the boundaries of the viewfinder. (2) The useful area and shape of 

the film image.

Gradation - Variation in tone. Tonal range or scale.

Gray Card - A card of known reflectance, usually 18 percent, intended to be placed in the subject area and 

used as a meter target in the determination of exposure.

Harsh - Implies an unpleasant lack of subtlety of gradation or light distribution. Contrasty, glaring.

Highlights - The brightest light accents in the subject. In the negative, the areas of greatest density.

Incident Light - The light reaching the subject from any and all sources.

Incident Meter - A light meter used to measure incident light. The meter is placed at the subject position 

and pointed in the direction of the camera so as to measure light intensity from sources directing light upon 

the subject.

Lens Hood - A device for shading the front element of a lens from direct light outside the subject area so as 

to reduce flare.

Long Lens - The description of a lens of longer than-normal focal length.

Luminance - Light reflected from, or produced by, a surface.

Macro-Lens - A term used to describe lenses especially corrected for use at short subject distances.

Matte - Dull, non-glossy; referring to surface or texture.

Opening - Refers to lens opening and is used, loosely, to mean either lens aperture or relative aperture.

Overexposed - Refers to a photographic image which has received too much light.

Plane - Refers to the position of elements within an image in space. Actually, the term can be misleading 

since objects (and elements of a picture) are three-dimensional and have at least one plane that is closer to 

the camera than another.

Reflection - The rebounding of light from a surface, especially a polished surface.

Reflector - A surface used to bounce light. For photographic purposes, usually, cardboard, fabrics, or 

polished surfaces.

Rim Light - Back light that illuminates the edges of a subject, producing a bright outline.

Sensitivity - In photography, the level of a film's susceptibility to alteration by light energy.

Shadow Area - Any area of a photographic image that corresponds to areas of shade in the original subject. 

Loosely, any dark area in a positive or light area in a negative.

Stop - The aperture or f-number of a lens.

Stop Down - To reduce the size of the lens aperture.

Washed Out - A term to describe a pale, lifeless, gray print image, usually implying loss of highlight 

detail, such as might typically result from underexposure of a negative or overexposure of a positive.

Wide-Angle - Describes a lens whose angular coverage is substantially greater than that of a 11normal" 

lens.

Zoom Lens - A very complex lens can be adjusted in focal length to provide a continuous range within its 

design limits.
Suggested Reading:

Landscape Photography - A Kodak Guide available from Eastman Kodak and many photo shops.

The Art of Seeing, a publication in the Kodak Workshop Series available from Eastman Kodak and many 

photo shops.

Photographic Composition by Tom Grill & Mark Scanlon available from AMPHOTO, New York and 

many photo shops.

Art and Visual Perception-A Psychology of the Creative Eye by Rudolf Arnheim, published by the 

University of California Press.

The Nature Photographer's Complete Guide to Professional Field Techniques, by John Shaw, published by 

AMPHOTO, New York.

Product names that appear in this handout do not constitute an endorsement by the Natural 

Resources Conservation Service.

Tim McCabe

National Photographic Specialist

United States Department of Agriculture

Natural Resources Conservation Service

P.O. Box 2890

Washington, D.C. 20013

Revised: 5/91

"The U.S. Department of Agriculture (USDA) prohibits discrimination in all its programs and 

activities on the basis of race, color, national origin, age, disability, and where applicable, sex, 

marital status, familial status, parental status, religion, sexual orientation, genetic information, 

political beliefs, reprisal, or because all or a part of an individual's income is derived from any 

public assistance program. (Not all prohibited bases apply to all programs.) Persons with 

disabilities who require alternative means for communication of program information (Braille, 

large print, audiotape, etc.) should contact USDA's TARGET Center at (202) 720-2600 (voice 

and TDD). To file a complaint of discrimination write to USDA, Director, Office of Civil Rights, 

1400 Independence Avenue, S.W., Washington, D.C. 20250-9410 or call (800) 795-3272 (voice) 

or (202) 720-6382 (TDD). USDA is an equal opportunity provider and employer."